Health & Safety Policy & Program
Revised: Dec. 2015
POLICY STATEMENT
It is the policy of the Town of Golden that written and practical procedures will be developed and
maintained on an ongoing basis to not only insure compliance with the Workers’ Compensation Act
and the Occupational Health and Regulation, but to also eliminate or control dangers likely to be
encountered by the employees in performance of their duties.
All workers are charged with the responsibility of following the Town of Golden Health
and Safety policies and procedures. Supervisory staff is to be held accountable for the
monitoring of the workplace to ensure that compliance is followed and known and
reasonably foreseeable hazards are identified.
Each worker is responsible for their actions and must be alert to the actions of others.
The cooperation and support from the Town Council, administration, department
heads and employees is essential to insuring an effective Health and Safety Program.
Mayor of the Town of Golden
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. ROLES & RESPONSIBILITIES .................................................................................. 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Mayor and Town Council............................................................................................... 3
Administrator ................................................................................................................. 3
Supervisory Staff ........................................................................................................... 3
Workers ......................................................................................................................... 4
Contractors.................................................................................................................... 5
Visitors, Suppliers and Consultants ............................................................................... 6
Administration and Distribution of the Program ............................................................. 6
Joint Health and Safety Committee ............................................................................... 6
2. SAFETY COMMUNICATION ................................................................................... 11
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Purpose ....................................................................................................................... 13
Communication System .............................................................................................. 13
Distribution of Health Safety Program ......................................................................... 13
Crew/staff Meetings and Notice Boards ...................................................................... 13
Form ............................................................................................................................ 13
3. TRAINING AND EDUCATION ................................................................................. 15
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Purpose ....................................................................................................................... 17
Scope .......................................................................................................................... 17
Educational Standards ................................................................................................ 17
Required Learning ..................................................................................................... 18
Benefits of Training and Education ............................................................................ 18
Training Measurement ............................................................................................... 18
Forms .......................................................................................................................... 18
4. HAZARD ASSESSMENT PROCESS ...................................................................... 23
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
Purpose ...................................................................................................................... 25
Scope .......................................................................................................................... 25
Hazard Assessments .................................................................................................. 25
Control Measures ........................................................................................................ 29
Implementing Control Strategies ............................................................................. 30
Purchasing Controls .................................................................................................... 31
Field Level Risk Assessment ...................................................................................... 31
Forms .......................................................................................................................... 32
5. REFUSAL OF UNSAFE WORK .............................................................................. 37
5.1
5.2
Introduction ................................................................................................................. 39
Procedure.................................................................................................................... 39
6. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 41
6.1
6.2
Purpose ....................................................................................................................... 43
Scope .......................................................................................................................... 43
1
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
General ....................................................................................................................... 43
Training ....................................................................................................................... 43
Personal Protection ..................................................................................................... 44
Forms .......................................................................................................................... 47
7. INSPECTION AND MONITORING .......................................................................... 49
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
Purpose ....................................................................................................................... 51
Scope .......................................................................................................................... 51
Types of Inspections ................................................................................................... 51
Inspection Process ...................................................................................................... 52
Monitoring ................................................................................................................... 53
Forms .......................................................................................................................... 53
8. INCIDENT INVESTIGATION ................................................................................... 57
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
Purpose ....................................................................................................................... 59
Scope .......................................................................................................................... 59
Definitions ................................................................................................................... 59
Investigation ................................................................................................................ 59
Investigation Procedure .............................................................................................. 60
Incident Reporting ....................................................................................................... 60
Determining Incident Classification ............................................................................. 61
Forms .......................................................................................................................... 62
9. FIRST AID SERVICES AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................. 71
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
Purpose ....................................................................................................................... 73
Scope .......................................................................................................................... 73
Definitions ................................................................................................................... 73
General Requirements ................................................................................................ 73
First Aid Facilities ........................................................................................................ 74
First Aid Attendants ..................................................................................................... 74
Forms .......................................................................................................................... 75
10. CONFINED SPACE ............................................................................................... 81
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
10.10
10.11
10.12
10.13
Introduction ................................................................................................................. 83
Definitions ................................................................................................................... 83
General Requirements for Confined Space Entry ....................................................... 83
Confined Space Hazard Assessment and Safe Work Plan ......................................... 84
Confined Space Entry Permit ...................................................................................... 84
Lock out and Control of Harmful Substances .............................................................. 84
Pre-entry Procedures .................................................................................................. 84
Testing ........................................................................................................................ 85
Entry Procedure .......................................................................................................... 85
Ventilation ................................................................................................................... 86
Standby Attendant ....................................................................................................... 86
Lifelines, Harnesses and Lifting Equipment ................................................................ 87
Personal Protective Equipment and other Precautions ............................................... 87
10.14 Emergency Procedures ............................................................................................... 87
10.15 Forms .......................................................................................................................... 88
10.16 Arena Condensate CSE Procedure ............................................................................. 89
10.17 Civic Centre Elevator Sump Space CSE Procedure .................................................... 95
10.18 Digesters & Aerator Cells CSE Procedure ................................................................. 101
10.19 Irrigation Vaults CSE Procedure ................................................................................ 106
10.20 Open Pits CSE Procedure ......................................................................................... 114
10.21 Open Trenches CSE Procedure ................................................................................ 121
10.22 Primary Effluent from 12th Street Space CSE Procedure ........................................... 127
10.23 Pressure Reducing Vaults (PRV) CSE Procedure ..................................................... 133
10.24 RAS WAS Space CSE Procedure ............................................................................. 141
10.25 Sequencing Batch Reactor CSE Procedure............................................................... 147
10.26 Sewage Lift Stations CSE Procedure ........................................................................ 155
10.27 Sewage Treatment Plant – Effluent Wet Wells CSE Procedure................................. 164
10.28 Sewage Manholes CSE Procedure............................................................................ 172
10.29 Transfer Manhole to Aeration Ponds Space CSE Procedure..................................... 179
10.30 Wading Pool Mechanical Room CSE Procedure ....................................................... 185
10.31 Water Metering Valve Chambers CSE Procedure ..................................................... 191
10.32 Water Reservoirs CSE Procedure ............................................................................. 200
11. LOCK-OUT PROCEDURES ............................................................................... 209
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 210
Definitions ................................................................................................................. 210
General Lockout Principles ....................................................................................... 210
Appropriate Steps for Applying a Lock ...................................................................... 211
Appropriate Steps for Removal of Lock ..................................................................... 211
Emergency Lock Removal ........................................................................................ 212
Contractors................................................................................................................ 212
Forms ........................................................................................................................ 212
12. INTRODUCTION TO YOUNG OR NEW WORKERS .......................................... 215
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 217
Definitions ................................................................................................................. 217
Orientation and Training ............................................................................................ 217
Additional Orientation and Training ........................................................................... 218
Documentation .......................................................................................................... 218
Forms ........................................................................................................................ 218
13. ERGONOMICS..................................................................................................... 221
13.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 223
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
Consultation .............................................................................................................. 223
Education .................................................................................................................. 223
Risk Identification ...................................................................................................... 223
Computer Work and Desktop Procedure .................................................................. 227
14. WORKING ALONE OR IN ISOLATION ............................................................... 233
14.1 Purpose ............................................................................................................ 235
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.9
Scope ........................................................................................................................ 235
Hazard Identification and Assessments .................................................................... 235
Checking the well-being of workers ........................................................................... 235
Communication ......................................................................................................... 236
Training ..................................................................................................................... 236
Annual Review .......................................................................................................... 236
Working Alone Procedure ......................................................................................... 237
Working Alone Policy ................................................................................................ 239
15. VIOLENCE IN THE WORKPLACE ...................................................................... 241
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
Definition ................................................................................................................... 243
Purpose ..................................................................................................................... 243
Risk Assessment....................................................................................................... 243
Instruction of workers ................................................................................................ 244
Consulting a Physician .............................................................................................. 244
Annual Review .......................................................................................................... 244
16. TRAFFIC CONTROL ........................................................................................... 245
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
16.7
Definition ................................................................................................................... 247
Purpose ..................................................................................................................... 247
Responsibility ............................................................................................................ 247
Equipment ................................................................................................................. 247
Training ..................................................................................................................... 248
Standards for Signals and Operations ...................................................................... 248
Dust Control .............................................................................................................. 248
17. FALL PROTECTION ............................................................................................ 249
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
17.7
Purpose ..................................................................................................................... 251
Definitions ................................................................................................................. 251
Responsibilities ......................................................................................................... 251
Assessment............................................................................................................... 251
Certification by an Engineer (11.8) ............................................................................ 251
Inspections, Maintenance and Removal of Equipment ............................................. 252
Training of the worker ............................................................................................... 252
18. BIOLOGICAL HAZARD CONTROL PROGRAM ................................................ 253
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
18.6
18.7
18.8
Purpose, Scope, Policy Statement ............................................................................ 255
Responsibilities – Town of Golden ............................................................................ 255
Responsibilities – Manager, Supervisors, Employees, JOHS Committee ................. 256
Procedure for Identifying and Controlling Harmful Substances ................................. 257
Define Types of Hazards ........................................................................................... 257
Assess Potential Exposure........................................................................................ 258
Identify Chemical and Biological Hazards ................................................................. 260
Determine the Degree of Risk ................................................................................... 261
18.9
18.10
18.11
18.12
18.13
18.14
18.15
18.16
18.17
Determine Appropriate Control Measures ................................................................. 261
Develop Written Safe Work Practices ....................................................................... 263
Ensure Identity of Substances, MSDS Labeling ........................................................ 264
Train Employees ....................................................................................................... 266
Ensure Employee Compliance .................................................................................. 266
Appendix A - Routine Practices................................................................................. 267
Appendix B – Guideline Reference: OHSR 5.48 – 5.59 ............................................ 271
Appendix C – Guideline Reference: OHSR 8.33 ....................................................... 275
Appendix D – Removal of Gloves ............................................................................. 277
19. EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM ................................................................... 279
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
19.7
19.8
19.9
19.10
19.11
19.12
19.13
19.14
19.15
19.16
19.17
19.18
19.19
19.20
19.21
19.22
19.23
19.24
19.25
19.26
19.27
Objective ................................................................................................................... 281
Assignment of Responsibility .................................................................................... 281
Training ..................................................................................................................... 282
Excavation Requirements ......................................................................................... 283
Protective System Requirements .............................................................................. 290
Accident Investigations ............................................................................................. 297
Changes to Program ................................................................................................. 298
Glossary .................................................................................................................... 298
Appendix A – Graveyard Excavation ......................................................................... 301
Purpose ..................................................................................................................... 301
Scope ........................................................................................................................ 301
Preparation................................................................................................................ 301
Equipment Placement ............................................................................................... 301
Excavation Procedure ............................................................................................... 301
No Entry .................................................................................................................... 302
Appendix B - Excavation Practices - Safe Work Procedure ..................................... 303
Purpose ..................................................................................................................... 303
Scope ........................................................................................................................ 303
Standards / Procedures ............................................................................................ 304
RD7000 User Locate Information .............................................................................. 323
Preface ...................................................................................................................... 323
Basic Operation......................................................................................................... 323
Locating Cables and Pipes........................................................................................ 325
Depth and Current Readings..................................................................................... 328
General Locating Tips ............................................................................................... 331
Using Accessories ..................................................................................................... 334
Care and Maintenance .............................................................................................. 336
20. AERIAL LIFT SAFETY PROGRAM ..................................................................... 337
20.1
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 339
Purpose ..................................................................................................................... 339
Scope & Applicability ................................................................................................. 339
References: ............................................................................................................... 339
Responsibilities: ........................................................................................................ 339
Definitions: ................................................................................................................ 340
General Requirements: ............................................................................................. 341
20.8
20.9
20.10
20.11
20.12
20.13
20.14
20.15
20.16
20.17
20.18
20.19
20.20
20.21
Pre-Use Inspections: ................................................................................................. 342
Battery Charging, Filling and Fueling: ....................................................................... 342
Personal Protective Equipment: ................................................................................ 343
Training ..................................................................................................................... 343
Maintenance.............................................................................................................. 345
Recordkeeping .......................................................................................................... 345
Contract Employees .................................................................................................. 346
Appendix A – Pre-Use: Aerial/Scissor Lift Inspection Checklist ................................ 347
Appendix B – Examples of Aerial/Scissor Lifts .......................................................... 348
Appendix C - Aerial/Scissor Lift Training Certification Form ...................................... 349
Appendix D - Aerial/Scissor Lift Hands-On Operator Training Evaluation Form ........ 350
Appendix E - Evaluator Guidelines - Aerial/Scissor Lift ............................................. 352
Appendix F - Safe Work Practices ............................................................................ 354
Safework Procedures - Terex Telelect Hi-Ranger TPL 40 Aerial Lift ........................ 357
21. VEHICLE LIFT SAFETY PROGRAM ................................................................... 363
21.1
21.2
21.3
21.4
21.5
21.6
21.7
21.8
21.9
21.10
21.11
21.12
21.13
21.14
21.15
21.16
21.17
21.18
21.19
21.20
21.21
21.22
21.23
21.24
21.25
21.26
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 365
Purpose ..................................................................................................................... 365
Scope & Applicability................................................................................................. 365
References ................................................................................................................ 365
Responsibilities ......................................................................................................... 365
Definitions ................................................................................................................. 366
General Requirements for Vehicle Lifts ..................................................................... 367
Training ..................................................................................................................... 367
Inspections for Vehicle Lifts....................................................................................... 368
Maintenance.............................................................................................................. 369
Recordkeeping .......................................................................................................... 369
Contractors................................................................................................................ 370
Appendix A - Pre-Use Vehicle Lift Inspection Guidelines .......................................... 370
Appendix B - Monthly Vehicle Lift Inspection ............................................................ 371
Appendix C - Vehicle lift Training Certification Form ................................................. 372
Appendix D - Safe Work Practices for Vehicle Lifts ................................................... 373
Appendix E - Vehicle Lift Operator Evaluation Form ................................................ 374
Appendix F - Instructions for Conducting Vehicle Lift Operator Evaluations .............. 375
Safe Work Procedures for PKS Vehicle Lift .............................................................. 375
Scope ........................................................................................................................ 375
Authorization ............................................................................................................. 375
Hazards ..................................................................................................................... 376
Personal Protective Equipment (ppe) ........................................................................ 376
Emergency Requirements ......................................................................................... 376
Safe Work Procedures .............................................................................................. 376
Lift Operation Procedure ........................................................................................... 377
22. BRIDGE CRANE HOIST SLING PROGRAM ...................................................... 381
22.1
22.2
22.3
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 383
Purpose ..................................................................................................................... 383
Scope & Applicability................................................................................................. 383
22.4
22.5
22.6
22.7
22.8
22.9
22.10
22.11
22.12
22.13
22.14
22.15
22.16
22.17
22.18
22.19
22.20
22.21
22.22
22.23
22.24
22.25
22.26
22.27
22.28
22.29
22.30
References ................................................................................................................ 384
Responsibilities ......................................................................................................... 384
Definitions ................................................................................................................. 385
General Requirements for Cranes, Hoists and Slings ............................................... 387
Training ..................................................................................................................... 387
Inspections for Cranes, Hoists and Slings ................................................................. 388
Maintenance.............................................................................................................. 390
Recordkeeping .......................................................................................................... 390
Contractors................................................................................................................ 391
Appendix A - Pre-Use Crane, Hoist and Sling Inspection Guidelines........................ 391
Appendix B - Crane & Hoist Monthly Inspection Checklist ........................................ 393
Appendix C - Examples of Cranes and Hoists .......................................................... 395
Appendix D - Examples of Sling ................................................................................ 398
Appendix E - Crane and Hoist Training Certification Form ........................................ 399
Appendix F - Safe Work Practices of Cranes, Hoists and Slings .............................. 400
Engaging the Load .................................................................................................... 400
Moving the Load........................................................................................................ 401
Placing the Load ....................................................................................................... 402
Slings ........................................................................................................................ 402
Appendix G - Bridge Crane Operator Evaluation Form ............................................. 403
Appendix H - Instructions for Conducting Bridge Crane Operator Evaluations .......... 405
Safe Work Procedures for Bridge Crane ................................................................... 405
Scope ........................................................................................................................ 405
Authorization ............................................................................................................. 405
Hazards ..................................................................................................................... 406
Personal Protective Equipment (ppe) ........................................................................ 406
Safe Work Procedures .............................................................................................. 406
23. ASBESTOS MANAGEMENT PLAN ..................................................................... 411
23.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................................... 413
23.2 Definitions ................................................................................................................... 413
23.3 Reference Materials & Applicable Legislation .............................................................. 414
23.4 Roles and Responsibilities ........................................................................................... 415
23.5 Procedures................................................................................................................... 418
23.6 Documentation ............................................................................................................. 422
23.7 Program Review ......................................................................................................... 422
23.8 Appendix A- Exposure Control Plan ............................................................................ 423
23.9 Appendix B - Labelling ................................................................................................ 429
23.10 Appendix C – Safe Work Procedures ........................................................................ 429
24. PESTICIDE USE – SAFE WORK PROCEDURE ............................................... 441
24.1
24.2
24.3
24.4
24.5
24.6
Purpose ...................................................................................................................... 443
Scope .......................................................................................................................... 443
Hazards ...................................................................................................................... 443
Pesticides in Use ........................................................................................................ 443
Risk Assessment ........................................................................................................ 444
Personal Protective Equipment ................................................................................... 444
24.7 Handling ...................................................................................................................... 445
24.8 Storage ....................................................................................................................... 448
24.9 Spill Cleanup and Disposal ......................................................................................... 450
24.10 Planning Emergency Procedures............................................................................... 450
24.11 Records...................................................................................................................... 452
24.12 Guidelines for Spraying in Public Places ................................................................... 452
25. RESPECTFUL WORK PLACE PROGRAM ....................................................... 457
25.1 Respectful Work Place Policy ..................................................................................... 459
25.2 Definitions ................................................................................................................... 459
25.3 General Policy Statement ........................................................................................... 459
25.4 Scope .......................................................................................................................... 460
25.5 Consequences of Non-Compliance ............................................................................ 460
25.6 Appropriate Work Place Behaviours ........................................................................... 461
25.7 Inappropriate Work Place Behaviours ......................................................................... 461
25.8 Employee Responsibilities .......................................................................................... 463
25.9 Reporting and Investigative Procedures ..................................................................... 463
25.10 Respectful Work Place Procedure ............................................................................. 464
25.11 Respectful Work Place Reporting Form ..................................................................... 465
25.12 Respectful Work Place Investigation Form ................................................................ 466
WorkSafeBC Regulations ........................................................................................ 469
1. ROLES & RESPONSIBILITIES
1.1
Mayor and Town Council ...................................................................................... 3
1.2
Administrator ........................................................................................................ 3
1.3
Supervisory Staff .................................................................................................. 3
1.4
Workers ................................................................................................................ 4
1.5
Contractors ........................................................................................................... 5
1.6
Visitors, Suppliers and Consultants...................................................................... 6
1.7
Administration and Distribution of the Program .................................................... 6
1.8
Joint Health and Safety Committee ...................................................................... 6
1
Golden Health & Safety Program
Roles and Responsibilities
In accordance with the Workers’ Compensation Act (Act) Division 3 section 121and the
Occupational Health and Safety Regulation (OH&SR) Part 3 which requires the Town of
Golden to develop, implement and maintain a Health and Safety Program, and the
responsibility to achieving that goal will be with the office of town administrator.
The following section will defines the functional responsibilities of the Town of Golden,
as well as third party companies or individuals, which perform contract work for this
organization.
1.1
Mayor and Town Council
1.2
Administrator
Responsibilities include:
 Maintain overall control of the Health and Safety Program direction
 Ensure all established health and safety policies are administered
and complied with in all areas
 Ensure that all personnel are aware of and effectively practice the
policies and procedures set out in the safety and health
management system
 Ensure supervisory staff are trained and educated on health and
safety policies and procedures
 Ensure at least one Joint Health and Safety Committee (JH&SC)
meeting is held monthly to review safety conditions and general
safety and health policies and practices
 Ensure Supervisory staff does regular observations of safety and
health activities in their area responsibilities
 Ensure that an investigation of incidents or near misses or
determine the underlying causes. These must be reported in detail,
and the required report forms completed on a timely basis. Each
investigation will include a worker health and safety representative
from the JH&SC.
 Ensure that new or transferred employees receive detailed health
and safety instructions before they are allowed to start work.
Temporary or new employees should be assigned to work with
other employees who are familiar with the job/task and are aware of
any specific safety and health rules, hazards and regulations that
are in force
 LEAD by example
1.3
Supervisory Staff
The supervisory staff will assist with the development, implementation and
monitoring of the Health & Safety Program and their job/task related practices
and procedures.
##Main_Table_of_Contents
3
Golden Health & Safety Program
Roles and Responsibilities
Responsibilities include:
 Provide safe working conditions for all workers under their
supervision; provide instructions to workers in safe work procedures
and practices
 As part of the routine duties, shall require employees to use
personal protective equipment as appropriate, e.g. hard hats,
goggles, masks, respirators, safety glasses or other items deemed
necessary
 Undertake an investigation of incidents or near misses to determine
the underlying causes, and the findings must be reported using the
appropriate forms, and completed in a timely manner
 Provide a good example for workers by always directing and
performing work in a safe manner
 Conduct regular inspections of their area of responsibilities. If
unsafe practices or conditions are identified, ensure prompt
corrective action is taken to eliminate their causes
 Work in cooperation with other personnel in determining safe
practices, enforcing their observations, and developing procedures
for dealing with violations and developing other general safety and
incident prevention
 Provide each worker with information about the hazards of the job
and how to avoid them
 Ensure that workers are trained and educated in the appropriate
safety and health policies and procedures, and maintain
involvement in employee training
 Maintain a housekeeping standard and assign definite
responsibilities to individuals for good housekeeping
 Enforce all established safety and health requirements, and work
procedures
 Conduct a minimum of one safety and health talk a month with your
crew and record minutes on the prescribed form
 Ongoing risk assessment and LEAD by example
1.4
Workers
All workers are responsible for safeguarding their own safety and health and the
safety of their fellow employees.
Responsibilities include:
 Take reasonable care to protect the worker’s health and safety and
the health and safety of other persons who may be affected by the
worker's acts or omissions at work, and
 Comply with the Act, the OH&SR and any applicable orders
Without limiting the above, a worker must:
 Carry out his or her work in accordance with established safe work
procedures as required
##Main_Table_of_Contents
4
Golden Health & Safety Program







Roles and Responsibilities
Use or wear protective equipment, devices and clothing as required
Not engage in horseplay or similar conduct that may endanger the
worker or any other person
Carry out their work in a manner that will not create a hazard to
their own safety and health or other workers
Assist supervision in the reduction and controlling of incident
producing conditions and unsafe acts at the job/task or work area
Report any incidents, near misses and/or injuries immediately to
their immediate supervisor
Report any anticipated loss of work time to the supervisory staff as
soon as possible after being treated by a physician following an
injury
Ensure that the worker's ability to work without risk to his or her
health or safety, or to the health or safety of any other person, is not
impaired by alcohol, drugs or other causes
Report to their immediate supervisor or employer:
 Any contravention of this Part, the regulations or an applicable
order of which the worker is aware, and
 The absence of or defect in any protective equipment, device or
clothing, or the existence of any other hazard, that the worker
considers is likely to endanger the worker or any other person
 Cooperate with the Workers’ Compensation Board, or an Officer of the
board, and any other person carrying out a duty under this Part or the
regulations
 Cooperate with a member of the JH&SC for the workplace
 Exercise their Right to Refuse in accordance with section 3.12 of
the regulation when they have reason to believe they are faced with
an unsafe or unhealthy working condition and LEAD by example
1.5
Contractors
Contractors working on town property and/ or projects are responsible for the
safety of their employees and must provide proof of WCB coverage.
Responsibilities include:
 Complying with all applicable acts and Regulations
 Making arrangements with a Town of Golden representative
concerning emergency procedures
 Immediately correcting any unsafe condition or acts observed in
their jurisdiction and reporting any out of their jurisdiction
 Providing education, training and enforcing the use of applicable
personal protective equipment
 Reporting of all incidents and injuries, also investigate and report
findings of all lost time and serious incidents to their representative
 Cooperate with a representative from the JH&SC
##Main_Table_of_Contents
5
Golden Health & Safety Program



1.6
Roles and Responsibilities
Maintain a good housekeeping practice in their work area(s)
LEAD by example
Visitors, Suppliers and Consultants
Visitors, Suppliers and Consultants are responsible for insuring their own or their
employee safety, and also that of the employees from the town.
Responsibilities include:
 Participating and complying with health and safety directives
received from a Town of Golden representative
 Complying with the Town of Golden Health and Safety Program
 Wearing adequate personal protective equipment
 Reporting any unsafe acts and or unsafe conditions which could
have any negative health or safety consequence to a Town of
Golden representative
 Reporting any injury sustained on the town property
 LEAD by example
1.7
Administration and Distribution of the Program
The Health and Safety Program is comprised of different sections, which require
continuous improvements and updating. Also to meet the requirements of the Act
and OH&SR, the program will need to be reviewed annually.
Continuous improvement through feedback is the only way that the Town of
Golden can remain competitive in improving the health and safety performance.
Each and every worker will be given the opportunity of providing information,
which could help improve program.
As for distribution, copies of the program will be located in the public works yard
and the town office with extra copies available at request.
1.8
Joint Health and Safety Committee
Terms of Reference
Name of the committee for purposes of this document shall be known as “Joint
Occupational Health and Safety Committee”. (JOH & S Committee)
Purpose of the JOH & S Committee
A JOH & S Committee is made up of Worker and Employer Representatives
consulting in a cooperative spirit to identify and resolve health and safety problems in
support of a planned health and safety program.
##Main_Table_of_Contents
Duties and Functions of the JOH & S Committee
6
Golden Health & Safety Program
Roles and Responsibilities
a) Identify situations that may be unhealthy or unsafe for workers and advise on
effective systems for responding to those situations.
b) Consider and expeditiously deal with complaints relating to the occupational
health and safety of workers.
c) Consult with workers and the employer on issues related to occupational
health and safety and the occupational environment.
d) Make recommendations to the employer and workers for the improvement of
the occupational health and safety of workers, compliance with Regulations,
and monitor their effectiveness.
e) Make recommendations to the employer on educational programs promoting
the health and safety of workers, compliance with the Regulations, and
monitor their effectiveness.
f) Advise the employer on programs and policies required under the Regulation
for the workplace and monitor their effectiveness.
g) Advise the employer on proposed changes to the workplace or work
processes that may affect the health and safety of workers.
h) Ensure that the incident investigations and regular inspections are carried out
as required by the Workers Compensation Act and Regulation.
i) Participate in inspections, investigations and inquires as provided by the
Workers Compensation Act and Regulation.
j) To carry out any other duties and functions prescribed by regulation.
k) When necessary request information from the employer about:
i) Known or reasonable foreseeable health and safety hazards to which
workers at the workplace are likely to be exposed. (WCA 115,117,136)
ii) Health and safety experience and work practices and standards in similar
or other industries of which the employer has knowledge (implication WCA
136, WCR 4.28)
Records
a) The JOH & S committee will keep accurate records of all matters that come
before the JOH & S committee.
b) The JOH & S committee will maintain copies of its reports (minutes) for a
period of at least 2 years from the date of the JOH & S committee meeting to
which they relate.
c) First aid records to be kept for at least 10 years;
d) Education and training related records to be kept for at least 3 years after the
training session.
Meetings
a) The JOSH committee will meet monthly as per 131 (2) of the WCA.
b) Meeting dates to be established by the committee at the inaugural meeting in
the new calendar year, the new committee shall set its meeting dates for the
coming year. A date may be changed with the approval of the JOH & S
committee co-chairs.
c) Special meetings, if required will be held at the call of the co-chairs.
##Main_Table_of_Contents
7
Golden Health & Safety Program
Roles and Responsibilities
d) A quorum shall consist of a minimum of three members, two representing the
employees and one representing the employer.
e) At the approval of the Co-chairs guests will be invited to share information
and knowledge.
f) A third party consultant may be invited to help maintain JOH & S Committee
direction and focus.
Agenda and Meeting Records
a) An agenda will be prepared by the co-chairs or delegate and distributed to
members one week prior to the meeting.
b) A report (minutes) of the meeting will be prepared within one week following
the meeting and will be distributed to JOH & S Committee members,
employer and the union one week prior to the next meeting .
c) Following JOH & S Committee approval, each report will be posted on the
appropriate bulletin boards for no less than 3 months.
Committee Membership
a) The committee shall be made up of five (5) members
b) In accordance with the Workers Compensation Act (WCA) at least half the
members on the committee must be worker representatives. Two (2)
Employer representatives as determined under 129 of the WCA by the
employer
c) Three (3) Worker representatives as determined under 128 of the WCA by
CUPE 2309.
d) The JOH & S Committee member names shall be listed as an attachment
(appendix A) to the Terms of Reference.
e) Appendix A will be updated by December 31st of each year.
Co-chairs
a) The JOH & S Committee will select Co-chairs from its membership.
b) The Worker Representatives shall select their co-chair annually each
December.
c) The Employer Representatives shall select their co-chair annually each
December.
d) Unless facilitated by a third party consultant the Co-chairs or delegate shall:
i.
Control the meeting.
ii.
Ensure the maintenance of an unbiased viewpoint.
iii.
Arrange the agenda.
iv.
Review previous meeting reports and material including correspondence
prior to the meeting
v.
Arrange for the meeting place.
vi.
Notify members of the meetings
vii.
Prepare the agenda
viii.
Prepare meeting reports
ix.
Forward a copy of the meeting report to the employer for distribution.
x.
Prepare a recommendation(s) and forward to the employer for response.
xi.
Prepare all correspondence.
##Main_Table_of_Contents
8
Golden Health & Safety Program
Roles and Responsibilities
Terms of Office
a) Each December the employees and employer are to appoint/elect the correct
number of representatives plus the requisite number of alternates as per
WCA sec 128 and 129.
b) Where possible the term on the committee will overlap to allow for a mix of
new and experienced JOH & S Committee member.
c) A joint committee member may be reappointed by those they represent.
d) If a member of the JOH & S Committee is unable to complete their term of
office. The party they represent will arrange for a replacement.
e) Alternates may be used when a member has good cause not to attend. The
member being replaced must assure their alternate is well informed.
Guidelines for Recommendations to the Employer
a) Directly related to health and safety
b) Follow the Principles of Control
c) Practicable, Doable (reasonably capable of being done).
d) Complete (employer will not need further information to make decision)
e) Note: Principles of Control is also known as the Hierarchy of Controls. This is
a recognized progressive control system that will result when used in effective
and cost effective hazard control. The Hierarchy is as follows Elimination,
Substitution, Engineering, Administrative and lastly Personnel Protective
Equipment (PPE)
Posting JOH & S Committee information
a) All information to be posted at the Town Hall, Arena, Swimming Pool
(when staffed) and Public Works.
b) Names and work locations of the JOH & S committee members, and also who
they represent
c) Reports of the 3 most recent JOH & S committee meetings.
d) Copies of any applicable orders under the WC Act or Regulation
e) Location of a copy of the Workers Compensation Act and Regulations
Resolving Disagreements within the JOH & S Committee
a) If the JOH & S Committee is unable to reach agreement on a matter relating
to the health and safety of workers at the workplace, a Co-chair of the JOH &
S committee may report this to WorkSafe which may investigate and attempt
to resolve the matter as per section 132 of the WCA.
Approval or amendments to the Terms of Reference
a) When finalized by the JOH & S Committee the Terms of Reference will go to
both to Town Council and CUPE Local 2309 for approval.
b) Once approved the Terms of Reference will be reviewed:
c) Annually by the JOH & S Committee following the December
appointment/election of the new representative.
d) If an identified situation arises that the Terms of Reference requires
discussion in order to meet the needs of the Town of Golden and its
employees.
9
Golden Health & Safety Program
Roles and Responsibilities
The Terms of Reference will be reviewed and updated if necessary by March 31st of
each year.
Payment for attendance at meetings and related duties
Payment at JH&SC meetings will be paid for at the member’s current rate of pay
for performing work, and the time for the time spent at meetings is to be
considered as time at work.
All time spent on other JH&SC duties such as inspections, accident or near miss
investigation, representing a worker in work refusal situation, accompanying a
WCB representative and any work assigned by the JH&SC will be paid in the
same manner in accordance of 134 of the WC Act
Education Leave
Each JH&SC member will receive a minimum of eight (8) hours paid education
leave annually in accordance with the WC Act 135
Both parties must agree to the training course being received, if there is a
disagreement the parties may choose to have their training separately as long as
it meets the requirements of the Act.
General
All workers will be encouraged to discuss their problems with their immediate
supervisor before bringing it to the attention of a JH&SC representative
##Main_Table_of_Contents
10
Golden Health & Safety Program
Safety Communication
2. SAFETY COMMUNICATION
2.1
Purpose .............................................................................................................. 13
2.2
Communication System...................................................................................... 13
2.3
Distribution of Health Safety Program ................................................................ 13
2.4
Crew/staff Meetings and Notice Boards ............................................................. 13
2.5
Form ................................................................................................................... 13
11
Golden Health & Safety Program
Safety Communication
2.1
Purpose
The purpose of safety communication is to provide information that will help minimize
or eliminate the risk to workers performing the job function. It is also a positive way to
communicate the Town of Golden Health and Safety Program to the workforce. When
the procedures for the program are being developed or reviewed it will be involving the
workers who have to do the work procedure being reviewed, and will also include
reviewing all manufacturers' recommendations as it relates to equipment, and all
related sections within the Act and OH&SR.
2.2
Communication System
The communication system used throughout the organization is to provide workers with
up to date information regarding safety and health requirements and issues.
This system includes:
 Distribution of the Health & Safety Program
 Development of safe work procedures
 Supplementary Instructions
 Distribution of the Act and OH&SR
 Safety as an issue during Crew/staff Meetings
2.3
Distribution of Health Safety Program
When finalized the Town of Golden Health & Safety Program will be distributed to
every full time and part time worker, and will also be available in a location that is
known and accessible to all workers, with the location posted.
2.4
Crew/staff Meetings and Notice Boards
The primary vehicle for ongoing safety awareness and exchange of safety information
is through good communication, and to achieve that goal the issue of health and safety
will form part of the agenda at the crew/staff meetings, and all related correspondence
on the issue will be posted on the main bulletin boards. (E.g. WCB poster, alert
notices)
2.5
Form
Crew/Staff Meeting Record (following page)
##Main_Table_of_Contents
.
13
Golden Health & Safety Program
Safety Communication
CREW/STAFF MEETING RECORD
Attendance Roster
DEPARTMENT HEAD :
DATE :
Have workers sign-in next to their name at the beginning of each meeting.
ATTENDING WORKER’S NAME
ABSENT WORKER’S NAME(S)
WORKER”S SIGNATURE
ABSENT WORKER’S NAME(S)
##Main_Table_of_Contents
14
Golden Health & Safety Program
Training and Communication
3. TRAINING AND EDUCATION
3.1
Purpose .............................................................................................................. 17
3.2
Scope.................................................................................................................. 17
3.3
Educational Standards ...................................................................................... 17
3.4
Required Learning ............................................................................................. 18
3.5
Benefits of Training and Education ................................................................... 18
3.6
Training Measurement ...................................................................................... 18
3.7
Forms.................................................................................................................. 18
15
Golden Health & Safety Program
Training and Communication
3.1
Purpose
The intent of this section is to identify key issues related to education and training. The
Act and OH&SR requires that the Town of Golden provide to their workers the
appropriate information, instruction, training and supervision necessary to ensure the
worker can do their work in a healthy and safe manner, and to achieve that goal training
and education must be ongoing.
3.2
Scope
The provision of instruction and training:
1. The Town of Golden shall ensure that appropriate health and safety instruction or
training is provided for all workers where it is required by the Act and OH&SR
and when necessary to ensure workers can perform their work in a manner that
is safe and healthy. Subject(s) selected for instruction or training shall be
identified by the Town of Golden in consultation with, the supervisory staff,
JH&SC and the workers themselves. Participants should be selected based on
their individual need for instruction or training in each subject.
2. Workers assigned specific Health and Safety roles shall be provided with
instruction and training that provides knowledge of the Act, OH&SR and the
Town of Golden Health and Safety Program, responsibilities and tasks they are
assigned and the practical means of performing them.
Workers requiring this education include:
a) The supervisory staff responsible for the health and safety in their
area,
b) Representatives on the JH&SC, and
c) Workers (other than the OH&SC) who may be assigned to perform
health and safety functions.
3. All Young or New Workers shall be provided with the appropriate instruction for
the Town of Golden workplaces which is outlined in this program. Supervisors
shall ensure they are competent to perform their work safely and know what
action to take in emergencies.
4. Up-to-date training records shall be maintained by the Town of Golden for each
worker, identifying the safety and health instruction or training received and the
date it was provided.
3.3
Educational Standards
Health and Safety instruction and training programs must maintain a level of quality to
ensure that a high standard of field education is being maintained. When users are
reviewing the quality of a program, the following must be considered:

Quality of the lesson plans, teaching techniques (including "situational" training)
and teaching aids selected.
##Main_Table_of_Contents
17
Golden Health & Safety Program



Training and Communication
Appropriate use of written tests and/or demonstrations of competency
Use of course evaluations to obtain participants' comments
Use of records of completion, certificates of competency or other education
tracking systems
Educators selected to deliver instruction and training shall be able to:
 Demonstrate a depth of knowledge in the material to be presented
 Explain confusing or technically complex course material, and
 Relate the educational material to practical applications familiar to the
participants
3.4
Required Learning
The Town of Golden will have required learning depending upon the tasks and hazards
that a worker is subjected to. The Town of Golden will outline the required learning at
time of hire. If the task or job position changes, training will be provided as required.
3.5
Benefits of Training and Education
The benefit of training is twofold; the first benefit is that if training is successful, we
achieve a desired action. For example, we have a worker who performs an equipment
inspection. Secondly, we have a safer piece of equipment. Training reduces the number
of incidents, which in turn prevents vehicle and equipment damage and down time.
Incidence of injuries will also decrease, thereby reducing the costs of lost time and
compensation.
3.6
Training Measurement
 Keep a running total of incidents broken down into key categories and compare
the totals to before and after training and/or procedural changes.
 Watch for decreases in costs (WCB Cost, lost time, etc.) after training.
 Compare worker survey results after training. Has it improved?
3.7
Forms
Employee Development Record
Training Attendance Sheet
New Employee Indoctrination Checklist
#Main_Table_of_Contents
18
Golden Health & Safety Program
Employee Name:
SUBJECT
Training and Communication
Dept/Division:
INSTRUCTOR
EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT RECORD
O.J.T = On the Job Training
DATE(S) OF
INSTRUCTION
Hire Date:
O.J.T.
C.I.
Job Title:
C.B.T.
C.I. = Class Room Instruction
OTHER
DURATION
TIME
COMMENTS
C.B.T = Computer Based Training
#Main_Table_of_Contents
19
Golden Health & Safety Program
Training and Communication
TRAINING ATTENDANCE SHEET
Name of Training Conducted: ________________________________________
Date: ________
Time: ____________
Facilitator: __________________
I have read the information and understand the contents. I was shown how to (list what was
shown during training):
I have demonstrated to the facilitator that I know how to:
Name (please print)
Signature
Position
#Main_Table_of_Contents
20
Golden Health & Safety Program
Training and Communication
NEW EMPLOYEE INDOCTRINATION CHECKLIST
Employee Name:
Permanent
Relief
Department:
Transfer
Consultant
Position:
Orientation Date:
Manager:
Supervisor:
Instructor Name:
Part One: New Hire Orientation Program
Completed? Yes
No
Part Two: Workplace Hazardous Material Information System (WHMIS)
Completed? Yes
No
Part Three: Supervisor
H&S Philosophy
Expectations
Attendance
Lateness
Absenteeism Reporting:
Phone:
Reporting Hazards:
Reporting Injuries:
Urge reading of Labour Agreement:
Time Cards:
Location of Washroom/Lunchroom:
Smoking Areas:
First Aid Location:
Issue Personal Protective Equipment:
Review PPE Matrix:
Job Hazards:
Job Procedures:
H&S Instruction:
Fire Prevention:
Introduction to Associates
Supervisor:
Committee Member:
Fellow Workers:
First Aid Attendant:
Supervisor Signature:
Employee Signature:
Note: H&S = Health & Safety
#Main_Table_of_Contents
21
Golden Health & Safety Program
Hazard Assessment Process
4. HAZARD ASSESSMENT PROCESS
4.1
Purpose .............................................................................................................. 25
4.2
Scope................................................................................................................. 25
4.3
Hazard Assessments ......................................................................................... 25
4.4
Control Measures ............................................................................................... 29
4.6
Implementing Control Strategies ....................................................................... 30
4.7
Purchasing Controls ........................................................................................... 31
4.8
Field Level Risk Assessment ............................................................................. 31
4.9
Forms.................................................................................................................. 32
23
Golden Health & Safety Program
Hazard Assessment Process
4.1
Purpose
The hazard assessment process is a system to identify health and safety hazards,
occupational factors or illnesses, arising in and from the workplace, which may cause
impaired health and well-being, sickness or significant discomfort and this inefficiency
must be identified, monitored and controlled.
4.2
Scope
The overall process is comprised of four basic components including:




4.3
recognizing the hazard exposure or potential hazard exposure
identifying the source
evaluating the loss potential
controlling potential loss exposure
Hazard Assessments
Hazard definition: a situation with a potential for injury, damage to property or
damage to the environment.
Hazard Recognition and Control
The identification process of occupational hazards must be implemented and
maintained through recognition and control. The steps are as follows:
•
•
•
•
determining what hazards are present in the workplace
assessing the level of risk for the hazards identified
implementing strategies to eliminate or reduce the risk involved; and
monitoring and following up to ensure the control
strategies chosen are implemented and effective
It is very important to recognize that the hazard assessment
does not deal strictly with things that are wrong at the
present time. Rather, this assessment must deal with what
could go wrong.
The hazard assessment must be employer led, but the
workforce needs to be involved. This will require bringing
those workers into the process with the expertise in that
particular task. The team approach will achieve the best
results.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
25
Golden Health & Safety Program
Hazard Assessment Process
Types of Hazards to Consider:
Chemical Hazards
Chemical compositions that come in contact with the human body, causing acute
and/or chronic effects, are known as chemical hazards. These chemicals may
consist of mists, vapors, fumes, gases, fibres, dusts and liquids.
Physical Hazards
Physical hazards causing harm or adverse effects to the human body include
ionizing radiation, infrared and ultraviolet radiation, noise, temperature
extremes, barometric extremes, illumination, vibration , lasers , humidity extremes ,
dusts and microwave radiation.
Biological Hazards
Mold, viruses, bacteria, fungi, parasites, insects, snakes, plants and animals that
may cause adverse effects to the human body are classified as biological hazards.
Ergonomic Hazards
Physical disorders and stress which cause harm to the human body resulting from
poor work posture, repetitive motions, forceful exertions, contact stressors,
improper handling of material, improper work/rest cycles and other associated
factors are considered ergonomic hazards.
Safety Hazards
Safety hazards span a broad range of activities which tend to result in immediate
effects ranging from minor injuries to major traumatic events. Typical accident
types resulting in injury include: struck by; struck against; caught in; falls from
elevation; falls from same level; harmful substances; transportation; and
overexertion.
Conducting a Hazard Assessment
Every workplace consists of four major components. These are:
•
•
•
•
the people (workers , visitors, clients, suppliers, subcontractors, etc.)
the environment they work in
the materials they work with
the equipment and tools they use
In conducting a hazard assessment, all four components must be examined,
subdivided and evaluated to see what risks are present.
1.
2.
Conducting or Updating a Hazard Assessment
Don’t confuse monthly inspections with hazard assessments
“Inspections presume that you already know what the hazards are. If you haven’t already
done an assessment, your inspections won’t be very robust. Ticking things off a checklist is
not an assessment.
Form an assessment team
While the employer is legally responsible for conducting the hazard assessment, a team
26
Golden Health & Safety Program
3.
4.
Hazard Assessment Process
approach is ideal. The assessment should be done by those most familiar with the work
and with the assistance of other people, such as management.
Include a fresh pair of eyes on the team
Could be a manager, a health and safety committee member, or an outside consultant.
“Even if people have been on the job only a short time, they habituate themselves to
hazards.
Determine an approach
For example, divide your workplace into major work areas or steps in the work flow. If
you’ve already conducted an assessment, you may wish to follow the same approach or try
a different one. Include all areas of the workplace, such as:






5.
customer service
offices
maintenance
shipping/receiving
storage
areas outside of the workplace (driveways, parking lots, sidewalks, walkways, etc.)
Prep for the assessment
Collect and review existing information. Sources include:









6.
7.
8.
results of previous workplace assessments and inspections
worker hazard reports
recommendations made by the joint health and safety committee
maintenance reports
results of any workplace testing (e.g., air sampling)
injury, illness and incident investigation reports
inspection reports and orders from Worksafebc
hazardous materials inventories and material safety data sheets (MSDSs)
inventories of on-site machinery and equipment, plus related information from
manufacturers or suppliers
Keep your mind open, and avoid making assumptions beforehand
Don’t assume any task, procedure or process is safe just because no one has been injured
yet. To refresh your sense of what could go wrong, review “Sample hazards to watch out
for,” below.
Conduct the assessment
Advise supervisors and workers beforehand. Be thorough. Take into account both safety
and health hazards. Ask workers about hazards and how they may be controlled. Ask a
worker to show how the process or equipment works. Ask what’s happened in the past?
What could potentially happen? If someone wasn’t trained, what could go wrong?’ “To
assess the hazards, ask workers to answer, ‘What could hurt me, how often am I doing it,
and how bad could I be hurt?’ Questions like these give everyone participating in the
assessment a better picture of what goes on, where the greatest risks may be, and how to
control them.”
Gauge whether existing controls are adequate
In order of preference, options include:



elimination/substitution — removing the hazard from the workplace
engineering — reducing the exposure through design or modification of the facility,
equipment, ventilation systems, and processes
administrative — altering the way the work is done, including timing of work, policies
and other rules, and work practices such as standards and operating procedures
27
Golden Health & Safety Program
9.
Hazard Assessment Process
(including training, housekeeping, and equipment maintenance, and personal
hygiene practices)
 personal protective equipment — worn by individuals to reduce exposure; for
example, to chemicals or noise
Determine what controls are required by law and by company rules. This may require
consulting with an expert, such as an industrial hygienist, safety specialist, ergonomist or
equipment specialist.
Follow up on your assessment findings




Share results of the assessment with affected workers, supervisors and managers.
Everybody is required to know about the hazards, and understand that they have
their own hazard responsibilities.
Develop, share and implement an action plan for controlling the hazards.
Train workers on new controls.
Review your progress with the action plan, and reassess regularly. “You have to
stay on top of your action plans. It’s part of building commitment at all levels.
Sample hazards to watch out — “Do you see what I see? Yes… tell me what you see.”
When identifying safety hazards, consider





material handling hazards (e.g., lifting, carrying, lowering, pushing, and pulling). Mechanical
material handling devices such as lift trucks, conveyors, cranes, and handcarts can also
introduce hazards, such as contact with moving equipment or parts, loads, or electricity. So
too handling of hazardous materials, such as corrosives, flammables and reactives.
machine hazards (e.g., rotating shafts, belts or pulleys • presses, blades and saws • flying
projectiles
energy hazards, causing the sudden movement of machine components, electrical shock
or other releases of energy. Sources include electricity, steam, heat, pneumatic or
hydraulic pressure and gravity, as well as mechanical and chemical energy
work practice hazards, such as failing to have or follow safe work practices
confined space hazards, where hazardous gases, vapours, dusts or fumes may build up, or
where an oxygen-deficient atmosphere may be created. Examples include storage tanks,
vaults, pits, vats, silos, pipelines, ducts and trenches. Other hazards include difficult entry
and exit, working in awkward spaces, poor walking surfaces, poor visibility, and extremes
of temperature and noise.
When identifying health hazards, consider





physical hazards (e.g., noise, vibration, temperature extremes, and radiation)
chemical hazards (solids, liquids, vapours, gases, dusts, fumes or mists that can be
inhaled, ingested or absorbed into the body)
biological hazards (living things or substances produced by living things that can cause
illness; they enter the body by inhalation, ingestion or absorption)
ergonomic or work design hazards, arising from the design and organization of work
stress or psychosocial hazards, including physical (e.g., noise and vibration) and
organizational stressors (e.g., lack of job control, work overload, role uncertainty and
conflict, isolation and workplace violence)
28
Golden Health & Safety Program
Hazard Assessment Process
Create additional workplace-specific hazard categories as you encounter them (e.g., vehicle
driving hazards or hand tool hazards). During the assessment, wear appropriate personal
protective equipment and take detailed notes.
4.4
Control Measures
Hazards can be controlled in three different ways:
•
•
•
At the source
Along the path
Or at the worker
Controls follow a hierarchy which includes;
 elimination
 substitution
 isolation
 engineering
 administrative and
 personal protective equipment
Elimination or Substitution
Ideally, hazards should be eliminated. On a stairway, for example, an uneven step that
poses a tripping hazard can be replaced. Likewise, a cleaning solution that is irritating to
the skin may be substituted by a non-irritating solution.
Isolation
If hazards cannot be eliminated then the next approach would be to isolate the hazard.
An example would be to conduct welding work outdoors away from other workers
instead of conducting such activities in an open shop.
Engineering Controls
Enclosures, guards, barriers, ventilation systems and lockout mechanisms are good
examples of engineering controls. Whenever possible, they should be built into
equipment and systems. A careful inventory of parts necessary for safety should be
developed and maintained. In addition, a preventive maintenance program should be
established.
Before purchasing machinery and equipment, safety considerations should be
factored into the purchase.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
29
Golden Health & Safety Program
Hazard Assessment Process
Administrative Controls
Administrative controls are managed through the Town of Golden administration. They
include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
policies and procedures
worker assignment and rotation
education and training
supervision
inspections and investigations
hazardous materials and substances inventory
JH&SC participation
records and statistics
evaluation of the Health and Safety program
Personal Protective Equipment
When elimination, substitution, isolation, engineering or
administrative controls are not practicable, then personal
protective equipment must be worn. The use of personal
protective equipment is necessary wherever a worker may be
exposed to hazards.
Personal protective equipment may act as the primary control for
situations where other control methods are not effective such as
in temporary emergency situations. It is imperative that the choice
for personal protective equipment be reviewed both by
management and by the JOSH committee. This will minimize
obtaining inappropriate protective wear.
Training in the effective use and care of personal protective
equipment is a requirement under the Act and OH&SR.
Supervision is essential to ensure that personal protective
equipment is available, is being used properly and that corrective
measures are addressed in a timely manner.
4.5
Implementing Control Strategies
Once a control method has been established, it must be
implemented. Documents describing the control method must
include;
a) assigning the person primarily responsible for implementing the
control method
#Main_Table_of_Contents
30
Golden Health & Safety Program
Hazard Assessment Process
b) the date the control method (corrective action) will be
developed and completed
There must be a follow-up to confirm if the control method or
corrective action was implemented and if it is effective in
eliminating the potential hazard. Results of follow-ups must be
documented for purposes of due diligence.
Some operations may have special hazards that are beyond the
expertise of staff and supervisory experience. In those particular
circumstances a qualified and competent person will be hired
(consultant) to act on these hazards.
4.6
Purchasing Controls
It is the responsibility of the Town of Golden to ensure that all items purchased meet or
exceed all government standards. All equipment must meet provincial and federal
safety standards, CSA standards or their equivalent.
4.7
Field Level Risk Assessment
A method that an individual or crew would use to minimize or
eliminate potential workplace injuries and losses to, property,
materials or environment during the course of conducting work on
the day of the job. When such assessments are conducted they
should be documented as a measure of due diligence.
Benefits
For the workers:
 Lower probability of injuries
 More security for worker's families
 Improved morale
 Recognition that all risks can be engineered
The Town of Golden:
 Due diligence
 Cost saving - less injuries
 WCB premium reduction
 Productivity efficiencies
 Data used to improve organization's safety program
#Main_Table_of_Contents
31
Golden Health & Safety Program
Hazard Assessment Process
Questions to ask before and while doing a task
Identify:
 Do I clearly understand my task?
 Am I physically and mentally prepared to do the task? What could go
wrong?
 Is there a risk to others or myself?
 What can change that could create a new risk?
 Could other crews, workers or conditions pose risks to me?
Assess:
 How bad could this be?
 How likely is it to happen?
Control:
 Who should I contact for help?
 Are permits, written practices, procedures, etc. required?
 What can I do to control the risk?
 Will the control affect another part of the task being done?
 Do I need to tell anyone else?
 Are emergency response plans required?
4.8
Forms
Workplace Hazard Assessment
Workplace Hazard Corrective Action
Job Hazard Analysis
#Main_Table_of_Contents
32
Golden Health & Safety Program
Hazard Assessment Process
WORKPLACE HAZARD ASSESSMENT
Department:
Immediate Supervisor:
Date/Time:
LOCATION:
TYPE OF OPERATION:
CREW SIZE:
Hazard Status: #1 Imminent (Life or Limb)
ITEM #
STATUS (1-2-3-4-5)
#2 Major #3 Serious #4 Minor #5 N/A
HAZARDOUS ITEMS
1.
Waste Disposal/Housekeeping
2.
Material Storage/Handling
3.
Protection to Public
4.
Shoring/Sloping/Excavation
5.
Water/Vibration/Erosion
6.
Confined Space Entry
7.
Traffic Control, Flashers, Barricades/Restrictions
8.
Overhead Hazards
9.
Power Pole Support
10.
Underground Hazards
11.
Flammables (Fire/Explosion)
12.
Hazardous Chemicals (WHMIS)
13.
Dangerous Pressure
14.
Work at Heights
15.
High Risk Positioning
16.
Work Over Water
17.
Scaffolds
18.
Hoisting/Lifting
19.
Cables/Ropes/Chains/Slings
20.
Vehicles/Machine Condition
21.
Gas (Toxic or Non-life Supporting)
22.
Electrical Wiring and Guards
23.
Weather Conditions
24.
Hot Work
25.
Cold Work
26.
Night Lighting
27.
Pipe Handling
28.
PPE: Basic/Specialized
29.
Tie-in/Test Purge
30.
Other:
33
Golden Health & Safety Program
Hazard Assessment Process
Assessment Team Names:
ITEM #
STATUS (1-2-3-4-5)
COMMENTS
Note: For Corrective Action, transfer information by Hazard Priority Number to “Work Place
Hazard Assessment Corrective Action” form
#Main_Table_of_Contents
34
Golden Health & Safety Program
Hazard Assessment Process
WORKPLACE HAZARD ASSESSMENT CORRECTIVE ACTION
Department:
Assessment Location(s):
Department/Areas Covered:
Date/Time:
Assessment Team Members & Positions (list):
FOLLOW UP
ITEM #
PRIORITY
COPIES TO (For Action):
Manager’s Signature:
RECOMMENDED
ACTION
ACTION TAKEN
DATE/TIME
BY WHOM
(For Information):
Date:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
35
Golden Health & Safety Program
Refusal of Unsafe Work
5. REFUSAL OF UNSAFE WORK
5.1
Introduction ......................................................................................................... 39
5.2
Procedure ........................................................................................................... 39
37
Golden Health & Safety Program
5.1
Refusal of Unsafe Work
Introduction
In accordance with section 3.12 of the OH&SR a worker must not carry out or cause
to be carried out any work process or operate or cause to be operated any tool,
appliance or equipment if that person has reasonable cause to believe that to do so
would create an undo hazard to the health and safety of any person.
Whenever a worker observes (or is requested to do) what appears to be an unsafe
or harmful condition or act that worker must report it to their immediate
supervisor/foreman, and the person receiving the report must investigate the
reported unsafe condition without delay. Depending on the response, the worker
then has to decide if they wish to invoke section 3.12 and if chosen must inform
their immediate supervisor they are refusing to work.
5.2
Procedure
1.
Work refusal (and reason) must be immediately reported to your immediate
supervisor/foreman. The supervisor/foreman must immediately investigate
the matter and;
a) ensure that any unsafe condition is remedied without delay, or
b) in their opinion the matter is not valid, must so inform the person who
made the report.
2.
If the worker continues to refuse to carry out the work process or operate the
tool, appliance, or equipment, the supervisor/foreman must investigate the
matter in the presence of a worker health and safety representative from the
JH&SC.
3.
If the matter is still not resolved and the worker continues to refuse to carry
out the work process or operate the tool, appliance or equipment, in
accordance with section 3.12 either the worker or the supervisor/foreman is
required to contact the local Workers’ Compensation Board office and request
a board officer to attend.
4.
No worker will be subject to discriminatory action as defined in section 150 of
Part 3 of the OH&SR because the employee has acted in compliance with
Section Number of the Town Health & Safety Program or with an order made
by a board Officer.
Temporary Assignment
Temporary assignment to alternative work, at no loss of pay to the worker,
until the matter is resolved is deemed not to constitute discriminatory action.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
39
Golden Health & Safety Program
PPE
6. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
6.1
Purpose ............................................................................................................. 43
6.2
Scope.................................................................................................................. 43
6.3
General ............................................................................................................... 43
6.4
Training ............................................................................................................... 43
6.5
Personal Protection ............................................................................................ 44
6.6
Forms.................................................................................................................. 47
41
Golden Health & Safety Program
6.1
Purpose
The purpose of PPE is to establish a minimum requirement for personal protective
equipment that will insure the safety of workers. It shall be used to ensure that
workplace hazards have been identified and proper equipment is available for each
worker. The PPE program includes written hazard assessments, equipment
requirements and worker training.
6.2
Scope
This program applies to both The Town of Golden employees and contract
personnel. Contractors’ requirements may vary however the contractors program
must meet the same level of protection.
6.3
General
All PPE utilized by employees in the course of their work must be used in
accordance with all manufacturer's specifications, and the Act and OH&SR
requirements. All PPE must be maintained in a clean and reliable condition and
stored appropriately.
PPE
Hazard Assessments
A hazard assessment must be performed for each job/task to determine if
hazards are present which require the use of PPE. The hazard assessment
will be certified with the identity of the workplace evaluated, the person
certifying the evaluation and the date(s) of the evaluation.
PPE Selection
If hazards are determined to be present, PPE will be selected based on the
results of the hazard assessment and those requirements are to be entered
into a PPE matrix. These PPE requirements will be communicated to all
employees.
6.4
Training
All workers required to use PPE will be trained in the following:





what PPE is required for their job/task
when PPE is required to be used
how to properly don, doff, adjust and wear required PPE
the limitations of required PPE
the proper care, maintenance, useful life and disposal of required PPE
All workers must demonstrate an understanding of the above training. Worker
training must be certified and documented. The PPE Training Record will be used
to document and certify PPE-related training. Certification will include the name
and signature of the person certifying the training as well as the date of
certification.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
43
Golden Health & Safety Program
6.5
PPE
Personal Protection
Eye and Face Protection
All workers shall use eye or face protection when exposed to eye or face
hazards from flying particles, liquid chemicals, and/or caustic liquids,
chemical gases or vapors or potentially injurious light radiation. This would
include side protection when there is a hazard from flying objects. Also
workers who must wear prescription lenses while engaged in operations that
involve eye hazards must wear prescription eye protection or eye protection
over their own prescription lenses.
When work is performed that involves potential exposure to injurious light
radiation (welding), workers must use equipment and filter lenses that have
a shade number appropriate for the work being performed.
Head Protection (Safety Headgear)
All workers must wear hard hats when working in areas where there is a
potential for injury to the head from falling or flying objects. This would
include working in customer sites that require the use of a hard hat, or
working near exposed electrical conduit, which could contact the head, must
wear hard hats designed to reduce electrical shock hazard.
Foot Protection
All workers must wear the appropriate protective safety footwear when
working in areas where there is a danger of foot injuries including but not
limited to:
 falling and rolling objects piercing the sole
 exposure to electrical hazards
 exposure to severe temperatures, chemical or biohazard concerns
 any other hazards that may cause a foot injury
Hand Protection
All workers must use hand protection when exposed to such hazards as:
 skin absorption of harmful substances
 severe cuts or lacerations
 severe abrasions
 punctures
 chemical burns
 thermal burns
 any other hazards that may cause a hand injury
Leg Protection
(Applicable to chainsaw use, updated February 2011)
 See page 492 for updated regulation 8.21
#Main_Table_of_Contents
44
Golden Health & Safety Program
PPE
Hazard Assessment Guide
Impact:
Compression:
Puncture:
Electrical:
Temperature
Extremes:
Cuts:
Abrasions:
Puncture:
Chemicals:
Thermal Burns:
Temperature
Extremes:
Impact/
Penetration
(falling objects):
Electrical
Shock:
Temperature
Extremes:
Impact:
Heat:
Dust:
Chemicals:
FOOT
Carrying or handling packages, parts, tools or other
objects
Use of manual material handling carts (hand trucks),
working around heavy pipes, tire assemblies, bulk
rolls of materials, liquid storage drums, fork trucks
Where nails, wire, screws, broken glass, large
staples, scrap metal, walking on trash may puncture
shoe, blade from mower
Working on or near electrically energized parts, while
standing on a non-grounded surface (example:
water)
Working in cold temperatures or severe wind chill
conditions
HAND/ARM
Handling broken glass, sheet metal, medical waste
sharps
Handling wood pallets, construction/demolition
debris, corrugated materials, trash
Potential contact with nails, large staples, medical
waste sharps
Fuels, oils, greases, acids, solvents, battery filling,
parts. cleaner
Handling hot objects, welding, contact with liquid
natural gas
Working in severe cold or hot temperatures
HEAD
 Working below others who are using tools or
handling materials that could fall
 Working around or down in a confined space
 Working below machinery or equipment
Working on or around energized conductors
Working in severe cold or hot temperatures
FACE
Chips, particles, fragments from chipping, grinding,
woodworking, sawing, drilling, chiseling, sanding, &
handling certain materials
Hot sparks or molten metal splashes from welding
Airborne dust from material handling, emptying dust
loads
Splashes or mists from batter acid, fuels & solvents,
biohazards
45
Golden Health & Safety Program
Temperature
Extremes:
Impact:
Heat:
Chemicals:
Dust:
Light/
Radiation:
Chemical:
Visibility:
Heat:
Flame:
Dust/fibers:
Temperature
Extremes:
PPE
Working in severe cold or hot temperatures
EYE
Chips, particles, fragments from chipping, grinding,
woodworking, sawing, drilling, chiseling, sanding, and
handling certain materials
Hot sparks or molten metal splashes from welding
Splashes or mists from battery acid, fuels, and
solvents, biohazards
Airborne dust from material handling, emptying dust
loads
Hazard radiation or glare caused by electric or gas
welding, lasers, extreme sunlight
WHOLE BODY
Large chemical splash to the torso and legs from
chemical spills
Workers must wear hi-visibility apparel that meets or
exceeds the Act and Regulation requirements when
working on or near a roadway, construction site or
near mobile equipment
Fire suppression beyond incipient stage
Fire suppression beyond incipient stage; dispensing
large volumes of flammable fuels
Asbestos disposal, ABS pipe cutting
Working in cold temperatures or severe wind chill
conditions or extreme heat
#Main_Table_of_Contents
46
Golden Health & Safety Program
6.6
PPE
Forms
Personal Protective Equipment
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) MATRIX
Department:
Job/Task
Division:
Safety
Shoe
Face
Shield
Safety
Glasses
Hearing
Protection
Supervisor:
Hard Hat
Respirator
Traffic
Vest
Gloves
Arm
Protection
Coveralls
Name: ________________________________
Signature: ___________________________________
Name: ________________________________
Signature: ___________________________________
#Main_Table_of_Contents
47
Golden Health & Safety Program
Inspection and Monitoring
7. INSPECTION AND MONITORING
7.1
Purpose .............................................................................................................. 51
7.2
Scope.................................................................................................................. 51
7.3
Types of Inspections ........................................................................................... 51
7.4
Inspection Process ............................................................................................. 52
7.5
Monitoring ........................................................................................................... 53
7.6
Forms.................................................................................................................. 53
49
Golden Health & Safety Program
Inspection and Monitoring
7.1
Purpose
The purpose of inspecting and monitoring the workplace is to recognize, identify and
control hazards before incidents or injuries can occur.
7.2
Scope
During an inspection, both activities and conditions in the workplace are carefully
examined. Situations that have potential to cause injury or damage (unsafe acts or
unsafe conditions) are identified and corrective action is initiated.
General housekeeping in the workplace will receive considerable attention during
inspections.
Management personnel will closely follow up the monitoring and record keeping of
inspection reports.
The inspection will provide a systematic examination of the facility, equipment and
work practices on a regular basis.
7.3
Types of Inspections
Ongoing (Informal) Inspections
Ongoing inspections are conducted by supervisory staff on a daily basis.
Everyone should constantly watch for unsafe acts and conditions. In many
cases, a worker and the supervisory staff can correct a problem by discussing
the act or condition before an incident occurs. Situations that require additional
corrective action must be recorded by the supervisory staff for follow-up.
Supervisory staff should encourage workers to bring forward their observation
of unsafe acts or conditions on an ongoing basis. In fact, this is an employee's
right and responsibility under the Act and OH&SR. It is the responsibility of the
Town of Golden to initiate prompt corrective action in response to valid
concerns of workers.
Planned (Formal) Inspections
Planned regular inspections are structured event and are required by the Act
and OH&SR. They are to be conducted by the JH&SC in conjunction with
supervisory staff.
Special Inspections
A special inspection must be made when required by equipment/machinery
malfunction or a serious accident or near miss incident and must include a
worker and employer representative from the JH&SC.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
51
Golden Health & Safety Program
7.4
Inspection and Monitoring
Inspection Process
Scheduling
Workplace inspection requires planning. The JH&SC has the responsibility to
set the schedule for the inspection(s), and are responsible and accountable for
assigning and identifying who from the JH&SC will do the inspections, and are
also responsible for when the inspections will take place. The primary focus of
the inspection is incident prevention, through the maintenance of a healthy and
safe working conditions safe and healthy work environment. The adherence to
proper procedures includes removal of any potential hazards that arise in the
workplace.
The inspections will identify the issue to be addressed and set standards to be
maintained in the workplace by supervisory staff and workers. The program
includes a system to record completed inspections and ensure that any
problems identified are corrected. A follow-up system must be employed to
ensure that all corrective actions have been completed.
General Requirements
General requirements of the inspection program are:




regular inspections scheduled at all places of employment
buildings, structures, grounds, pits, tools, lagoons, equipment,
machinery, confined space, work methods and practice
inspections shall be made at intervals that will prevent the development
of unsafe working conditions, acts, etc.
actual inspection will be unannounced and the date to be identified on
completion of inspection
Recording
It is necessary to record any unsafe actions and conditions observed during an
inspection tour. The inspection report will establish the location of the condition
or action observed. Give it a hazard rating. Then provide some guideline(s)
regarding action taken by the inspector or inspection team. It is then the
responsibility of the supervisory staff to assign corrective actions and
accountability and ensure the action is taken by a certain date.
Hazard Rating
Classify each item that you observe and record during your inspection tour.
This hazard rating establishes priorities for corrective action and highlights the
level of severity or seriousness of the hazards.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
52
Golden Health & Safety Program
Inspection and Monitoring
The ABC rating system:
Major: A condition or practice likely to cause permanent
disability, loss of life or body part and/or extensive loss of
A
structure, equipment or material.
Serious: A condition or practice likely to cause serious Injury
or illness, resulting in temporary disability or property damage
B
that is disruptive but not extensive.
Minor: A condition or practice likely to cause minor, nonC
disabling injury or illness or non-disruptive property damage.
Housekeeping: A disorderly or unclean condition or practice
likely to contribute to injury or illness, disruption of work or
H
property damage
Follow Up
Corrective action must be completed as soon as practicable on any
deficiencies that are noted in the inspection. Feedback on this action is to be
conveyed to the inspection team. Copies of inspection reports must be sent to:
 Administrator
 Supervisory staff
 OH&SC
 And the union if requested
7.5
Monitoring
The JH&SC will review the information obtained from the inspection reports and once
all the corrective action is completed, this data will become part of Records and
Statistics. This information can be used to assist in identifying any trends that may be
developing in the workplace. A proper analysis of these records may over time reveal:
 a need for more training in certain areas
 why incidents are occurring in certain areas
 the need to improve safe work practices
 improved enforcement of the Act and OH&SR
 problem areas that may require more hazard review
7.6
Forms
These forms are to be used to document information gathered from inspections and
action taken to correct deficiencies.
 Inspection Report
 Inspection Schedule
 Fire Extinguisher Inspections
 Worker Safety Concern Report
#Main_Table_of_Contents
53
Golden Health & Safety Program
Inspection and Monitoring
INSPECTION REPORT
Area Inspected:
Date and Time Inspected:
Inspection Completed by:
Date of Report:
# of Items Carried Forward from Previous Report:
Items:
Item
denotes
old item
Hazard
Class
A-B-C
Hazard
Description
Specific
Location
Supervisor
# Items Added:
Corrective
Action
Recommended
Corrective
Action
Taken by
Total #
Target
Date
Followup by
A = Immediate Action
B = Urgent Situation (ASAP)
C = Not Emergency, Corrective Action without delay
H = Disorderly or unclean
Distribution:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
54
Golden Health & Safety Program
Inspection and Monitoring
INSPECTION SCHEDULE
Year of:
Department Manager:
AREA TO INSPECT
Department/Division:
SUPERVISOR
Date:
Prepared by:
INSPECTIONS
PROPOSED
REMARKS
ACTUAL
#Main_Table_of_Contents
55
Golden Health & Safety Program
Inspection and Monitoring
EMPLOYEE SAFETY CONCERN REPORT
ITEM #
Name (please print):
UNSAFE ACT
UNSAFE CONDITION
LOCATION
Date:
Distribution:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
56
Golden Health & Safety Program
Incident Investigation
8. INCIDENT INVESTIGATION
8.1
Purpose .............................................................................................................. 59
8.2
Scope.................................................................................................................. 59
8.3
Definitions ........................................................................................................... 59
8.4
Investigation ....................................................................................................... 59
8.5
Investigation Procedure ...................................................................................... 60
8.6
Incident Reporting .............................................................................................. 60
8.7
Determining Incident Classification .................................................................... 61
8.8
Forms.................................................................................................................. 62
57
Golden Health & Safety Program
Incident Investigation
8.1
Purpose
The purpose of an incident investigation is to determine the cause and to implement
suitable corrective measures. The Town of Golden is required under the Act and
OH&SR to investigate immediately following an incident with the supervisory staff and
JH&SC conducting incident investigations. The purpose of the investigation is to find
fact, not fault. The supervisory staff and JH&SC are reminded to focus on how and why
the event occurred, rather than who should be blamed.
8.2
Scope
The investigation is a systematic process of examination, observation and inquiry
comprised of three parts including:
Description of Incident:
The description identifies in detail how, what, when, where and why (if
possible) the incident occurred including all related factors (i.e. weights,
heights, and distances, time of day, weather conditions, location,
equipment and even staffing)
Cause of Incident:
What acts, failures to act and conditions contributed to the accident or
incident
Recommendations:
After the cause of the incident has been determined, recommendations to
prevent recurrence should now be prepared
8.3
Definitions
Incident:
Includes an occurrence, which results in or had the potential for causing an
injury or occupational disease.
8.4
Investigation
What Incidents should be investigated?
All incidents and near misses must be investigated, although the primary focus
should be on serious and major incidents. Minor incidents and near misses
however, must not be overlooked. They may signal a trend toward unsafe acts
that will eventually cause a serious incident. The investigation of an incident
should be proportionate to the loss potential. As the degree of loss potential
increases, so will the degree of investigation. Cause(s) must be determined
and preventive action taken.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
59
Golden Health & Safety Program
Incident Investigation
Investigation Kit
Responding to the requirements of an incident investigation where time is of
the essence can be a challenging experience. To assist this endeavor, an
investigation kit should be available. Ideally, this kit should contain the
following items including:
 Clipboard, paper and pencils
 Flashlights with extra batteries
 A complete list of emergency phone numbers and investigation
procedures
 Camera
 Measuring device
 Appropriate PPE
8.5
Investigation Procedure
The success of an investigation is generally the result of prompt and efficient
response. The investigator must be prepared so that the investigation process can be
adequately planned, initiated and completed successfully.
The team will consist of a member of the Supervisory staff, a worker and employer
from the JH&SC who will be conducting an investigation into an incident should
proceed as follows:
 establish and take control of the scene
 ensure that any injured persons are cared for
 ensure that no further injury or damage occurs
 get the big picture of what happened
 examine equipment/materials involved
 preservation of evidence, collect and safeguard any physical evidence. Where
practicable, the scene of any accident should be left untouched, except for
activity necessitated by rescue work or to prevent further failures or injuries
until the incident has been investigated
 take photographs of the scene (if necessary)
 interview people involved and obtain written statements where appropriate
 analyze all the available information to determine the causes
 look for causes where "the system failed the employee", not only for those where
"the employee failed the system"
 determine what corrective action will prevent recurrence, complete the report,
and
 follow-up to ensure corrective action is completed
Note: Incident investigations are NOT conducted to lay blame. They are conducted to
prevent recurrence.
8.6
Incident Reporting
All serious incidents or injuries must be reported and documented immediately. The
incident reporting procedures described here are intended to assist workers with
legitimate claims for compensation as quickly and fairly as possible.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
60
Golden Health & Safety Program
Incident Investigation
Injury Reporting
First aid Injuries: All injuries, major and minor must be recorded to the First Aid
Attendant and immediate supervisor.
Medical Aid Injuries: All injured workers must be transported to further medical
attention if required. All appropriate WCB documentation must be completed
and forwarded to the Administration Office without delay
Reporting Equipment Property Damage
The Town of Golden must be promptly notified of serious equipment or
property damage. An Incident Investigation Report must be completed (with
diagrams) for all downgrading incidents and forwarded to the Administration
Office.
Incident/Injuries Reporting
All incidents must be reported immediately. The worker will report these to
their immediate supervisor who in turn must then report occurrences to the
Administration Office. Incidents must be treated seriously and the Incident
Investigation Report must be completed.
Government Notification
The WCB must be notified in the event of certain injuries or incidents. In the
event of any of the following occurrences and immediately after emergency
measures have been activated, the Administration Office must be contacted
and they will inform the appropriate agencies.
8.7
Determining Incident Classification
Lost Time Incident
A lost time incident is an incident where a physician directs the injured worker
to remain away from work longer than the day of the incident.
Medical Aid
An injury requiring treatment by a physician beyond simple first aid care but
does not result in time lost from work beyond the day of the injury is classified
as a Medical Aid injury.
First Aid
A first aid is when a qualified person renders immediate treatment and the
worker immediately returns to work.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
61
Golden Health & Safety Program
8.8
Incident Investigation
Forms
First Aid Record
Incident Investigation
Incident Sketch Map
Witness Statement
Sequence of Events Record
Major Incident Report
#Main_Table_of_Contents
62
Golden Health & Safety Program
Incident Investigation
FIRST AID RECORD
Full name of injured worker:
PHN:
Follow-up Visit?Y
Job Title:
Department/Division:
Supervisor’s Name:
Date of Incident:
Incident Location:
Time of Incident:
Date Incident Reported:
Reported to:
Time:
Type of
Incident:
(Circle One)
Near-miss
Property
Damage
First-aid
Medical Aid
N
N/A
am
am
pm
pm
Lost Time
Injury or
Illness
Name of Witness:
Name of Witness:
1.
2.
What was worker doing at the time of the incident? (eg. Using a weed eater, lifting refuse onto truck, etc)
Describe the injury. (eg. Painful lower back, bruised swollen left ankle, etc. Be sure to indicate
left/right/backside etc).
Describe first aid treatment and advice given. (eg. Applied Band-aid, iced, removed sliver, etc,)
Was violence a contributing factor in this incident?
Is the worker returning to his/her shift without lost time?
Yes
No
Yes
No
Is the worker going to medical aid without completing their shift?
Yes
No
The Supervisor must be notified by the worker before leaving the site
Has the worker been referred by the First-aid attendant to the hospital, doctor
Yes
No
or clinic? If yes, Doctor’s name and phone:

If first aid treatment was rendered before worker went to the doctor/hospital, Form 7A must
be completed by the first aid attendant.

If the worker goes to the doctor and/or is off work beyond the date of injury, Human
Resources to report incident to WCB
First-Aid Attendant’s signature:
Date:
Injured Worker’s signature:
Foreman’s signature:
Date:
Date:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
63
Golden Health & Safety Program
Incident Investigation
INCIDENT INVESTIGATION
Location/Address Incident Occurred:
Description of Incident:
Any damage to city property:
Yes
No
Details of damage:
Any damage to private property:
Yes
No
Estimate of damage:
Immediate action taken:
Is action taken:
Permanent
Temporary
Was protective equipment being used?
If yes, what type?
Are written safe work procedures or instructions in place for
doing this task?
Have they been reviewed with the worker?
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
If incident is a motor vehicle accident, please complete the following:
Drivers Name:________________ DOB: __/__/__ (mm/dd/yy) Driver’s Serial #:___________
Was our vehicle involved:
Yes
No If yes, unit #:_____________________________
Year: ______ Make: ___________ Model: _____________ Serial #:____________________
Licence Plate #___________________ Province: ____________________
Insurance Company: ________________________ Insurance Co. City: _________________
Insurance Agent: __________________________ Agent Address: ____________________
Policy #:_________________________________ Expiry Date: _________________________
Corrective measures taken:
Corrective action referred to:
Date to be completed by:
Committee member’s signature:
Date:
Foreman/Supervisor’s signature:
Date:
Please return completed form to the Safety Coordinator
For Office Use Only
Is an MSI investigation required for this incident?
Yes
No
Is a Violence Incident Report required for this incident?
Yes
No
WCB Claim #:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
64
Golden Health & Safety Program
Incident Investigation
INCIDENT SKETCH MAP
Claim Number:
On Street, Road or Building
At Intersection:
In Location:
Hour
mm/dd/yy:
Show North by
Arrow Scale
Reported by:

Indicate on this diagram what happened:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
65
Golden Health & Safety Program
Incident Investigation
SKETCHING CHECKLIST
By eliminating irrelevant details and adding measurements, you can often sketch a scene
more clearly than you can photograph it.
The following points will make sketching for incident maps easy without sacrificing
accuracy.
1. Use squared paper. Let each square represent a fixed distance such as a foot and
write the scale at the top of the sketch.
2. Use a strip of squared paper to measure diagonals on the sketch.
3. Locate each important object with a rough outline.
4. Label large objects inside their outline. Label small objects outside their outline
with an arrow to the object; the arrow should just touch the object.
5. For maps with a lot of detail, use a sketch log. Use double letters to identify
reference points and single letters to identify items if evidence.
6. Indicate distances of movable objects from at least two fixed points. Logs for
detailed maps have columns for measurement data.
7. Include a north arrow in the sketch.
8. Mark camera positions by a letter inside a circle. Later, the appropriate letter
should be used on each print.
9. Identify the sketches with a label, data box, or, on the back as you would with a
photograph.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
66
Golden Health & Safety Program
Incident Investigation
WITNESS STATEMENT
Witness Name:
Department:
Location:
Date:
Time:
Address:
City:
Postal Code:
Phone:
Witness Signature:
(not mandatory)
If more space is required, please use the reverse side and/or obtain another form from the investigator.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
67
Golden Health & Safety Program
Incident Investigation
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS RECORD
Date
Time
Description of Action Taken and Persons Involved
Initials
#Main_Table_of_Contents
68
Golden Health & Safety Program
Incident Investigation
MAJOR INCIDENT REPORT
Department:
Date of Report:
Exact Location of Incident:
Date of Occurrence:
Report Prepared by:
Title:
Injured (name):
Employment Status:
FT
PT
Relief
Time of Occurrence:
am
Phone Number:
pm
Hours worked:
Day
Week
Nature of Injury:
Body Part:
Source of Injury:
Job Classification:
Activity at Time of Incident:
Name of Doctor:
Doctor’s Address and/or Phone Number:
Property Damage(Identification):
Other Incident/Damage (Identification):
Model/Serial Number:
Damage Results:
Person With Most Control of Incident:
Title:
Phone:
Caught in
Caught between
Struck by
Fall same level
Exposure to
Incident
Caught on
Struck against
Strain/stress
Fall to lower
Contact with
Type:
Describe How Incident Occurred: Activity, Authority, Job Procedure, Post-contact Action.
Function
Head Protection
Eye Protection
Respiratory Protection
Ear Protection
Body Restraint
Foot Protection
Gloves
Fire/Heat Protection
Other
Other
Remarks:
Sketch Attached? Yes No
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT USE
Required
Available
Used
Needed
#Main_Table_of_Contents
69
Golden Health & Safety Program
First Aid
9. FIRST AID SERVICES AND EQUIPMENT
9.1
Purpose .............................................................................................................. 73
9.2
Scope.................................................................................................................. 73
9.3
Definitions ........................................................................................................... 73
9.4
General Requirements ....................................................................................... 73
9.5
First Aid Facilities ............................................................................................... 74
9.6
First Aid Attendants ............................................................................................ 74
9.7
Forms.................................................................................................................. 75
71
Golden Health & Safety Program
First Aid
9.1
Purpose
The purpose of first aid is to provide workers with prompt, easily accessible and
appropriate first aid treatment.
9.2
Scope
No matter how complete a Health and Safety Program can be or how careful we are,
there is always risk of an injury. The first aid services and equipment are required to
provide adequate first aid to the injured Town of Golden employee.
9.3
Definitions
Attendant:
First aid:
First Aid Facility:
First Aid kit:
Injured worker:
Training agency:
9.4
means a first aid attendant who is designated by an employer to
provide first aid to workers at a workplace, and who holds a first aid
certificate valid for that workplace;
means the provision and use of the equipment, supplies, facilities
and the services of an attendant
means a first aid room or dressing room;
means the first aid equipment and supplies specified under the
regulations;
means a worker, who reports with an injury or illness during work;
means a person or organization recognized by the Board to provide
first aid instruction.
General Requirements
Basic
The first aid equipment, supplies, facilities and services will be supplied by the
Town of Golden and will be readily accessible to employees during working
hours. All facilities and equipment will be kept clean, dry and ready for use.
Signs will clearly post to indicate the location of, and how to call for first aid. This
information will be:
 posted conspicuously throughout the workplace, and
 effectively communicated to the employees at the workplace.
All employees will be made aware of the location of first aid for the workplace
and how to contact the attendant for assistance.
First Aid Records
The first aid records must be:
 accurately kept
 administration or supervisory staff to check records for trends
 first aid records to be reviewed by the worker health and safety
representative on a regular basis
 utilized as a method and basis for recording data
#Main_Table_of_Contents
73
Golden Health & Safety Program
First Aid
Access to Records
The access to first aid records is restricted to individuals requiring access for
reasons of medical treatment, workplace inspections, incident investigation,
claims processing and appeals and the gathering of statistics.
The first aid records must be available for inspection by a board officer. Persons
with access to first aid records must keep confidential the information contained
in the records, except as required for the legitimate purpose of their access. On
request, an employee must be given a copy of first aid records for any treatment
or report pertaining to the employee.
Hazard Classification
The type of work that you are performing will identify the hazard classification
under the Act and OH&SR.
9.5
First Aid Facilities
During the orientation it is a requirement that the new or transferred worker is made
aware of the location of the closest first aid facility to his/her work area: The first aid
facility will:
 be located as near as practicable to the work area or areas it is to serve and have
the appropriate equipment and supplies
 meet legislative requirements
Smoking is not permitted in a first aid room, and No Smoking signs must be posted
within the room. The first aid room must only be used for first aid purposes.
9.6
First Aid Attendants
The first aid attendant is in complete charge of all first aid treatment of an injured worker
until:
 a place of medical treatment is reached
 the worker is passed to an ambulance services acceptable to the board, or
 responsibility for treatment is accepted by an attendant with a higher level of
certificate, a physician, a registered nurse with a valid Level 2 or 3 certificate,
 or a person licensed as an Emergency Medical Assistant Level 1 or higher by the
BC Ambulance Service under the Health Emergency Act
Availability of Attendant
The attendant must not undertake activities that will interfere with the ability to
receive a request for first aid.
A level 2 or 3 attendant must only undertake activities that allow the prompt rendering of
first aid in a clean and sanitary condition.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
74
Golden Health & Safety Program
9.7
First Aid
Qualification
The first aid attendant's original certificate must be copied and placed in their
personnel file, prior to performing any first aid functions. The Attendant must
have their certificate at the workplace and must produce the certificate for
inspection at the request of a board officer (a photocopy is not acceptable proof
of certification).
Forms
 First Aid Services and Equipment Inventory
 First Aid Attendant Inventory
 Summoning First Aid
 First Aid Equipment/Supplies Inspection Report
#Main_Table_of_Contents
75
Golden Health & Safety Program
First-Aid
FIRST AID SERVICES AND EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
Compiled by:
Work
Location
Date:
# of
Employees
Supplies,
Equipment
&Facilities
First Aid
Certificate
Required
Year:
Hazard
Classification
First Aid Attendant
Level
Expiry Date
Comments:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
76
Golden Health & Safety Program
First Aid
FIRST AID ATTENDANT INVENTORY
Department:
Name
Compiled by:
Year of:
Department
Level
Expiry Date
Date:
Comments:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
77
Golden Health & Safety Program
First Aid
SUMMONING FIRST AID
All employees must report and have any injury/illness treated by first aid immediately.
MINOR INJURY/ILLNESS
Dial:
Meet the First Aid Attendant where the first aid kit is located. First aid kit is located at:
The First Aid Attendant, with consent of the worker, will make the decision whether the worker should be
transported to medical aid.
The attendant’s decision of treatment or transport must not be overruled. The attendant, however, does not have
the authority to overrule a worker’s decision to seek medical attention.
SERIOUS INJURY/ILLNESS
Dial: 911
Arrange to meet the First Aid Attendant at the scene. Keep patient calm and still. The First Aid Attendant will
make the decision whether an ambulance is required:
If an ambulance is required (injury is critical or severe) stay calm, speak clearly and relay the following
information:
 Location of patient (name of worksite, address entrance to use, etc);
 How to get to the patient;
 Arrange for someone to meet the ambulance and direct them to the patient;
 Contact phone so the dispatch can call back;
 Mechanism of injury (what happened);
 Known injuries to the patient (fractures, consciousness, heart attack)
If transporting the patient will not aggravate the injury, the First Aid Attendant will use (city cab, company vehicle,
etc.)
EMERGENCY TELEPHONE LIST
AMBULANCE:
911
GOLDEN HOSPITAL:
250-344-5271
FIRST AID ATTENDANT:
LOCATION OF FA ATTENDANT:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
78
Golden Health & Safety Program
First Aid
FIRST AID EQUIPMENT/SUPPLIES INSPECTION REPORT
Inspected by:
Location/Dept
(e.g. Main Office)
Year:
Required
Supplies/
Equipment
(e.g. Level 1 First
Aid Kit)
Month:
Account
Code
Missing
Equipment/
Supplies
Equipment
Supplied
Yes
No
Cost
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
Distribution:
Approved by:
Signature
#Main_Table_of_Contents
79
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
10. CONFINED SPACE
10.1 Introduction......................................................................................................... 83
10.2 Definitions ........................................................................................................... 83
10.3 General Requirements for Confined Space Entry ............................................ 83
10.4 Confined Space Hazard Assessment and Safe Work Plan ............................... 84
10.5 Confined Space Entry Permit ............................................................................. 84
10.6 Lock out and Control of Harmful Substances ..................................................... 84
10.7 Pre-entry Procedures ........................................................................................ 84
10.8 Testing ................................................................................................................ 85
10.9 Entry Procedure .................................................................................................. 85
10.10 Ventilation ........................................................................................................... 86
10.11 Standby Attendant .............................................................................................. 86
10.12 Lifelines, Harnesses and Lifting Equipment ....................................................... 87
10.13 Personal Protective Equipment and other Precautions ..................................... 87
10.14 Emergency Procedures ...................................................................................... 87
10.15 Forms ................................................................................................................. 88
10.16 Arena Condensate CSE Procedure .................................................................. 89
10.17. Civic Centre Elevator Sump Space CSE Procedure ......................................... 95
10.18 Digesters & Aerator Cells CSE Procedure ..................................................... 101
10.19 Irrigation Vaults CSE Procedure ...................................................................... 106
81
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
10.20 Open Pits CSE Procedure ................................................................................ 114
10.21 Open Trenches CSE Procedure ....................................................................... 121
10.22 Primary Effluent from 12th St Space CSE Procedure .................................... 127
10.23 Pressure Reducing Vaults (PRV) CSE Procedure ........................................... 133
10.24 RAS WAS Space CSE Procedure .................................................................... 141
10.25 Sequencing Batch Reactor CSE Procedure .................................................... 147
10.26 Sewage Lift Stations CSE Procedure .............................................................. 155
10.27 Sewage Treatment Plan - Effluent Wet Wells CSR Procedure........................ 164
10.28 Sewage Manholes CSE Procedure .................................................................. 172
10.29 Transfer Manhole to Aerations Ponds Space CSE Procedure ...................... 179
10.30 Wading Pool Mechanical Room CSE Procedure............................................ 185
10.31 Water Metering Valve Chambers CSE Procedure ......................................... 191
10.32 Water Reservoirs CSE Procedure ................................................................... 200
82
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
10.1 Introduction
These safety procedures must be followed before and during any work being undertaken by
employees working in confined spaces.
All employees that are required to be entering and work in confined spaces
must have received training in the hazards of working in confined spaces and
the precautions for their safety.
The procedures to be followed shall be based on Workers’ Compensation
Act and Occupational Health & Safety Regulation, (BC Regulation
243/2006) Part 9 Confined Spaces February 2011, and detailed as follows.
10.2 Definitions
“Confined Space”
A confined space means an area that:
a) Is enclosed or partially enclosed.
b) Is not designed or intended for continuous human
occupancy.
c) has limited or restricted means for entry or exit that may
complicate the provision of first aid, evacuation, rescue or
other emergency response service, and
d) is large enough and so configured that a worker could
enter to perform assigned work.
“Enclosed Space”
An enclosed space means any enclosed area, other than a confined space,
in which ordinary job hazards may be intensified.
10.3
General Requirements for Confined Space Entry
Responsibilities
 All personnel who enter confined spaces shall know and follow
these procedures thoroughly.
 All personnel shall identify and evaluate risks as well as complete
an entry permit prior to entering a confined space.
 The Supervisor/foreman shall be responsible for the supervision of
all personnel entering a confined space to ensure all precautions
and procedures are followed
 Personnel shall determine whether a space is defined as a
‘Confined Space’ or ‘Enclosed Space’ using the definitions
outlined in 10.2.
Appendix I lists “confined spaces” normally encountered during
operation and maintenance of the Town of Golden infrastructure.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
83
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
10.4
Confined Space Hazard Assessment and Safe Work Plan
Prior to entering a confined space all personnel as a team shall complete a
Confined Space Hazard Assessment and work plan.
.
Samples of Hazard Assessment forms to be completed are included in
Appendix II of this procedure.
10.5
Confined Space Entry Permit
 A Confined Space Entry Permit is required to be completed for
any confined spaces evaluated as high hazard or requiring lock
out procedures to be implemented.
 An example of the Confined Entry Permit to be completed is
included in Appendix II. Depending on the hazard assessment
either the "short" or "long" form may be used.
 All personnel including the standby attendant are to be involved in
completing the permit.
10.6
Lock out and Control of Harmful Substances
Whenever a system or pieces of equipment present a potential hazard to
life or property they are to be locked out or isolated.
The method of locking out equipment shall be as outlined in the Town of
Golden Lock Out Procedures and current WorkSafeBC regulation and
guidelines. See updated regulation 9.18 (updated February 2011) for
regulatory procedure on page 108.
10.7
Pre-entry Procedures
 All personal protective equipment, such as hard hats, hearing,
gloves, and proper footwear and safety vests, safety harness (if
required) must be worn.
 Traffic control by means of signage, traffic cones, barricades and
by positioning the vehicle shall be utilized where entry confined
spaces as manholes is situated on the traveled portion of the road
right of way.
 Any worker entering a confined space must be attended to and in
regular communication with a person fully knowledgeable in the
operation of gas detection and ventilation equipment and these
procedures; i.e. a standby attendant.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
84
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
10.8
Testing
1. All workers conducting tests to determine safe working conditions
must be trained in confined space
2. Ensure testing unit is in proper working order prior to use. If it is
faulty, return it to your foreman and obtain a replacement.
3. Test all confined spaces to confirm that:
a. oxygen levels are maintained at 19.5% to 23.0%
b. combustible gases are less than 20% of the lower explosive
limit (LEL)
c. hydrogen sulphide is less than 10 ppm
d. carbon monoxide is less than 25 ppm
4. If possible, initial testing of a confined space's atmosphere should be
done before opening the access hatch or manhole cover. This is
done by placing the test unit over the hatch lid to detect leaking
gases. Testing should be done through the hole in the manhole cover
when possible. Caution should be taken if using a pickaxe to open
the cover so as not to create a metal to metal spark.
5. If safe, open the access cover and lower tester slowly into the
confined space to confirm safe conditions before entry.
6. IF SAFE CONDITIONS ARE NOT PRESENT, DO NOT ENTER THE
CONFINED SPACE. ALL CONFINED SPACES MUST BE
VENTILATED PRIOR TO ENTRY
7. The gas detector test unit MUST be worn and operating continuously
while the worker is in the confined space.
8. The test procedures listed herein must be repeated in their entirety
upon return after rest breaks, anytime the confined space has been
vacated for more than 20 minutes, after any unusual occurrence
(such as strange odors) or after any interruption of ventilation.
10.9
Entry Procedure
1. Test the atmosphere of the confined space upon opening and before entry
as stated in section H.
2. In addition to pre-testing, entry person must carry a testing unit during all
work activities in confined space. IF ALARM GOES OFF, VACATE SPACE
IMMEDIATELY. Additional ventilation may be required and the confined
space must be retested prior to re-entry.
3. Keep all tools away from the manhole or chamber entrance to prevent
anything from falling into the hole, as well as providing a clear area to walk
and maneuver about while assisting the person working below.
4. Have your standby assistant remain in a position next to the confined space
entrance as long as you are in the hole.
5. If tools are required use a non sparking type. Flashlights if needed should be
suitable for an explosive exposure.
6. Where lighting is required, use a sealed lighting unit designed for use in a
potentially explosive environment.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
85
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
7. Leave the space IMMEDIATELY if any unusual odour, taste or irritation is
noticed.
8. Do not take cylinders of oxygen, acetylene or other gases into a confined
space. If hoses supplying compressed gas are taken into confined space,
remove them if space is vacated.
10.10 Ventilation
1. Ventilation is required in confined spaces as specified in the specific
procedures for confined space entry as outlined in this manual.
Venting does not, however, preclude pre-entry testing. It is
necessary to provide adequate ventilation while work is in progress.
2. The procedure to mechanical ventilation is as follows:
a. Positive pressure ventilation units shall be used to supply the air
to the area as this is more effective than drawing air or
exhausting from the area.
b. Ventilate by blowing air into confined space to remove any
contaminants. Position the hose so that the air is forced all
around the space to purge any possible gas pockets that may
collect.
c. Ensure that the confined space is purged for a minimum of 5
minutes prior to entry.
d. During operation, ensure discharge end of hose is located within
2 feet of the bottom (floor) of the confined space.
3. The blower must be able to provide 20 air changes per hour, up to a
maximum of 1500 cubic feet per minute.
4. In the event of failure of the ventilation system the worker (s} in the
confined space must leave it IMMEDIATELY.
5. Full entry procedures must be used after a failure of the ventilation
system prior to re-entry.
6. Specific confined space areas with low hazard assessments may
only require ventilation by natural means. Spaces of this type will
still require pre-entry testing and inspection.
10.11 Standby Attendant
1. All confined space entry work must be performed using a standby attendant
outside of the confined space whenever someone is inside.
2. The standby attendant must visually observe or continuously monitor the
well being of the worker(s) inside the space.
3. The standby attendant must have a means of communicating with the
worker inside the space at least every 20 minutes.
4. The standby attendant must have a means of summoning rescue personnel
if necessary.
5. In high hazard atmosphere, engulfment or entrapment, the standby
attendant shall be equipped and capable of immediately affecting rescue
using lifting equipment as required.
6. The standby attendant must prevent entanglement of lifelines and
equipment.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
86
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
10.12 Lifelines, Harnesses and Lifting Equipment
1. Personnel entering a confined space which contains a high hazard
atmosphere a risk of entrapment or engulfment or any other
recognized serious health or safety hazard, must wear a harness to
permit rescue.
2. A lifeline must be attached to the harness and tended to at all time
by a standby attendant outside the entrance to the space.
3. Harness, lifelines and lifting equipment shall be in accordance with
WCB regulations.
10.13 Personal Protective Equipment and other Precautions
1. Personnel entering a confined space must wear personal protective
equipment as outlined in section G.
2. Except for compressed air supplied to a respirator, medical
resuscitation equipment, and handheld aerosol spray container, a
cylinder of compressed gas is not permitted inside a confined
space.
3. Torches and hoses used for welding, brazing or cutting must be
removed from a confined space when not in use and when the
confined space is vacated.
4. Electrical tools and equipment used in a confined space must be
grounded or double-insulated and so marked, and if wet or damp
conditions exist inside the space, must be protected by an
approved ground fault circuit interrupter as required by Part 19
(Electrical
Safety).
5. Electrical tools and equipment used in a confined space where
flammable or explosive gases, vapors or liquids are present must
be CSA approved for hazardous locations classified under CSA
Standard C22.1-94, Canadian electrical Code part 1, as Class
1, Division 2, Groups A, B and C.
6. Only non-sparking tools may be used in a confined space where
flammable or explosive gases, vapours or liquids are present.
10.14 Emergency Procedures
IF IN NEED OF RESCUE the standby attendant must immediately radio
dispatch so that the fire department can be alerted. Dispatch will
communicate name and work location where assistance is required.
Commence preparations to evacuate victim from confined space.
Examples of normally encountered confined spaces
 Lift Stations
 PRV Station/Metering/Utility Vaults Manholes
 Vessels Tanks
 Sewers
 Lagoons
 Septic Tanks
 Drywells
 Drain Pits/Sumps
87
Golden Health & Safety Program





Confined Space
Cooling Water Condensers (Arena) Boilers
Ducting
Culverts
Large Diameter Piping/Conduits
Grave Openings
10.15 Forms
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY FORM
IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY, CALL 911 IMMEDIATELY
PRE-ENTRY PRECAUTIONS:
Equipment Inventory/Pre-entry Check:
 Eliminate any unsafe conditions before
 Gas Monitor – ID# : __________
opening access door
 Phone/Radio (to call 911)
 Lock-out/Tag-out all sources of energy
 2-way communication with entrant
posing a risk
 Gloves
 Have lights or ladders available
 Safety Glasses
 Have appropriate MSDS on site
 Ladder
 Ventilating Fan
 Lights
Atmospheric Tests: Gas Detector Calibration Model: Industrial Scientific M-40
Date:
Time:
Signature:
Gas
Limits
Time
Result
Time
Result
Extended
Time
Result
Extended
Time
Result
Extended
Time
Result
.
Extended
Time
Result
min 23%
Oxygen
max 19.5%
Combustibles 10% of LEL
10 PPM
H2S
25 PPM
CO
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PERMIT AND RECORD
Name:
In:
am  pm Out:
am  pm
Permit Issue Date:
Time Permit Issued:
am  pm
Location Valid For:
Permit Expiry Date:
am  pm
Description of Work to be Done:
Ventilation Required: Off  On
Rescue Plan Reviewed: Yes  No
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
Safety Harness & Lifeline: Yes  N/A
Hard Hat:
Yes  N/A
Safety Glasses:
Rubber Gloves: Yes  N/A
Yes  N/A
FINAL ENTRY CHECK
Rescue plan reviewed:
Pre-entry meeting held:
Yes  N/A
Yes  N/A
Rescue equipment on-site: Yes  N/A
Communications reviewed: Yes  N/A
I have been informed of and trained in my duties and understand my responsibilities.
Attendant:
Signature:
Date:
Time:
.
I understand the nature and extend to the work and will comply with all conditions and
precautions to be followed in completing the work.
Entrant:
FINAL INSPECTION
Work is complete:
Signature:
Yes  N/A
Date:
Clean up complete:
Time:
.
Yes  N/A
88
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
Equipment removed & Yes  N/A
All personnel
Yes  N/A
accounted for:
accounted for:
This confined space is safe for entry and work as outlined above and I authorize the work.
Entry Supervisor:
Signature:
Date:
Time:
.
10.16 Arena Condensate CSE Procedure
1) Arena condensate pit
_______________________________________
Arena condensate pit
[Volume: 96 cubic feet]
Hazards
Moderate risk:
Fall into the space from above while
space is open
Entry/exit risk of fall
Slip/trip on entry and during wet
conditions
Exposure to residual chemicals
Low oxygen levels
Poor visibility
Atmosphere hazard class moderate
Arena condensate pit location view
Low Risk:
Narrow space
Possible mould/bacteria and potential
ammonia exposure
Overhead material being dropped into
space
Possible sharp edges
Electrical exposure from sump
Contact with energized equipment
Noise from work activities in narrow space
Pre-Entry Requirements
Prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. These include:

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: Visual check of the rescue equipment: davit, winch, rope,
harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to ensure that they are the correct devices and
are in good working order. One person must be designated to verify this activity.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
89
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there
are no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled
before work progresses. Check the lifting device anchor to verify the integrity and
function.

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted
monthly and bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor.

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test. The alarm settings
should be noted and recorded.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air at the
site to verify that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space

VENTILATOR: The ventilator should be tested to verify it is operational. The hose
should be checked for cuts and holes and repaired if any are found. Confirm the
connection between the hose and blower is effective. Check the fan blades to see if
they are dirty. Clean them if this is noted. Delegate one person for this activity. When
the ventilator is required, all doors in the vicinity should be opened for passive venting to
the atmosphere.

STAFFING: There will be a minimum two persons assigned during any confined
space entry event. One worker will be assigned to be the standby person and will be
responsible to affect rescue by contacting the fire department. The second worker will
be the entry person. Prior to entry the team will discuss the work activities and roles to
ensure each worker is aware of their responsibilities. All staff will be trained in confined
space entry procedures.

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Signage denoting a confined space entry should be
placed at the periphery of the space.

FALL PROTECTION: The entry person will don the safety harness and life line and
the other worker will confirm proper installation. The lifeline will be inserted through the
lifting device; i.e. davit with attached winch, in preparation for entry. Portable
guardrails are to be placed in front of the outside worker station to prevent the potential
for falling into the opening.

TOOL BUCKET: When required, place all tools or equipment into a tool bucket
attached to a hoisting rope. When the entry operator requires such material it can be
lowered by the outside worker.
ACCESS/EGRESS: For spaces where chemical exposure may affect safe access and
egress, ensure that the lifting device is available for the access and egress of the inside
worker. This is recommended to assist in safe rescue.

90
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated prior to worker entry.

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: One worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation is necessary then the
standby person will have ready access to the ambulance for emergency transport. A first
aid record treatment book must be on site to document any potential injuries. For all
rescue events, the fire department will be contacted without delay. A written agreement
with the fire department regarding rescue services will verify their availability at all times.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter). All
internal equipment MUST be locked out and verified prior to entry. Use the Towns
lockout procedures where applicable.

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle, hardhat,
safety glasses, leather gloves and/or disposable nitrile gloves and cotton coveralls with
high visibility material incorporated into the coveralls. Entry personnel will wear rubber
safety toed boots and may require wet gear depending on the conditions of the interior
space.

COMMUNICATION: Staff must have an effective means of communication either voice,
radio or other effective means. If background noise levels compromise standard methods
of communication then other effective means MUST be agreed on prior to entry and
periodically assessed for effectiveness.

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require washing facilities after
exiting the space if there is any potential for contamination. A portable eye wash with
saline solution is necessary for dealing with any material that enters the eye.

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes place
or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate on site will
complete the documentation for all entry permits.

COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the
prescribed time. The standby worker will be responsible for contacting the fire
department who will affect rescue from the space. If the ambulance is the emergency
transportation vehicle, then the supervisor or designate will call directly as required. The
supervisor or designate is responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency and
non-emergency numbers will be kept in all Town vehicles for quick response. These
numbers will also be installed on the mobile phones. Confined space entry drills will take
place annually.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
91
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation (i.e. double block &
bleed) procedures are followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment. This is the
responsibility of the supervisor or designate.
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment prior to use in the confined space. Readings
should be between 19.5-23.0% but ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0 ppm H2S and 0%
LEL. Record this in the testing record sheet. The form should include the date, time of
the test, initials of tester and the levels found.
 Insert the probe at the opening and measure the air concentrations. Record the levels.
 Insert the probe halfway into the confined space and test the air again. Record the
levels in the test record sheet.
 Insert the probe to the bottom of the space being sure not to immerse the probe end
into any fluid or debris and test the air. Record these values in the test record sheet. If
readings for all three levels are the same then one record is acceptable.
 If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do
not enter. Commence ventilation of the space. Retest the space after 20 minutes of
venting. If the readings are back to acceptable levels then entry is permitted with
continuous ventilation.
 If the space receives other chemicals (i.e. ammonia) which may pose a risk to the
worker over and above the existing measurement assessment, then the specific
chemicals must be tested using direct reading colourimetric tube devices or
instruments.
 Attach the monitor to the entry worker for continuous monitoring of the work
environment. Record the readings on a periodic basis.
 If at any time the alarm sounds or the colourimetric tube readings or instruments
indicate overexposures, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
 If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
3) VENTILATION:
 For moderate hazard atmospheres, continuous ventilation at a minimum rate of 20 air
changes per hour (ach) is required. For the space in the condensate pit this works out
to:
o 32 cfm for the arena condensate pit;
 The ventilation hose must not have more than 2 bends. Each bend affects the flow rate.
The existing ventilator should be able to supply this flow rate with two bends. The
manufacturer should be able to specify what the flow rates are for no bend (straight
duct); one bend; and for two bends.
 The configuration for moderate atmosphere hazard venting, should be with two bends of
the hose or one bend of the hose directed onto a flat plate. See pictorial.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
92
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
Figure 1: Do not use oxygen for ventilation.
Figure 2: Do use positive pressure systems, where necessary, to increase effectiveness
of ventilation.



The hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The intake for the
ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and upwind.
Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may enter the
space through the blower.
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 The lifting equipment will be installed prior to the entry worker accessing the confined
space.
 The entry worker must always wear the fall arrest harness and lifeline in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions whenever a closed pit entry takes place.
 The stand by worker is charged with attending to the life line and ensuring the entrants
harness is properly connected to the lifting device (davit and winch).
 This person will keep the slack off the line during entry and exit from the confined space
and will assist the entry worker during entry and exit.
 This person will also keep the line from entanglement.
 A portable guardrail, where applicable, will be placed in front of the outside workers to
prevent inadvertent entry into the space.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
93
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
5) ENTRY WORKER:
 The entry worker must wear the safety harness and lifeline attached to the lifting device
for any entry into a confined space.







The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry. For wet environments use
safety toed rubber boots and wet gear to enter.
All tools and equipment used for work inside the space cannot be carried by the entry
worker unless a tool pouch is used. Three point contacts with the ladder rungs are
necessary.
For spaces where external contaminants are introduced, the lifting device must be used
to assist in safely exiting the space to assist in rescue.
Inform the standby person to prevent slack on the lifeline.
Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to
minimize this hazard.
Bring adequate lighting into the space or drop a trouble light (connected to a GFCI) into
the space for all work activities when there is insufficient illumination.
If work requires kneeling, bring knee pads or a floor matt to rest the knees on.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must stay within close proximity to the space and contact the entry
person performing their work on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry
person.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person is responsible for the lifting equipment and will contact the fire
department if a rescue is required.
 This person will observe the line to ensure it does not get entangled.
 The standby person will be responsible for recording test results.
 The outside team will constantly monitor the external environment for possible safety
issues. This includes restricting the public from the work area and confirming that the
intake is constantly drawing fresh air into the space.
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
REPLACE FLOATS AND CLEAN SCALE OUT:
 If single valves are used for isolation, it is necessary to obtain engineering approval of
this activity.
 Lockout the sump and verify the system is locked out.
 Ensure the ventilator is used during entry.
 A tool bucket is needed for transferring equipment up and down from the space unless
the entry worker has a tool pouch.
 Use the bucket for removal of scale or floats.
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
 The blower is removed from the space when work is completed.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
94
Golden Health & Safety Program





Confined Space
The standby person will assist the entry person with exiting the space.
The lockout is removed where applicable and the equipment is observed for leaks.
The hatch is replaced to close off the space.
The supervisor or designate will complete the entry permit where applicable and confirm
that the air monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or designate will
notify the call centre that the work is completed.
The supervisor or designate will fill the permit, file it and the team will debrief on the
effectiveness of the confined space entry.
10.17 Civic Centre Elevator Sump Space CSE Procedure
1) Civic centre elevator sump space
____________________________________________________________________________
No picture
Civic Centre elevator sump space
[Volume ~28 cu. ft.: No entry anticipated, only work from above]
HAZARDS
Moderate risk:
O2 deficiency
LEL exposure
Fall into the space from above while space is open
Entry/exit risk of fall
Slip/trip on entry and during indoor wet conditions
Atmosphere hazard class is moderate
Low Risk:
Valve failure resulting in fluid entry
Possible mould/bacteria
Overhead material being dropped into space
Possible sharp edges
Low lighting levels at base of sump
Electrical exposure from external lights
Ergonomic concerns with kneeling and awkward postures
PRE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. It is not anticipated
that entry will occur. All work is expected to take place from above. This information is
in place if such an entry does occur. These include:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
95
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: No rescue equipment is anticipated in the event of an
entry. The height is shallow enough for rescue personnel to remove the worker. If
staff does consider the use of the rescue equipment, conduct a visual check of the
rescue equipment: davit, winch, rope, harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to
ensure that they are the correct devices and are in good working order. One person
must be designated to verify this activity.

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there
are no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled
before work progresses. If a davit is being used, check the anchor point for proper
integrity prior to usage.

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted
monthly and bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor.

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air to verify
that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space

VENTILATOR: The use of a ventilator is not anticipated for entry due to the
shallow space of the sump. If air monitoring results are not within accepted values or
the air is noted as not clean then a ventilator is required. The ventilator should be tested
to verify it is operational. The hose should be checked for cuts and holes and repaired if
any are found. Check the fan blades to see if they are dirty. Clean them if this is noted.
Delegate one person for this activity. When the ventilator is required, it must be placed
in the outside hall from the confined space. Open the entry door when using the
ventilator.

STAFFING: There will be two persons assigned during any confined space entry
event. One worker will be assigned to be the standby person and will be responsible for
contacting the fire department for rescue. The second worker will be the entry person.
Prior to entry the team will discuss the work activities and roles to ensure each worker is
aware of their responsibilities. All staff will be trained in confined space entry
procedures.

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Signage denoting a confined space entry should be
placed at the periphery of the space.

FALL PROTECTION: No fall protection is anticipated for this space if entry is
required. If staff considers the use of fall protection due to air monitoring results or
other identified hazards then the entry person will don the safety harness and life line
and the other worker will confirm proper installation. The lifeline will be inserted through
96
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
the liftingdevice; davit with attached winch, in preparation for entry. Portable guardrails
are to be placed in front of the outside worker station to prevent the potential for falling
into the opening if a hazard exists.

TOOL BUCKET: When required, place all tools or equipment into a tool pouch. When the
entry operator requires such material it can be handed directly by the outside worker. A
bucket for debris or equipment can also be handed to the entry worker from above.

ACCESS/EGRESS: With no fixed ladder rungs, be cautious of access and egress
maintaining three point contacts. If difficulty with such entry is identified then ensure that
the lifting device assists with the access and egress of the inside worker. This may be
necessary since there is no hand hold above the space for safe entry or ladder rungs for
secure entry and exit.

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated (if practicable) prior to worker entry.

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: One worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation is necessary then the
standby person will have ready access to the ambulance for emergency transport if
necessary. A first aid record treatment book must be on site to document any potential
injuries. The fire department will act as the rescue team. A written agreement with the fire
department will be made to confirm that rescue response at all times will be available.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter). Use
the Towns lockout procedures where applicable for lockout of electrical equipment prior to
entry. Verify the effectiveness of the lockout before entering.

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle, hardhat,
safety glasses, leather gloves and/or disposable nitrile gloves and cotton coveralls. Areas
where wet environments are prevalent will require safety toed rubber boots and wet gear.

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require washing facilities after
exiting the space if there is any potential for contamination. A portable eye wash with
saline solution is necessary for dealing with any material that enters the eye.

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes place
or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate on site will
complete the documentation for all entry permits.

COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the
prescribed time. The standby worker will be responsible to contact the fire
department for rescue from the space. If the ambulance is the emergency transportation
vehicle, then the supervisor or designate will contact them as required. The supervisor or
designate is responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency and non-emergency
97
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
numbers will be kept in all Town vehicles for quick response. These numbers will also be
installed on the mobile phones. Confined space entry drills will take place annually.
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation (i.e. double block &
bleed) procedures are followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment.
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment at the site prior to use in the confined
space. Readings should be between 19.5-23.0% but ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0
ppm H2S and 0% LEL. Record this in the testing record sheet. The form should include
the date, time of the test, initials of tester and the levels found.
 Open the hatch and insert the probe at the top and test the air. Record the levels in the
test record sheet.
 Insert the probe halfway into the confined space and test the air again. Record the
levels in the test record sheet.
 Insert the probe to the bottom of the space being sure not to immerse the probe end
into any fluid or debris and test the air. If the readings are the same at all three levels,
record as one value in the test record sheet.
 If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do
not enter. Commence ventilation of the space with the entrance door open. Retest the
space after 20 minutes of venting. If the readings are back to acceptable levels then
entry is permitted with continuous ventilation.
 Attach the monitor to the entry worker for continuous monitoring of the work
environment. Record the readings on a periodic basis.
 If at any time the alarm sounds, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
 If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
3) VENTILATION:
 For all entries, continuous positive ventilation is required from a portable blower system.
 Moderate hazard atmospheres require continuous ventilation at a minimum rate of 20
air changes per hour (ach). If air monitoring readings are outside of normal or a
noticeable odour is identified in the space then continuous ventilation is required. If
readings are acceptable then continuous monitoring must be utilized. For the space in
the civic centre elevator sump, this works out to:
o ~10 cfm for the civic centre elevator sump space
 The ventilation hose must not have more than 2 bends. Each bend affects the flow rate.
The existing ventilator should be able to supply this flow rate with two bends. The
manufacturer should be able to specify what the flow rates are for no bend (straight
duct); one bend; and for two bends.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
98
Golden Health & Safety Program

Confined Space
The configuration for moderate atmosphere hazard venting, should be with two bends of
the hose or one bend of the hose directed onto a flat plate. See pictorial.
Figure 3: Do not use oxygen for ventilation
Figure 4: Do use positive pressure systems where necessary, to increase effectiveness
of ventilation



The hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The intake for the
ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and upwind.
Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may enter the
space through the blower.
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 When applicable, the lifting device must be set up prior to worker entry into the space.
 The entry worker must always wear the fall arrest harness and lifeline whenever an entry
takes place.
 The stand by worker is charged with attending to the life line and ensuring entrant’s
harness is properly connected.
 This person will keep the slack off the line during entry and exit from the confined space
and will assist the entry worker during entry and exit.
5) ENTRY WORKER:
 When applicable, the entry worker must wear the safety harness and lifeline attached to
the lifting device for any entry into a confined space.
 The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry.
99
Golden Health & Safety Program







Confined Space
All tools and equipment used for work inside the space cannot be carried by the entry
worker unless a tool pouch is used or the outside worker hands the items to the entry
worker. Three point contacts would not be feasible otherwise.
For entry, if safe access and egress is not effective with the existing layout, the use of
the lifting device would be required to ensure safe access and egress since there are no
ladder rungs or effective hand holds above the confined space entrance.
Inform the standby person to prevent slack on the lifeline.
Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to
minimize this hazard.
Ensure that all lockouts are in place and verified.
Bring adequate lighting into the space or drop a trouble light (attached to GFCI) into the
space for all work activities and when there is insufficient outside sunlight.
If work requires kneeling, bring knee pads or a floor matt to rest the knees on.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must stay within close proximity to the space and visually observe
the entry person performing their work on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry
person.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person is responsible for the lifting equipment when required and will affect
rescue through phone contact with the fire department.
 This person will observe the line to ensure it does not get entangled.
 The standby person will be responsible for recording test results.
 The outside team will constantly monitor the external environment for possible safety
issues. This includes monitoring mobile equipment activity and confirming that the intake
is constantly drawing fresh air into the space.
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
SERVICE SUMP/REMOVE PLUG:
 Lock out all electrical and elevator unit and verify.
 Drain the fluid from the space with a vacuum pump if applicable.
 Double block and bleed is required for servicing valves under pressure.
 If single valves are used for isolation, it is necessary to obtain engineering approval of
this activity.
 An entry permit is required for work if isolation or lockout is used.
 A waste bucket is needed for removing debris from the plug.
 Remove the plug.
 Repair the sump.
 Exit the space using the lifting devices if required.
 Ensure all isolation devices and locks are removed.
 Open the appropriate valves and deactivate the lockout and test to confirm appropriate
function.
100
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
 All tools and equipment is removed.
 The blower is removed from the space where applicable.
 The standby person will assist the entry person with exiting the space.
 The isolation and lockouts are removed where applicable and the process is observed
for proper function.
 The hatch cover is reinstalled by sliding with a hook tool versus lifting and reinstalling.
 The supervisor or designate will complete the entry permit where applicable and confirm
that the air monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or designate will
notify the call centre that the work is completed.
 The supervisor or designate will file the permit and the team will debrief on the
effectiveness of the confined space entry.
10.18 Digesters & Aerator Cells CSE Procedure
1) Digester 1 & 2
2) Aerator Cell 1 & 2
____________________________________________________________________________
Aerator cells 1 & 2
[volume 219,700 cu.ft.]
HAZARDS
Moderate risk:
Slip/trip on entry/exit and during winter
or wet conditions
Sinking or getting stuck in residual
waste
Low oxygen from reaction with organic
material
H2S from reaction with organic material
Contact with sewage
Contact with bacteria
Atmospheric hazard moderate
Digester 1 & 2
[volume 219,700 cu.ft.]
Low Risk:
Carbon monoxide from vehicular and
gas powered equipment
Noise from vacuum truck
Manual handling of vacuum truck hose
Electrical shock from the aerator
Valve failure leading to sewage ingress
Low light levels during poor sunlight
conditions
Ergonomic concerns with manual lifting
and awkward posture
101
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
PRE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. These include:

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: Visual check of the rescue equipment: davit, winch, rope,
harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to ensure that they are the correct devices and
are in good working order. One person must be designated to verify this activity.

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there
are no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled
before work progresses. For sites with davit anchors, check the integrity of the anchor
for adequacy.

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted
monthly and bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor.

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air on site
to verify that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space

VENTILATOR: It is not expected that a ventilator will be required due to the open
atmosphere and minimal depth restrictions of these spaces as long as continuous
monitoring is utilized. If staff perceives a ventilator is required then the ventilator should
be tested to verify it is operational. The hose should be checked for cuts and holes and
repaired if any are found. Check the fan blades to see if they are dirty. Clean them if this
is noted. If a gas powered power source is used to operate the ventilator, it must be
fueled up and checked for proper operation. The gas powered power source must be
downwind from the ventilator. Delegate one person for this activity. When the ventilator
is required, it must be placed upwind of the confined space.

STAFFING: There will always be three persons on site during any confined space
entry event. One worker will be assigned to be the standby person and one will be the
rescue person who will contact the fire department in the event of a rescue. The third
worker will be the entry person. Prior to entry the team will discuss the work activities
and roles to ensure each worker is aware of their responsibilities. All staff will be trained
in confined space entry procedures.

COMMUNICATION: Staff must have an effective means of communication either voice,
radio or other effective means. If background noise levels compromise standard
methods of communication then other effective means MUST be agreed on prior to
entry and periodically assessed for effectiveness.
102
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Any location where there is potential for contact with
mobile equipment will require hi visibility apparel to notify the equipment operators of
worker activity. Signage denoting a confined space entry should be placed at the
periphery of the space. Up top workers must keep non-essential personnel away from
the work site.

FALL PROTECTION: The entry person will don the safety harness and life line and
the standby and rescue workers will confirm proper installation. The lifeline will be
inserted through the davit with attached winch, in preparation for entry. Barricades are
to be placed in front of the outside worker station where applicable to prevent the
potential for the outside worker from entering the space.

TOOL BUCKET: When required, all tools or equipment will be carried by the entry
person(s). Discussion with the entry team is required to indicate the best method for
equipment handling.

ACCESS/EGRESS: The entry worker(s) will use the lifting device for access/egress of
the space.

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated prior to worker entry as applicable.

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: One worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation is necessary then the
standby worker will contact the ambulance for emergency transport. A first aid record
treatment book must be on site to document any potential injuries. For all rescue
activities, the fire department will be notified and shall respond without undue delay. A
written agreement with the fire department for rescue purposes will ensure their
availability at all times.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter). All
electrical equipment within the space MUST be locked out, deenergized and verified
prior to entry. Use the Towns lockout procedures where applicable.

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle (rubber
safety toed boots for the entry worker), hardhat, safety glasses, leather gloves and/or
disposable nitrile gloves and coveralls with high visibility material incorporated into the
coveralls or with a high visibility vest for visual traffic notification. When contact with
waste material must take place, include an impermeable apron or full two piece
impermeable gears that can be disinfected.

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require disinfection capabilities for
all ppe contaminated from sewage plus washing facilities after exiting the space if there
is any potential for contamination. A portable eye wash with saline solution is necessary
for dealing with any material that enters the eye.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
103
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes place
or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate will complete
the documentation for all entry permits.

COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the
prescribed time. The rescue worker will be responsible for contacting the fire
department if rescue from the space is required. If the ambulance is the emergency
transportation vehicle, then the supervisor or designate will call directly as required. The
supervisor or designate is responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency and
non-emergency numbers will be kept in all Town vehicles for quick response. These
numbers will also be installed on the mobile phones. Confined space entry drills will take
place annually
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation (i.e. double block &
bleed) procedures are followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment.
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment prior to use in the confined space. Readings
should be between 19.5-23% but ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0 ppm H2S and 0% LEL.
Record this in the testing record sheet. The form should include the date, time of the
test, initials of tester and the levels found.
 Insert the probe at the periphery of the confined space and test the air. Record the
levels in the test record sheet.
 Enter part way into the space and retest.
 If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do not
enter further. Commence ventilation of the space. Retest the space after 20 minutes of
venting. If the readings are back to acceptable levels then entry is permitted with
continuous ventilation.
 Attach the monitor to the entry worker for continuous monitoring of the work
environment. Record the readings on a periodic basis.
 If at any time the alarm sounds, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
 If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
3) VENTILATION:
 Moderate hazard atmospheres require continuous ventilation. All these spaces are open
to atmosphere which will utilize natural ventilation processes. If further ventilation is
required in these spaces, the large area would prompt the full flow rate from the
ventilator unit.
 Where applicable, these sites should be vented for a minimum 20 minutes prior to entry.
 If a portable blower is used, the ventilation hose should be a straight run. Each bend
affects the flow rate. The existing ventilator should be able to supply these flow rates
where applicable.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
104
Golden Health & Safety Program





Confined Space
The configuration for moderate atmosphere hazard venting, should be with no bends of
the hose. Always use positive pressure venting.
Where required, the hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The
intake for the ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and
upwind. Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may
enter the space through the blower.
The ventilation system should be turned on and allowed to purge the space for a
minimum 20 minutes before a second air monitoring test is performed and before the
entry worker accesses the space.
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 The lifting system will be set up prior to worker entry.
 The entry worker(s) must always wear the fall arrest harness and lifeline whenever an
entry takes place.
 The stand by worker is charged with attending to the life line and ensuring the entrants
harness is properly connected to the davit and winch.
 This person will keep the slack off the line during entry and exit from the confined space
and will assist the entry worker during entry and exit.
 The standby worker will ensure that the lifeline is not entangled on any equipment while
the entry worker is in the space.
5) ENTRY WORKER:
 The entry worker must wear the safety harness and lifeline attached to the lifting device
for any entry into a confined space.
 The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry.
 The entry worker will bring the air monitor into the space for continuous readings
 All tools and equipment used for work inside the space must be carried by the entry
worker.
 Inform the standby person to minimize slack on the lifeline.
 Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to minimize
this hazard.
 Turn on portable lighting or bring adequate lighting (hooked to GFCI unit) for all work
activities when there is insufficient outside sunlight.
 If work requires manual lifting, lift with the knees and keep the back straight.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must stay within close proximity to the space and visually observe
the entry person performing their work on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry
person. If verbal communication is not effective, then other effective means must be
implemented and tested for effectiveness prior to use.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person is responsible for the lifting equipment and the rescue person will
summon rescue personnel in the event of an emergency.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
105
Golden Health & Safety Program



Confined Space
The standby person will observe the line to ensure it does not get entangled.
The rescue person will be responsible for recording test results.
The outside team will constantly monitor the external environment for possible safety
issues. This includes assessing traffic for proper location; restricting the area to essential
personnel and confirming that the blower intake is constantly drawing fresh air into the
space as required.
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
DEENERGIZING AND/OR REMOVING AERATOR:
 Implement lockout procedures for those activities where deenergization is required prior
to servicing and replacing.
 If isolation is necessary and single valving is used, engineering approval of this activity
is needed.
 An entry permit is required for work where lockout or isolation is required.
 All tools must be carried by the entry personnel. For removal of equipment, use
approved lifting devices.
 If water is required for cleaning of parts, use water buckets or hoses.
VACUUM TRUCK CLEANING AND LINER REPAIR:
 The entry worker must wear ppe appropriate for the material they are to contact.
 Ensure that all valving and electrical sources are locked out prior to entry.
 Ensure that the entry worker only maneuvers the hose and does not lift and manually
handle the hose. Use the vacuum truck and or outside workers to maintain the proper
amount of hose while the entry worker assists with the vacuuming
 Do not allow the hose end to contact the entry worker while the hose is being moved
around
 Carry all essential materials for repair.
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
 Remove all tools and equipment using the tool bucket.
 Remove any locks and reactivate the systems.
 The standby and rescue persons will assist the entry person with exiting the space.
 The blower is removed from the space where applicable.
 The entry person will decontaminate their ppe and wash any contamination from their
person and use a sanitizer after this is completed.
 The supervisor will complete the entry permit where applicable and confirm that the air
monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or designate will notify the call
centre that the work is completed.
 The supervisor will file the permit and the team will debrief on the effectiveness of the
confined space entry.
10.19 Irrigation Vaults CSE Procedure
1) KKMP irrigation vault
2) Spirit square fountain and irrigation vault
#Main_Table_of_Contents
106
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
3) Post office fountain vault
_______________________________________
KKMP irrigation vault
[Volume: 72 cubic feet]
Spirit square fountain and irrigation vault
[Volume: 336 cubic feet]
Post office fountain vault
[Volume: 128 cubic feet]
HAZARDS
Moderate risk:
Fall into the space from above while space is
open
Lifting the metal hatches at the post office
location (low back)
Entry/exit risk of fall
Slip/trip on entry and during wet conditions
Low Risk:
O2 deficiency
Flammable buildup from propane gas
Carbon monoxide from vehicular and gas
powered equipment
Possible mould/bacteria
Overhead material being dropped into space
Possible sharp edges
Pinch and crush of fingers and hands from
hatch covers
Be aware of weather conditions and potential
water accumulation
Address vehicular traffic issues and
pedestrian and domestic animal interaction
Low light levels
Ergonomic concerns with kneeling and
awkward posture
Atmospheric hazard class low
107
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
PRE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. These include:

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: Visual check of the rescue equipment: davit, winch, rope,
harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to ensure that they are the correct devices and
are in good working order. One person must be designated to verify this activity.

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there are
no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled before
work progresses. Check the davit to verify the integrity and function.

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted
monthly and bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor.

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test. The alarm settings
should be noted and recorded.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air at the
site to verify that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space

VENTILATOR: The ventilator would not be required for the KKMP and Post Office
locations (open to atmosphere).The ventilator should be tested to verify it is
operational. The hose should be checked for cuts and holes and repaired if any are
found. Confirm the connection between the hose and blower is effective. Check the fan
blades to see if they are dirty. Clean them if this is noted. If a gas powered power source
is used to operate the ventilator, it must be fueled up and checked for proper operation. It
must be located downwind from the ventilator and the space opening during use. If this is
not practicable, then use extended exhaust piping but ensure the exhaust is located
downwind from the ventilator and space opening. Delegate one person for this activity.
When the ventilator is required, it must be placed upwind of the confined space.

STAFFING: There will be a minimum two persons available during any confined space
entry event. One worker will be assigned to be the standby person and will be
responsible to affect rescue by contacting the fire department. The second worker will
be the entry person. Prior to entry the team will discuss the work activities and roles to
ensure each worker is aware of their responsibilities. All staff will be trained in confined
space entry procedures. For the KKMP and Post office sites, one worker can be used
but utilization of the person check system is required.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
108
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Any location where there is potential for contact with
local traffic will require barricades and signage warning of worker activity. Barricades
and work vehicles must be positioned in accordance with Ministry of Transportation
requirements if within their jurisdiction otherwise use the Towns traffic control
procedures. Signage denoting a confined space entry should be placed at the periphery
of the space.

FALL PROTECTION: To assist in access/egress the entry person should don the safety
harness and life line. The other worker will confirm proper installation. The lifeline will
be inserted through the lifting device; davit with attached winch, in preparation for entry.
Portable guardrails are to be placed in front of the outside worker station to prevent the
potential for falling into the opening.

TOOL BUCKET: When required, place all tools or equipment into a tool bucket attached
to a hoisting rope. When the entry operator requires such material it can be lowered by
the outside worker.

ACCESS/EGRESS: For spaces equipped with fixed ladder rungs, ensure that the lifting
device assists with the access and egress of the inside worker. This is necessary since
there is no hand hold above the space for safe entry.

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated prior to worker entry.

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: One worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation is necessary then the
standby worker will have ready access to the ambulance for emergency transport. A first
aid record treatment book must be on site to document any potential injuries. For all
rescue events, the fire department will be contacted without delay. A written agreement
with the fire department regarding rescue services will ensure their availability at all times.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter).

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle, hardhat,
safety glasses, leather gloves and/or disposable nitrile gloves and cotton coveralls with
high visibility material incorporated into the coveralls or with a high visibility vest.

COMMUNICATION: Staff must have an effective means of communication either voice,
radio or other effective means. If background noise levels compromise standard methods
of communication then other effective means MUST be agreed on prior to entry and
periodically assessed for effectiveness.

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require washing facilities after
exiting the space if there is any potential for contamination. A portable eye wash with
saline solution is necessary for dealing with any material that enters the eye.
109
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes
place or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate on
site will complete the documentation for all entry permits.

COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the prescribed
time. The standby worker will be responsible for contacting the fire department who
will affect rescue from the space. If the ambulance is the emergency transportation vehicle,
then the supervisor or designate will call directly as required. The supervisor or designate is
responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency and non-emergency numbers will be
kept in all Town vehicles for quick response. These numbers will also be installed on the
mobile phones. Confined space entry drills will take place annually.
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation (i.e. double block &
bleed) procedures are followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment. This is the
responsibility of the supervisor or designate.
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment prior to use in the confined space.
Readings should be between 19.5-23.0% but ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0 ppm H2S
and 0% LEL. Record this in the testing record sheet. The form should include the date,
time of the test, initials of tester and the levels found.
 Open the access hatch to the confined space and insert the probe at the opening and
measure the air concentrations. Record the levels.
 Insert the probe halfway into the confined space and test the air again. Record the
levels in the test record sheet.
 Insert the probe to the bottom of the space being sure not to immerse the probe end
into any fluid or debris and test the air. Record these values in the test record sheet. If
readings for all three levels are the same then one record is acceptable.
 If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do
not enter. Commence ventilation of the space. Retest the space after 20 minutes of
venting. If the readings are back to acceptable levels then entry is permitted with
continuous ventilation.
 Attach the monitor to the entry worker for continuous monitoring of the work
environment. Record the readings on a periodic basis.
 If at any time the alarm sounds, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
 If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
 Testing of the KKMP and post office vaults are not necessary due to the open
environment once the hatches are opened
3) VENTILATION:
 If the space is a low atmosphere hazard, the worker is in the space for less than 15
minutes and the work inside the space does not generate contaminants other than
exhaled air then positive ventilation is not required.
110
Golden Health & Safety Program




Confined Space
For all other entries, continuous positive ventilation is required. A minimum 50 cfm per
person of fresh air into the space is acceptable for low hazard atmospheres. For the
KKMP and post office vaults, ventilation is not required since the space is open to
atmosphere once the hatches are accessed.
For conditions that generate moderate hazard atmospheres, continuous ventilation at a
minimum rate of 20 air changes per hour (ach) is desired. For the spaces in the irrigation
vaults this works out to:
o Not applicable for KKMP irrigation vault;
o 112 cfm for Spirit square fountain and irrigation vault; and
o Not applicable for the post office fountain vault
The ventilation hose must not have more than 2 bends. Each bend affects the flow rate.
The existing ventilator should be able to supply this flow rate with two bends. The
manufacturer should be able to specify what the flow rates are for no bend (straight duct);
one bend; and for two bends.
The configuration for low and moderate atmosphere hazard venting, should be with two
bends of the hose or one bend of the hose directed onto a flat plate. See pictorial.
Figure 5: Do not use oxygen for ventilation.
Figure 6: Do use positive pressure systems, where necessary, to increase effectiveness
of ventilation.



The hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The intake for the
ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and upwind.
Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may enter the
space through the blower.
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
111
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 For safe access/egress, the lifting equipment should be installed prior to the entry worker
accessing the confined space.
 The entry worker must always wear the fall arrest harness and lifeline in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions and whenever an extended vault entry takes place.
 The stand by worker is charged with attending to the life line and ensuring the entrants
harness is properly connected to the lifting device (davit and winch).
 This person will keep the slack off the line during entry and exit from the confined space
and will assist the entry worker during entry and exit.
 This person will also keep the line from entanglement.
 A portable guardrail will be placed in front of the outside workers to prevent inadvertent
entry into the space.
5) ENTRY WORKER:
 The entry worker must wear the safety harness and lifeline attached to the lifting device
for any entry into a confined space.
 The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry. For wet environments use
safety toed rubber boots.
 All tools and equipment used for work inside the space cannot be carried by the entry
worker unless a tool pouch is used. Three point contacts with the ladder rungs are
necessary.
 Inspect the fixed rungs for looseness and if this is found, then repairs are required.
 For spaces with fixed ladder rungs, the lifting device must be used to assist in safely
entering and exiting the space because there are no outside hand grips above the hatch
for safe access/egress.
 Inform the standby person to prevent slack on the lifeline.
 Use proper handling techniques for removing hatch covers: Lift with the legs, and pull
cover back without twisting the torso, get two persons to move the lid where practicable
especially at the Post Office.
 Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to
minimize this hazard.
 Bring adequate lighting into the space or drop a trouble light (connected to a GFCI) into
the space for all work activities when there is insufficient outside sunlight.
 If work requires kneeling, bring knee pads or a floor matt to rest the knees on.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must be assigned to the space and check on the well-being of the
worker on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry
person.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person is responsible for the lifting equipment and will contact the fire
department if a rescue is required.
 This person will observe the line to ensure it does not get entangled.
 The standby person will be responsible for recording test results.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
112
Golden Health & Safety Program

Confined Space
The outside team will constantly monitor the external environment for possible safety
issues. This includes assessing traffic barricades for effectiveness; restricting the public
and neighborhood animals from the work area and confirming that the intake is
constantly drawing fresh air into the space.
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
INSPECTIONS/START UP AND SHUT DOWN:
 For work activities less than 15 minutes duration where no air contaminants are
generated, no ventilation is required.
FIXING LEAKS/SERVICING VALVES:
 If single valves are used for isolation, it is necessary to obtain engineering approval to
ensure that the valve is the appropriate type for this activity.
 An entry permit is required for work using double block and bleed isolation and lockout.
 If the work is less than 15 minutes duration where no contaminants are generated, then
no ventilation is required. If the work is greater than 15 minutes then continuous
ventilation is needed. A minimum of 50 cfm per worker is required.
 A tool bucket is needed for transferring equipment up and down from the space unless
the entry worker has a tool pouch.
ELECTRICAL WORK:
 Servicing of all electrical equipment MUST be locked out and verified prior to any work
activity on such equipment.
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
 The blower is removed from the space when work is completed.
 The standby person will assist the entry person with exiting the space.
 The double block and bleed and or lockout are removed where applicable and the
equipment is observed for leaks.
 The lid or cover is reattached to close off the space. Keep the back straight and bend
with the knees.
 The supervisor or designate will complete the entry permit where applicable and confirm
that the air monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or designate will
notify the call centre that the work is completed.
 The supervisor or designate will file the permit and the team will debrief on the
effectiveness of the confined space entry.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
113
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
10.20 Open Pits CSE Procedure
1) Zamboni arena pit
2) Pool filter pit
_______________________________________
Zamboni arena pit
Pool filter pit
[Volume: 240 cubic feet; access not anticipated]
[Volume: 960 cubic feet]
HAZARDS
Moderate risk:
Fall into the space from above while
space is open
Entry/exit risk of fall
Slip/trip on entry and during wet
conditions
Exposure to diatomaceous earth and
paint vapours in the pool filter pit
O2 deficiency
Possible mould/bacteria
Potential ammonia and chlorine
exposures
Overhead material being dropped into
space
Possible sharp edges
Low light levels
Ergonomic concerns with kneeling and
awkward posture
Atmospheric hazard class low
Low Risk:
PRE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. These include:

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: Visual check of the rescue equipment: davit, winch, rope,
harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to ensure that they are the correct devices and
are in good working order. One person must be designated to verify this activity.

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there are
no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled before
work progresses. Check the davit to verify the integrity and function.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
114
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted
monthly and bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor.

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test. The alarm settings
should be noted and recorded.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air at the
site to verify that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space

VENTILATOR: The ventilator should be tested to verify it is operational. The hose
should be checked for cuts and holes and repaired if any are found. Confirm the
connection between the hose and blower is effective. Check the fan blades to see if they
are dirty. Clean them if this is noted. Delegate one person for this activity. When the
ventilator is required, all doors in the vicinity should be opened for passive venting to the
atmosphere.

STAFFING: There will be a minimum two persons assigned during any confined space
entry event. One worker will be assigned to be the standby person and will be
responsible to affect rescue by contacting the fire department. The second worker will
be the entry person. Prior to entry the team will discuss the work activities and roles to
ensure each worker is aware of their responsibilities. All staff will be trained in confined
space entry procedures.

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Signage denoting a confined space entry should be
placed at the periphery of the space.
FALL PROTECTION: The entry person will don the safety harness and life line and
the other worker will confirm proper installation. The lifeline will be inserted through the
lifting device; davit with attached winch, in preparation for entry. Portable guardrails are
to be placed in front of the outside worker station to prevent the potential for falling into
the opening.


TOOL BUCKET: When required, place all tools or equipment into a tool bucket attached
to a hoisting rope. When the entry operator requires such material it can be lowered by
the outside workers. If the entry worker brings tools into the space it must be on a tool
pouch to ensure three point contact.

ACCESS/EGRESS: For spaces where chemical exposure may affect safe access and
egress, ensure that the lifting device is available for the access and egress of the inside
worker. This is recommended to assist in safe rescue. Access into the Zamboni pit and
pool pit will require a portable ladder which must extend 1 metre above the opening, be
secured at the top and positioned on a stable floor surface.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
115
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated prior to worker entry.

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: One worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation is necessary then the
standby person will have ready access to the ambulance for emergency transport. A first
aid record treatment book must be on site to document any potential injuries. For all
rescue events, the fire department will be contacted without delay. A written agreement
with the fire department regarding rescue will ensure their availability at all times.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter). Use
the Towns lockout procedures where applicable.

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle, hardhat,
safety glasses, leather gloves and/or disposable nitrile gloves and cotton coveralls with
high visibility material incorporated into the coveralls.

COMMUNICATION: Staff must have an effective means of communication either voice,
radio or other effective means. If background noise levels compromise standard methods
of communication then other effective means MUST be agreed on prior to entry and
periodically assessed for effectiveness.

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require washing facilities after
exiting the space if there is any potential for contamination. A portable eye wash with
saline solution is necessary for dealing with any material that enters the eye.

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes place
or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate on site will
complete the documentation for all entry permits.

COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the
prescribed time. The standby worker will be responsible for contacting the fire
department who will affect rescue from the space. If the ambulance is the emergency
transportation vehicle, then the supervisor or designate will call directly as required. The
supervisor or designate is responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency and
non-emergency numbers will be kept in all Town vehicles for quick response. These
numbers will also be installed on the mobile phones. Confined space entry drills will take
place annually.
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation (i.e. double block &
bleed) procedures are followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment. This is the
responsibility of the supervisor or designate.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
116
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment prior to use in the confined space. Readings
should be between 19.5-23.0% but ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0 ppm H2S and 0%
LEL. Record this in the testing record sheet. The form should include the date, time of
the test, initials of tester and the levels found.
 Insert the probe at the opening and measure the air concentrations. Record the levels.
 Insert the probe halfway into the confined space and test the air again. Record the levels
in the test record sheet.
 Insert the probe to the bottom of the space being sure not to immerse the probe end into
any fluid or debris and test the air. Record these values in the test record sheet. If
readings for all three levels are the same then one record is acceptable.
 Measurement of the vapour concentration from the paint may be required if it is not a
water based product. Levels MUST be below the occupational exposure limit for the
solvent used.
 If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do not
enter. Commence ventilation of the space. Retest the space after 20 minutes of venting.
If the readings are back to acceptable levels then entry is permitted with continuous
ventilation.
 Attach the monitor to the entry worker for continuous monitoring of the work
environment. Record the readings on a periodic basis.
 If at any time the alarm sounds, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
 If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
3) VENTILATION:
 If the space is a low atmosphere hazard, the worker is in the space for less than 15
minutes and the work inside the space does not generate contaminants other than
exhaled air then positive ventilation is not required.
 For all other entries, continuous positive ventilation is required. A minimum 50 cfm per
person of fresh air into the space is acceptable for low hazard atmospheres.
 For moderate hazard atmospheres (where contaminants are introduced), continuous
ventilation at a minimum rate of 20 air changes per hour (ach) is desired. For the spaces
in the open pits this works out to:
o 80 cfm for the Zamboni arena pit;
o 320 cfm for the Pool filter pit.
 The ventilation hose must not have more than 2 bends. Each bend affects the flow rate.
The existing ventilator should be able to supply this flow rate with two bends. The
manufacturer should be able to specify what the flow rates are for no bend (straight
duct); one bend; and for two bends.
 Exterior doors must be open during any venting of the space to allow passive movement
to atmosphere.
 The configuration for low and moderate atmosphere hazard venting, should be with two
bends of the hose or one bend of the hose directed onto a flat plate. See pictorial.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
117
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
Figure 7: Do not use oxygen for ventilation.
Figure 8: Do use positive pressure systems, where necessary, to increase effectiveness
of ventilation.



The hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The intake for the
ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and upwind.
Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may enter the
space through the blower.
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 The lifting equipment will be installed prior to the entry worker accessing the confined
space.
 The entry worker must always wear the fall arrest harness and lifeline in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions and whenever an open pit entry takes place.
 The stand by worker is charged with attending to the life line and ensuring the entrants
harness is properly connected to the lifting device (davit and winch).
 This person will keep the slack off the line during entry and exit from the confined space
and will assist the entry worker during entry and exit.
 This person will also keep the line from entanglement.
 A portable guardrail, where applicable, will be placed in front of the outside workers to
prevent inadvertent entry into the space.
5) ENTRY WORKER:
 The entry worker must wear the safety harness and lifeline attached to the lifting device
for any entry into a confined space.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
118
Golden Health & Safety Program








Confined Space
The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry. For wet environments use
safety toed rubber boots and wet gear to enter.
All tools and equipment used for work inside the space cannot be carried by the entry
worker unless a tool pouch is used. Three point contacts with the ladder rungs are
necessary.
For spaces where external contaminants are introduced, the lifting device must be used
to assist in safely exiting the space to assist in rescue.
Inform the standby person to prevent slack on the lifeline.
Use proper handling techniques for removing grate covers: Lift with the legs, and pull
cover back without twisting the torso, get two persons to move the grates where
practicable.
Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to minimize
this hazard.
Bring adequate lighting into the space or drop a trouble light (connected to a GFCI) into
the space for all work activities when there is insufficient illumination.
If work requires kneeling, bring knee pads or a floor matt to rest the knees on.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must stay within close proximity to the space and contact the entry
person performing their work on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry
person.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person is responsible for the lifting equipment and will contact the fire
department if a rescue is required.
 This person will observe the line to ensure it does not get entangled.
 The standby person will be responsible for recording test results.
 The outside team will constantly monitor the external environment for possible safety
issues. This includes restricting the public and neighborhood animals from the work area
and confirming that the intake is constantly drawing fresh air into the space.
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
INSPECTIONS:
 For work activities less than 15 minutes duration where no air contaminants are
generated, no ventilation is required.
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS:
 If single valves are used for isolation, it is necessary to obtain engineering approval of this
activity.
 An entry permit is required for work using double block and bleed isolation.
 If the work is less than 15 minutes duration where no contaminants are generated, then
no ventilation is required. If the work is greater than 15 minutes then continuous
ventilation is needed. A minimum of 50 cfm per worker is required unless contaminants
are introduced whereupon moderate risk measures apply.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
119
Golden Health & Safety Program


Confined Space
A tool bucket is needed for transferring equipment up and down from the space unless
the entry worker has a tool pouch.
When the extension ladder is introduced into the space, ensure that it is placed on a
secure base, be positioned so that the horizontal distance from the base to vertical plane
of support is approximately ¼ of the ladder length and the top extends a minimum 3 feet
above the upper landing and is secured to ensure stability during use.
ANNUAL PAINTING OF POOL FILTER PIT:
 Shut off and lockout all power sources used for supplying water to the pit. Verify they are
locked out prior to entry.
 An entry permit is required for work requiring lockout of equipment.
 Install extension ladder on a firm surface, secure it at the top and leave 1 metre above the
pit for safe access/egress.
 Remove filters from the pit using approved lifting devices.
 Clean wall surfaces.
 If the work is greater than 15 minutes then continuous positive ventilation is needed. A
minimum of 50 cfm per worker is required unless contaminants are introduced whereupon
moderate risk measures apply.
 A tool bucket is needed for transferring equipment up and down from the space unless
the entry worker has a tool pouch.
 Where feasible, use low solvent paints such as acrylic or latex. If the paint type required
for the pit contains solvents, then auxiliary explosion proof exhaust ventilation is needed
and it must be vented to atmosphere.
 Roll on or brush the paint onto the surfaces versus spraying the paint to minimize vapour
release.
 Conduct air monitoring during this work activity. For specific chemical exposures,
monitoring of those chemicals will verify if the worker is being overexposed.
 Workers should wear organic vapour dual cartridge half mask respirators unless the air
monitoring indicates that the air concentrations are below the permissible exposure limits.
 Remove all materials when painting is completed. Remove the ladder from the pit and
reenergize the system.
 Continue exhausting until no further vapour emissions are noticed.
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
 The blower is removed from the space when work is completed.
 The standby person will assist the entry person with exiting the space.
 The double block and bleed and or lockout are removed where applicable and the
equipment is observed for leaks.
 The grate and or safety railing is reattached to close off the space.
 The supervisor or designate will complete the entry permit where applicable and confirm
that the air monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or designate will
notify the receptionist that the work is completed.
120
Golden Health & Safety Program

Confined Space
The supervisor or designate will file the permit and the team will debrief on the
effectiveness of the confined space entry.
10.21 Open Trenches CSE Procedure
1) Pool deck trench
2) UV chamber trench
_______________________________________
Pool deck trench
[Volume: perimeter varies @ 1.65’ to
4.5’deep x 2.5’; access not anticipated]
HAZARDS
Moderate risk:
Fall into the space from above while space
is open
Entry/exit risk of fall
Slip/trip on entry and during wet conditions
O2 deficiency
UV exposure to eyes and skin
Atmospheric hazard class moderate for
the UV chamber
UV chamber trench
[Volume: 960 cubic feet; access not
anticipated]
Low Risk:
O2 deficiency
H2S exposure
LEL potential
Chlorine gas
Possible bacteria/virus
Overhead material being dropped into
space
Possible sharp edges
Low light levels
Glare from sun
Ergonomic concerns with kneeling and
awkward posture
Atmospheric hazard class low for the
pool trench
#Main_Table_of_Contents
121
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
PRE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
If entry is required, prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. These include:

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: Use of rescue equipment is not anticipated. If conditions
warrant use of the rescue equipment then visually check the rescue equipment: lifting
device, winch, rope, harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to ensure that they are the
correct devices and are in good working order. One person must be designated to verify
this activity.

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there are
no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled before
work progresses. Check the lifting device to verify the integrity and function.

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted monthly and
bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor.

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test. The alarm settings
should be noted and recorded.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air at the site
to verify that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space

VENTILATOR: The ventilator is not anticipated to be used. If conditions warrant the
use, then the ventilator should be tested to verify it is operational. The hose should be
checked for cuts and holes and repaired if any are found. Confirm the connection
between the hose and blower is effective. Check the fan blades to see if they are dirty.
Clean them if this is noted. Delegate one person for this activity. The UV chamber has its
own dedicated ventilation which should be checked periodically to ensure proper flow
rates. However outside air flow into the UV space may not supply adequate mixing
whereupon the use of the portable blower would enhance the outside air supply.

STAFFING: There will be a minimum two persons assigned during any confined space
entry event. One worker will be assigned to be the standby person and will be
responsible to affect rescue by contacting the fire department. The second worker will be
the entry person. Prior to entry the team will discuss the work activities and roles to
ensure each worker is aware of their responsibilities. All staff will be trained in confined
space entry procedures.

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Signage denoting a confined space entry should be
placed at the periphery of the space.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
122
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

FALL PROTECTION: Fall protection should not be required for entry into the spaces.
The use of a ladder should be sufficient for entry and egress unless chemical exposure
may affect safe exit and egress. In this case, a safety harness and lifeline would be
required.

TOOL BUCKET: When required, place all tools or equipment into a tool bucket attached
to a hoisting rope. When the entry operator requires such material it can be lowered by
the outside worker. If the space is shallow enough then the standby worker can hand the
appropriate tools and equipment.

ACCESS/EGRESS: For spaces where chemical exposure may affect safe access and
egress, ensure that the lifting device is available for the access and egress of the inside
worker. This is recommended to assist in safe rescue. If chemical exposure is not a
concern then a ladder would be appropriate for safe exit and egress.

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated prior to worker entry.

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: One worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation is necessary then the
standby worker will have ready access to the ambulance for emergency transport. A first
aid record treatment book must be on site to document any potential injuries. For all
rescue events, the fire department will be contacted without delay. A written agreement
with the fire department for rescue purposes will ensure their availability at all times.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter). All
internal electrical sources will be locked out and verified prior to entry.

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle, hardhat,
safety glasses with appropriate UV protection where applicable, leather gloves and/or
disposable nitrile gloves and cotton coveralls with high visibility material incorporated into
the coveralls. For wet work the inside worker will wear safety toed rubber boots and wet
gear as required.

COMMUNICATION: Staff must have an effective means of communication either voice,
radio or other effective means. If background noise levels compromise standard methods
of communication then other effective means MUST be agreed on prior to entry and
periodically assessed for effectiveness.

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require washing facilities after
exiting the space if there is any potential for contamination. A portable eye wash with
saline solution is necessary for dealing with any material that enters the eye

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes place
or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate on site will
complete the documentation for all entry permits.
123
Golden Health & Safety Program

Confined Space
COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the
prescribed time. The standby worker will be responsible for contacting the fire
department who will affect rescue from the space. If the ambulance is the emergency
transportation vehicle, then the supervisor or designate will call directly as required. The
supervisor or designate is responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency and
non-emergency numbers will be kept in all Town vehicles for quick response. These
numbers will also be installed on the mobile phones. Confined space entry drills will take
place annually.
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation (i.e. double block &
bleed) procedures are followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment. This is the
responsibility of the supervisor or designate.
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment prior to use in the confined space. Readings
should be between 19.5-23.0% but ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0 ppm H2S and 0%
LEL. Record this in the testing record sheet. The form should include the date, time of
the test, initials of tester and the levels found.
 Insert the probe halfway into the confined space and test the air. Record the levels in the
test record sheet. Record these values in the test record sheet.
 If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do not
enter, commence ventilation of the space. Retest the space after 20 minutes of venting.
If the readings are back to acceptable levels then entry is permitted with continuous
ventilation.
 Attach the monitor to the entry worker for continuous monitoring of the work
environment. Record the readings on a periodic basis.
 If at any time the alarm sounds, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
 If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
3) VENTILATION:
 If the space is a low atmosphere hazard, the worker is in the space for less than 15
minutes and the work inside the space does not generate contaminants other than
exhaled air then positive ventilation is not required.
 For all other entries, continuous positive ventilation is required. A minimum 50 cfm per
person of fresh air into the space is acceptable for low hazard atmospheres.
 For moderate hazard atmospheres (or where contaminants are introduced), continuous
ventilation at a minimum rate of 20 air changes per hour (ach) is desired. For the spaces
in the trenches this works out to:
o Not anticipated for the pool trench (open to atmosphere);
o 108 cfm for the UV chamber trench.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
124
Golden Health & Safety Program


Confined Space
If chlorine is detected in the trench, then ventilation must be considered. The ventilation
hose must not have more than 2 bends. Each bend affects the flow rate. The existing
ventilator should be able to supply this flow rate with two bends. The manufacturer
should be able to specify what the flow rates are for no bend (straight duct); one bend;
and for two bends.
The configuration for low and moderate atmosphere hazard venting, should be with two
bends of the hose or one bend of the hose directed onto a flat plate. See pictorial.
Figure 9: Do not use oxygen for ventilation.
Figure 10: Do use positive pressure systems, where necessary, to increase
effectiveness of ventilation.



The hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The intake for the
ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and upwind.
Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may enter the
space through the blower.
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 Fall protection is not anticipated unless chemical or atmospheric conditions are
encountered. In this case, fall protection would be used for safe access/egress. A ladder
would be appropriate for these activities.
 Where required, the lifting equipment will be installed prior to the entry worker accessing
the confined space.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
125
Golden Health & Safety Program





Confined Space
The entry worker must always wear the fall arrest harness and lifeline in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions and whenever an open trench entry takes place (UV chamber
only).
The stand by worker is charged with attending to the life line and ensuring the entrants
harness is properly connected to the lifting device (davit and winch).
This person will keep the slack off the line during entry and exit from the confined space
and will assist the entry worker during entry and exit.
This person will also keep the line from entanglement.
A portable guardrail, where applicable, will be placed in front of the outside workers to
prevent inadvertent entry into the space.
5) ENTRY WORKER:
 Safe access/egress will be with the use of a ladder. If atmospheric conditions become a
concern, then the use of a safety harness and lifeline should be considered.
 If the safety harness and lifeline is being used it should be attached to a lifting device.
 The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry. For wet environments use
safety toed rubber boots and wet gear to enter.
 All tools and equipment used for work inside the space cannot be carried by the entry
worker unless a tool pouch is used. Three point contact while entering the space is
necessary.
 Use proper handling techniques for removing grate covers: Lift with the legs, and pull
back without twisting the torso, get two persons to move the grates where practicable.
 Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to minimize
this hazard.
 Bring adequate lighting into the space or drop a trouble light (connected to a GFCI) into
the space for all work activities when there is insufficient illumination.
 If work requires kneeling, bring knee pads or a floor matt to rest the knees on.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must stay within close proximity to the space and contact the entry
person performing their work on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry
person.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person is responsible for the lifting equipment and will contact the fire
department if a rescue is required.
 This person will observe the line to ensure it does not get entangled.
 The standby person will be responsible for recording test results.
 The outside team will constantly monitor the external environment for possible safety
issues. This includes restricting the public from the work area and confirming that the
intake is constantly drawing fresh air into the space.
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
INSPECTIONS:
 For low atmospheric hazard spaces where work activities less than 15 minutes duration
takes place and where no air contaminants are generated, no ventilation is required.
126
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS:
 If single valves are used for isolation, it is necessary to obtain engineering approval to
ensure that the valve is appropriate for this function.
 An entry permit is required for work using double block and bleed isolation.
 For low hazard atmospheres, if the work is less than 15 minutes duration where no
contaminants are generated, then no ventilation is required. If the work is greater than
15 minutes then continuous ventilation is needed. A minimum of 50 cfm per worker is
required unless contaminants are introduced or are present, then moderate risk
measures apply.
 A safe means of handling tools is needed to ensure that three point contacts are met
when entering and exiting the space.
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
 The blower is removed from the space when work is completed.
 The standby person will assist the entry person with exiting the space.
 The double block and bleed and or lockout are removed where applicable and the
equipment is observed for leaks.
 The grates are reattached to close off the space.
 The supervisor or designate will complete the entry permit where applicable and confirm
that the air monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or designate will
notify the receptionist that the work is completed.
 The supervisor or designate will file the permit and the team will debrief on the
effectiveness of the confined space entry.
10.22 Primary Effluent from 12th Street Space CSE Procedure
1) Primary effluent from 12th street space
____________________________________________________________________________
Primary effluent from 12th street space
[Volume ~90 cu. ft.: No entry anticipated, only visual from above]
#Main_Table_of_Contents
127
Golden Health & Safety Program
HAZARDS
Moderate risk:
O2 deficiency
LEL exposure
H2S exposure
Fall into the space from above while space
is open
Entry/exit risk of fall
Slip/trip on entry and during winter or wet
conditions
Atmosphere hazard class is moderate
Confined Space
Low Risk:
Valve failure resulting in fluid entry
Carbon monoxide from vehicular and gas
powered equipment
Possible mould/bacteria
Overhead material being dropped into
space
Possible sharp edges
Be aware of weather conditions
Low lighting levels if overcast day
Electrical exposure from external lights
Ergonomic concerns with kneeling and
awkward postures
Inward sloping floor
If covers used over space
Fluid accumulation
PRE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. It is not anticipated that
entry will occur. This information is in place if such an entry does occur. These include:

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: Visual check of the rescue equipment: davit, winch, rope,
harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to ensure that they are the correct devices and
are in good working order. One person must be designated to verify this activity.

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there are
no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled before
work progresses. If a davit is being used, check the anchor point for proper integrity prior
to usage.

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted
monthly and bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor.

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air to verify
that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space
#Main_Table_of_Contents
128
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

VENTILATOR: The ventilator should be tested to verify it is operational. The hose
should be checked for cuts and holes and repaired if any are found. Check the fan
blades to see if they are dirty. Clean them if this is noted. If a gas powered power source
is used to operate the ventilator, it must be fueled up and checked for proper operation.
The unit must be downwind from the ventilator and the space opening during use. If this
is not practicable, extend the exhaust pipe so the exhaust is downwind from the
ventilator and the space opening. Delegate one person for this activity. When the
ventilator is required, it must be placed upwind of the confined space.

STAFFING: There will be two persons on site during any confined space entry event.
One worker will be assigned to be the standby person and will be responsible for
contacting the fire department for rescue. The second worker will be the entry person.
Prior to entry the team will discuss the work activities and roles to ensure each worker is
aware of their responsibilities. All staff will be trained in confined space entry procedures.

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Signage denoting a confined space entry should be
placed at the periphery of the space.

FALL PROTECTION: The entry person will don the safety harness and life line and
the other worker will confirm proper installation. The lifeline will be inserted through the
lifting device; davit with attached winch, in preparation for entry. Portable guardrails,
where feasible, are to be placed in front of the outside worker station to prevent the
potential for falling into the opening.

TOOL BUCKET: When required, place all tools or equipment into a tool bucket attached
to a hoisting rope. When the entry operator requires such material it can be lowered by
the outside worker.

ACCESS/EGRESS: With no fixed ladder rungs, ensure that the lifting device assists with
the access and egress of the inside worker. This is necessary since there is no hand
hold above the space for safe entry or ladder rungs for secure entry and exit.

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated (if practicable) prior to worker entry.

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: One worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation is necessary then the
standby person will have ready access to the ambulance for emergency transport. A first
aid record treatment book must be on site to document any potential injuries. The fire
department will act as the rescue team and will be contacted when required. A written
agreement with the fire department for rescue purposes will ensure their availability at all
times.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter). Use
the Towns lockout procedures where applicable for lockout of the sewage infeed.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
129
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle, hardhat,
safety glasses, leather gloves and/or disposable nitrile gloves and cotton coveralls with
high visibility material incorporated into the coveralls or with a high visibility vest in areas
where traffic control is required. Areas where wet environments are prevalent will require
rubber boots and wet gear.

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require washing facilities after
exiting the space if there is any potential for contamination. A portable eye wash with
saline solution is necessary for dealing with any material that enters the eye.

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes place
or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate on site will
complete the documentation for all entry permits.

COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the
prescribed time. The standby worker will be responsible to contact the fire
department for rescue from the space. If the ambulance is the emergency transportation
vehicle, then the supervisor or designate will contact them as required. The supervisor or
designate is responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency and non-emergency
numbers will be kept in all Town vehicles for quick response. These numbers will also be
installed on the mobile phones. Confined space entry drills will take place annually.
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation (i.e. double block &
bleed) procedures are followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment.
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment at the site prior to use in the confined space.
Readings should be between 19.5-23.0% but ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0 ppm H2S
and 0% LEL. Record this in the testing record sheet. The form should include the date,
time of the test, initials of tester and the levels found.
 Insert the probe at the opening and measure the air concentrations. Record the levels.
 Insert the probe halfway into the confined space and test the air again. Record the levels
in the test record sheet.
 Insert the probe to the bottom of the space being sure not to immerse the probe end into
any fluid or debris and test the air. If the readings are the same at all three levels, record
as one value in the test record sheet.
 If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do not
enter. Commence ventilation of the space. Retest the space after 20 minutes of venting.
If the readings are back to acceptable levels then entry is permitted with continuous
ventilation.
 Attach the monitor to the entry worker for continuous monitoring of the work environment.
Record the readings on a periodic basis.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
130
Golden Health & Safety Program


Confined Space
If at any time the alarm sounds, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
3) VENTILATION:
 For all entries, continuous positive ventilation is required from a portable blower system.
 Moderate hazard atmospheres require continuous ventilation at a minimum rate of 20 air
changes per hour (ach). For the space in the primary effluent from the 12th street station
this works out to:
o 30 cfm for the primary effluent from the 12th street station space
 The ventilation hose must not have more than 2 bends. Each bend affects the flow rate.
The existing ventilator should be able to supply this flow rate with two bends. The
manufacturer should be able to specify what the flow rates are for no bend (straight
duct); one bend; and for two bends.
 The configuration for moderate atmosphere hazard venting, should be with two bends of
the hose or one bend of the hose directed onto a flat plate. See pictorial.
Figure 11: Do not use oxygen for ventilation
Figure 12: Do use positive pressure systems where necessary, to increase effectiveness
of ventilation



The hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The intake for the
ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and upwind.
Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may enter the
space through the blower.
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
131
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 The lifting device must be set up prior to worker entry into the space.
 The entry worker must always wear the fall arrest harness and lifeline whenever an entry
takes place.
 The stand by worker is charged with attending to the life line and ensuring entrant’s
harness is properly connected.
 This person will keep the slack off the line during entry and exit from the confined space
and will assist the entry worker during entry and exit.
5) ENTRY WORKER:
 The entry worker must wear the safety harness and lifeline attached to the lifting device
for any entry into a confined space.
 The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry.
 All tools and equipment used for work inside the space cannot be carried by the entry
worker unless a tool pouch is used or a tool bucket is utilized. The tool bucket would be
the preferred choice since foot holds are only available on the sloping floor.
 For entry, the use of the lifting device is needed to ensure safe access and egress since
there are no ladder rungs or effective hand holds above the confined space entrance.
 Inform the standby person to prevent slack on the lifeline.
 Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to
minimize this hazard.
 Bring adequate lighting into the space or drop a trouble light (attached to GFCI) into the
space for all work activities and when there is insufficient outside sunlight.
 If work requires kneeling, bring knee pads or a floor matt to rest the knees on.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must stay within close proximity to the space and visually observe
the entry person performing their work on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry
person.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person is responsible for the lifting equipment and will affect rescue
through phone contact with the fire department.
 This person will observe the line to ensure it does not get entangled.
 The standby person will be responsible for recording test results.
 The outside team will constantly monitor the external environment for possible safety
issues. This includes assessing traffic barricades for effectiveness and confirming that
the intake is constantly drawing fresh air into the space.
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
REMOVING PLUGS:
 Drain the fluid from the space with a vacuum pump.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
132
Golden Health & Safety Program








Confined Space
Double block and bleed is required for servicing valves under pressure.
If single valves are used for isolation, it is necessary to obtain engineering approval of
this activity.
An entry permit is required for work if isolation lockout is used.
A tool bucket and waste bucket is needed for transferring equipment up and down from
the space and to remove debris from the plug.
Remove the material from the plug.
Exit the space using the lifting devices.
Ensure all isolation locks are removed.
Open the appropriate valves and deactivate the lockout and test to confirm appropriate
function.
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
 All tools and equipment is removed with the tool bucket.
 The blower is removed from the space where applicable.
 The standby person will assist the entry person with exiting the space.
 If covers are used for the space, use hook tools and slide the cover or use proper lifting
techniques.
 The isolation lockouts are removed where applicable and the equipment is observed for
proper function.
 The supervisor or designate will complete the entry permit where applicable and confirm
that the air monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or designate will
notify the call centre that the work is completed.
 The supervisor or designate will file the permit and the team will debrief on the
effectiveness of the confined space entry.
10.23 Pressure Reducing Vaults (PRV) CSE Procedure
1) Pine Drive PRV
2) Granite Drive access to PRV
3) Canyon Ridge and Pine Drive PRV
_______________________________________
Pine Drive PRV
[Volume: 660 cubic feet]
Granite Drive access to PRV
[Volume: 840 cubic feet]
133
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
Canyon Ridge and Pine Drive PRV
[Volume: 720 cubic feet]
HAZARDS
Moderate risk:
Fall into the space from above while space
is open
Falls into space from corroded rungs or
loosened grout
Entry/exit risk of fall
Improper handling of manhole covers (low
back concerns)
Slip/trip on entry and during winter or wet
conditions especially with fixed rungs
Low Risk:
O2 deficiency
Flammable buildup from natural gas
Carbon monoxide from vehicular and gas
powered equipment
Possible mould/bacteria
Overhead material being dropped into
space
Possible sharp edges
Watch for leaks from high pressure system
resulting in flooding
Be aware of weather conditions and
potential water accumulation
Address vehicular traffic issues and
pedestrian and domestic animal interaction
Low light levels
Ergonomic concerns with kneeling and
awkward posture
Atmospheric hazard class low
PRE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. These include:

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: Visual check of the rescue equipment: davit, winch, rope,
harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to ensure that they are the correct devices and
are in good working order. One person must be designated to verify this activity.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
134
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there are
no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled before
work progresses. Check the davit to verify the integrity and function.

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted
monthly and bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor.

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test. The alarm settings
should be noted and recorded.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air at the
site to verify that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space

VENTILATOR: The ventilator should be tested to verify it is operational. The hose
should be checked for cuts and holes and repaired if any are found. Confirm the
connection between the hose and blower is effective. Check the fan blades to see if they
are dirty. Clean them if this is noted. If a gas powered power source is used to operate
the ventilator, it must be fueled up and checked for proper operation. It must be
positioned downwind from the ventilator and space opening during use. If this is not
practicable, then use extended exhaust piping with the exhaust downwind of the
ventilator and space opening. Delegate one person for this activity. When the ventilator
is required, it must be placed upwind of the confined space. For openings with small
access, a restrictor will need to be inserted at the opening.

STAFFING: There will be a minimum two persons on site during any confined space
entry event. One worker will be assigned to be the standby person and will be
responsible to affect rescue by contacting the fire department. The second worker will
be the entry person. Prior to entry the team will discuss the work activities and roles to
ensure each worker is aware of their responsibilities. All staff will be trained in confined
space entry procedures.

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Any location where there is potential for contact with
local traffic will require barricades and signage warning of worker activity. Barricades
and work vehicles must be positioned in accordance with Ministry of Transportation
requirements if within their jurisdiction or utilize the Towns procedures for traffic control.
Signage denoting a confined space entry should be placed at the periphery of the space.

FALL PROTECTION: The entry person will don the safety harness and life line and
the other worker will confirm proper installation. The lifeline will be inserted through the
lifting device; davit with attached winch, in preparation for entry. Portable guardrails are
to be placed in front of the outside worker station to prevent the potential for falling into
the opening.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
135
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

TOOL BUCKET: When required, place all tools or equipment into a tool bucket
attached to a hoisting rope. When the entry operator requires such material it can be
lowered by the outside worker.

ACCESS/EGRESS: For spaces equipped with fixed ladder rungs, ensure that the lifting
device assists with the access and egress of the inside worker.

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated prior to worker entry.

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: One worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation is necessary then the
standby person will have ready access to the ambulance for emergency transport. A first aid
record treatment book must be on site to document any potential injuries. For all rescue
events, the fire department will be contacted without delay. A written agreement with the fire
department for rescue purposes will be in place specifying rescue availability at all times.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter). Use
the Town’s lockout procedures where applicable.

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle, hardhat,
safety glasses, leather gloves and/or disposable nitrile gloves and cotton coveralls with
high visibility material incorporated into the coveralls or with a high visibility vest.

COMMUNICATION: Staff must have an effective means of communication either voice,
radio or other effective means. If background noise levels compromise standard methods
of communication then other effective means MUST be agreed on prior to entry and
periodically assessed for effectiveness.

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require washing facilities after
exiting the space if there is any potential for contamination. A portable eye wash with
saline solution is necessary for dealing with any material that enters the eye.

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes place
or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate on site will
complete the documentation for all entry permits.

COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the prescribed
time. The standby worker will be responsible for contacting the fire department who
will affect rescue from the space. If the ambulance is the emergency transportation vehicle,
then the supervisor or designate will call directly as required. The supervisor or designate is
responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency and non- emergency numbers will
be kept in all Town vehicles for quick response. These numbers will also be installed on the
mobile phones. Confined space entry drills will take place annually.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
136
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation (i.e. double block &
bleed) procedures are followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment. This is the
responsibility of the supervisor or delegate.
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment prior to use in the confined space. Readings
should be between 19.5-23.0% but ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0 ppm H2S and 0%
LEL. Record this in the testing record sheet. The form should include the date, time of
the test, initials of tester and the levels found.
 Open the access hatch to the confined space and insert the probe at the opening and
measure the air concentrations. Record the levels.
 Insert the probe halfway into the confined space and test the air again. Record the
levels in the test record sheet.
 Insert the probe to the bottom of the space being sure not to immerse the probe end into
any fluid or debris and test the air. Record these values in the test record sheet. If
readings for all three levels are the same then one record is acceptable.
 If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do not
enter. Commence ventilation of the space. Retest the space after 20 minutes of venting.
If the readings are back to acceptable levels then entry is permitted with continuous
ventilation.
 Attach the monitor to the entry worker for continuous monitoring of the work
environment. Record the readings on a periodic basis.
 If at any time the alarm sounds, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
 If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
3) VENTILATION:
 If the space is a low atmosphere hazard, the worker is in the space for less than 15
minutes and the work inside the space does not generate contaminants other than
exhaled air then positive ventilation is not required.
 For all other entries, continuous positive ventilation is required. A minimum 50 cfm per
person of fresh air into the space is acceptable for low hazard atmospheres.
 For low hazard atmospheres, continuous ventilation at a minimum rate of 20 air changes
per hour (ach) is desired. For the spaces in the PRV’s this works out to:
o 220 cfm for Pine Drive PRV;
o 280 cfm for Granite Drive access to PRV; and
o 240 cfm for Canyon Ridge and Pine Drive PRV


The ventilation hose must not have more than 2 bends. Each bend affects the flow rate.
The existing ventilator should be able to supply this flow rate with two bends. The
manufacturer should be able to specify what the flow rates are for no bend (straight
duct); one bend; and for two bends.
The configuration for low atmosphere hazard venting, should be with two bends of the
hose or one bend of the hose directed onto a flat plate. See pictorial.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
137
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
Figure 13: Do not use oxygen for ventilation.
Figure 14: Do use positive pressure systems, where necessary, to increase effectiveness
of ventilation.



The hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The intake for the
ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and upwind.
Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may enter the
space through the blower.
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 The lifting equipment will be installed prior to the entry worker accessing the confined
space.
 The entry worker must always wear the fall arrest harness and lifeline in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions and whenever a PRV entry takes place.
 The stand by worker is charged with attending to the life line and ensuring the entrants
harness is properly connected to the lifting device (davit and winch).
 This person will keep the slack off the line during entry and exit from the confined space
and will assist the entry worker during entry and exit.
 This person will also keep the line from entanglement.
 A portable guardrail will be placed in front of the outside workers to prevent inadvertent
entry into the space.
5) ENTRY WORKER:
 The entry worker must wear the safety harness and lifeline attached to the lifting device
for any entry into a confined space.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
138
Golden Health & Safety Program









Confined Space
The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry. For wet environments use
safety toed rubber boots and wet gear to enter.
All tools and equipment used for work inside the space cannot be carried by the entry
worker unless a tool pouch is used. Three point contacts with the ladder rungs are
necessary.
Inspect the fixed rungs for looseness and if this is found, then repairs are required.
For spaces with fixed ladder rungs, the lifting device must be used to assist in safely
entering and exiting the space because there are no outside hand grips above the hatch
for safe access/egress and the rungs may not be equally spaced.
Inform the standby person to prevent slack on the lifeline.
Use proper handling techniques for removing manhole covers: Use hook tool, lift with the
legs, and pull cover back without twisting the torso, get two persons to move the lid
where practicable.
Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to
minimize this hazard.
Bring adequate lighting into the space or drop a trouble light (connected to a GFCI) into
the space for all work activities when there is insufficient outside sunlight.
If work requires kneeling, bring knee pads or a floor matt to rest the knees on.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must stay within close proximity to the space and visually observe
the entry person performing their work on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry
person.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person is responsible for the lifting equipment and will contact the fire
department if a rescue is required.
 This person will observe the line to ensure it does not get entangled.
 The standby person will be responsible for recording test results.
 The outside team will constantly monitor the external environment for possible safety
issues. This includes assessing traffic barricades for effectiveness; restricting the public
and neighborhood animals from the work area and confirming that the intake is
constantly drawing fresh air into the space.
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
INSPECTIONS:
 For work activities less than 15 minutes duration where no air contaminants are
generated, no ventilation is required.
FIXING LEAKS/SERVICING VALVES:
 Double block and bleed is required as a means of lockout for servicing the pressure
reducing valve.
 If single valves are used for isolation, it is necessary to obtain engineering approval of
this activity to verify that the valve used for isolation is appropriate.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
139
Golden Health & Safety Program




Confined Space
All valve shut offs for double block and bleed should be conducted from the outside
where possible.
An entry permit is required for work using double block and bleed or single valve
isolation.
If the work is less than 15 minutes duration where no contaminants are generated, then
no ventilation is required. If the work is greater than 15 minutes then continuous
ventilation is needed. A minimum of 50 cfm per worker is required.
A tool bucket is needed for transferring equipment up and down from the space unless
the entry worker has a tool pouch.
WELDING/CUTTING:
 The worker conducting welding must wear a P100 dual cartridge half mask respirator
with continuous ventilation into the space to minimize fume accumulation.
 If possible use local exhaust ventilation at the welding source.
 The worker will gauge the work activity to minimize the accumulation of fumes.
 Continuous air monitoring is needed to verify the air quality.
 If cutting torches are used, they must be removed from the space whenever workers
leave the space.
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
 The blower is removed from the space when work is completed.
 The standby person will assist the entry person with exiting the space.
 The double block and bleed and or lockout are removed where applicable and the
equipment is observed for leaks.
 The lid or cover is reattached to close off the space.
 The supervisor or designate will complete the entry permit where applicable and confirm
that the air monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or designate will
notify the call centre that the work is completed.
 The supervisor or designate will file the permit and the team will debrief on the
effectiveness of the confined space entry.
140
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
10.24 RAS WAS Space CSE Procedure
1) RAS WAS space
____________________________________________________________________________
RAS WAS space
[Volume 95 cu. ft.]
HAZARDS
Moderate risk:
O2 deficiency
LEL exposure
H2S exposure
Fall into the space from above while space
is open
Lifting the manhole
Entry/exit risk of fall
Slip/trip on entry and during winter or wet
conditions
Atmosphere hazard class is moderate
Low Risk:
Valve failure resulting in fluid entry
Carbon monoxide from vehicular and gas
powered equipment
Possible mould/bacteria
Overhead material being dropped into
space
Possible sharp edges
Be aware of weather conditions
Low lighting levels
Electrical exposure from external lights
Ergonomic concerns with kneeling and
awkward postures
Crush or pinching of the fingers or hands
from inappropriate handling of the
manhole cover
Noise from vacuum pump or vacuum truck
PRE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. These include:

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: Visual check of the rescue equipment: davit, winch, rope,
harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to ensure that they are the correct devices and
are in good working order. One person must be designated to verify this activity.
141
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there are
no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled before
work progresses. If a davit is being used, check the anchor point for proper integrity prior
to usage.

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted
monthly and bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor.

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air to verify
that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space

VENTILATOR: The ventilator should be tested to verify it is operational. The hose
should be checked for cuts and holes and repaired if any are found. Check the fan
blades to see if they are dirty. Clean them if this is noted. If a gas powered power source
is used to operate the ventilator, it must be fueled up and checked for proper operation. It
must be located downwind from the ventilator and from the space opening during use. If
this is not practicable, extend the exhaust pipe so the exhaust is directed downwind from
the ventilator and space opening. Delegate one person for this activity. When the
ventilator is required, it must be placed upwind of the confined space. For openings with
small access, a restrictor will need to be inserted at the opening.

STAFFING: There will be two persons on site during any confined space entry event.
One worker will be assigned to be the standby person and will be responsible for
contacting the fire department for rescue. The second worker will be the entry person.
Prior to entry the team will discuss the work activities and roles to ensure each worker is
aware of their responsibilities. All staff will be trained in confined space entry procedures.

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Signage denoting a confined space entry should be
placed at the periphery of the space.

FALL PROTECTION: The entry person will don the safety harness and life line and
the other worker will confirm proper installation. The lifeline will be inserted through the
lifting device; davit with attached winch, in preparation for entry. Portable guardrails,
where feasible, are to be placed in front of the outside worker station to prevent the
potential for falling into the opening.

TOOL BUCKET: When required, place all tools or equipment into a tool bucket attached
to a hoisting rope. When the entry operator requires such material it can be lowered by
the outside worker.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
142
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

ACCESS/EGRESS: For fixed ladder rungs, ensure that the lifting device assists with the
access and egress of the inside worker. This is necessary since there is no hand hold
above the space for safe entry.

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated (if practicable) prior to worker entry.

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: One worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation is necessary then the
standby person will have ready access to the ambulance for emergency transport. A first
aid record treatment book must be on site to document any potential injuries. The fire
department will act as the rescue team and will be contacted in the event of a rescue. A
written agreement with the fire department will ensure the availability for rescue at all
times.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter). Use
the Towns lockout procedures where applicable for lockout of the mag meter.

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle, hardhat,
safety glasses, leather gloves and/or disposable nitrile gloves and cotton coveralls with
high visibility material incorporated into the coveralls or with a high visibility vest in areas
where mobile equipment activity is required. Areas where wet environments are
prevalent will require rubber safety toed boots and wet gear.

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require washing facilities after
exiting the space if there is any potential for contamination. A portable eye wash with
saline solution is necessary for dealing with any material that enters the eye.

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes place
or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate on site will
complete the documentation for all entry permits.

COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the
prescribed time. The standby worker will be responsible to contact the fire
department for rescue from the space. If the ambulance is the emergency
transportation vehicle, then the supervisor or designate will contact them as required.
The supervisor or designate is responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency
and non-emergency numbers will be kept in all Town vehicles for quick response. These
numbers will also be installed on the mobile phones. Confined space entry drills will take
place annually.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
143
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation (i.e. double block &
bleed) procedures are followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment.
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment at the site prior to use in the confined space.
Readings should be between 19.5-23.0% but ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0 ppm H2S
and 0% LEL. Record this in the testing record sheet. The form should include the date,
time of the test, initials of tester and the levels found.
 Open the access hatch to the confined space and insert the probe at the opening and
measure the air concentrations. Record the levels.
 Insert the probe halfway into the confined space and test the air again. Record the
levels in the test record sheet.
 Insert the probe to the bottom of the space being sure not to immerse the probe end into
any fluid or debris and test the air. If the readings are the same at all three levels, record
as one value in the test record sheet.
 If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do not
enter. Commence ventilation of the space. Retest the space after 20 minutes of venting.
If the readings are back to acceptable levels then entry is permitted with continuous
ventilation.
 Attach the monitor to the entry worker for continuous monitoring of the work
environment. Record the readings on a periodic basis.
 If at any time the alarm sounds, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
 If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
3) VENTILATION:
 For all entries, continuous positive ventilation is required from a portable blower system.
 Moderate hazard atmospheres require continuous ventilation at a minimum rate of 20
air changes per hour (ach). For the spaces in the water metering stations this works out
to:
o 32 cfm for the RAS WAS space
 The ventilation hose must not have more than 2 bends. Each bend affects the flow rate.
The existing ventilator should be able to supply this flow rate with two bends. The
manufacturer should be able to specify what the flow rates are for no bend (straight
duct); one bend; and for two bends.
 The configuration for moderate atmosphere hazard venting, should be with two bends of
the hose or one bend of the hose directed onto a flat plate. See pictorial.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
144
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
Figure 15: Do not use oxygen for ventilation
Figure 16: Do use positive pressure systems where necessary, to increase
effectiveness of ventilation



The hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The intake for the
ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and upwind.
Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may enter the
space through the blower.
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 The lifting device must be set up prior to worker entry into the space.
 The entry worker must always wear the fall arrest harness and lifeline whenever an
entry takes place.
 The stand by worker is charged with attending to the life line and ensuring entrant’s
harness is properly connected.
 This person will keep the slack off the line during entry and exit from the confined space
and will assist the entry worker during entry and exit.
5) ENTRY WORKER:
 The entry worker must wear the safety harness and lifeline attached to the lifting device
for any entry into a confined space.
 The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry.
 All tools and equipment used for work inside the space cannot be carried by the entry
worker unless a tool pouch is used. Three point contacts with the ladder rungs are
necessary.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
145
Golden Health & Safety Program






Confined Space
Inspect the ladder for any deterioration and repair without undue delay.
For entry, the use of the lifting device is needed to ensure safe access and egress since
there are no effective hand holds above the confined space entrance.
Inform the standby person to prevent slack on the lifeline.
Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to
minimize this hazard.
Bring adequate lighting into the space or drop a trouble light (attached to GFCI) into the
space for all work activities and when there is insufficient outside sunlight.
If work requires kneeling, bring knee pads or a floor matt to rest the knees on.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must stay within close proximity to the space and visually observe
the entry person performing their work on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry person.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person is responsible for the lifting equipment and will affect rescue through
phone contact with the fire department.
 This person will observe the line to ensure it does not get entangled.
 The standby person will be responsible for recording test results.
 The outside team will constantly monitor the external environment for possible safety
issues. This includes assessing traffic barricades for effectiveness and confirming that
the intake is constantly drawing fresh air into the space.
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
SERVICING MAG METER/SERVICING VALVES:
 Slightly lift and slide the manhole from the opening. Use the legs and keep the back
straight.
 Drain the fluid from the space with a vacuum pump or vacuum truck.
 Double block and bleed is required for servicing valves under pressure.
 If single valves are used for isolation, it is necessary to obtain engineering approval of
this activity.
 All valve shut offs for double block and bleed should be conducted from the outside
where possible.
 An entry permit is required for work if electrical or isolation lockout is used.
 A tool bucket is needed for transferring equipment up and down from the space unless
the entry worker has a tool pouch.
 Ensure all lockouts and isolation is in place and verify their effectiveness.
 Remove and replace the mag meter using a lifting device versus manually lifting the unit
out.
 Open the appropriate valves and activate the lockout and test to confirm appropriate
function.
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
146
Golden Health & Safety Program







Confined Space
All tools and equipment is removed with the tool bucket.
The blower is removed from the space where applicable.
The standby person will assist the entry person with exiting the space.
The manhole cover will be slid back into place using a proper hook tool or pickaxe. DO
NOT lift and slide the cover without these assists.
The double block and bleed and/or lockouts are removed where applicable and the
equipment is observed for leaks or function.
The supervisor or designate will complete the entry permit where applicable and confirm
that the air monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or designate will
notify the call centre that the work is completed.
The supervisor or designate will file the permit and the team will debrief on the
effectiveness of the confined space entry.
10.25 Sequencing Batch Reactor CSE Procedure
1) Sequencing Batch Reactor (SBR)
2) Effluent Tank from SBR
3) Influent (pre react zone) to SBR
4) Initial entry to SBR
____________________________________________________________________________
Sequencing Batch Reactor x 2 (SBR)
[volume 249,480 cu.ft.]
Effluent tank from SBR
[volume 5940 cu.ft.: No entry expected]
#Main_Table_of_Contents
147
Golden Health & Safety Program
Influent (pre react zone) to SBR
[volume 41,580 cu.ft]
HAZARDS
Moderate risk:
Fall into the space from above
Entry/exit risk of fall
Slip/trip on entry and during winter or wet
conditions
Flammable methane buildup from organic
material breakdown
H2S buildup from organic material
breakdown
Low oxygen from reaction with organic
material
Contact with sewage
Atmospheric hazard moderate
Confined Space
Initial entry to SBR
[volume 30 cu.ft: No entry expected]
Low Risk:
Carbon monoxide from vehicular and gas
powered equipment
Overhead material being dropped into
space
Possible sharp edges
Noise from vacuum truck
Manual handling of sludge pump
Electrical shock from the sludge pump
Valve failure leading to sewage ingress
Sharps and needles in the raw sewage and
possibly into the pump
Low light levels during poor sunlight
conditions
Ergonomic concerns with manual lifting and
awkward posture
PRE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. These include:

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: Visual check of the rescue equipment: davit, winch, rope,
harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to ensure that they are the correct devices and
are in good working order. One person must be designated to verify this activity.

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there are
no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled before
work progresses. For sites with davit anchors, check the integrity of the anchor for
adequacy.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
148
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted
monthly and bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor.

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air on site
to verify that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space

VENTILATOR: Natural ventilation should be sufficient for most applications. If additional
venting is needed (disturbance of sludge generating contaminant release) the ventilator
should be used. It should be tested to verify it is operational. The hose should be
checked for cuts and holes and repaired if any are found. Check the fan blades to see if
they are dirty and periodically check the fixed ventilation shroud for leak points. Clean
them if this is noted. If a gas powered power source is used to operate the ventilator, it
must be fueled up and checked for proper operation. It must be located downwind from
the ventilator or if this is not practicable, extend the exhaust pipe so it vents downwind.
Delegate one person for this activity. When the ventilator is required, it must be placed
upwind of the confined space.

STAFFING: There will always be three persons on site during any confined space
entry event. One worker will be assigned to be the standby person and one will be the
rescue person who will contact the fire department in the event of a rescue. The third
worker will be the entry person. Prior to entry the team will discuss the work activities
and roles to ensure each worker is aware of their responsibilities. All staff will be trained
in confined space entry procedures.

COMMUNICATION: Staff must have an effective means of communication either voice,
radio or other effective means. If background noise levels compromise standard
methods of communication then other effective means MUST be agreed on prior to
entry and periodically assessed for effectiveness.

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Any location where there is potential for contact with
mobile equipment will require hi visibility apparel to notify the equipment operators of
worker activity. Signage denoting a confined space entry should be placed at the
periphery of the space. Up top workers must keep non-essential staff away from the
work site.

FALL PROTECTION: The entry person will don the safety harness and life line and
the standby and rescue workers will confirm proper installation. The lifeline will be
inserted through the davit with attached winch, in preparation for entry. Portable
guardrails are to be placed in front of the outside worker station where applicable to
prevent the potential for the outside worker from falling into the opening.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
149
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

TOOL BUCKET: When required, place all tools or equipment into a tool bucket attached
to a hoisting rope. When the entry operator requires such material it can be lowered by
the outside workers.

PUMP HOISTING DEVICES: Check the chains/cables to verify that there is no damage
or problems prior to usage. Ensure lifting device is sufficiently rated for the weight of the
pump and that the chain/cable is not contacting any other surface while under load.

ACCESS/EGRESS: With portable ladder access, ensure proper securement and angle
while entering and exiting the space. The ladder must extend 1 metre above the space.
The entry worker will use the lifting device as an assist for access/egress of the space.

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated prior to worker entry.

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: One worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation is necessary then the
rescue person will contact the ambulance for emergency transport. A first aid record
treatment book must be on site to document any potential injuries. For all rescue
activities, the fire department will be notified without undue delay. A written agreement
with the fire department regarding rescue services will ensure their availability at all times.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter). All
electrical equipment within the space MUST be locked out, deenergized and verified
prior to entry.

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle (rubber
safety toed boots for the entry worker), hardhat, safety glasses, leather gloves and/or
disposable nitrile gloves and coveralls with high visibility material incorporated into the
coveralls or with a high visibility vest for traffic control activities. When contact with
partial treated sewage must take place, include an impermeable apron or full two piece
impermeable gears that can be disinfected.

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require disinfection capabilities
for all ppe contaminated from raw sewage plus washing facilities after exiting the
space if there is any potential for contamination. A portable eye wash with saline
solution is necessary for dealing with any material that enters the eye.

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes
place or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate on
site will complete the documentation for all entry permits.

COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the
prescribed time. The rescue worker will be responsible for contacting the fire
department if
150
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
rescue from the space is required. If the ambulance is the emergency transportation
vehicle, then the supervisor or designate will call directly as required. The supervisor or
designate is responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency and nonemergency numbers will be kept in all Town vehicles for quick response. These
numbers will also be installed on the mobile phones. Confined space entry drills will take
place annually
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation (i.e. double block &
bleed) procedures are followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment.
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment prior to use in the confined space.
Readings should be between 19.5-23% but ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0 ppm H2S
and 0% LEL. Record this in the testing record sheet. The form should include the date,
time of the test, initials of tester and the levels found.
 Insert the probe halfway into the confined space and test the air. Record the levels in
the test record sheet.
 Insert the probe to the bottom of the space being sure not to immerse the probe end
into any fluid or debris and test the air. Record these values in the test record sheet. If
all three levels are the same then one recorded entry can be made.
 If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do
not enter. Commence ventilation of the space. Retest the space after 20 minutes of
venting. If the readings are back to acceptable levels then entry is permitted with
continuous ventilation.
 Attach the monitor to the entry worker for continuous monitoring of the work
environment. Record the readings on a periodic basis.
 If at any time the alarm sounds, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
 If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
3) VENTILATION:
 Moderate hazard atmospheres require continuous ventilation at a minimum rate of 20
air changes per hour (ach) or 50 fpm cross sectional flow at the opening if feasible. For
the spaces in the SBR, this works out to:
o Not required for SBR; space is open to atmosphere but it is recommended;
o 41 fpm for the effluent tank from SBR;
o 6 fpm for the influent ((pre react zone) to the SBR;
o 10 cfm for the initial entry to the SBR;
 Where applicable, these sites should be vented for a minimum 20 minutes prior to entry
using the portable blower.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
151
Golden Health & Safety Program


Confined Space
If a portable blower is used, the ventilation hose must not have more than 2 bends.
Each bend affects the flow rate. The existing ventilator should be able to supply these
flow rates with two bends. The manufacturer should be able to specify what the flow
rates are for no bend (straight duct); one bend; and for two bends.
The configuration for moderate atmosphere hazard venting, should be with two bends of
the hose or one bend of the hose directed onto a flat plate. See pictorial.
Figure 17: Do not use oxygen for ventilation
Figure 18: Do use positive pressure systems, where necessary, to increase
effectiveness of ventilation.




The hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The intake for the
ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and upwind.
Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may enter the
space through the blower.
The ventilation system should be turned on and allowed to purge the space for a
minimum 20 minutes before a second air monitoring test is performed and before the
entry worker accesses the space.
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 The lifting system will be set up prior to worker entry.
 The entry worker must always wear the fall arrest harness and lifeline whenever an
entry takes place.
 The stand by worker is charged with attending to the life line and ensuring the entrants
harness is properly connected to the davit and winch.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
152
Golden Health & Safety Program



Confined Space
This person will keep the slack off the line during entry and exit from the confined
space and will assist the entry worker during entry and exit.
The standby worker will ensure that the lifeline is not entangled on any equipment while
the entry worker is in the space.
When the extension ladder is introduced into the space, ensure that it is placed on a
horizontal base, be positioned so that the horizontal distance from the base to vertical
plane of support is approximately ¼ of the ladder length and the top extends a
minimum 3 feet above the upper landing and is secured to ensure stability during use.
5) ENTRY WORKER:
 The entry worker must wear the safety harness and lifeline attached to the lifting device
for any entry into a confined space where vertical ladder access is used.
 The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry.
 The entry worker will bring the air monitor into the space for continuous readings
 All tools and equipment used for work inside the space cannot be carried by the entry
worker unless a tool pouch is used. Three point contacts with ladder rungs are
necessary.
 Inform the standby person to minimize slack on the lifeline.
 Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to
minimize this hazard.
 Turn on portable lighting or bring adequate lighting (hooked to GFCI unit) for all work
activities when there is insufficient outside sunlight.
 If work requires manual lifting, lift with the knees and keep the back straight.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must stay within close proximity to the space and visually observe
the entry person performing their work on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry
person. If verbal communication is not effective, then other effective means must be
implemented and tested for effectiveness prior to use.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person is responsible for the lifting equipment and the rescue person will
summon rescue personnel in the event of an emergency.
 The standby person will observe the line to ensure it does not get entangled.
 The rescue person will be responsible for recording test results.
 The outside team will constantly monitor the external environment for possible safety
issues. This includes assessing traffic for proper location; restricting the area to
essential personnel and confirming that the blower intake is constantly drawing fresh air
into the space as required.
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
INSPECTIONS/SERVICING AERATORS:
 Ensure there is natural ventilation across the surface of the ponds. If in doubt utilize
mechanical ventilation as an assist for a minimum 20 minutes prior to entry.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
153
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
DEENERGIZING AND/OR REMOVING SLUDGE PUMP:
 If entry is required for pump removal, implement lockout procedures for those activities
where deenergization is required prior to servicing and replacing.
 If isolation is necessary and single valving is used, engineering approval to verify that
the valve in question is appropriate for this activity is required.
 An entry permit is required for work where lockout or isolation is necessary.
 Use proper rigging methods on the pump if it is being lifted and removed being
cognizant of hoisting equipment capabilities.
 A tool bucket is needed for transferring tools up and down from the space unless the
entry worker has a tool pouch. For removal of equipment, use approved lifting devices.
 If water is required for cleaning of parts, use water buckets or hoses lowered from the
top.
VACUUM TRUCK CLEANING:
 The entry worker must wear ppe appropriate for the material he is to contact.
 Ensure that the entry worker only maneuvers the hose and does not lift and manually
handle the hose. Use the vacuum truck and or outside workers to maintain the proper
amount of hose while the entry worker assists with the vacuuming
 Do not allow the hose end to contact the entry worker while the hose is being moved
around.
PULLING PUMPS:
 Lockout all power sources and verify they are locked out prior to removing pumps.
 Rig all pumps that are being serviced using certified lifting devices and remove from the
space using appropriate lifting equipment. Where feasible, wash the pumps at the base
prior to raising them to the surface.
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
 Remove all tools and equipment using the tool bucket.
 Remove any locks and reactivate the systems.
 The standby and rescue persons will assist the entry person with exiting the space.
 The blower is removed from the space where applicable.
 The ladder is removed from the space.
 The entry person will decontaminate their ppe and wash any contamination from their
person and use a sanitizer after this is completed.
 The supervisor designate will complete the entry permit where applicable and confirm
that the air monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or designate will
notify the call centre that the work is completed.
 The supervisor or designate will file the permit and the team will debrief on the
effectiveness of the confined space entry.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
154
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
10.26 Sewage Lift Stations CSE Procedure
1) Canyon Ridge lift station; 1520 Granite Drive
2) Edelweiss lift station; 1514 11th Avenue N.
3) 14th Street lift station; 820 14th Street S.
4) 12th Street lift station; 150 liftsa Rd.
5) 7th Street lift station; 602 7th Street N.
6) Civic Centre sewage lift station
7) A&T lift station
____________________________________________________________________________
Canyon Ridge Lift Station
[volume 533 cu.ft.]
Edelweiss lift station
[volume 151 cu.ft.]
14th Street lift station
[volume 930 cu.ft]
12th Street lift station
[volume 9148 cu.ft.]
155
Golden Health & Safety Program
7th Street lift station dry side
[volume 1935 cu.ft.]
Civic Centre sewage lift station
[volume 28 cu.ft.]
Confined Space
7th Street lift station wet side
[volume 1935 cu.ft.]
A&T lift station 11th Avenue North
[volume 509 cu.ft.]
HAZARDS
Moderate risk:
Fall into the space from above while space is open
Entry/exit risk of fall
Slip/trip on entry and during winter or wet conditions especially with fixed rungs
Oxygen deficiency from organic material breakdown
Flammable methane buildup from organic material breakdown
H2S buildup from organic material breakdown
Potential contact with raw sewage
Contact with overhead power lines (Edelweiss)
Fall into sewage with grates and hatches open (7th street, 12th street, 14th street and A&T)
Atmospheric hazard moderate
#Main_Table_of_Contents
156
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
Low Risk:
Carbon monoxide from vehicular and gas powered equipment
Possible mould/bacteria
Floor openings to access floats
Overhead material being dropped into space
Possible sharp edges
Contact with mechanical pumps and macerators
Electrical power to the pumps
Rising of sewage levels if pumps stop
Sharps and needles in the raw sewage and possibly into the pump
Address vehicular traffic issues and pedestrian and domestic animal interaction
Low light levels for those stations without fixed illumination or during poor sunlight conditions
Ergonomic concerns with kneeling and awkward posture
PRE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. These include:

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: Visual check of the rescue equipment: davit, winch, rope,
harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to ensure that they are the correct devices and
are in good working order. One person must be designated to verify this activity.

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there are
no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled before
work progresses. For sites with davit anchors, check the integrity of the anchor for
adequacy.

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted
monthly and bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor.

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air on site
to verify that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space

VENTILATOR: The ventilator or fixed ventilation system should be tested to verify it is
operational. The hose should be checked for cuts and holes and repaired if any are
found. Check the fan blades to see if they are dirty and periodically check the fixed
ventilation shroud for leak points. Clean them if this is noted. If a gas powered power
source is used to operate the ventilator, it must be fueled up and checked for proper
operation. It must be located downwind from the ventilator and the space opening. If this
is not practicable, extend
157
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
the exhaust pipe so the exhaust is downwind of both the ventilator and the space
opening. Delegate one person for this activity. When the ventilator is required, it must be
placed upwind of the confined space.

STAFFING: There will always be two persons assigned during any confined space entry
event. One worker will be assigned to be the standby person and will contact the fire
department in the event of a rescue. The second worker will be the entry person. Prior to
entry the team will discuss the work activities and roles to ensure each worker is aware of
their responsibilities. All staff will be trained in confined space entry procedures.

COMMUNICATION: Staff must have an effective means of communication either voice,
radio or other effective means. If background noise levels compromise standard methods
of communication then other effective means MUST be agreed on prior to entry and
periodically assessed for effectiveness.

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Any location where there is potential for contact with
local traffic will require barricades and signage warning of worker activity. Barricades
and work vehicles must be positioned in accordance with Ministry of Transportation
requirements when within their jurisdiction. Signage denoting a confined space entry
should be placed at the periphery of the space. Up top workers must keep animals and
pedestrians away from the work site.

FALL PROTECTION: Where applicable (not required for sites with stairs unless the
space below has an additional location that may warrant fall protection)) the entry person
will don the safety harness and life line and the other worker will confirm proper
installation. The lifeline will be inserted through the davit with attached winch, in
preparation for entry. Portable guardrails are to be placed in front of the outside worker
station to prevent the potential for the outside worker from falling into the opening.

TOOL BUCKET: When required, place all tools or equipment into a tool bucket attached
to a hoisting rope. When the entry operator requires such material it can be lowered by
the outside worker.

PUMP HOISTING DEVICES: Check the rails and chains to verify that there are no kinks or
problems with proper usage. Ensure lifting device is sufficiently rated for the weight of the
pump and that the chain/cable is not contacting any other surface while under load.

ACCESS/EGRESS: For spaces with ladders that have the adjusting hand hold device
ensure that it is fully extended and locked in place for safe entry and exit. The entry
worker will use the lifting device to assist with access/egress of the space. For the A&T lift
station, bring an extension ladder, insert into the space with a minimum 3 feet above the
opening and secured at the top.

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated prior to worker entry. All electrical equipment and
valving must be locked out and isolated AND VERIFIED prior to entry.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
158
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: A worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation is necessary then the
standby worker will contact the ambulance for emergency transport. A first aid record
treatment book must be on site to document any potential injuries. For all rescue
activities, the fire department will be notified prior to entry and shall respond without
undue delay. A written agreement with the fire department regarding rescue services will
verify their ability to respond at all times.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter). The
Towns lockout procedures will be used where applicable.

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle (rubber
safety toed boots for the entry worker), hardhat, safety glasses, leather gloves and/or
disposable nitrile gloves and coveralls with high visibility material incorporated into the
coveralls or with a high visibility vest for traffic control activities. When contact with raw
sewage must take place, include an impermeable apron or full two piece impermeable
gear that can be disinfected.

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require disinfection capabilities for
all ppe contaminated from raw sewage plus washing facilities after exiting the space if
there is any potential for contamination. A portable eye wash with saline solution is
necessary for dealing with any material that enters the eye.

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes place
or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate on site will
complete the documentation for all entry permits.

COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the
prescribed time. The standby worker will be responsible for contacting the fire
department if rescue from the space is required. If the ambulance is the emergency
transportation vehicle, then the supervisor or designate will call directly as required. The
supervisor or designate is responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency and
non-emergency numbers will be kept in all Town vehicles for quick response. These
numbers will also be installed on the mobile phones. Confined space entry drills will take
place annually
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation (i.e. double block &
bleed) procedures are followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
159
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment prior to use in the confined space. Readings
should be between 19.5-23% but ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0 ppm H2S and 0% LEL.
Record this in the testing record sheet. The form should include the date, time of the
test, initials of tester and the levels found.
 Open the access hatch to the confined space and insert the probe at the opening and
measure the air concentrations. Record the levels.
 Insert the probe halfway into the confined space and test the air again. Record the
levels in the test record sheet.
 Insert the probe to the bottom of the space being sure not to immerse the probe end
into any fluid or debris and test the air. Record these values in the test record sheet. If
all three levels are the same then one recorded entry can be made.
 If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do
not enter. Commence ventilation of the space. Retest the space after 20 minutes of
venting. If the readings are back to acceptable levels then entry is permitted with
continuous ventilation.
 Attach the monitor to the entry worker for continuous monitoring of the work
environment. Record the readings on a periodic basis.
 If at any time the alarm sounds, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
 If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
3) VENTILATION:
 Moderate hazard atmospheres require continuous positive ventilation at a minimum rate
of 20 air changes per hour (ach). For the spaces in the lift stations, this works out to:
o 178 cfm for Canyon Ridge lift station;
o 50 cfm for the Edelweiss lift station;
o 310 cfm for the 14th Street lift station;
o 1290 cfm for the 7th street lift station;
o 3050 cfm for the 12th Street lift station (includes all levels);
o 10 cfm for the Civic Centre sewage lift station; and
o 153 cfm for the A&T lift station, 11th Avenue North.
 These sites should be vented for a minimum 20 minutes prior to entry using the existing
fixed ventilation system or the portable blower. The 12th street lift station should utilize
its continuous positive ventilation due to the larger space to vent.
 If a portable blower is used, the ventilation hose must not have more than 2 bends.
Each bend affects the flow rate. The existing ventilator should be able to supply these
flow rates with two bends. The manufacturer should be able to specify what the flow
rates are for no bend (straight duct); one bend; and for two bends.
 The configuration for moderate atmosphere hazard venting, should be with two bends of
the hose or one bend of the hose directed onto a flat plate. See pictorial.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
160
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
Figure 19: Do not use oxygen for ventilation
Figure 20: Do use positive pressure systems, where necessary, to increase effectiveness
of ventilation.




The hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The intake for the
ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and upwind.
Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may enter the
space through the blower.
The ventilation system should be turned on and allowed to purge the space for a
minimum 20 minutes before a second air monitoring test is performed and before the
entry worker accesses the space.
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 The davit system will be set up prior to worker entry.
 The entry worker must always wear the fall arrest harness and lifeline whenever an entry
takes place excluding the 7th street and 12th street sites where permanent stairs are used
unless entry takes place in the lower hatches.
 The stand by worker is charged with attending to the life line and ensuring the entrants
harness is properly connected to the davit and winch.
 This person will keep the slack off the line during entry and exit from the confined space
and will assist the entry worker during entry and exit.
 The standby worker will ensure that the lifeline is not entangled on any equipment while
the entry worker is in the space.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
161
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
5) ENTRY WORKER:
 The entry worker must wear the safety harness and lifeline attached to the lifting device
for any entry into a confined space where vertical ladders, extension ladders or
permanent rungs are used.
 The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry.
 The entry worker will bring the air monitor into the space for continuous readings
 All tools and equipment used for work inside the space cannot be carried by the entry
worker unless a tool pouch is used. Three point contacts with ladder rungs are necessary.
 Where applicable, adjustable ladder hand grips must be raised and locked in place for
safe access and egress.
 Inform the standby person to minimize slack on the lifeline.
 Use proper handling techniques for raising and lowering entry hatches.
 Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to minimize
this hazard.
 Turn on fixed lighting or bring adequate lighting into the space or drop a trouble light into
the space (hooked to GFCI unit) for all work activities when there is insufficient outside
sunlight.
 If work requires kneeling, bring knee pads or a padded floor matt to rest the knees on.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must stay within close proximity to the space and visually observe the
entry person performing their work on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry
person. If verbal communication is not effective, then other effective means must be
implemented and tested for effectiveness prior to use.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person is responsible for the lifting equipment and will summon rescue
personnel in the event of an emergency.
 This person will observe the line to ensure it does not get entangled.
 The standby person will be responsible for recording test results.
 The outside team will constantly monitor the external environment for possible safety
issues. This includes assessing traffic barricades for effectiveness; restricting the public
and neighborhood animals from the work area and confirming that the blower intake is
constantly drawing fresh air into the space.
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
INSPECTIONS/READING GAUGES:
 Ventilation must be on for a minimum 20 minutes prior to entry.
SERVICING BALL VALVES & CHANGING FLOATS:
 Implement lockout procedures for those activities where deenergization is required prior
to servicing and replacing. Lockout of all sources of energy be it gravity, pressure,
electrical, pneumatic, potential, etc. must be deenergized and confirmed it is locked out
before work commences on servicing.
 If isolation is necessary and single valving is used, the use of such single valve lockout will
require engineering approval to confirm that the valve is appropriate for this type of activity.
162
Golden Health & Safety Program





Confined Space
An entry permit is required for work where lockout or isolation is required.
A tool bucket is needed for transferring tools up and down from the space unless the
entry worker has a tool pouch. For removal of equipment, use approved lifting devices.
If a degreaser system is affecting this work activity, then it must be disconnected or shut
off.
If water is required for cleaning of parts, then use water buckets lowered from the top.
When the lower floor grate or hatch is raised, the lifeline must be kept taut and the
worker kept cognizant of potential for falling into the opening. Keep the floor grate and
hatch closed wherever possible.
CLEANING GRATES:
 All grate cleaning must be performed above the platform.
 Ensure the lifeline is taut to minimize inadvertent access to the platform opening.
 Any debris that requires removal is to be placed in a bucket and hauled up with a winch.
GREASE REMOVAL AND CHEMICAL USE:
 Use appropriate cleaning tools for removing accumulated grease. If the amount is
sufficient for disposal, it should be placed in a container and brought up top with the
winch. If a degreaser system is used, it should be disconnected prior to commencement
of this work.
 Chemicals used for reducing the grease accumulation are to be handled according to
the MSDS’s. The entry person will wear chemical splash proof goggles and chemical
resistant gloves when handling this product.
PULLING PUMPS:
 Lockout all power sources prior to removing pumps.
 Connect all pumps that are being serviced and removed from the space using the
installed chain and guide system. Where feasible, wash the pumps at the base prior to
raising them to the surface using the winch.
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
 Remove all tools and equipment using the tool bucket where applicable.
 The standby person will assist the entry person with exiting the space.
 The blower is removed from the space where applicable. The fixed ventilation system is
shut down.
 Remove any locks and reactivate the systems.
 The lid or cover is reattached to close off the space.
 The entry person will decontaminate their ppe and wash any contamination from their
person and use a sanitizer after this is completed.
 The supervisor or designate will complete the entry permit where applicable and confirm
that the air monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or designate will
notify the call centre that the work is completed.
 The supervisor or designate will file the permit and the team will debrief on the
effectiveness of the confined space entry.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
163
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
10.27 Sewage Treatment Plant – Effluent Wet Wells CSE Procedure
1) Effluent wet well east hatch
2) Effluent wet well west hatch
3) Effluent wet well pump hatch
4) Effluent wet well manhole
____________________________________________________________________________
Effluent wet well east hatch
[volume 160 cu.ft., no entry expected]
Effluent wet well west hatch
[volume 160 cu.ft.]
Effluent wet well pump hatch
Effluent wet well manhole
[volume 21 cu.ft]
[volume 37 cu.ft: No entry expected]
Space under plant: 5280 cu. ft. [no entry expected]
HAZARDS
Moderate risk:
Fall into the space from above
Entry/exit risk of fall
Space under plant
Slip/trip on entry and during winter or wet conditions
Contact with bacteria/virus
164
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
Low Risk:
Carbon monoxide from vehicular and gas powered equipment
Overhead material being dropped into space
Possible sharp edges
Noise from vacuum truck
Manual handling of valve
Valve failure leading to effluent ingress
Low light levels during poor sunlight conditions and under plant space
Ergonomic concerns with manual lifting and awkward posture
Flammable methane buildup from organic material breakdown
H2S buildup from organic material breakdown
Pinching of fingers or hands when lowering the hatches or manholes
Atmospheric hazard low
PRE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. These include:

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: Visual check of the rescue equipment: davit, winch, rope,
harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to ensure that they are the correct devices and
are in good working order. One person must be designated to verify this activity.

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there
are no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled
before work progresses. For sites with davit anchors, check the integrity of the anchor
for adequacy.

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted monthly and
bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor.

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air on site to
verify that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space

VENTILATOR: The ventilator system should be tested to verify it is operational. The
hose should be checked for cuts and holes and repaired if any are found. Check the fan
blades to see if they are dirty and periodically check the fixed ventilation shroud for leak
points. Clean them if this is noted. If a gas powered power source is used to operate the
ventilator, it must be fueled up and checked for proper operation. The gas powered
source must be located
#Main_Table_of_Contents
165
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
downwind from the ventilator and the space opening. If this is not practicable, extend the
exhaust pipe so the exhaust is downwind from the ventilator and the space opening.
Delegate one person for this activity. When the ventilator is required, it must be placed
upwind of the confined space.

STAFFING: There will always be two persons on site during any confined space entry
event. One worker will be assigned to be the standby person and will also be the rescue
person who will contact the fire department in the event of a rescue. The second worker
will be the entry person. Prior to entry, the team will discuss the work activities and roles
to ensure each worker is aware of their responsibilities. All staff will be trained in
confined space entry procedures.

COMMUNICATION: Staff must have an effective means of communication either voice,
radio or other effective means. If background noise levels compromise standard methods
of communication then other effective means MUST be agreed on prior to entry and
periodically assessed for effectiveness.

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Any location where there is potential for contact with
mobile equipment will require hi visibility apparel to notify the equipment operators of
worker activity. Signage denoting a confined space entry should be placed at the periphery
of the space. Up top workers must keep non-essential personnel away from the work site.

FALL PROTECTION: The entry person will don the safety harness and life line and the
standby and rescue workers will confirm proper installation. The lifeline will be inserted
through the davit with attached winch, in preparation for entry. Portable guardrails are to
be placed in front of the outside worker station where applicable to prevent the potential
for the outside worker from falling into the opening.
TOOL BUCKET: When required, place all tools or equipment into a tool bucket attached
to a hoisting rope. When the entry operator requires such material it can be lowered by
the outside workers.


EQUIPMENT HOISTING DEVICES: Check the chains/cables to verify that there is no
damage or problems prior to usage. Ensure lifting device is sufficiently rated for the
weight of the equipment being lifted and that the chain/cable is not contacting any other
surface while under load.

ACCESS/EGRESS: With portable ladder access, ensure proper securement and angle
while entering and exiting the space. For built in rungs be cautious when accessing the
first rung. The entry worker will use the lifting device for access/egress of the space. For
fixed rungs, check the integrity of the rungs in the concrete and repair when loose.

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated prior to worker entry.

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: One worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation is necessary then the
supervisor or designate will contact the ambulance for emergency transport. A first aid
#Main_Table_of_Contents
166
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
record treatment book must be on site to document any potential injuries. For all
rescue activities, the fire department will be notified and shall respond without undue
delay. A written agreement with the fire department for rescue purposes will confirm their
availability at all times.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter). All
electrical equipment within the space MUST be locked out, deenergized and verified prior
to entry. Use the town’s lockout procedures where applicable.

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle (rubber
safety toed boots for the entry worker), hardhat, safety glasses, leather gloves and/or
disposable nitrile gloves and coveralls with high visibility material incorporated into the
coveralls or with a high visibility vest for mobile equipment activities. When contact with
treated sewage must take place, include an impermeable apron or full two piece
impermeable gears that can be disinfected.

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require disinfection capabilities for
all ppe contaminated from raw sewage plus washing facilities after exiting the space if
there is any potential for contamination. A portable eye wash with saline solution is
necessary for dealing with any material that enters the eye.

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes place
or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate on site will
complete the documentation for all entry permits.

COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the
prescribed time. The rescue worker will be responsible for contacting the fire
department if rescue from the space is required. If the ambulance is the emergency
transportation vehicle, then the supervisor or designate will call directly as required. The
supervisor or designate is responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency and
non-emergency numbers will be kept in all Town vehicles for quick response. These
numbers will also be installed on the mobile phones. Confined space entry drills will take
place annually
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation (i.e. double block &
bleed) procedures are followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment.
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment prior to use in the confined space. Readings
should be between 19.5-23% but ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0 ppm H2S and 0% LEL.
Record this in the testing record sheet. The form should include the date, time of the test,
initials of tester and the levels found.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
167
Golden Health & Safety Program







Confined Space
Insert the probe at the top of the space. This may require opening the hatch slightly and
inserting the probe and testing the air. Record the levels on the test sheet.
Insert the probe halfway into the confined space and test the air. Record the levels in the
test record sheet.
Insert the probe to the bottom of the space being sure not to immerse the probe end into
any fluid or debris and test the air. Record these values in the test record sheet. If all
three levels are the same then one recorded entry can be made.
If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do not
enter. Commence ventilation of the space. Retest the space after 20 minutes of venting.
If the readings are back to acceptable levels then entry is permitted with continuous
ventilation.
Attach the monitor to the entry worker for continuous monitoring of the work
environment. Record the readings on a periodic basis.
If at any time the alarm sounds, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
3) VENTILATION:
 Low hazard atmospheres require continuous ventilation at a minimum rate of 50 cfm per
person. With spaces under the plant it would be necessary to vent at a rate up to 20
ach’s. For the spaces in the sewage treatment plant effluent wet wells, this works out to:
o 53 cfm for the effluent wet well east hatch;
o 53 cfm for the effluent wet well west hatch;
o 7 cfm for the effluent wet well pump hatch;
o 12 cfm for the effluent wet well manhole; and
o 1760 cfm for the space under the plant
 Where applicable, these sites should be vented for a minimum 20 minutes prior to entry
using the portable blower.
 If a portable blower is used, the ventilation hose must not have more than 2 bends. Each
bend affects the flow rate. With the exception of the space under the plant, the existing
ventilator should be able to supply these flow rates with two bends. The manufacturer
should be able to specify what the flow rates are for no bend (straight duct); one bend;
and for two bends.
 The configuration for continuous low atmosphere hazard venting, should be with two
bends of the hose or one bend of the hose directed onto a flat plate. See pictorial.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
168
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
Figure 21: Do not use oxygen for ventilation
Figure 22: Do use positive pressure systems, where necessary, to increase effectiveness
of ventilation.




The hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The intake for the
ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and upwind.
Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may enter the
space through the blower.
The ventilation system should be turned on and allowed to purge the space for a
minimum 20 minutes before a second air monitoring test is performed and before the
entry worker accesses the space.
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 The lifting system will be set up prior to worker entry.
 The entry worker must always wear the fall arrest harness and lifeline whenever an entry
takes place.
 The stand by worker is charged with attending to the life line and ensuring the entrants
harness is properly connected to the lifting device or davit and winch.
 This person will keep the slack off the line during entry and exit from the confined space
and will assist the entry worker during entry and exit.
 The standby worker will ensure that the lifeline is not entangled on any equipment while
the entry worker is in the space.
 When the extension ladder is introduced into the space, where feasible ensure that it is
placed on a horizontal base, be positioned so that the horizontal distance from the base to
vertical plane of support is approximately ¼ of the ladder length and the top extends a
minimum 3 feet above the upper landing and is secured to ensure stability during use.
169
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
5) ENTRY WORKER:
 The entry worker must wear the safety harness and lifeline attached to the lifting device
for any entry into a confined space where vertical ladder access is used.
 The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry.
 The entry worker will bring the air monitor into the space for continuous readings
 All tools and equipment used for work inside the space cannot be carried by the entry
worker unless a tool pouch is used. Three point contacts with ladder rungs are
necessary.
 Inform the standby person to minimize slack on the lifeline.
 Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to
minimize this hazard.
 Turn on portable lighting or bring adequate lighting (hooked to GFCI unit) for all work
activities when there is insufficient outside sunlight.
 If work requires manual lifting, lift with the knees and keep the back straight.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must stay within close proximity to the space and visually observe
the entry person performing their work on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry
person. If verbal communication is not effective, then other effective means must be
implemented and tested for effectiveness prior to use.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person is responsible for the lifting equipment and will summon rescue
personnel in the event of an emergency.
 The standby person will observe the line to ensure it does not get entangled.
 The rescue person will be responsible for recording test results.
 The outside team will constantly monitor the external environment for possible safety
issues. This includes assessing mobile equipment for proper location; restricting the area
to essential personnel and confirming that the blower intake is constantly drawing fresh
air into the space as required.
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
INSPECTION AND SERVICE CHECK VALVES OR VALVES:
 Ventilation must be on for a minimum 20 minutes prior to entry if work activity is greater
than 15 minutes in duration.
 Implement lockout procedures for those activities where deenergization is required prior
to servicing and replacing.
 If isolation is necessary and single valving is used, engineering approval of this activity is
needed.
 An entry permit is required for work where lockout or isolation is required.
 A tool bucket is needed for transferring tools up and down from the space unless the
entry worker has a tool pouch. For removal of equipment, use approved lifting devices.
 If water is required for cleaning of parts, use water buckets or hoses lowered from the
top.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
170
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
BLOCKED PIPE:
 Ventilation must be on for a minimum 20 minutes prior to entry.
 The entry worker must wear ppe appropriate for the material he is to contact.
 Ensure that the appropriate valves are closed and locked out.
 Drain the space prior to entry
 Bring tools and essential equipment into the space and remove debris causing the
blockage. Load the debris onto buckets for removal and lift out of the space.
 Remove all tools and equipment from the space.
 Exit the space and disinfect ppe and tools
 Open valves and confirm proper operation
PULLING VALVES:
 Ventilation must be on for a minimum 20 minutes prior to entry.
 Lockout all power sources and isolation valves and verify they are locked out prior to
removing VALVES.
 Rig all valves that are being serviced using certified lifting devices and remove from the
space using appropriate lifting equipment. Where feasible, wash the pumps at the base
prior to raising them to the surface.
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
 Remove all tools and equipment using the tool bucket.
 The standby person will assist the entry person with exiting the space.
 The blower is removed from the space where applicable.
 The ladder is removed from the space where required.
 Remove any locks and reactivate the systems.
 Replace the manhole cover using a hooked tool or pick axe to slide the manhole cover
onto the seat. Replace the hatch ensuring the back is straight and the hatch is lowered
using the legs.
 The entry person will decontaminate their ppe and wash any contamination from their
person and use a sanitizer after this is completed.
 The supervisor or designate will complete the entry permit where applicable and confirm
that the air monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or designate will
notify the call centre that the work is completed.
 The supervisor or designate will file the permit and the team will debrief on the
effectiveness of the confined space entry.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
171
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
10.28 Sewage Manholes CSE Procedure
1) Sewer manholes: MULTIPLE sites,
____________________________________________________________________________
Sewer manholes, [multiple sites: 3 ft. to 28 ft. depth (at Deere Ridge Road), ~ volume 38 to 350
cu. ft.]
HAZARDS
Moderate risk:
Fall into the space from above while space
is open, from loss of integrity of ladder
rungs due to corrosion or loosening from
the grout
Entry/exit risk of fall
Slip/trip on entry and during winter or wet
conditions especially with fixed rungs
Oxygen deficiency from organic material
breakdown
Flammable methane buildup from organic
material breakdown
H2S buildup from organic material
breakdown
Potential contact with raw sewage at base
level from lines above and from sewer
system
Atmospheric hazard moderate
Low Risk:
Carbon monoxide from vehicular and gas
powered equipment
Possible mould/bacteria
Overhead material being dropped into
space
Possible sharp edges
Rising of sewage levels
Flammables dumped down the drain
Be aware of sharps and needles in the raw
sewage
Address vehicular traffic issues and
pedestrian and domestic animal interaction
Low light levels during poor sunlight
conditions
Ergonomic concerns with kneeling and
awkward posture
Introduction of chemicals flushed into the
sewer
Noise from vacuum truck
#Main_Table_of_Contents
172
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
PRE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. These include:

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: Visual check of the rescue equipment: davit, winch, rope,
harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to ensure that they are the correct devices and
are in good working order. One person must be designated to verify this activity.

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there are
no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled before
work progresses.

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted
monthly and bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor.

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air on site
to verify that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space

VENTILATOR: The ventilator should be tested to verify it is operational. The hose
should be checked for cuts and holes and repaired if any are found. Check the fan
blades to see if they are dirty and periodically check the fixed ventilation shroud for leak
points. Clean them if this is noted. If a gas powered power source is used to operate the
ventilator, it must be fueled up and checked for proper operation. It must be downwind
from the ventilator and from the space opening during use. If this is not feasible then
extend the exhaust pipe so that the exhaust is located downwind from the ventilator and
the space opening. Delegate one person for this activity. When the ventilator is required,
it must be placed upwind of the confined space.

STAFFING: There will always be a minimum of two persons on site during any
confined space entry event. One worker will be assigned to be the standby person and
will be responsible for contacting the fire department for rescue. The second worker will
be the entry person. Prior to entry the team will discuss the work activities and roles to
ensure each worker is aware of their responsibilities. All staff will be trained in confined
space entry procedures.

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Any location where there is potential for contact with local
traffic will require barricades and signage warning of worker activity. Barricades and work
vehicles must be positioned in accordance with Ministry of Transportation requirements
#Main_Table_of_Contents
173
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
when within their jurisdiction; otherwise the Town’s traffic control procedures will be
used. Signage denoting confined space entry should be placed at the periphery of the
space. Up top workers must keep animals and pedestrians away from the work site.

FALL PROTECTION: The entry person will don the safety harness and life line and
the other worker will confirm proper installation. The lifeline will be inserted through the
lifting device; davit with attached winch, in preparation for entry. Portable guardrails are
to be placed in front of the outside worker station to prevent the potential for the standby
person from falling into the opening.

COMMUNICATION: Staff must have an effective means of communication either voice,
radio or other effective means. If background noise levels compromise standard methods
of communication then other effective means MUST be agreed on prior to entry and
periodically assessed for effectiveness.

TOOL BUCKET: When required, place all tools or equipment into a tool bucket attached
to a hoisting rope. When the entry operator requires such material it can be lowered by
the outside worker. If tools are to be carried then a tool pouch is required.

HOUSEHOLD SEWER LINES DRAINING INTO MANHOLE: To prevent discharge of
household waste onto the entry worker, place bladder devices in the household discharge
pipes. This will prevent potential discharges contacting the entry worker at the bottom of
the manhole. Advise property owners to refrain from any water use or sewer disposal.

ACCESS/EGRESS: For spaces equipped with fixed rungs, ensure that the lifting device
assists with the access and egress of the inside worker. This is necessary since there is
no hand hold above the space for safe entry

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated (if practicable) prior to worker entry if there is a
potential for effluent surging.

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: One worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation is necessary then the
standby worker will access the ambulance for emergency transport. A first aid record
treatment book must be on site to document any potential injuries. For all rescue activity,
the fire department will be notified in the event that a rescue is required. A written
agreement with the fire department will confirm the fire departments availability at all times.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter).
Use of the Town’s lockout procedures will be utilized where applicable.

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle (rubber
safety toed boots for the entry worker), hardhat, safety glasses, leather gloves and/or
#Main_Table_of_Contents
174
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
disposable nitrile gloves and cotton coveralls with high visibility material incorporated into
the coveralls or with a high visibility vest for traffic control. When contact with raw sewage
must take place, use an impermeable apron or rain gear that can be sanitized.

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require disinfection of ppe and
washing facilities after exiting the space if there is any potential for contamination. A
portable eye wash with saline solution is necessary for dealing with any material that
enters the eye. Be observant of sharps and needles in the effluent.

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes place
or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate on site will
complete the documentation for all entry permits.

COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the
prescribed time. The standby worker will be responsible to call the fire department
for rescue from the space. If the ambulance is the emergency transportation vehicle,
then the supervisor or designate will contact as required. The supervisor or designate is
responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency and non-emergency numbers will
be kept in all Town vehicles for quick response. These numbers will also be installed on
the mobile phones. Confined space entry drills will take place annually
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation procedures are
followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment.
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment prior to use in the confined space. Readings
should be between 19.5-23.0% but ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0 ppm H2S and 0%
LEL. Record this in the testing record sheet. The form should include the date, time of
the test, initials of tester and the levels found.
 Insert the probe at the opening and measure the air concentrations. If access holes are
available on the manhole, then the probe will be inserted through the hole for the initial
test. Record the levels.
 Insert the probe halfway into the confined space and test the air again. Record the levels
in the test record sheet.
 Insert the probe to the bottom of the space being sure not to immerse the probe end into
any fluid or debris and test the air. Record these values in the test record sheet. If the
readings are the same at all levels, then one record can be documented.
 If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do not
enter. Commence ventilation of the space. Retest the space after 20 minutes of venting.
If the readings are back to acceptable levels then entry is permitted with continuous
ventilation.
 Attach the monitor to the entry worker for continuous monitoring of the work
environment. Record the readings on a periodic basis.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
175
Golden Health & Safety Program


Confined Space
If at any time the alarm sounds, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
3) VENTILATION:
 Moderate hazard atmospheres require continuous ventilation at a minimum rate of 20 air
changes per hour (ach). For the sewer manholes this works out to:
o 12 cfm for a 3 foot deep manhole to 117 cfm for a 28 foot deep manhole
(assumption that all manholes are 4 feet diameter)
 With the portable blower, the ventilation hose should not have more than 2 bends. Each
bend affects the flow rate. The existing ventilator should be able to supply these flow
rates with two bends. The manufacturer should be able to specify what the flow rates are
for no bend (straight duct); one bend; and for two bends.
 The configuration for moderate atmosphere hazard venting, should be with two bends of
the hose or one bend of the hose directed onto a flat plate. See pictorial.
Figure 23: Do not use oxygen for ventilation
Figure 24: Do use positive pressure systems, where necessary, to increase
effectiveness of ventilation.


The hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The intake for the
ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and upwind.
Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may enter the
space through the blower.
The ventilation system should be turned on and allowed to purge the space for a
minimum 20 minutes before a second air monitoring test is performed and before the
entry worker accesses the space.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
176
Golden Health & Safety Program


Confined Space
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 The davit will be set up prior to worker entry.
 The entry worker must always wear the fall arrest harness and lifeline attached to a
lifting device (davit) whenever an entry takes place.
 The stand by worker is charged with attending to the life line and ensuring the line is
properly attached to the harness.
 This person will keep the slack off the line during entry and exit from the confined space
and will assist the entry worker during entry and exit.
 The standby worker will ensure that the lifeline is not entangled on any equipment while
the entry worker is in the space.
5) ENTRY WORKER:
 The entry worker must wear the safety harness and lifeline attached to the lifting device
for any entry into a confined space.
 The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry.
 The entry worker will bring the air monitor into the space for continuous readings
 All tools and equipment used for work inside the space cannot be carried by the entry
worker unless a tool pouch is used. Three point contacts with the ladder rungs are
necessary.
 Inspect the fixed rungs for looseness and if this is found, then repairs are required.
 Inform the standby person to keep slack out of the lifeline.
 Use proper handling techniques for lifting and lowering manhole covers (use hook tools
and slide cover off opening versus lifting, use legs and keep back straight).
 Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to
minimize this hazard.
 Turn on portable lighting (flashlight/head lamp) in the space or drop a trouble light into
the space for all work activities when there is insufficient outside sunlight.
 If work requires kneeling, bring knee pads to rest the knees on.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must stay within close proximity to the space and visually observe
the entry person performing their work on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry
person.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person is responsible for the lifting equipment and will contact the fire
department if a rescue is required.
 This person will observe the line to ensure it does not get entangled.
 The standby person will be responsible for recording test results.
 The outside team will constantly monitor the external environment for possible safety
issues. This includes assessing traffic barricades for effectiveness; restricting the public
and neighborhood animals from the work area and confirming that the intake is
constantly drawing fresh air into the space.
177
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
INSPECTIONS (PLUGS):
 Ventilation must be on for a minimum 20 minutes prior to entry.
 Install bladders in the household sewer drains if they are above the entry worker.
 Conduct the inspection and when exiting, remove the bladders from the household
drains
 Disinfect all ppe and equipment and after completing this activity, wash hands and face.
GROUTING:
 Ventilation must be on for a minimum 20 minutes prior to entry
 A tool bucket is needed for transferring tools up and down from the space unless the
entry worker has a tool pouch.
 Be aware that some grouting material has silicon additives. Silicone will poison the LEL
sensor. The blower should be positioned to blow from above which should keep any
vapour release away from the sensor.
 Install bladders in the household sewer drains if they are above the entry worker.
 Conduct the repair and when exiting, remove the bladders from the household drains
 Disinfect all ppe and equipment and after completing this activity, wash hands and face.
GREASE REMOVAL AND CHEMICAL USE:
 Chemicals used for reducing the grease accumulation are to be handled according to the
MSDS’s. The entry person will wear chemical splash proof goggles and chemical
resistant gloves when handling this product.
JETRODDING:
 Insert rod into space and if necessary enter space to direct rod into sewer.
 Prior to full entry, install bladders in the household sewer drains if they are above the
entry worker.
 Notify affected households of the use of bladders.
 Complete the jet rodding and remove the rod from the sewer.
 Where feasible, clean the rod with water as it is being brought up to the surface.
 Remove the bladders and disinfect and ppe and equipment.
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
 Remove all tools and equipment using the tool bucket where feasible.
 The standby person will assist the entry person with exiting the space.
 The blower is removed from the space.
 Remove any locks and isolation points and reactivate the systems if applicable.
 The lid or cover is reattached (slide back on) to close off the space. DO NOT use hands
to reattach the lid. Only use approved hook tools or a pick axe to when handling the
manhole cover.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
178
Golden Health & Safety Program



Confined Space
The team will disinfect all equipment in contact with the space activities and wash their
hands and face on completion.
The supervisor or designate will complete the entry permit where applicable and confirm
that the air monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or designate will
notify the call centre that the work is completed.
The supervisor or designate will file the permit and the team will debrief on the
effectiveness of the confined space entry.
10.29 Transfer Manhole to Aeration Ponds Space CSE Procedure
1) Transfer manhole to aeration ponds space
____________________________________________________________________________
Transfer manhole to aeration ponds space
[Volume ~38 cu. ft.: No entry anticipated, only visual from above]
HAZARDS
Moderate risk:
O2 deficiency
LEL exposure
H2S exposure
Fall into the space from above while space
is open
Entry/exit risk of fall
Slip/trip on entry and during winter or wet
conditions
Atmosphere hazard class is moderate
Low Risk:
Valve failure resulting in fluid entry
Carbon monoxide from vehicular and gas
powered equipment
Possible mould/bacteria
Overhead material being dropped into space
Possible sharp edges
Be aware of weather conditions
Low lighting levels if overcast day
Electrical exposure from external lights
Ergonomic concerns with kneeling and
awkward postures
Fluid accumulation
Noise from vacuum truck
#Main_Table_of_Contents
179
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
PRE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. It is not anticipated that
entry will occur. This information is in place if such an entry does occur. These include:

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: No rescue equipment is anticipated in the event of an entry.
The height is shallow enough for rescue personnel to remove the worker. If staff
does consider the use of the rescue equipment, conduct a visual check of the rescue
equipment: davit, winch, rope, harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to ensure that they
are the correct devices and are in good working order. One person must be designated to
verify this activity.

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there are
no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled before
work progresses. If a davit is being used, check the anchor point for proper integrity prior
to usage.

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted monthly and
bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor.

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air to verify
that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space

VENTILATOR: The use of a ventilator is not anticipated for entry due to the shallow
space of the manhole and the near proximity to open atmosphere. If staff considers
the use of a ventilator then the ventilator should be tested to verify it is operational. The
hose should be checked for cuts and holes and repaired if any are found. Check the fan
blades to see if they are dirty. Clean them if this is noted. If a gas powered power source is
used to operate the ventilator, it must be fueled up and checked for proper operation. It
must be located downwind from the ventilator and the space opening during use. If this is
not practicable, extend the exhaust pipe so the exhaust is directed downwind of the
ventilator and the space opening. Delegate one person for this activity. When the ventilator
is required, it must be placed upwind of the confined space.

STAFFING: There will be two persons on site during any confined space entry event. One
worker will be assigned to be the standby person and will be responsible for contacting the
fire department for rescue. The second worker will be the entry person. Prior to entry the
#Main_Table_of_Contents
180
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
team will discuss the work activities and roles to ensure each worker is aware of their
responsibilities. All staff will be trained in confined space entry procedures.

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Signage denoting a confined space entry should be
placed at the periphery of the space.

FALL PROTECTION: No fall protection is anticipated for this space if entry is
required. If staff considers the use of fall protection the entry person will don the safety
harness and life line and the other worker will confirm proper installation. The lifeline
will be inserted through the lifting device; davit with attached winch, in preparation for
entry. Portable guardrails are to be placed in front of the outside worker station to
prevent the potential for falling into the opening if a hazard exists.

TOOL BUCKET: When required, place all tools or equipment into a tool pouch. When
the entry operator requires such material it can be handed directly by the outside worker.
A bucket for debris can also be handed to the entry worker from above.

ACCESS/EGRESS: With no fixed ladder rungs, be cautious of access and egress and
try to maintain three point contacts. If difficulty with such entry is identified then ensure
that the lifting device assists with the access and egress of the inside worker. This may
be necessary since there is no hand hold above the space for safe entry or ladder rungs
for secure entry and exit.

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated (if practicable) prior to worker entry.

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: One worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation is necessary then the
standby worker will have ready access to the ambulance for emergency transport. A first
aid record treatment book must be on site to document any potential injuries. The fire
department will act as the rescue team and will be contacted when required. A written
agreement with the fire department will ensure the fire department is available for rescue
at all times.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter). Use
the Towns lockout procedures where applicable for lockout of the sewage infeed.

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle, hardhat,
safety glasses, leather gloves and/or disposable nitrile gloves and cotton coveralls with
high visibility material incorporated into the coveralls or with a high visibility vest in areas
where traffic control is required. Areas where wet environments are prevalent will require
safety toed rubber boots and wet gear.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
181
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require washing facilities after
exiting the space if there is any potential for contamination. A portable eye wash with
saline solution is necessary for dealing with any material that enters the eye.

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes place
or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate on site will
complete the documentation for all entry permits.

COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the
prescribed time. The standby worker will be responsible to contact the fire
department for rescue from the space. If the ambulance is the emergency transportation
vehicle, then the supervisor or designate will contact them as required. The supervisor or
designate is responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency and non-emergency
numbers will be kept in all Town vehicles for quick response. These numbers will also be
installed on the mobile phones. Confined space entry drills will take place annually.
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation (i.e. double block &
bleed) procedures are followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment.
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment at the site prior to use in the confined space.
Readings should be between 19.5-23.0% but ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0 ppm H2S
and 0% LEL. Record this in the testing record sheet. The form should include the date,
time of the test, initials of tester and the levels found.
 Insert the probe halfway into the confined space and test the air again. Record the levels
in the test record sheet.
 Insert the probe to the bottom of the space being sure not to immerse the probe end into
any fluid or debris and test the air. If the readings are the same at all three levels, record
as one value in the test record sheet.
 If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do not
enter. Commence ventilation of the space. Retest the space after 20 minutes of venting.
If the readings are back to acceptable levels then entry is permitted with continuous
ventilation.
 Attach the monitor to the entry worker for continuous monitoring of the work environment.
Record the readings on a periodic basis.
 If at any time the alarm sounds, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
 If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
3) VENTILATION:
 Due to the close proximity or the opening to atmosphere it is not anticipated that
mechanical ventilation will be necessary.
 #Main_Table_of_Contents
182
Golden Health & Safety Program



Confined Space
Moderate hazard atmospheres require continuous ventilation at a minimum rate of 20 air
changes per hour (ach). If air monitoring readings are outside of normal then continuous
ventilation is required. If readings are acceptable then natural ventilation may suffice as
long as continuous monitoring is utilized. For the space in the transfer manhole to
aeration ponds space this works out to:
o 13 cfm for the transfer manhole to aeration ponds space
The ventilation hose must not have more than 2 bends. Each bend affects the flow rate.
The existing ventilator should be able to supply this flow rate with two bends. The
manufacturer should be able to specify what the flow rates are for no bend (straight duct);
one bend; and for two bends.
The configuration for moderate atmosphere hazard venting, should be with two bends of
the hose or one bend of the hose directed onto a flat plate. See pictorial.
Figure 25: Do not use oxygen for ventilation
Figure 26: Do use positive pressure systems where necessary, to increase
effectiveness of ventilation



The hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The intake for the
ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and upwind.
Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may enter the
space through the blower.
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 When applicable, the lifting device must be set up prior to worker entry into the space.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
183
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

The entry worker must always wear the fall arrest harness and lifeline whenever an entry
takes place.

The stand by worker is charged with attending to the life line and ensuring entrant’s
harness is properly connected.
This person will keep the slack off the line during entry and exit from the confined space
and will assist the entry worker during entry and exit.

5) ENTRY WORKER:
 When applicable, the entry worker must wear the safety harness and lifeline attached to
the lifting device for any entry into a confined space.
 The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry.
 All tools and equipment used for work inside the space cannot be carried by the entry
worker unless a tool pouch is used or the outside worker hands the items to the entry
worker. Three point contacts would not be feasible.
 For entry, if safe access and egress is not effective with the existing layout, the use of
the lifting device would be required to ensure safe access and egress since there are no
ladder rungs or effective hand holds above the confined space entrance.
 Inform the standby person to prevent slack on the lifeline.
 Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to
minimize this hazard.
 Bring adequate lighting into the space or drop a trouble light (attached to GFCI) into the
space for all work activities and when there is insufficient outside sunlight.
 If work requires kneeling, bring knee pads or a floor matt to rest the knees on.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must stay within close proximity to the space and visually observe
the entry person performing their work on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry
person.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person is responsible for the lifting equipment when required and will affect
rescue through phone contact with the fire department.
 This person will observe the line to ensure it does not get entangled.
 The standby person will be responsible for recording test results.
 The outside team will constantly monitor the external environment for possible safety
issues. This includes monitoring mobile equipment activity and confirming that the intake
is constantly drawing fresh air into the space.
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
REMOVING PLUGS:
 Drain the fluid from the space with a vacuum pump.
 Double block and bleed is required for servicing valves under pressure.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
184
Golden Health & Safety Program







Confined Space
If single valves are used for isolation, it is necessary to obtain engineering approval of
this activity.
An entry permit is required for work if isolation lockout is used.
A waste bucket is needed for removing debris from the plug.
Remove the plug.
Exit the space using the lifting devices if required.
Ensure all isolation locks are removed.
Open the appropriate valves and deactivate the lockout and test to confirm appropriate
function.
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
 All tools and equipment is removed.
 The blower is removed from the space where applicable.
 The standby person will assist the entry person with exiting the space.
 The isolation lockouts are removed where applicable and the process is observed for
proper function.
 The supervisor or designate will complete the entry permit where applicable and confirm
that the air monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or designate will
notify the call centre that the work is completed.
 The supervisor or designate will file the permit and the team will debrief on the
effectiveness of the confined space entry.
10.30 Wading Pool Mechanical Room CSE Procedure
1) Wading pool mechanical room
_______________________________________
Wading pool mechanical room
[Volume: 560 cu. Ft.]
#Main_Table_of_Contents
185
Golden Health & Safety Program
HAZARDS
Moderate risk:
Entry/exit risk of fall
Slip/trip on entry and during wet
conditions
Confined Space
Low Risk:
Chlorine gas
Possible bacteria/virus
Sharp edges and overhead impact
hazards
Low light levels
Mechanical equipment contact
Electrical contact with live equipment
Ergonomic concerns with kneeling and
awkward posture
Atmospheric hazard class low
NOTE: Adjusting the angle of the stairs to less than 45 degrees would remove this space from
the criteria specified for a confined space to an enclosed space.
PRE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
If entry is required, prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. These include:

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: Use of rescue equipment is not anticipated. If such
equipment is considered, visual check of the rescue equipment: lifting device, winch,
rope, harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to ensure that they are the correct devices
and are in good working order. One person must be designated to verify this activity.

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there are
no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled before
work progresses. Check the lifting device to verify the integrity and function.

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted monthly and
bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor. If test results
indicate good air quality over a minimum 6 air checks, then further air testing would not be
required as long as the conditions do not change within this space.

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test. The alarm settings
should be noted and recorded.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air at the site
to verify that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space
#Main_Table_of_Contents
186
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

VENTILATOR: The ventilator is not anticipated to be used. There should be sufficient
mechanical ventilation within the building. If such equipment is considered, the ventilator
should be tested to verify it is operational. The hose should be checked for cuts and
holes and repaired if any are found. Confirm the connection between the hose and
blower is effective. Check the fan blades to see if they are dirty. Clean them if this is
noted. Delegate one person for this activity.

STAFFING: There will be a minimum two persons during any confined space entry
event. One worker will be assigned to be the standby person and will be responsible to
affect rescue by contacting the fire department. The second worker will be the entry
person. Prior to entry the team will discuss the work activities and roles to ensure each
worker is aware of their responsibilities. All staff will be trained in confined space entry
procedures.

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Signage denoting a confined space entry should be
placed at the periphery of the space.

FALL PROTECTION: Fall protection is not required.

TOOL BUCKET: When required, place all tools into a tool belt. When the entry operator
requires equipment it can be brought in with the assistance of the outside worker.

ACCESS/EGRESS: For spaces where chemical exposure may affect safe access and
egress, ensure that the atmosphere is vented to acceptable values. Access/egress will
be conducted using the existing stairs.

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated prior to worker entry.

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: One worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation is necessary then the
standby worker will have ready access to the ambulance for emergency transport. A first
aid record treatment book must be on site to document any potential injuries. For all
rescue events, the fire department will be contacted without delay. A written agreement
with the fire department regarding rescue services will ensure their availability at all
times.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter). All
internal electrical sources will be locked out and verified prior to entry.

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle, hardhat,
safety glasses, leather gloves and/or disposable nitrile gloves and cotton coveralls with
high visibility material incorporated into the coveralls. For wet work the inside worker will
wear safety toed rubber boots and wet gear as required.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
187
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

COMMUNICATION: Staff must have an effective means of communication either voice,
radio or other effective means. If background noise levels compromise standard methods
of communication then other effective means MUST be agreed on prior to entry and
periodically assessed for effectiveness.

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require washing facilities after
exiting the space if there is any potential for contamination. A portable eye wash with
saline solution is necessary for dealing with any material that enters the eye.

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes place
or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate on site will
complete the documentation for all entry permits.

COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the
prescribed time. The standby worker will be responsible for contacting the fire
department who will affect rescue from the space. If the ambulance is the emergency
transportation vehicle, then the supervisor will call directly as required. The supervisor or
designate is responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency and non-emergency
numbers will be kept in all Town vehicles for quick response. These numbers will also
be installed on the mobile phones. Confined space entry drills will take place annually.
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation (i.e. double block &
bleed) procedures are followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment. This is the
responsibility of the supervisor or designate.
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment prior to use in the confined space. Readings
should be between 19.5-23.0% but ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0 ppm H2S and 0%
LEL. Record this in the testing record sheet. The form should include the date, time of
the test, initials of tester and the levels found.
 Insert the probe at the entrance into the confined space and test the air. Record the
levels in the test record sheet. Record these values in the test record sheet.
 If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do not
enter, commence ventilation of the space. Retest the space after 20 minutes of venting.
If the readings are back to acceptable levels then entry is permitted with continuous
ventilation.
 If there is chlorine lines in the vicinity it would be appropriate to test the air for chlorine at
the entrance using either a direct reading colourimetric tube or permanently mounted
meter. If any readings are >0.5 ppm leave the space and initiate a chlorine repair to
source out the leak while monitoring continuously.
 Record the readings on a periodic basis.
 If at any time the alarm sounds, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
188
Golden Health & Safety Program


Confined Space
If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
Monitoring should take place for a period to obtain historical monitoring data and once
test results indicate only clean air values no further testing would be required unless
process changes occur.
3) VENTILATION:
 If the space is a low atmosphere hazard, the worker is in the space for less than 15
minutes and the work inside the space does not generate contaminants other than
exhaled air then positive ventilation is not required.
 For all other entries, continuous positive ventilation is required. A minimum 50 cfm per
person of fresh air into the space is acceptable for low hazard atmospheres. The
existing ventilation system may suffice for this requirement.
 For moderate hazard atmospheres, continuous ventilation at a minimum rate of 20 air
changes per hour (ach) is desired. For the spaces in the room this works out to:
o 186 cfm.
 If required, the ventilation hose must not have more than 2 bends. Each bend affects
the flow rate. The existing ventilator should be able to supply this flow rate with two
bends. The manufacturer should be able to specify what the flow rates are for no bend
(straight duct); one bend; and for two bends.
 The configuration for low atmosphere hazard venting, should be with two bends of the
hose or one bend of the hose directed onto a flat plate. See pictorial.
Figure 27: Do not use oxygen for ventilation.
Figure 28: Do use positive pressure systems, where necessary, to increase
effectiveness of ventilation.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
189
Golden Health & Safety Program



Confined Space
The hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The intake for the
ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and upwind.
Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may enter the
space through the blower.
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 The work activity in the room should not require fall protection. Access to the worker can
be obtained at the stairs.
5) ENTRY WORKER:
 The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry. For wet environments use
safety toed rubber boots and wet gear to enter.
 All tools and equipment used for work inside the space can be carried by the entry worker
preferably with a tool pouch. Three point contact while entering the space is preferred.
 Inform the standby person of entry.
 Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to minimize
this hazard.
 Bring adequate lighting into the space or drop a trouble light (connected to a GFCI) into
the space for all work activities when there is insufficient illumination.
 If work requires kneeling, bring knee pads or a floor matt to rest the knees on.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must be assigned and contact the entry person performing their work
on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry person.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person will contact the fire department if a rescue is required.
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
INSPECTIONS:
 For work activities less than 15 minutes duration where no air contaminants are
generated, no ventilation is required.
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS:
 If single valves are used for isolation, it is necessary to obtain engineering approval to
verify that the valve is appropriate for this activity.
 An entry permit is required for work using double block and bleed isolation.
 For low hazard atmospheres, if the work is less than 15 minutes duration where no
contaminants are generated, then no ventilation is required. If the work is greater than 15
minutes then continuous ventilation is needed. This can be through a fixed ventilation
system. A minimum of 50 cfm per worker is required.
 A safe means of handling tools is needed to ensure that three point contacts are met
when entering and exiting the space.
 Ensure that all appropriate electrical equipment is locked out and verified.
190
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
 Where required, the blower is removed from the space when work is completed.
 The standby person will verify the entry person exited the space.
 The double block and bleed and or lockout are removed where applicable and the
equipment is observed for leaks.
 The supervisor or designate will complete the entry permit where applicable and
confirm that the air monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or
designate will notify the call centre that the work is completed.
 The supervisor or designate will file the permit and the team will debrief on the
effectiveness of the confined space entry.
10.31 Water Metering Valve Chambers CSE Procedure
1) NE reservoir pressure transducer chamber
2) Bearspaw reservoir vault
3) Gunnite valve chamber
4) Hypalon valve chamber
5) Hypalon drain manhole
191
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
____________________________________________________________________________
NE Reservoir pressure transducer chamber
[Volume 385 cu. ft.]
Bearspaw reservoir vault
[Volume 516 cu. Ft.]
Gunnite valve chamber
[Volume 690 cu.ft.]
Hypalon valve chamber
[Volume 672 cu.ft.]
#Main_Table_of_Contents
192
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
Hypalon drain manhole
[Volume 251 cu.ft.]
HAZARDS
Moderate risk:
Fall into the space from above while space is open
Entry/exit risk of fall
Slip/trip on entry and during winter or wet conditions
Low Risk:
O2 deficiency
Possible buildup of H2S from organic material breakdown
Carbon monoxide from vehicular and gas powered equipment
Possible mould/bacteria
Overhead material being dropped into space
Possible sharp edges
Water runoff from curb (Granite drive access to PRV)
Watch for leaks from pressure system resulting in flooding
Be aware of weather conditions and potential water accumulation
Possible entrapment and life line entanglement if working on the other side of the piping
Electrical power for lights, heat and panel
Address pedestrian and domestic animal interaction
Low light levels if there is a power failure or for sites not equipped with power.
Ergonomic concerns with kneeling and awkward posture
Atmospheric hazard class low
PRE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. These include:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
193
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: Visual check of the rescue equipment: davit, winch, rope,
harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to ensure that they are the correct devices and
are in good working order. One person must be designated to verify this activity.

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there are
no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled before
work progresses. If a davit is being used, check the anchor point for proper integrity prior
to usage.

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted monthly and
bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor.

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air to verify
that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space

VENTILATOR: The ventilator should be tested to verify it is operational. The hose should
be checked for cuts and holes and repaired if any are found. Check the fan blades to see
if they are dirty. Clean them if this is noted. If a gas powered power source is used to
operate the ventilator, it must be fueled up and checked for proper operation, is
positioned away from the ventilator and the confined space entry point during use or if this
is not practicable, extend the exhaust pipe and position it downwind. Delegate one person
for this activity. When the ventilator is required, it must be placed upwind of the confined
space. For openings with small access, a restrictor will need to be inserted at the
opening.

STAFFING: There will be two persons on site during any confined space entry event.
One worker will be assigned to be the standby person and will be responsible for
contacting the fire department for rescue. The second worker will be the entry person.
Prior to entry the team will discuss the work activities and roles to ensure each worker is
aware of their responsibilities. All staff will be trained in confined space entry procedures.

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Any location where there is potential for contact with
local traffic will require barricades and signage warning of worker activity. Barricades
and work vehicles must be positioned in accordance with Ministry of Transportation
requirements if within their jurisdiction or with the Towns procedures. Signage denoting a
confined space entry should be placed at the periphery of the space.

FALL PROTECTION: The entry person will don the safety harness and life line and the
other worker will confirm proper installation. The lifeline will be inserted through the lifting
device; davit with attached winch, in preparation for entry. Portable guardrails, where
#Main_Table_of_Contents
194
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
feasible, are to be placed in front of the outside worker station to prevent the potential for
falling into the opening.

TOOL BUCKET: When required, place all tools or equipment into a tool bucket attached
to a hoisting rope. When the entry operator requires such material it can be lowered by
the outside worker.

ACCESS/EGRESS: For spaces equipped with fixed ladder rungs, ensure that the lifting
device assists with the access and egress of the inside worker. This is necessary since
there is no hand hold above the space for safe entry. For spaces with ladders that have
the adjusting hand hold device, ensure that it is fully extended and locked in place for safe
entry and exit.

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated prior to worker entry.

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: One worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation is necessary then the
standby worker will contact the ambulance for emergency transport. A first aid record
treatment book must be on site to document any potential injuries. The fire department
will act as the rescue team and will be contacted when required. A written agreement will
be prepared stipulating the fire department is available 24 hours a day for confined space
entry rescue

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter). Use
the Town’s lockout procedures where applicable.

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle, hardhat,
safety glasses, leather gloves and/or disposable nitrile gloves and cotton coveralls with
high visibility material incorporated into the coveralls or with a high visibility vest in areas
where traffic control is required.

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require washing facilities after
exiting the space if there is any potential for contamination. A portable eye wash with
saline solution is necessary for dealing with any material that enters the eye.

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes place
or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate on site will
complete the documentation for all entry permits.

COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the prescribed
time. The standby worker will be responsible to contact the fire department for rescue
from the space. If the ambulance is the emergency transportation vehicle, then the
#Main_Table_of_Contents
195
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
supervisor or designate will contact them as required. The supervisor or designate is
responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency and non-emergency numbers will
be kept in all Town vehicles for quick response. These numbers will also be installed on
the mobile phones. Confined space entry drills will take place annually.
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation (i.e. double block &
bleed) procedures are followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment.
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment at the site prior to use in the confined space.
Readings should be between 19.5-23.0% but ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0 ppm H2S
and 0% LEL. Record this in the testing record sheet. The form should include the date,
time of the test, initials of tester and the levels found.
 Open the access hatch to the confined space and insert the probe at the opening and
measure the air concentrations. Record the levels.
 Insert the probe halfway into the confined space and test the air again. Record the
levels in the test record sheet.
 Insert the probe to the bottom of the space being sure not to immerse the probe end into
any fluid or debris and test the air. If the readings are the same at all three levels, record
as one value in the test record sheet.
 If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do not
enter. Commence ventilation of the space. Retest the space after 20 minutes of venting.
If the readings are back to acceptable levels then entry is permitted with continuous
ventilation.
 Attach the monitor to the entry worker for continuous monitoring of the work
environment. Record the readings on a periodic basis.
 If at any time the alarm sounds, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
 If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
3) VENTILATION:
 If the space is a low atmosphere hazard, the worker is in the space for less than 15
minutes and the work inside the space does not generate contaminants other than
exhaled air then positive ventilation is not required.
 For all other entries, continuous positive ventilation is required either from a portable
blower or a fixed ventilation system. A minimum 50 cfm per person of fresh air into the
space is acceptable for low hazard atmospheres.
 Where contaminants are introduced, moderate hazard atmospheres require continuous
ventilation at a minimum rate of 20 air changes per hour (ach). For the spaces in the
water metering stations this works out to:
o 128 cfm for the NE reservoir pressure transducer chamber;
o 172 cfm for the Bearspaw reservoir vault;
#Main_Table_of_Contents
196
Golden Health & Safety Program


Confined Space
o 230 cfm for the Gunnite reservoir chamber;
o 224 cfm for the Hypalon Valve chamber; and
o 84 cfm for the Hypalon drain manhole.
The ventilation hose must not have more than 2 bends. Each bend affects the flow rate.
The existing ventilator should be able to supply this flow rate with two bends. The
manufacturer should be able to specify what the flow rates are for no bend (straight
duct); one bend; and for two bends. For fixed ventilation systems a periodic assessment
of the flow rates will confirm adequate fresh air flow capacity.
The configuration for moderate or low atmosphere hazard venting, should be with two
bends of the hose or one bend of the hose directed onto a flat plate. See pictorial.
Figure 29: Do not use oxygen for ventilation
Figure 30: Do use positive pressure systems where necessary, to increase effectiveness
of ventilation



The hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The intake for the
ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and upwind.
Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may enter the
space through the blower.
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 The lifting device must be set up prior to worker entry into the space.
 The entry worker must always wear the fall arrest harness and lifeline whenever an entry
takes place.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
197
Golden Health & Safety Program


Confined Space
The stand by worker is charged with attending to the life line and ensuring entrant’s
harness is properly connected.
This person will keep the slack off the line during entry and exit from the confined space
and will assist the entry worker during entry and exit.
5) ENTRY WORKER:
 The entry worker must wear the safety harness and lifeline attached to the lifting device
for any entry into a confined space.
 The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry.
 All tools and equipment used for work inside the space cannot be carried by the entry
worker unless a tool pouch is used. Three point contacts with the ladder rungs are
necessary.
 Inspect the ladder for any deterioration and repair without undue delay.
 For entry with ladder systems that do not have the hand hold extender pole, the use of
the lifting device is needed to ensure safe access and egress since there are no
effective hand holds above the confined space entrance. For ladders with the hand hold
extender pole, pull it up and lock it in place and use this hand hold for safe access and
egress. For the Hypalon drain manhole use the harness and lifeline as a means to
assist the inside worker if rescue is required.
 Inform the standby person to prevent slack on the lifeline.
 Use proper handling techniques for lifting access hatches. Use two people when
possible.
 Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to
minimize this hazard.
 Bring adequate lighting into the space or drop a trouble light (attached to GFCI) into the
space for all work activities where there is no fixed illumination and when there is
insufficient outside sunlight.
 If work requires kneeling, bring knee pads or a floor matt to rest the knees on.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must stay within close proximity to the space and visually observe
the entry person performing their work on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry
person.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person is responsible for the lifting equipment and will affect rescue
through phone contact with the fire department.
 This person will observe the line to ensure it does not get entangled.
 The standby person will be responsible for recording test results.
 The outside team will constantly monitor the external environment for possible safety
issues. This includes assessing traffic barricades for effectiveness; restricting the public
and neighborhood animals from the work area and confirming that the intake is
constantly drawing fresh air into the space.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
198
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
INSPECTIONS:
 For work activities less than 15 minutes duration where no air contaminants are
generated, no ventilation is required.
ELECTRICAL REPAIRS:
 All electrical repairs require lockout of the energy source prior to servicing the unit.
FIXING LEAKS/SERVICING VALVES:
 Double block and bleed is required for servicing valves.
 If single valves are used for isolation, it is necessary to obtain engineering approval to
verify that the valve is appropriate for this activity.
 All valve shut offs for double block and bleed should be conducted from the outside
where possible.
 An entry permit is required for work using double block and bleed isolation.
 If the work is less than 15 minutes duration where no contaminants are generated, then
no ventilation is required. If the work is greater than 15 minutes then continuous
ventilation is needed. A minimum of 50 cfm per worker is required where activities do not
generate a contaminant.
 For work areas where chemical additives are introduced, the source must be
disconnected and the line purged to prevent any residual from contacting the entry
worker. Workers must be aware of the hazards of these chemicals and the PPE needed
for protection.
 A tool bucket is needed for transferring equipment up and down from the space unless
the entry worker has a tool pouch.
WELDING/CUTTING:
 The worker conducting this activity must wear a P100 dual cartridge half mask respirator
with continuous ventilation into the space to minimize fume accumulation.
 If possible use local exhaust ventilation at the welding source.
 The worker will gauge the work activity to minimize the accumulation of fumes.
 Continuous air monitoring is needed to verify the air quality.
 If cutting torches are used, they must be removed from the space whenever workers
leave the space.
CHEMICAL HANDLING:
 Any sources of chemicals will be handled with chemical resistant gloves, splash proof
goggles and spill kits.
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
 All tools and equipment is removed with the tool bucket.
 The blower is removed from the space where applicable.
 The standby person will assist the entry person with exiting the space.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
199
Golden Health & Safety Program




Confined Space
The double block and bleed and/or lockouts are removed where applicable and the
equipment is observed for leaks.
The lid is reattached to close off the space.
The supervisor or designate will complete the entry permit where applicable and confirm
that the air monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or designate will
notify the call centre that the work is completed.
The supervisor or designate will file the permit and the team will debrief on the
effectiveness of the confined space entry.
10.32 Water Reservoirs CSE Procedure
1) NE reservoirs (2 storage tanks), 451 Lafontaine Rd.
2) Bearspaw reservoir, 2050 Bowle-Evans Rd.
3) Selkirk reservoir (Gunnite), 101-1600 Maple Drive
4) Hypalon Reservoir,
____________________________________________________________________________
Water storage tank, NE reservoirs;
[Volume sm. 27884/lg. 49534 cu.ft.]
Selkirk reservoir (Gunnite):
[Volume 51050 cu.ft.]
Bearspaw reservoir;
[Volume 43,745 cu.ft.]
Hypalon reservoir;
[Volume 88,357 cu.ft.]
#Main_Table_of_Contents
200
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
HAZARDS
Moderate risk:
Fall into the space from above while space is open
Falls into space due to corrosion of ladder rungs (Selkirk reservoir (Gunnite))
Entry/exit risk of fall
Slip/trip on entry and during winter or wet conditions
Excess levels of chlorine or chlorine products from bleaching process
Poor visibility from power washing process
Possible poor communication from echo effect
Ergonomic risks with manual material handling of the ladder (Selkirk reservoir)
Falls from the roof (Selkirk Reservoir (Gunnite))
Sloping slippery floor (Hypalon)
Low Risk:
O2 deficiency
Possible buildup of H2S from organic material breakdown
Carbon monoxide from vehicular and gas powered equipment
Possible mould/bacteria
Overhead material being dropped into space
Possible sharp edges
Electrical power for existing equipment
Energized equipment within the space
Water in the space
Noise from power washing equipment and reverberation
Low light levels
Possible public and animal interference
Possible vehicle usage adjacent to space
Atmospheric hazard class low
PRE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Prior to entry the items listed below must be addressed and available on site:
Verify all confined space entry systems used are in good working order. These include:

RESCUE EQUIPMENT: Visual check of the rescue equipment: davit, tripod, winch,
rope, harness, lanyard, clips, carabiners, etc. to ensure that they are the correct devices
and are in good working order. One person must be designated to verify this activity.

SITE INSPECTION: Prior to set up, all staff must inspect the area to verify that there are
no preexisting hazards. If any hazards are identified then they must be controlled before
work progresses. If there are anchor points for davit use, they must be checked for
effectiveness prior to use.

AIR MONITOR: Ensure that the air monitor is calibrated and bump tested in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Ideally the calibration should be conducted
monthly and bump tested prior to any entry. Only trained staff will use the monitor.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
201
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

CALIBRATION AND SPAN GASES: One person must be designated to ensure the
monitor is calibrated and bump tested in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
This person must ensure the unit is serviced according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The span gases must be regularly checked to guarantee the cylinder is not expired and
that there is sufficient gas to conduct a calibration and bump test.

CLEAN AIR TEST: Prior to using the air monitor, it must be tested in clean air at the site
to verify that the unit is operating properly before being used in the confined space

VENTILATOR: The ventilator should be tested to verify it is operational. The hose should
be checked for cuts and holes and repaired if any are found. Check the fan blades to see
if they are dirty. Clean them if this is noted. If a gas powered power source is used to
operate the ventilator, it must be fueled up and checked for proper operation. It must be
positioned downwind from the ventilator and the space opening during use. If this is not
feasible use extended exhaust piping which must be vented downwind of the ventilator
and the space opening. Delegate one person for this activity. When the ventilator is
required, it must be placed upwind of the confined space. For openings with small
access, a restrictor will need to be inserted at the opening.

COMMUNICATION: Staff must have an effective means of communication either voice,
radio or other effective means. If background noise levels compromise standard methods
of communication then other effective means MUST be agreed on prior to entry and
periodically assessed for effectiveness.

STAFFING: Ideally there will always be three persons on site during the confined space
entry event. One worker will be assigned to be the standby person, one worker will
contact the fire department for rescue and the third worker will be the entry person. Prior
to entry the team will discuss the work activities and roles to ensure each worker is aware
of their responsibilities. All staff will be trained in confined space entry procedures. Under
certain circumstances where entry into a low atmosphere hazard confined space is
required, 2 persons can carry out the entry, with the standby person acting as the rescue
contact.

BARRICADES AND SIGNAGE: Any location where there is potential for contact with
local traffic will require barricades and signage warning of worker activity. Barricades
and work vehicles must be positioned in accordance with the Town of Golden’s
procedures. Signage denoting a confined space entry should be placed at the periphery
of the space.
FALL PROTECTION: The lifting device will be set up prior to worker entry. The entry
person will don the safety harness and life line and the other workers will confirm proper
installation. The lifeline will be inserted through the lifting device; davit or tripod with
attached winch, in preparation for entry. Portable guardrails are to be placed in front of
the outside worker station (for roof access only) to prevent the potential for falling into the
opening.


TOOL BUCKET: When required, place all tools or equipment into a tool bucket attached
to a hoisting rope. When the entry operator requires such material it can be lowered by
the outside workers. For entry in ground access tools will be inserted into tool pouches.
202
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space

ACCESS/EGRESS: For spaces equipped with fixed ladder rungs, ensure that the lifting
device assists with the access and egress of the inside worker. This is necessary since
there are limited hand holds above the space for safe entry. For spaces without ladders,
supply an extension ladder capable of extending 42” above the space for safe entry and
exit. The ladder must be secured at the top. For all reservoirs, access will be through the
lower access hatch wherever possible instead of the top access door.

LOCKOUT/ISOLATION: When required, make sure that the existing lockout/isolation
procedures are reviewed and activated prior to worker entry. No energized equipment
should be operational while work takes place in the space. Isolation of pressured lines will
be blanked, blinded or double block and bleed (DBB) prior to entry. The DBB method
allows the use of dual inline valve lockout as long as the line between these valves is
open and bled to atmosphere. All single shut off valves are not to be used as the only
means of isolation unless engineering approval on the single valve isolation is acceptable.
Disconnect or shut off and bleed chlorine gas lines that could enter the space.

FIRST AID AND RESCUE: One worker must have a minimum level 1 first aid ticket. A
level one first aid kit will be on site. If emergency transportation or rescue is necessary
then the Town of Golden personnel will have ready access to the ambulance for
emergency transport and to the fire department for rescue. A written agreement between
the Town and the fire department, specifying availability at all times, will remove the
requirement of prior notification. A first aid record treatment book must be on site to
document any potential injuries.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: All equipment using external power sources will be double
insulated, or grounded and connected to a GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter). Use
the Town’s lockout procedures where applicable for any energized equipment that
impacts the reservoirs.

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): The minimum PPE for entry into and
around a confined space will include safety toed leather boots above the ankle, hardhat,
safety glasses, leather gloves and/or disposable nitrile gloves and cotton coveralls with
high visibility material incorporated into the coveralls or with a high visibility vest. For wet
work, use safety toed rubber boots and wet gear.

PERSONAL HYGIENE: All confined space entry will require washing facilities after
exiting the space if there is any potential for contamination. A portable eye wash with
saline solution is necessary for dealing with any material that enters the eye.

ENTRY PERMIT: An entry permit is required whenever lockout or isolation takes place
or where there is a potential for engulfment. The supervisor or designate on site will
complete the documentation for all entry permits.

COORDINATION: The supervisor or designate will notify the call centre prior to entry
specifying the work duration and will call back when the work is completed at the
prescribed time. The standby and back up worker will be responsible to initiate
rescue from the space. If the fire department is the rescue group and the ambulance is
the emergency
203
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
transportation vehicle, then the supervisor or designate will call directly when required.
The supervisor or designate is responsible for coordination of the work. All emergency
and non- emergency numbers will be kept in all Town vehicles for quick response.
These numbers will also be installed on the mobile phones. Confined space entry drills
will take place annually with the parties involved with confined space entry.
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1) PERMIT: An entry permit will be filled out whenever lockout or isolation (i.e. double block &
bleed) procedures are followed or where there is a hazard of engulfment. The supervisor or
designate will fill out the permit which will include the confined space, the work activities,
workers inside, required precautions and time of expiration of the permit.
Drain the space and lock out all energized equipment and isolate all affected pressurized
lines prior to entry.
2) TESTING:
 Test the air monitor in a clean environment prior to use in the confined space. Readings
should be 19.5-23% ideally 20.9% O2, 0 ppm CO, 0 ppm H2S and 0% LEL. Record this
in the testing record sheet. The form should include the date, time of the test, initials of
tester and the levels found.
 A separate test for chlorine gas should be done at intervals while the bleaching process
takes place. Readings should be below 0.15 ppm.
 Open the access hatch to the confined space and insert the probe at the opening and
measure the air concentrations. Record the levels.
 Where applicable, insert the probe halfway into the confined space and test the air
again. Record the levels in the test record sheet.
 Insert the probe to the bottom of the space being sure not to immerse the probe end into
any fluid or debris and test the air. Record these values in the test record sheet. If the
three readings are the same then one recording can be made.
 If any values are <19.5% or >23% O2; >12.5 ppm CO; >5 ppm H2S or > 10% LEL do not
enter. Commence ventilation of the space. Retest the space after 20 minutes of venting.
If the readings are back to acceptable levels then entry is permitted with continuous
ventilation.
 Attach the monitor to the entry worker for continuous monitoring of the work
environment. Record the readings on a periodic basis.
 If at any time the alarm sounds, the entry worker MUST exit the space.
 If the entry worker leaves the space for longer than 20 minutes then the space must be
retested and recorded.
3) VENTILATION:
 If the space is a low atmosphere hazard, the worker is in the space for less than 15
minutes and the work inside the space does not generate contaminants other than
exhaled air then positive ventilation is not required.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
204
Golden Health & Safety Program




Confined Space
For all other entries, continuous positive ventilation is required either from a portable
blower or through natural ventilation. A minimum 50 cfm per person of fresh air into the
space is acceptable for low hazard atmospheres.
Moderate hazard atmospheres generated from work activities require continuous
ventilation at a minimum rate of 20 air changes per hour (ach) or for large spaces, 50
linear feet per minute cross sectional flow. For the spaces in the water reservoirs this
works out to:
o -9495 & 16511 cfm for the NE reservoirs respectively. The air velocity would be
too great at the space entrances to manage this air volume (Note: by opening the
top access hatch and the lower access door a natural chimney effect will result
which aids in air movement. Install the blower at the base with a straight hose
directed to the worker)
o -14582 cfm for the Bearspaw reservoir. The air velocity would be too great at the
space entrances to manage this air volume. (Note: by opening the top access
hatch and the lower access door a natural chimney effect will result which aids in
air movement. Install the blower at the base with a straight hose directed to the
worker)
o -17017 cfm for the Selkirk reservoir (Gunnite). The air velocity would be too great
at the space entrances to manage this air volume. Natural ventilation may not be
feasible with only one access hatch and a small vent stack. Insert the blower into
the primary hatch to obtain adequate cross sectional flow rate for this space.
o -29452 cfm for the Hypalon reservoir. When access is required the use of the
blower system to inflate the reservoir may supply sufficient air. If the system is
only used to inflate the space then addition of the blower through the main hatch
should generate sufficient air flow.
The ventilation hose must not have more than 2 bends. Each bend affects the flow rate.
The manufacturer should be able to specify what the flow rates are for no bend (straight
duct); one bend; and for two bends.
The configuration for moderate atmosphere hazard venting, should be with two bends of
the hose or one bend of the hose directed onto a flat plate. See pictorial.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
205
Golden Health & Safety Program
Confined Space
Figure 31: Do not use oxygen for ventilation
Figure 32: Do use positive pressure systems, where necessary, to increase effectiveness
of ventilation.



The hose end should be near the entry workers breathing zone. The intake for the
ventilation blower must be located away from any contaminant sources and upwind.
Assess any external work activities and restrict the work if contaminants may enter the
space through the blower.
The blower must be kept on for the duration of the work activity.
Do NOT use oxygen as a source of fresh air.
4) FALL PREVENTION:
 The entry worker must always wear the fall arrest harness and lifeline whenever an entry
takes place.
 The stand by worker or third person is charged with attending to the life line and ensuring
the life line is properly connected to the harness.
 This person will keep the slack off the line during entry and exit from the confined space
and will assist the entry worker during entry and exit.
5) ENTRY WORKER:
 The entry worker must wear the safety harness and lifeline attached to the lifting device
for any entry into a confined space.
 The entry worker must wear appropriate PPE during entry.
 All tools and equipment used for work inside the space cannot be carried by the entry
worker unless a tool pouch is used. Where required, three point contacts with the ladder
rungs are necessary.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
206
Golden Health & Safety Program







Confined Space
Where feasible all entry will be at the ground hatch access.
Inspect the fixed rungs for looseness and if this is found, then repairs are required. For
those spaces with no ladder access place an extension ladder into the space with a
minimum 42” extending out of the space. The ladder must be tied off and secured at the top.
Inform the standby person to prevent slack on the lifeline.
Use proper handling techniques for removing manhole covers and hatches: lift with the
legs, pull cover back without twisting the torso, and get two persons to move the lid where
practicable.
Be cognizant of ground surfaces that may be slippery. Wear anti slip footwear to minimize
this hazard.
Bring adequate portable lighting into the space or drop a trouble light connected to ground
fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) into the space for all work activities when there is insufficient
outside sunlight.
If work requires kneeling, bring knee pads or a floor matt to rest the knees on.
6) STANDBY PERSON:
 The standby person must stay within close proximity to the space and visually observe the
entry person performing their work on a regular basis but at least every 20 minutes.
 The standby worker must have a continuous means of communication with the entry
person.
 The standby person will have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
 The standby person is responsible for the lifting equipment and will monitor the rescue
equipment with the third member of the team and will notify the fire department for rescue.
 This person will observe the line to ensure it does not get entangled.
 The standby person or third member will be responsible for recording test results.
 The outside team will constantly monitor the external environment for possible safety
issues. This includes assessing traffic barricades for effectiveness; restricting the public
and neighborhood animals from the work area and confirming that the intake is constantly
drawing fresh air into the space.
WORK ACTIVITIES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
INSPECTIONS:
 For work activities less than 15 minutes duration where no air contaminants are
generated, no ventilation is required. For activities greater than 15 minutes, open both
hatches, if available, and insert the blower.
CHECKING FLOATS:
 Lockout or disconnect electrical power.
 Lockout valves
 Pull floats out using winch or other proper lifting device. Service unit outside of the space.
Avoid manual lifting.
WELDING/CUTTING:
 The worker conducting this activity must wear a P100 dual cartridge half mask respirator for
welding work with continuous ventilation into the space to minimize fume accumulation.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
207
Golden Health & Safety Program




Confined Space
If possible use local exhaust ventilation at the welding source.
The worker will gauge the work activity to minimize the accumulation of fumes.
Continuous air monitoring is needed to verify the air quality.
If cutting torches are used, they must be removed from the space whenever workers
leave the space.
CLEANING USING BLEACH/POWER WASH WALLS:
 All reservoirs must be drained, with lockout and isolation in place. Any sources of
chemicals will be handled with chemical resistant gloves, splash proof goggles, shield,
rain gear and acid gas dual cartridge half mask respirator.
 Ensure all hatches are open where feasible and use the blower for positive ventilation.
POST ENTRY ACTIVITIES:
 The entry person(s) will verify that all repairs or work activities are properly completed.
 All equipment and tools are removed from the space.
 The blower is removed from the space where applicable.
 The standby person will assist the entry person with exiting the space.
 The lid or hatches are reattached to close off the space.
 All lockout devices and isolation devices are removed where applicable and the
equipment is reactivated.
 The supervisor or designate will complete the entry permit where applicable and confirm
that the air monitoring tests are properly documented. The supervisor or designate will
notify the call centre that the work is completed.
 The supervisor or designate will file the permit and the team will debrief on the
effectiveness of the confined space entry.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
208
Golden Health & Safety Program
Lock Out Procedures
11. LOCK-OUT PROCEDURES
11.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 210
11.2 Definitions ......................................................................................................... 210
11.3 General Lockout Principles .............................................................................. 210
11.4 Appropriate Steps for Applying a Lock ............................................................. 211
11.5 Appropriate Steps for Removal of Lock ........................................................... 211
11.6 Emergency Lock Removal ............................................................................... 212
11.7 Contractors ....................................................................................................... 212
11.8 Forms................................................................................................................ 212
209
Golden Health & Safety Program
11.1
Lock Out Procedures
Introduction
These safety procedures must be followed before and during any work being
undertaken by employees while having to use a lockout procedure.
Only employees who are trained and authorized may work on equipment with a
hazardous energy source. Lockout procedures must be followed whenever
maintenance, repairs, new construction or other work on or about a machine,
process, or system could cause danger to the safety or health of any person from
potentially hazardous energy or substances.
11.2
Definitions
“Lockout” means the use of a lock or locks to render machinery or equipment
inoperable or to isolate an energy source.
“Energy isolating device” means a device that physically prevents the
transmission or release of an energy source to machinery or equipment.
“Energy source” means any electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic,
chemical, thermal, or other source of energy of potential harm to employees.
“Maintenance” means work performed to keep machinery or equipment in a safe
condition, including installing, repairing, cleaning, lubricating and the clearing of
obstructions to the normal flow of material.
“Sign out Lock” is a lock located at the lockout station for the use by an employee
to ensure personal lock-out protection.
“Contractor Lock” is a lock located at the lockout station that is used only to
lockout a device that will be serviced by a contractor when the employee who
originally locked out the device is not in the area. This is only to be applied in
water pump stations and sewer lift stations.
“Lockout Clip” is a lockout device that allows several locks to be attached to it at
the same time.
11.3
General Lockout Principles
1. Before beginning any maintenance or repairs on energy actuated (including
gas) machinery and equipment, the machine must be locked-out. When
lockout is required, the devices must be secured in the safe position by a
trained and authorized employee or contractor using a Sign out lock.
2. Bleed hydraulic, air or water systems after pumps or supply has been locked
out.
3. Block-up all equipment or machinery that could move due to gravity. (e.g. hoist,
overhead doors).
#Main_Table_of_Contents
210
Golden Health & Safety Program
Lock Out Procedures
4. When a machine or piece of equipment is required to be locked out, the
lockout devices must be signed out on the "Lockout Station Form", indicating;
date out, time out, employee, project and location, key and lock number, time
returned, and date returned. The lockout station will have locks, keys, energy
isolating lockout devices, lockout tags and a Lock-out Station Form. The
master key for all signed out locks is kept in the Supervisor's office and is to be
used by the supervisor only in emergency situation.
5. When the locked out machinery or equipment is placed back in service, the
key, lock, energy isolating lockout devices & lockout tag must be placed back
on the lock-out station and signed in.
Note: In a water pump station and a sewer lift station, when an employee notices a
device requiring repair, the employee will lockout the device with the lock from the
lockout station and contact the supervisor/foreman, informing them of the nature of
the lockout and where to locate the key. Then the appropriate person will carry out
the repair, remove the lock, test the device and return the lock and key to the
lockout station and finish filling in the "Lockout Station Form".
11.4 Appropriate Steps for Applying a Lock
The person applying a lock in a lock-out procedure is responsible for completing the
following steps:
1. Advise the supervisor and other employees in the work area that a piece of
equipment will be locked out for repairs or service.
2. Use the start/stop switch on the machine to turn it off.
3. Ensure the machine is no longer running.
4. Where the machine is supplied power from an electrical panel and circuit
breaker, determine the correct breaker, switch it to the off position and lock-out
the individual circuit breaker.
5. Immediately after applying the signed out lock, test the effectiveness of the
lock-out by making certain everyone stands clear of the device. Check the
device by pushing the start buttons, switches, and ensure the switch will not
open or close.
6. Ensure the equipment controls are returned to the off or neutral position
immediately after the test.
7. All other employees working on the machine or equipment shall then apply their
own signed out locks to the lockout clip. Every employee working on the device
must put on their signed out lock.
11.5
Appropriate Steps for Removal of Lock
1. Each employee must remove their own sign out lock when their maintenance
procedure is complete. Employees are not to remove locks belonging to other
employees.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
211
Golden Health & Safety Program
Lock Out Procedures
2. Removing the last sign-out lock from an isolation point is a serious act. The
employer is responsible for the last sign-out lock is to ensure that the following
procedure is done:
a) All parts are properly installed.
b) All defective guards and safety devices are repaired or replaced.
c) The work is complete and there are no obstructions.
d) The system has been safety-checked to ensure that operation of
the device will not create a hazard.
3. After completing the check then complete the following
a)
Remove the last sign-out lock.
b)
Restore power.
c)
Test the operation of the equipment or process.
d)
When satisfied with the test, advise the supervisor/foreman
and other employees in the work area that work has been
completed and that the equipment is ready to be put back in
service.
e)
Return all lockout devices to the lockout station and complete
filling in the "Lockout Station Form"
11.6
Emergency Lock Removal
1. Each employee or contractor must remove their own signed out lock when their
maintenance procedure is complete. Under no circumstances is an
employee or contractor to remove another employee's or contractor's signed
out lock.
2. Where an employee is not available to remove their signed-out lock and cannot
be contacted, the Superintendent/foreman may personally remove the lock
using the master or spare key. THIS TASK MUST NOT BE DELEGATED
3. Master or spare keys will be kept in a secure place accessible only to the
Supervisor/foreman.
11.7
Contractors
If work is being done directly by a contractor, or jointly with the Town, the Town’s
lock-out procedure will be reviewed with them and only that procedure will apply.
All outside contractors working for the Village shall follow the Town’s lock-out
procedure. The employee coordinating the onsite tasks are responsible for
ensuring that this is followed.
11.8
Forms
Lock-out/Tag-out Procedures and Form
#Main_Table_of_Contents
212
Golden Health & Safety Program
Lock Out Procedures
LOCK-OUT/TAG-OUT PROCEDURES
Before performing any maintenance or repairs on any equipment, the following procedures
must be followed.
1. Everyone involved or effected by the following equipment must be notified that a lockout is required and the reason therefore.
2. If the equipment is running, shut it down by the normal stopping procedures (i.e. by using
the HOA switch).
3. Turn off the control power at the disconnect and any other possible power source to the
equipment.
4. Lock-out and/or Tag-out the isolating device with an assigned individual lock from the
lock-out station. The key must be kept in your possession until the work is completed.
5. Once the lock-out is applied and the equipment is isolated, attempt to start the
equipment using the normal starting procedures (i.e. the HOA switch). ENSURE the
equipment will not start.
6. Once the equipment is locked out, it must be blocked out using isolating valves, etc.
Any residual pressure should be bled off.
NOTE: If more than one person is involved with the procedure, they must also place a lock on
the power isolation device.
If the equipment will cause a SCADA system fault, you must notify the person who is on
standby. The fault should not be cleared off the screen.
LOCK-OUT STATION FORM
Date Out:
Project Location & Name:
Key & Lock Number:
Time Returned:
Time Out:
Date Returned:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
213
Golden Health & Safety Program
Young or New Workers
12. INTRODUCTION TO YOUNG OR NEW WORKERS
12.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 217
12.2 Definitions ......................................................................................................... 217
12.3 Orientation and Training ................................................................................... 217
12.4 Additional Orientation and Training .................................................................. 218
12.5 Documentation ................................................................................................. 218
12.6 Forms................................................................................................................ 218
215
Golden Health & Safety Program
Young or New Workers
12.1
Introduction
In 2005 WCB injury rates showed that a young worker is injured more than twice of that of
the overall population. Within the same stats it showed that regardless of their age, both
young and new workers were more likely to sustain a workplace injury during their first
month on the job. In an attempt to address the issue in July 2007 Worksafe introduced a
new section, Regulation 3.23 to 3.25 to the Occupational Health and Safety Regulation.
12.2
Definitions
A “young worker” is defined under Regulation 3.23 as being a person under the age of 25.
The term “new worker” is defined as any worker who is new to a workplace, or where
changes to a workplace has occurred, or where changes to workplace hazards in the
worker’s absence, or new hazards are present in a workplace, or relocation to another
workplace, could result in the worker being exposed to hazards for which they have not
received orientation and training, this would include a worker who is under the age of 25.
12.3
Orientation and Training
The orientation and training of a young or new worker requires a program that must
include at least 13 areas to meet the requirements of the OH&SR, and must include the
following:
(a) Name and contact information from their supervisor/foreman to insure that the
young or new worker knows the identity of their superiors responsible for providing
direction in performing their duties, and what procedure to follow if they need to
contacted there supervisor/foreman.
(b) Rights and responsibilities of the employer and the young or new worker as it
relates to the Workers’ Compensation Act and the Occupational Health & Safety
Regulation, including the obligation to report hazards and the right to refuse unsafe
work
(c) The appropriate train of the young or new worker on specific requirements so they
perform their tasks in a healthy and safe manner and meet all the requirements set
out in the Town of Golden’s health and safety program.
(d) The employer is required to train and orient a young or new worker in safe
procedures and potential hazards that could be encountered while they are
performing assigned work tasks or processes, including risk of robbery, assault or
confrontation, where applicable.
Except for (vi) other areas listed within these sections require specific orientation
and training include;
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Working alone or in isolation,
Violence in the workplace,
Personal protective clothing,
First Aid,
#Main_Table_of_Contents
217
Golden Health & Safety Program
Young or New Workers
v. Emergency procedures,
vi. Requires the employer to provide a young or new worker with both instruction
and demonstration, and not simply verbal
vii. instruction of any work task or work process that the young or.
viii. new worker will be required to perform immediately. Further
ix. training may be required as new tasks are assigned.
x. Review of the employers Health and Safety Program,
xi. WHMIS,
xii. Worker Health and Safety Committee/representative
12.4
.
Additional Orientation and Training
The employer is required to provide additional orientation and training for young or
new workers if workplace observation indicates that the orientation and training
already provided is not sufficient. The additional orientation and training is to insure
that the young or new worker can perform their tasks or follow work procedures in a
safe manner.
12.5
Documentation
The employer is required to keep records of all orientation and training and must be
able to show that all above requirements have been met, and would include the
records of any additional orientation and training given to young or new workers.
12.6
Forms
Young and New Worker Orientation Checklist
#Main_Table_of_Contents
218
Golden Health & Safety Program
Young or New Workers
YOUNG AND NEW WORKER CHECKLIST
Employee name:
Position (tasks):
Date hired:
Date of orientation:
Person providing orientation (name & position):
Company name:
TOPIC
INITIALS
INITIALS
COMMENTS
1. Supervisor name:_______________________
Telephone #:________________________
2. Rights and responsibilities
(a) General duties of employers, workers and
supervisors
(b) Worker right to refuse unsafe work and
procedure for doing so
(c) Worker responsibility to report hazards and
procedure for doing so
3. Workplace health and safety rules:
(a) _____________________________________
(b) _____________________________________
(c) _____________________________________
(d) _____________________________________
4. Known hazards and how to deal with them
(a) _____________________________________
(b) _____________________________________
(c) _____________________________________
(d) _____________________________________
5. Safe work procedures for carrying out tasks
(a) _____________________________________
(b) _____________________________________
(c) _____________________________________
(d) _____________________________________
6. Procedures for working alone or in isolation
7. Measures to reduce risk of violence in the
workplace and procedures for dealing with
violent situations
8. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) – what to
use, when to use it, and where to find it.
(a) _____________________________________
(b) _____________________________________
(c) _____________________________________
(d) _____________________________________
219
Golden Health & Safety Program
TOPIC
Young or New Workers
INITIALS
INITIALS
COMMENTS
9. First Aid
(a) First aid attendant name and contact
information
(b) Locations of first aid kits and eye wash
facilities
(c) How to report an illness, injury or other
accident (including near-misses)
10. Emergency Procedures
(a) Locations of emergency exits and meeting
points
(b) Locations of fire extinguishers and fire
alarms
(c) How to use fire extinguishers
(d) What to do in an emergency situation
11. Where applicable, basic contents of the
occupational health and safety program
12. Hazardous materials and WHMIS
(a) What hazardous materials are in the
workplace
(b) Purpose and significance of hazard
information on product labels
(c) Location, purpose and significance of
material safety data sheets
(d) How to handle, use, store and dispose of
hazardous materials safely
(e) Procedures for an emergency involving
hazardous materials, including clean-up of
spills
13. Where applicable, contact information for the Joint
Occupational Health & Safety Committee or the
worker health and safety representative
#Main_Table_of_Contents
220
Golden Health & Safety Program
Ergonomics
13. ERGONOMICS
13.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 223
13.2 Consultation ..................................................................................................... 223
13.3 Education ......................................................................................................... 223
13.4 Risk Identification ............................................................................................. 223
13.5 Risk Identification ........................................................................................... 2237
221
Golden Health & Safety Program
Ergonomics
13.1 Introduction
Studies at Worksafe BC have shown Musculoskeletal Skeletal Injuries (MSI) is a common
type of workplace injury in all industries in British Columbia, and account for about one third
of claims, accepted by WCB. These injuries include soft tissue, muscles, joints, ligaments,
backs, shoulders, legs arms, and also include strains, sprains or repetitive motion causing
inflammation.
13.2
Consultation
Consultation involves both the workers and worker health and safety representative in each
step of the process to make the ergonomic prevention program a success.
13.3
Education
Through education, workers should know the following;
 The early signs and symptoms of MSI
 What can happen if the early signs and symptoms of MSI are ignored
 Where to report signs and symptoms of MSI to
 Job hazards and risks that could cause MSI
13.4
Risk Identification
The direct risk or physical demands include:
Force
The amount of muscular effort required through either gripping, lifting, pushing or
pulling to move an object. Force can also be used to keep an object in a stationary
position this action can lead to an injury because muscles, tendons and ligaments
can be overloaded.
Repetitive Motions
Repetition refers to tasks or series of motions that are preformed over and over
again by the same muscles groups with little variation or rest. Injures can arise when
performing tasks involving either small muscles (e.g. forearm) or large (e.g. Back)
Duration
The duration and the magnitude of the work task must be considered and the
following questions should be considered:
How long is the worker using force, perform a repeated task, perform a task with an
awkward body posture, is one part of the body exposed to local contact stress.
Or how much force is the worker using, how fast is the worker doing the repeated
movement, how severe is the awkward posture, is the edge digging into the skin,
causing local contact stress.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
223
Golden Health & Safety Program
Ergonomics
Work Posture
Posture comes in different ways; a “neutral” body position is the safest and most
effective in which to work. An “awkward” body position puts stress on muscles,
tendons and joints, the muscles will become fatigued from lack of blood flow which
leads to discomfort and progresses to injury.
Local Contact Stress
Local contact stress occurs when a hard or sharp object comes in contact with the
skin. The nerves and the tissues beneath the skin can be injured by the pressure.
Local contact stress can result from:
 Ridges and hard edges on tool handle digging into the hand
 Edges of work surfaces digging into the forearm or wrist
 Striking objects sharply with the hand, foot or knee.
Vibration
Exposure to vibration can occur while using power tools or while driving equipment
which can place stress on the body including tissues of the fingers, hands, arms, or
pressure on the spinal tissues.
Temperatures
Environmental conditions such as extreme heat or cold can place stress on tissues.
Extreme cold constrict blood vassals and reduces sensitivity and coordination of the
body parts, where excessive heat can result in increased fatigue and heat stress.
Risk Assessment
The objective is to determine relative risk (high, moderate or low) to the workers in
those jobs or tasks where exposure to risk factors has been identified. The risk
assessment will help decide which risk factor pose a risk of injury to workers and
are important to control, and must be done in consultation with workers performing
the task.
Areas that must be considered:
 Intensity (how much force, how far a distance, how much weight)
 Task duration (how long is task preformed)
 Exposure pattern (how often is task preformed)
What to look for will include: posture, the force being used, is it repetitious, duration
of the job, work location and the environment (lighting, temperature, vibration and
weather). What part of the body is most affected? For example when a person is
working overhead, the shoulder and neck may be effected.
Risk Factors for MSI
The employer must consider, where applicable, the following risk factors in the
identification and assessment of the MSI, as per OH&S Regulation 4.49:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
1. The physical demand of work activities, including:
224
Golden Health & Safety Program
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Ergonomics
force required
repetition
duration.
work postures
local contact stresses
2. Aspects of the layout and condition of the workplace or workstation, including:
a. working reaches
b. working heights
c. seating
d. floor surfaces
3. The characteristics of objects handled, including:
a. size and shape
b. weight distribution and load condition
c. container, tool, and equipment handles
4. The environment conditions, including heat and cold temperatures.
5. The following characteristics of the organization of work:
a. work-recovery cycles
b. task variability
c. work rate
Safe Lifting Guidelines
Injures can result from the improper lifting of heavy objects or from lifting when in an
awkward position. Employees should never attempt to lift heavy objects on their own.
The following guidelines are designed to reduce incidence of back, shoulder and neck
injures caused by improper lifting techniques.
1. Clear the work area of any unnecessary objects and/or equipment and make
sure your path is clear.
2. Size up your load before you lift it. If it is too heavy for you to lift alone, get help
or use the appropriate mechanical lifting equipment. (i.e. manhole covers)
3. To insure even distribution of weight, place one foot beside the object the other
foot slightly behind the front foot, about shoulder width apart, and insure the grip
is correct.
4. Bend your knees and keep your back straight.
5. Position the load as close to your body as possible and ensure a good grip.
6. Lift using your legs, not your back. Lift gradually and smoothly to avoid jerky
movement.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
7. Turn by pivoting your feet. Do not twist your back while lifting.
8. Make sure your vision is not obstructed by the size and height of the object you
are carrying.
225
Golden Health & Safety Program
Ergonomics
9. Place the load down using the same techniques used to lift it up. Bend your
knees and keep your back straight.
Computer Workstations
The ergonomic standards for computer workstations with the Town shall meet the
requirements set out within the following WCB publications:





Guidelines for Working with VDT’s, and
How to Make Your Computer Workstation Fit You
Preventing MSI Injury-guide for employers and OH&S Committees
Understanding the Risks of MSI Injury-guide for workers.
These publications are available through the Worksafe websitewww.worksafebc.com
Risk Control
If a risk control is needed, the first step is to see if the risk to the worker can be
eliminated, and if it’s not practicable then can it be minimized. The goal is to reduce the
risk of each hazard to the lowest category and if possible have it eliminated.
To achieve that goal control measures should be considered in the following order:
1. Engineering controls
2. Administrative controls
3. Personal protective equipment
Engineering controls
Will review the arrangement and design of the work, including location and work
station, and where needed improving or change the design or work procedures of the
existing work, and equipment including the appropriate accessories, in the attempt to
eliminate or reduce the risk to MSI.
Administrative control
Includes changing the way work is organized or performed, looking at scheduling of
resources including staffing, work environment, equipment, material and the workers
level of training.
Personal protective equipment
PPE may only be used in situations when engineering or administrative controls are
not practicable, and the appropriate PPE will be determined through the risk
assessment
#Main_Table_of_Contents
Note
The employer must, without delay, implement interim control measures when the
introduction of permanent control measures will be delayed.
226
Golden Health & Safety Program
Ergonomics
Training
The level of training of the worker will be determined by the recommendations from
the risk controls measures, include the risk procedures, the equipment, safe work
procedures, the surrounding environment.
Evaluation
The regulation requires that the Ergonomic Program must be evaluated annually for
its effectiveness.
How do you achieve this goal?
 By speaking to the workers,
 By reviewing the statistic over the past year to see the reduction or increase of MSI,
 By observing the changes that have been made to see if there has made a positive
difference or created a problem
 By using a checklist and reviewing the original forms used to implement the control
measures
 By involving the worker health and safety representative throughout the process.
13.5
Computer Work and Desktop Procedure
General Guidelines-Best Practices:
The following guidelines are applicable to office workers who sit at a desk and/or work on
computers.
Proper computer parameters:
(See Diagram)
#Main_Table_of_Contents
227
Golden Health & Safety Program
Ergonomics
Postures:
Holding tensed muscles in a fixed or awkward position for long periods of time is called static
work. Static work results in a burning sensation discomfort and fatigue because there is
decreased blood flow to the tensed muscles. Fatigue leads to a buildup of waste materials at a
muscle level, known as lactic acid. When fatigued the load is transferred to the tendons and
ligaments. With time, this can lead to musculoskeletal disorders (i.e. repetitive strain). Therefore
it is important to keep shoulders, neck, arms and hands in relaxed positions.
Working Heights:
Work heights have a major impact on job performance and musculoskeletal injuries. Working too
high, with arms held away from the body (abduction), and shoulders lifted, contributes to static
loading. Working too low results in employees bending forward which can lead to neck and back
pain.
Standing:
Standing in one position or standing with restricted movement especially on hard surfaces can
result in fatigue to the legs and back and if prolonged may affect joints. This risk factor is static
loading. It requires much longer for the muscles to recover versus dynamic movement. Staff
#Main_Table_of_Contents
that are required to stand should utilize ergonomic controls such as anti-fatigue matting, a sit
228
Golden Health & Safety Program
Ergonomics
stand stool, a foot rail to rest on or a combination of these solutions. Alternate work activities to
get the muscles working will also minimize the effects of static loading.
Reaches:
For work at elbow level (i.e. desk and computer work stations) reaching should be within 25 cm
(10 inches) for frequently used items such as answering the telephone. For occasionally reached
for items, say once every two minutes, reaching distance can be slightly longer at 50 cm or 20
inches from the body.
Ergonomic Chair:








In general, one should be able to sit all the way into the chair with feet flat on the floor,
knees and hips at approximately 90 degrees
Foot rests can be provided when the height of the chair does not allow for feet to be flat
on the floor
The seat depth should allow approximately two fingers or a tight fist of space between the
back of the knees and edge of the seat pan
The low back should be supported by the back of the chair
Some employees prefer additional support to the upper back area (high back)
Chairs should be adjustable to allow for tilting between 95 and 110 degrees. This allows
one to push back and alternate positioning as needed for comfort
Arm rests should not be used while typing. Ideally, arm rests should be adjustable
vertically and horizontally so that they do not interfere with the desk and/orkeyboard tray. If
this is not possible, consider removing the arm rests from the office chair
If the keyboard height is not adjustable, then the chair must be elevated so that the elbows
are level or slightly higher with the height of the keyboard.
Computer Workstation:



Computer monitors should be placed directly in front of the employee
Computer monitors should be placed approximately one arm’s length from the front of the
body. Typically, this is 19-26 inches.
Top of monitor screen should be at about eye level, or slightly lower to avoid neck
extension/flexion.
Keyboard
 Keyboard tray and keyboard should also be directly in front of the employee
 While resting on home row, fingers, hands, wrists should be in a neutral position
#Main_Table_of_Contents
229
Golden Health & Safety Program
Ergonomics
 Shoulders should be at rest, not hunched upwards as hunching upwards will place
additional stress and fatigue on shoulders, neck and upper back areas
 While typing, elbows should be close to the body
Mouse
 Computer mouse should be at same level as keyboard and close enough to prevent over
extended reaches
 Employees may wish to consider alternating the computer mouse to the left and right side
in order to alleviate excessive or constant use of one hand to perform computer mouse
work
 Make sure wrist is in a neutral position
How to choose a mouse
Experts recommend using a mouse that:
 Fits your hand. It should have a smooth, tear-drop shape, without angles and hard edges. It
should also have a sloping side and front.
 Allows you to lock the drag switch so that you don’t have to keep it depressed while
dragging the mouse.
 If you often drag your mouse, this lock feature helps prevent sore muscles in your fingers
and hand because you don’t have to continually hold them in the same position.
Where to place the mouse
Many computer users keep their mouses on the tops of their desks or work surfaces above the
keyboard tray.
This forces users to stretch their arms and shoulders, increasing muscle activity and fatigue. To
avoid this, place your mouse close to and on the same work surface as the keyboard. If there’s
not enough room, attach a rest or support for the mouse to the keyboard tray.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
230
Golden Health & Safety Program
Ergonomics
How to use a mouse
To avoid muscle stress and fatigue:
 Rest your hand comfortably over the mouse, keeping your wrist straight, in line with your
forearm. If your wrist feels tired — or you tend to drop it as shown in the drawing below —
place a support or some padding under your wrist.
 Don’t press your hand into a hard edge such as the edge of your desk or keyboard.
 Don’t use more force than necessary to click and drag the mouse.
 Adjust the mouse speed setting to suit the task. The mouse is harder to control if you use a
fast setting with fine tasks. You will have to lift the mouse more often if you use a slow
setting for general mouse work.
Regular breaks from mouse work can also help prevent sore muscles. Take frequent micro pauses
to lift your hand off the mouse and relax the muscles. Try to do a different task, or pause for a
minute or two, at least every hour to vary your posture and rest your tired muscles.
Document holders should be considered for those who frequently type on to the computer from
hand written documents. Document holders should be placed directly in front of the monitor and
sit underneath the keyboard tray. This will help to promote a more neutral neck posture
Lap Top Users:



Consideration should be given to incorporating an external keyboard and mouse that can
be attached to the laptop when in use.
When using a laptop it is important to ensure it is raised so that the top of the computer
monitor is at eye level to help promote neutral neck postures
Use of a roller cart is recommended when transferring a laptop and accessories
#Main_Table_of_Contents
Desk/Telephone Area:
231
Golden Health & Safety Program




Ergonomics
Regularly used items (telephone, binders, reference material, etc.) should be placed within
10 inches (25 cm) in front of the employee
Items occasionally reached for can be within 20 inches (50 cm) in front of employee
Employees who make frequent phone calls should consider using a head set. This will
prevent cradling of the telephone between ear and shoulder while trying to take notes, or
retrieving other information
Employees may need to adjust their chair (move higher) when relocating from computer
work station to desk area as generally desks are positioned higher than are keyboard
areas. While working at a desk, arms should continue to remain at a comfortable, neutral
position so that arms are at about 90 degrees at the desk, and shoulders are not hunched
upwards
Eye Strain:




Computer users should consider taking mini eye breaks throughout the day using the
30:30:30 rule: every 30 minutes, look some 30 feet away for 30 seconds. This will help to
reduce any eye strain that can occur with prolonged computer use.
Lowering the computer intensity, use of eye drops and hydration by drinking water can
also help to ensure eyes do not tire.
Palming is another activity which will help eyes relax. Periodically throughout the day,
close eyes and cover placing palms over, but not touching the eyelids. Fingers should
overlap above the nose onto the forehead. Take several deep breaths and visualize a
relaxed setting. After 20 seconds or so, uncover the eyes and allow them to refocus.
Dust gathers easily on computer screens. It is recommended that periodic cleaning be
done to remove dust and fingerprints.
Other Considerations:

It is also important for office workers, particularly computer users to vary postures and
work activities as time and urgency permits. Examples of stretches are enclosed with this
report. Employees should seek a medical opinion before incorporating the stretches into
their daily routine.

#Main_Table_of_Contents
232
Golden Health & Safety Program
Workine Along or In Isolation
14. WORKING ALONE OR IN ISOLATION
14.1 Purpose ............................................................................................................ 235
14.2
Scope .............................................................................................................. 235
14.3 Hazard Identification and Assessments ........................................................... 235
14.4 Checking the well-being of workers ................................................................. 235
14.5 Communication ................................................................................................ 236
14.6 Training ............................................................................................................ 236
14.7 Annual Review ................................................................................................. 236
14.8 Working Alone Procedure ................................................................................ 237
14.9 Working Alone Policy ..................................................................................... 2379
233
Golden Health & Safety Program
Workine Along or In Isolation
14.1 Purpose
The purpose of establishing this procedure is for checking the well-being of a worker
assigned to work alone or in isolation under conditions which present a risk of disabling
injury, if the worker might not be able to secure assistance in the event of injury or other
misfortune.
14.2
Scope
Working alone or in isolation is defined under section 4.20.1 of the OH&SR “as a worker in
circumstances where assistance would not be readily available to the worker in the even
of an emergency, injury, or ill health”, and may include a worker who while performing their
duties has the possibility of slipping or falling, use of a vehicle, inspecting isolated
locations, in areas that have been deemed hazards, or face the risk of violence be it
physical or verbal from the public.
14.3
Hazard Identification and Assessments
Prior to a worker being assigned to working alone or in isolation the Town must identify
any hazard to the worker, and before the worker starts the work the Town must eliminate
the hazard, and if it is not practicable to eliminate the hazard then the Town must minimize
the risk to the lowest level practicable using engineering controls, administrative controls
or a combination of both.
The assessment will follow the steps laid out in section 4 “Hazard Recognition and
Control” of the program which outlines a step by step process that first identifies the
nature and type of hazard that could reasonably be anticipated in the workplace, followed
by an assessment of the likelihood of such hazards occurring. This assessment will help
the Town set priorities and identify tasks that require further analysis to ensure that
effective controls can be implemented.
The assessments must include the participation of the worker affected, worker health and
safety representative and the supervisor/foreman, and when needed the administrator.
14.4
Checking the well-being of workers
Depending on the severity of the work being done, time intervals for communications will
be established within the assessment; the higher the risk more often contact must be
made. This does not exclude the visual checks that are required at the beginning, during,
and at the end of the assigned work.
As per section 4.21(3) of the OH&SR “a person must be designated to establish contact
with the worker at predetermined intervals and the results must be recorded by that
person”.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
235
Golden Health & Safety Program
14.5
Workine Along or In Isolation
Communication
A communication system shall be established by the Town that will insure each worker
who has the potential of working alone or in isolation will not only have the appropriate
communication device but will informed of who will be responsible as there contact person
before the assignment starts.
For communication for call in or emergency purposes the local fire department will
be contacted, followed by contacting the appropriate supervisor/foreman, and if required
the administrator.
14.6
Training
A worker required to work alone or is in isolation, as well as the co-worker assigned to be
responsible for checking on the worker must be trained and show they have an
understand of the requirements within the written procedures for checking the well-being
of the worker, and must also insure that all lines of communications be it physical, radio or
cell phone are available, and cell and radio are in good working order.
14.7
Annual Review
Due to the seriousness of the issue of Working Alone or in Isolation, Section 4.23 of the
OH&SR require an annual review of the procedures and systems for checking a worker’s
well-being must be done, or more frequently if there is a changes to the work environment
that has the potential to effect the health or safety of the worker.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
236
Golden Health & Safety Program
14.8
Workine Along or In Isolation
Working Alone Procedure
#Main_Table_of_Contents
237
Golden Health & Safety Program
Workine Along or In Isolation
#Main_Table_of_Contents
238
Golden Health & Safety Program
14.9
Workine Along or In Isolation
Working Alone Policy
#Main_Table_of_Contents
239
Golden Health & Safety Program
Workine Along or In Isolation
#Main_Table_of_Contents
240
Golden Health & Safety Program
Violence In The Workplace
15. VIOLENCE IN THE WORKPLACE
15.1 Definition .......................................................................................................... 243
15.2
Purpose ........................................................................................................... 243
15.3 Risk Assessment .............................................................................................. 243
15.4 Instruction of workers ....................................................................................... 244
15.5 Consulting a Physician ..................................................................................... 244
15.6 Annual Review ................................................................................................. 244
241
Golden Health & Safety Program
Violence In The Workplace
15.1
Definition
“violence” means the attempt or actual exercise by a person, other than a worker, of any
physical force so as to cause injury to a worker, and includes any threatening statements
or behavior which gives a worker reasonable cause to believe that he or she is at risk of
injury.
(Section 4.27 of the OHSR)
15.2
Purpose
The potential for violence whether it is physical or verbal within the public sector has
been shown to be a growing concern as it relates to the health and safety of workers
across the province, and where such incidents are very seldom reported until an incident
escalates or a worker is injured. To prevent workplace incidences the Act and the OHSR
requires that a policy and procedures be establish to reduce the risk.
15.3
Risk Assessment
The objective of the risk assessment is to determine the nature and type of incident of
violence that may occur in the work environment and the likelihood of this occurring.
Section 4.28(2) lists the following items that must be taken into consideration when doing
a risk assessment;
1. Previous experience in that workplace
2. Occupational experience in similar workplaces, and
3. The location and circumstances in which work will take place
Some examples of situations that must be taken into consideration, working alone or in
isolation, the time of year (tax time), road repair or construction, gender, or time of day or
week.
The risk assessment should include a management and worker representative.
Sources of information can be obtained from reviewing the first aid records, past
incident/injury reports, expert advice or relevant publications from WorkSafeBC, CUPE
and experience from other municipalities, but the most important resource are the
workers themselves.
The risk assessment must include a visual inspection of the total work environment of the
Town of Golden. The information received from areas with concerns must be addressed
to insure complains with this section of the OHSR.
As required under the OHSR when an incident of violence occurs an investigation is
required and if the investigation report shows that the procedures need to be changed to
address the findings then the OHSR requires that the procedures either have to changed
or new procedures added to address the issue.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
243
Golden Health & Safety Program
15.4
Violence In The Workplace
Instruction of workers
The Town is required to inform the workers of the result of the risk assessment, and from
the findings are required to instruct workers in measures to take to either reduce or
minimize the risk of violence. The training should be sufficient to insure workers are
aware of any risk and the appropriate measures are taken if violence occurs or is
threatened. It should cover all the circumstances of the place of employment. This will
also include information for workers on any known incidents prior to, during, and at the
end of their shift.
The workers also have a responsibility of informing their foreman/administrator of any
incidents that may occur during their shift.
15.5
Consulting a Physician
Where we can sometimes see the physical effects from a violent incident we can’t always
see the emotional effect the incident had on a worker. To address that possibility section
4.31 requires the Town to inform the worker that they have the choice if they so choose to
see their physician or use the program provided by the Town of Golden.
15.6
Annual Review
An annual review is required of the policy and procedures. To achieve that goal a review
of any incidents/ accidents reports including first aid that may have occurred over the
previous year as it relates to violence must be considered as well as any recent changes
to the OHSR, and depending on the findings another risk assessment may be needed.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
244
Golden Health & Safety Program
Traffic Control
16. TRAFFIC CONTROL
16.1 Definition .......................................................................................................... 247
16.2
Purpose ........................................................................................................... 247
16.3 Responsibility ................................................................................................... 247
16.4 Equipment ........................................................................................................ 247
16.5 Training ............................................................................................................ 248
16.6 Standards for Signals and Operations ............................................................. 248
16.7 Dust Control ..................................................................................................... 248
245
Golden Health & Safety Program
16.1
Traffic Control
Definition
“traffic control” means the use of signs, flashing arrow board, buffer or shadow vehicle,
barricades, cones, barriers, detours, traffic lights, traffic control person(TCP’s) or other
techniques and devices to manage the flow of traffic.
“traffic control person or TCP” means any person designated or assigned by the
employer to direct traffic.
16.2
Purpose
While the Town of Golden mainly contracts out the majority of the Traffic Control for
major projects, there are those occasions when workers of the Town are required to do
some form of traffic control, and no matter how small the control of traffic may be, it still
has to meet the requirements set out by the Ministry of Transportation (MOT) as well as
Part 18 of the OHSR.
16.3
Responsibility
In locations where traffic control is being carried out by the Town whether it is short term
or long term the Town will insure equipment, the use of devices and proper procedure to
insure the worker directing traffic is working in a safe manner and is following the
requirements set out under the MOT and Part 18 of the OHSR.
The above standards are set out within both the Traffic Control Manual for Work on
Roadways issued by the MOT, as well as Part 18, regulation 18.2 through to 18.8 of the
OHSR.
16.4
Equipment
The equipment required to be used must meet the standard and may include:
1. a traffic control paddle meeting the requirements for a C-27H Traffic Control
Paddle as specified in the Traffic Control Manual and, if necessary to control
fatigue, a non-conductive support staff for the paddle;
2. high visibility apparel meeting
a) the Type 1 or Type 2 criteria of WCB Standard Personal
Protective Equipment Standard 2-1997, High Visibility Garment,
or
b) the Class 2 or 3 garment criteria of CSA Standard Z96-02, HighVisibility Safety Apparel, with a fluorescent background colour;
3. wrist and lower leg bands fitted with a minimum 5 cm (2 in) wide fluorescent
retroreflective strip about their entire circumference, except that wrist and lower
leg bands are not required for a traffic control person performing this function on
an emergency or a temporary basis and not as part of their normal duties;
4. safety headgear of a high visibility colour with a strip of retroreflective tape across
the top from front to back and on the sides;
#Main_Table_of_Contents
247
Golden Health & Safety Program
Traffic Control
5. an effective means of communication when traffic control persons are not visible
to each other, which under no circumstances means a system of passing batons
or similar items to indicate the last vehicle traveling through the zone under
control.
6. during the hours of darkness, or in other conditions of poor visibility, each traffic
control person must be provided with and must use, in addition to the equipment
required by section 18.9, a flashlight fitted with a red signalling wand.
7. The traffic control person must have immediate access to spare batteries for the
flashlight.
8. All traffic control equipment and devices, including signs, traffic control paddles
and personal protective equipment, must be kept clean and in working condition.
16.5
Training
Workers doing the traffic control are required to receive the appropriate education and
training by a qualified person so they have a clear understanding of what is required to
meet the their obligations under the MOT and Part 18 of the OHSR.
16.6
Standards for Signals and Operations
All workers performing traffic control must follow standards set out in the Traffic Control
Manual and Part 18 of the OHSR.
16.7
Dust Control
If traffic causes airborne dust to the extent visibility is reduced and interferes with
effective traffic control or creates a hazard to workers, the employer must control the
dust by the periodic application of water or other acceptable material to the grade
surface to suppress dust.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
248
Golden Health & Safety Program
Fall Protection
17. FALL PROTECTION
17.1 Purpose ............................................................................................................ 251
17.2 Definitions ......................................................................................................... 251
17.3 Responsibilities ................................................................................................ 251
17.4 Assessment ...................................................................................................... 251
17.5 Certification by an Engineer (11.8) .................................................................. 251
17.6 Inspections, Maintenance and Removal of Equipment.................................... 252
17.7 Training of the worker ...................................................................................... 252
249
Golden Health & Safety Program
Fall Protection
17.1
Purpose
Over the past four years the majority of injuries, violations and fines in British Columbia
have been due to non-compliance with Part 11 Fall Protection of the OHSR. Part 11
clearly outlines when and where fall protection is required. This section outlines the
different type of work related to fall protection, the safeguards that must be taken as well
as the different types of equipment needed for which job.
17.2
Definitions
Part 11.1 defines the different types of Fall Protection, from “fall arrest system” to
“fall protection system”, “full body harness” “lifeline” to “safety belt”, “lanyard” to
“safety belt” or “horizontal lifeline” to “personal protective system” as well the use
of an “anchor” system.
17.3
Responsibilities
The Town of Golden must insure that a fall protection system is not only in place but is
followed when the work being carried out exceeds 3 m (10 ft) in height, or where a fall
from a height less than 3m involves a possible risk of injury from impact on a flat surface.
The Town must also insure the appropriate fall arrest system meets the requirements of
both Part 4 (General Conditions) and Part 11 (Fall Protection) and insure that the
workers use the equipment provided by the Town.
17.4
Assessment
An assessment of all work procedures within the Town of Golden will identify the work
areas that will require fall protection equipment including guard rails, written procedures
will be developed for each type of work that will be required to meet the fall protection
requirements. The equipment used will be required to meet both the CSA and the
OHSR. (More detailed information can be reviewed within the WorkSafeBC OHS
Guidelines)
17.5
Certification by an Engineer (11.8)
The following types of equipment and systems;
 permanent anchors
 anchors with multiple attachment points
 permanent horizontal lifeline systems
 support structure for safety
#Main_Table_of_Contents
251
Golden Health & Safety Program
17.6
Fall Protection
Inspections, Maintenance and Removal of Equipment
The equipment used in a fall protection system must be inspected by a qualified person
before each shift, and kept free from substances and conditions that could contribute to
its deterioration so they will continue to be in good working condition.
When a fall of a worker occurs while using their fall protection the equipment used must
be removed from service and not reused until it has been inspected and recertified as
safe by either the manufacture or their agent, or by a professional engineer.
17.7
Training of the worker
Workers who are required to use fall protection must be properly trained by a qualified
person to insure that it meets the Act and OHSR, and that awareness about the hazard
being faced by a worker while using the fall protections system be ongoing and retraining
every two years or sooner when needed.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
252
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
18. BIOLOGICAL HAZARD CONTROL PROGRAM
18.1
Purpose, Scope, Policy Statement ................................................................. 255
18.2 Responsibilities - Town of Golden ................................................................... 255
18.3 Responsibilities – Managers/Supervisors/ Employees/ JOHS Committee ...... 256
18.4 Procedure for Identifying & Controlling Harmful Substances .......................... 257
18.5 Define Types of Hazards .................................................................................. 257
18.6 Assess Potential Exposure .............................................................................. 258
18.7 Identify Chemical and Biological Hazards........................................................ 260
18.8
Determine the Degree of Risk ......................................................................... 261
18.9 Determine Appropriate Control Measures ....................................................... 261
18.10 Develop Written Safe Work Practices .............................................................. 263
18.11 Ensure Identity of Substances, MSDS Labeling .............................................. 264
18.12 Train Employees .............................................................................................. 266
18.13 Ensure Employee Compliance ......................................................................... 266
18.14 Appendix A - Practices ..................................................................................... 267
18.15 Appendix B - Guideline Reference: OHSR 5.48-5.59 ...................................... 271
18.16 Appendix C - Guideline Reference: OHSR 8.33 .............................................. 275
18.17 Appendix D - Removal of Gloves ..................................................................... 277
253
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
BIOLOGICAL HAZARD CONTROL PROGRAM
18.1
Purpose, Scope, Policy Statement
Purpose
This program sets forth a plan for the control of any biological or chemical substance used,
produced, stored or disposed of at the workplace and is critical to the overall safety and health
of employees working in The Town of Golden, British Columbia
Scope
This program applies to all employees of THE TOWN OF GOLDEN, temporary employees,
and any contractors working for THE TOWN OF GOLDEN in British Columbia
When work is performed on a non-owned or operated site, the operator’s program shall take
precedence, however, this document covers THE TOWN OF GOLDEN employees and
contractors and shall be used on owned premises, or when an operator’s program doesn’t
exist or is less stringent.
THE TOWN OF GOLDEN shall at each worksite, develop and implement work procedures
that are as safe as is reasonably practicable for the handling, use, storage, production and
disposal of chemical and biological substances.
Policy Statement
The ceiling limits established by Worksafe BC regulatory guidelines may not be exceeded at
any time. All existing and potential risks to the health or safety of employees will be identified
through THE TOWN OF GOLDEN hazard assessment process.
There will be written procedures to respond to an emergency situation (refer to THE TOWN
OF GOLDEN Emergency Preparedness and Response Program).
THE TOWN OF GOLDEN shall take all measures reasonably necessary in the circumstances
to protect workers from exposure to a hazardous biological or chemical agent because of the
storage, handling, processing or use of such agent in the workplace.
Health and safety will be considered in all tendering and purchasing decisions. THE TOWN
OF GOLDEN shall keep under constant review the use or presence of chemical substances
which may be hazardous to the health or safety of employees and shall wherever and so far
as is reasonably practicable substitute a safe or less hazardous substance.
18.2
Responsibilities – Town of Golden
• Shall Identify, assess and properly control chemical and biological hazards.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
255
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
• Shall develop and maintain a list of all chemical and biological substances that are
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
18.3
regularly handled, used, stored, produced or disposed of in the course of work processes
and that may be hazardous to the health and safety of the workers at the worksite. All
chemical and biological substances that are controlled products must be identified on the
list. This list must be readily available to the workers at the worksite.
Shall take all reasonable steps to ascertain and record the precautions that need to be
taken with respect to the substances to ensure the health and safety of workers. Clearly
mark the containers holding the substances with the name of the substance as set out in
the list of substances.
Maintain hazard identification and control lists and maintain written procedures that are
prepared and implemented to prevent exposure by any route that could cause an adverse
health effect, and to address emergency and clean-up procedures in the event of a spill or
release of the substance.
Ensure that atmosphere contamination of the workplace by chemical substances is kept as
low as is reasonably practicable and in the case of the substances for which a threshold
limit value is currently established by the ACGIH and that threshold value shall not be
exceeded.
Every employee is to be informed of the nature and degree of health effects of the
chemical substances to which the employee is exposed by virtue of his or her work the
exposure of employees to harmful chemical substances is as little as is reasonably
practicable.
If a worker is or may be exposed to a chemical or biological substance which could cause
an adverse health effect, THE TOWN OF GOLDEN must ensure that the content and
meaning of the information is clearly communicated to the worker.
Train employees with regards to required control measures to keep them safe at work and
ensure that the supervisors and the employees are trained in and follow the established
procedures for safely handling, using, storing and disposing of the substance, including
emergency and spill clean-up procedures.
Ensure that an emergency response plan is developed for tasks involving chemical and
biological substances.
Maintain a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) control system, and update MSDS sheets
every three years.
Place MSDS’ in a highly visible area and to be readily available for staff use as required.
Responsibilities – Manager, Supervisors, Employees, JOHS Committee
Managers and Supervisors
• Identify all potential chemical and biological hazards and risks to employees in their work
area.
• Develop and implement measures to reduce, eliminate or control the identified risks.
• Develop procedures to respond to an emergency.
• Ensure employee compliance with safe work procedures.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
256
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
• Train employees in safe work procedures and inform them of chemical and biological
hazards.
• Include chemical and biological hazard identification and control strategies as part of the
new employee orientation process.
• Supervise employees to ensure employee compliance.
Employees
• Comply with safe work practices.
• Inform their supervisor of chemical and biological hazards encountered in their workplace.
• Work with their supervisor to resolve hazardous situations.
Joint Health and Safety Committee
 Assist THE TOWN OF GOLDEN and their supervisors to identify, assess and control
chemical and biological hazards.
 Monitor the effectiveness of the implemented controls.
 Ensure training programs regarding identified chemical and biological hazards are
developed and implemented for employees.
18.4
Procedure for Identifying and Controlling Harmful Substances

Define the types of hazards.



Determine the degree of risk to employees.
Determine appropriate control measures for each chemical and biological hazard.
Develop written safe work practices that identify the hazard(s) and state the control
measures required, including any written emergency procedures to be implemented in
the event of an accumulation, spill or leak.
Ensure the identity of the substance, its possible effects on employee health and safety
and any precautions required for the health and safety of the employee are clearly
indicated by labels, MSDSs, placards, signs, tags or other similar means.
Train employees to identify chemical and biological hazard(s) and proceed with tasks
using safe work procedures.
Ensure employee compliance.



18.5
Define Types of Hazards
A hazard is any activity, situation or substance that can cause harm. Categorizing the
hazard(s) helps to determine the type of control(s) that may be necessary to protect
employees. Biological hazards and chemical hazards are two of the categories and
examples are noted below:
 Biological hazards - caused by organisms such as viruses, bacteria,
fungi, parasites, dusts, moulds or other living organisms.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
257
Golden Health & Safety Program

18.6
Biological Hazard Program
Chemical hazards - caused by solids, liquids, vapours, gases, dust, fumes or mists,
such as battery acids, solvents, etc.
Assess Potential Exposure
THE TOWN OF GOLDEN shall develop procedures to address how potential exposure to
harmful substances is assessed to ensure exposure does not exceed occupational
exposure limits. THE TOWN OF GOLDEN must assess all information that is practicably
available to THE TOWN OF GOLDEN respecting a chemical or biological substance
present in the workplace to determine if the substance creates or may create a risk to the
safety or health of a worker in the workplace.
If a worker is, or may be, exposed to an airborne chemical or biological substance in the
workplace at a concentration in excess of the occupational exposure limit for the
substance, THE TOWN OF GOLDEN must conduct monitoring of the substance on a
regular basis to determine the airborne concentration of the substance.
Each TOWN OF GOLDEN site specific safety plan shall list the potential health hazards
associated with any exposure to any chemical or biological hazards applicable to the
specific tasks being performed. Listed below are some of the chemicals/substances
employees may be exposed to. This list is not all-inclusive and other hazards may be
present varying by job site location and work activity:

Asbestos

Oils & Greases

Benzene

Compressed Gases

Cadmium

Fuels

Lead

Acids & Caustics

Hydrogen Sulphide

Refuse

Blood borne Pathogens (result of injury)
These hazards may be encountered near or around the following
locations/processes/equipment:
•Pits
•Reservoirs
•Piping
•Swimming Pool/Arena
•Well Heads
•Mechanics Shop
•Storage & Containment Facilities
#Main_Table_of_Content
•Garbage disposals
•Parks/Recreation facilities
•Sewage Treatment Plant
•Lift Stations
•Booster Stations
•Well Buildings
•Carpenter Bay
258
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
If a worker is or may be exposed to a chemical or biological substance which
could cause an adverse health effect, THE TOWN OF GOLDEN must ensure
that the identity of the substance, the health hazards associated with the
exposure and assess the employee’s exposure, its possible effects on worker
health and safety and any precautions required for the health and safety of
the worker are clearly indicated by labels, MSDSs, placards, signs, tags or
other similar means.
Some of the most common health hazards associated with the abovereferenced substances include but are not limited to:
Asbestos Specific
• Asbestosis: A chronic lung ailment caused by the build-up of scar tissue
inside the lungs.
• Asbestosis can cause shortness of breath, permanent lung damage, and
increases the risk of lung infections.
• Mesothelioma: Asbestos caused cancer of the chest cavity lining or
abdominal cavity.
• Other cancers: Cancer of the lung, esophagus, stomach, colon, and
pancreas.
Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S)
• H2S paralyzes the sense of smell. Do Not Rely On Smell To Detect
H2S – Rely strictly on Instruments designed to measure concentrations of
H2S.
• Hydrogen sulphide is a very dangerous and deadly gas - it is colorless
and heavier than air.
• Exposure to certain concentrations of H2S can cause serious injury or
death.
Benzene
• Short-term exposure causes depression of the central nervous system
(CNS), marked by drowsiness, dizziness, headache, nausea, loss of
coordination, confusion and unconsciousness.
• Exposure to 50 to 150 ppm produces headache, and tiredness.
• Nose and throat irritation have also been reported following short-term
exposure.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
259
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
Blood-borne Pathogen Specific
• HIV infection
• Hepatitis B infection
• Hepatitis C infection
Substance: Common Health Effects
• Eye Irritation
• Burns
• Breathing difficulty
• Confusion
• Sleepiness
• Rapid pulse
• Loss of consciousness
• Anemia
• Damage to the nervous system
• Kidney Damage
• A rise in blood pressure
• Miscarriages and subtle abortions
• Disruption of nervous systems
• Brain damage
• Declined fertility of men through sperm damage
• Suppression of the immune system
• Death
18.7
Identify Chemical and Biological Hazards
Supervisors and local safety staff are responsible for identifying potential
chemical and biological hazards and risks to employees. Chemical and
biological hazards may be identified through data gathered by any of the
following processes:
• Workplace inspections
• Job safety analysis (JSA)
• Dangerous occurrences
• Workplace incident reports (types and causes)
• Incident investigations
• Concerns raised by employees
• Employees’ Compensation Board (WCB) claims
• Joint Health Safety and Health Committee minutes
• New or modified jobs
• New or modified equipment or job procedures
• New scientific information regarding hazards or risks
#Main_Table_of_Contents
260
Golden Health & Safety Program
•
•
•
•
18.8
Biological Hazard Program
Legislation ( Transportation of Dangerous Goods, WHMIS)
Industry standards (infection control)
Regulatory (codes of practice, ANSI, CSA, provincial and local)
Supplier, client or manufacturer information
Determine the Degree of Risk
Hazards need to be assessed by the degree of risk or harm posed to employees.
When determining the degree of risk to employees, consider not only the
probability or likelihood of the hazard causing harm, but also the potential severity
of the harm. Probability is the chance that a hazard will cause harm. Severity is
the seriousness of the harm that could be suffered. Risk represents the odds that
a hazard will cause harm.
Common questions to ask that will help with assessing the degree of risk include:
 How likely is the hazard to cause harm?
 Under what conditions is harm likely to occur?
 How quickly could an unsafe condition arise?
 What type of harm is involved?
 How many employees could get hurt?
 Is there a history of problems, incidents or dangerous occurrences resulting
from this hazard?
 What monitoring is required to evaluate the risk?
When looking for hazards for a specific task, ask questions such as:
 Can any body part be exposed to the substance?
 Do tools, equipment or processes present any problems?
 Can the employee make harmful contact with any materials?
 Is there a danger from falling/spilling objects?
 Is lighting a problem?
 Can weather conditions affect the chemical or biological substance?
 Is contact possible with hot, toxic or caustic substances?
 Are there fumes, dusts, mists or vapours in the air?
 What are the task and job specific risks?
18.9
Determine Appropriate Control Measures
THE TOWN OF GOLDEN shall use control measures to ensure that workers may
not be exposed to a concentration of a harmful substance above its Occupational
Exposure Limits (OEL).
#Main_Table_of_Contents
261
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
If a worker is, or may be, exposed to an airborne chemical or biological substance
in the workplace at a concentration in excess of the occupational exposure limit for
the substance, THE TOWN OF GOLDEN must implement control measures
sufficient to ensure that no worker is exposed to the substance in excess of the
occupational exposure limit for that substance.
Controls may be implemented at the source of the hazard, along the path between
the hazard and the employee, and/or at the employee level.
Often, more than one control method needs to be implemented in order to protect
the health and safety of employees. Strategies used to reduce, eliminate or
control hazards may include any one of the following:
Controls at the Source
Engineering controls either reduce or remove the hazard at the source or isolate
employees from the hazard.
 Eliminate the risk by getting rid of the hazardous substance.
 Substitute the hazard with a less hazardous process or material.
 Redesign the layout of the workplaces, workstations, work processes and
jobs.
 Isolate, contain or enclose the hazard, often used for chemical or biological
hazards.
 Automate dangerous work processes by using mechanical equipment.
Controls along the Path to the Employee
 Relocate by moving the hazard a safe distance from the employee.
 Create barriers between employee and the hazard to block the hazard path.
For example, use of screens, walls, aprons or other personal protective
equipment.
 Absorb the hazard by using local exhaust ventilation to remove toxic gases
(airborne hazards) at the source where they are produced.
 Dilute the hazard, such as hazardous gases, by mixing with clean outside air.
Controls at the Employee
 Work practice controls alter the manner in which a hazardous task is
performed, such as minimizing exposure, prohibiting smoking, inspecting
equipment and eating in regulated areas.
 Administrative controls such as implementation of new policies, improved and
standardized work procedures, job rotations, shift scheduling and good
supervision.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
262
Golden Health & Safety Program





Biological Hazard Program
Housekeeping, maintenance and repair to ensure cleaning, waste disposal
and spill clean-up at the workplace, as well routine preventive maintenance
and repair of equipment.
Hygiene practices that can reduce the spread of infections such as frequent
hand washing, lockers for changing between work and street clothes and
footwear, separate eating areas away from the hazardous work area, etc.
Personal protective equipment (PPE) such as gloves, eye protection and face
shields are to be used as controls when other controls are not feasible are
reasonably practicable, or where additional protection is required.
THE TOWN OF GOLDEN shall provide, and employees shall wear and use,
personal protective equipment appropriate in the circumstances to protect the
employees from exposure to a hazardous biological or chemical agent.
Where hazardous, irritating, or corrosive substances are used,
Decontamination and Emergency Baths, Showers, Eye Wash Equipment
Emergency washing equipment must be readily available in a location in the
workplace; be clearly identified and have unimpeded access.
THE TOWN OF GOLDEN may provide a personal eyewash unit to a worker
and a worker may use the unit to immediately flush an eye injury. When a
worker has used a personal eyewash unit to flush an eye injury, THE TOWN
OF GOLDEN must ensure that the worker immediately uses the emergency
eye washing equipment provided in the workplace. If an eyewash unit is used
it shall be refilled and made ready by a competent person following
manufacturer’s instructions.
18.10 Develop Written Safe Work Practices
Once chemical and biological hazards have been identified and control measures
have been selected to reduce, eliminate or control the hazard, the safest way to
perform the task must be put in writing. Safe work practices outline the step-bystep method for performing a particular task, including any potential or existing
hazards present and the control measures that must be taken to eliminate, reduce
or manage the risk. Safe work practices should also outline any emergency
procedures required in the event that control measures are not sufficient to protect
the employee from harm.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
263
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
Example: Decontamination and Emergency Baths, Showers, Eye Wash
Equipment
Emergency washing equipment must be readily available. THE TOWN OF
GOLDEN must provide emergency washing facilities at a workplace where
hazardous, irritating, or corrosive substances are used. THE TOWN OF GOLDEN
must ensure that the emergency washing equipment is located in the workplace
and are clearly identified with unimpeded access to the equipment is provided.
THE TOWN OF GOLDEN may provide a Personal eyewash unit to a worker and a
worker may use the unit to immediately flush and eye injury. When a worker has
used a personal eyewash unit to flush an eye injury, THE TOWN OF GOLDEN
must ensure that the worker immediately uses the emergency washing equipment
provided in the workplace. If an eyewash unit is used it shall be refilled and made
ready by a competent person following manufacturer’s instructions.
18.11 Ensure Identity of Substances, MSDS Labeling
Ensure Identity of the substance, its possible effects on employee health
and safety, and take any precautions required
Example: Harmful Substances
Potential exposure to harmful substances shall be assessed to ensure exposure
does not exceed occupational exposure limits
Where THE TOWN OF GOLDEN or an employee has reason to believe that the
level of concentration of an air contaminant may be approaching 50% of the
threshold limit value, THE TOWN OF GOLDEN shall ensure that the air is tested
to determine the level of concentration of the air contaminant.
An employee shall not smoke, eat, or drink anything while working within potential
exposure of harmful substances.
All containers, used or handled at a workplace, which by reason of toxicity,
flammability or reactivity create risk to the health or safety of employees shall be
contained, so far as is reasonably practicable in a suitable container which is
clearly labelled to identify the substance, the hazards associated with its use or
handling, the workplace uses for which it is intended, and protective measures to
be taken by employees before, during and after its use.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
264
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
THE TOWN OF GOLDEN will ensure that residue or waste from the substance or
materials used for cleaning or wiping it is placed into suitably labelled containers
for safe disposal.
Harmful substances are to be stored in a self-contained enclosure, room or
building that is isolated from work-related areas and worksites and is adequately
ventilated and protected from conditions, including excessive temperature, shock
or vibration that could reduce the stability or increase the potential hazard of the
substance.
Example: Procedures to be Followed in the Event of an Uncontrolled Release
or Spill
THE TOWN OF GOLDEN will ensure that emergency equipment appropriate for
use in the event of escape of a hazardous substance is readily available, any
spillage of a hazardous substance is immediately and adequately cleaned up, and
a hazardous substance is disposed of so that it will not create a hazard to the
health or safety of employees. Employees must be warned not to inhale the dust
during handling. THE TOWN OF GOLDEN must develop policy and procedures for
spill cleanup, which must include:



worker training and education
safe work procedures
at what threshold emergency services would be required to attend
Example: Restricted Areas
These are areas where there is a reasonable likelihood that airborne
concentrations of asbestos, silica, coal dust or lead will exceed their Occupational
Exposure Limits (OELs). THE TOWN OF GOLDEN shall ensure that only
authorized persons enters a restricted area. Signs shall clearly indicate that:



Asbestos, silica, coal dust or lead are present
Only authorized persons may enter and,
Eating, drinking and smoking are prohibited
Example: Protective Clothing
THE TOWN OF GOLDEN is responsible for laundering clothing used by
employees in a restricted area that contains asbestos or lead. This includes towels
that are used for employee decontamination.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
265
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
During storage and transportation, all contaminated protective clothing must be in
sealed containers that are clearly labeled to identify the contaminants.
18.12 Train Employees
Workers must be provided training on the chemical and biological hazards they
may be exposed to. THE TOWN OF GOLDEN must train workers in the safe work
procedures respecting the use, production, storage, handling and disposal of any
chemical or biological substance that an assessment has determined creates or
may create a risk to the safety or health of a worker in that workplace.
THE TOWN OF GOLDEN shall ensure that, prior to performing any hazardous
task(s), employees are trained in:
•
The established procedures for safely handling, using, storing and disposing of
the substance, including emergency and spill clean-up procedures.
•
Work procedures developed and the proper use of any personal protective
equipment required by regulations.
•
The health hazards associated with exposure to that substance.
•
Informed of measurements made of airborne concentrations of harmful
substances at the work site.
•
Emergency procedures developed that require the involvement of the worker or
are necessary to protect the health and safety of the worker.
18.13 Ensure Employee Compliance
Supervisors are responsible to ensure that employees comply with safe work
procedures. Procedures are written to provide information and guidance to anyone
performing a hazardous task or work process. Employees must comply with safe
work procedures by using equipment and/or tools provided in order to do the task
safely. Non-compliance with safe work practices may result in disciplinary action of
the employee. Working safely is a condition of employment.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
266
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
APPENDIX A - BIOLOGICAL HAZARD CONTROL PROGRAM PRACTICES
18.14 Appendix A - Routine Practices
Routine practices are a set of infection control strategies and standards designed to protect
workers from exposure to potential sources of infectious diseases. Routine practices are based
on the premise that all blood, body fluids, secretions, excretions, mucous membranes, nonintact skin or soiled items are potentially infectious. These practices, while mainly adopted by
healthcare providers, apply to all professions in which workers may become exposed to
infectious microorganisms through contact with blood and body fluids.
Universal Precautions, Body Substance Isolation, and Standard Precautions
Universal precautions are a set of strategies developed to prevent of transmission of blood
borne pathogens. The focus of universal precautions is on blood and selected body fluids such
as cerebrospinal fluid, pleural fluid, and amniotic fluid. Body secretions such as urine, vomitus,
feces, or sputum are not controlled under universal precautions, and are instead usually
covered under a set of guidelines called body substance isolation.
Routine practices are a combination of universal precautions and body substance isolation.
Routine practices have a much bigger scope and aim to protect against the transmission of all
microorganisms through contact with all body fluids, excretions, mucous membranes, non-intact
skin and soiled items in addition to precautions for blood.
Standard precautions is a term widely adopted in the United States and convey the same set of
principles as routine practices.
Components of Routine Practices
There are 5 major components to routine practices: risk assessment, hand hygiene, personal
protective equipment, environmental and administrative controls.
1.
Risk Assessment
Before any task is performed, conduct a risk assessment to evaluate the risk of disease
transmission. The risk assessment should take into account the following:
• the time it takes to complete the task
• the type of body fluids that the worker may come into contact with
• the presence of microorganisms in the bodily fluids
• the route of potential exposure to these microorganisms
• the susceptibility of the worker to these microorganisms
• the environment in which the task is carried out
Appropriate strategies such as hand hygiene, waste management, and the use of
personal protective equipment are then selected to reduce the risk of exposure and
disease transmission.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
267
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
APPENDIX A CONT’D
The following questions can be asked while assessing the risk:
1. What task am I going to perform?
2. What is the risk of exposure to:
• Blood and body fluids including respiratory secretions?
• Non-intact skin?
• Mucous membranes?
• Body tissues?
• Contaminated equipment?
3. How competent/experienced am I in performing this task?
2.
Hand Hygiene
Hand hygiene is the act of removing or destroying microorganisms on the hands while
maintaining good hand integrity (keeping the skin healthy). Hand hygiene can be
performed with an alcohol-based hand rub or with soap and water.
3.
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
PPE includes gloves, coveralls, goggles, glasses with side shields, masks, and
respirators. PPE is particularly needed when disease transmission may occur through
touching, spraying, aerosolization, or splashing of blood, bodily fluids, mucous
membranes, non-intact skin, body tissues, and contaminated equipment and surfaces.
PPE can help create a barrier between the exposed worker and the source of
microorganisms.
Gloves
Only disposable gloves should be used in the prevention of disease transmission. Gloves
must be removed and replaced when they become heavily soiled and when working
between patients and between dirty and clean tasks. Gloves should always be removed
using a glove-to-glove or skin-to-skin technique which will prevent contaminating the
hands.
The use of gloves does not replace the need for hand hygiene. Gloves often create a
moist environment that facilitates the growth of microorganisms. Hands should be properly
washed before the gloves are put on and after the gloves are removed. Hand hygiene is
also needed before and after the replacement of gloves during a procedure or in between
tasks.
Coveralls
Coveralls can be either reusable or disposable. These steps of coverall donning and
removal should be followed:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
268
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
APPENDIX A CONT’D
Coverall Donning
1.
Perform hand hygiene.
2.
Put coveralls on.
3.
Fasten.
Coverall Removal
1.
Unfasten and take coveralls off.
2.
Slip fingers of one hand under the wrist cuff and pull hand inside.
3.
With inside hand, push sleeve off with the other arm.
4.
Fold dirty-to-dirty and roll into bundle (do not shake).
5.
Discard in hamper.
6.
Perform hand hygiene.
Face Protection
Face protection can provide an effective barrier to protect a worker’s eyes, nose or mouth
from coming into contact with sprays or aerosolized body fluids. There are different types
and combinations of face protection, such as a mask with safety glasses, a full face shield,
or a mask with an attached visor.
Steps to remove PPE
The proper steps when removing PPE are critical to prevent contamination of the worker
with soiled PPE. The removal of PPE should be performed in the following order:
1.
Remove gloves.
2.
Remove coveralls.
3.
Perform hand hygiene.
4.
Remove eye protection.
5.
Remove mask.
6.
Perform hand hygiene.
4.
Environmental Controls
Environmental control refers to controlling and minimizing the level of microorganisms in
the environment. Environmental control measures include:
 Consistent and stringent equipment and work area cleaning, including laundry
protocols and schedules
 Proper disposal of waste such as sharps.
 Appropriate ventilation and other engineering controls
 Installation of easily accessible and clearly identified waste containers, hand hygiene
product dispensers, and dedicated hand wash sinks
 Effective placement and segregation of sources of contamination
 #Main_Table_of_Contents
269
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
APPENDIX A CONT’D
5.
Administrative Controls
Administrative controls include employee training, supervisory competency, immunization,
cough etiquette, workplace policies and procedures that are strictly enforced, and
sufficient staffing.
Administrative controls are critical to ensure that the principles of routine practices are
effectively and properly executed in the workplace.
Additional Precautions
In addition to routine practices, some workplaces apply additional precautions to prevent
and control specific infectious agents. The methods of additional precautions are based
on the mode of transmission -- contact, droplet, and airborne. Some microorganisms that
require additional precautions include Methicillin-Resistant Staphylococcus Aureus
(MRSA), Vanomycin-resistant enterococci (VRE) (included in drug-resistant organisms),
Clostridium Difficile (C. difficile), Anthrax, Malaria, and West Nile virus.
Additional precautions include following routine practices, plus:
 appropriate signage
 using barrier equipment (specific PPE)
 having dedicated equipment and additional cleaning measures
 having good communication between departments
Routine Practices and Law
Occupational health and safety is regulated in Canada in each of the fourteen jurisdictions
(provincial, territorial, and federal).
#Main_Table_of_Contents
270
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
APPENDIX B - BIOLOGICAL HAZARD CONTROL REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
18.15 Appendix B – Guideline Reference: OHSR 5.48 – 5.59
5.48 Exposure limits
Except as otherwise determined by the Board, the employer must ensure that no worker is
exposed to a substance that exceeds the ceiling limit, short-term exposure limit, or 8-hour Time
Weighted Average (TWA) limit prescribed by the American Conference of Governmental
Industrial Hygenists (ACGIH).
5.49 Excursion limits
If a substance referred to under section 5.48 is provided only with an 8-hour TWA limit, the
employer must, in addition to the requirement of section 5.48, ensure that a worker's exposure
to the substance does not exceed
(a) three times the 8-hour TWA limit for more than a total of 30 minutes during the work
period, and
(b) five times the 8-hour TWA limit at any time.
5.50 Extended work periods
(1) If the work period is more than 8 hours in a 24 hour day, the 8-hour TWA limit must be
reduced by multiplying the TWA limit by the following factors:
Facto Length of work period (in
r
hours)
0.7
more than 8, but not
more than 10
0.5
more than 10, but not
more than 12
0.25 more than 12, but not
more than 16
0.1
more than 16
(2) For some substances with an extended biological half-life, with written permission from the
Board, a factor other than those in subsection (1), or a time-weighted averaging period other
than 8 hours may be used to accommodate extended work periods, provided that any such
adjustment is based upon recognized occupational hygiene principles, and provides adequate
protection from adverse health effects.
5.51 Additive effects
If there is exposure to a mixture of 2 or more substances with established exposure limits which
exhibit similar toxicological effects, the effects of such exposure must be considered additive
unless it is known otherwise, and the additive exposure must not exceed 100% when calculated
as follows:
AE = %EL1 + %EL2 + ... %ELn
where
(a) AE is the calculated additive exposure to the mixture,
#Main_Table_of_Contents
271
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
APPENDIX B CONT’D
(b) %EL1 is the measured exposure to component 1 of the mixture expressed as a
percentage of its exposure limit,
(c) %EL2 is the measured exposure to component 2 of the mixture expressed as a
percentage of its exposure limit, and
(d) %ELn is the measured exposure to any additional components of the mixture
expressed as a percentage of their respective exposure limits.
5.52 Skin designation
If skin absorption may contribute to the overall exposure, effective measures must be taken to
limit exposure by this route.
Note: Substances which can contribute to exposure by skin absorption are identified with a
"Skin" notation by the ACGIH.
5.53 Workplace monitoring
(1) If a worker is or may be exposed to a hazardous substance, the employer must ensure that
(a) a walkthrough survey is conducted to assess the potential for overexposure taking
into account all routes of exposure, including inhalation, ingestion, and skin contact, and
(b) reassessment is conducted when there is a change in work conditions which may
increase the exposure, such as a change in production rate, process or equipment.
(2) If the walkthrough survey required by subsection (1) reveals that a worker may be at risk of
overexposure to an airborne contaminant, the employer must ensure that air sampling is
conducted to assess the potential for overexposure.
(3) Additional workplace monitoring to reliably determine worker exposure is required if
(a) the assessment under subsection (2) reveals that a worker may be exposed to an air
contaminant in excess of 50% of its exposure limit,
or
(b) measurement is not possible at 50% of the applicable exposure limit.
(4) Workplace exposure monitoring and assessment must be conducted using occupational
hygiene methods acceptable to the Board.
(5) The results of workplace exposure monitoring and assessment, or a summary of the results,
must be provided to workers at their request without undue delay.
Note: See also section 5.2 which provides general requirements to prevent overexposure by
any route.
5.54 Exposure control plan
(1) An exposure control plan must be implemented when
(a) exposure monitoring under section 5.53(3) indicates that a worker is or may be
exposed to an air contaminant in excess of 50% of its exposure limit,
(b) measurement is not possible at 50% of the applicable exposure limit, or
(c) otherwise required by this Regulation.
272
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
APPENDIX B cont’d
(2) The exposure control plan must incorporate the following elements:
(a) a statement of purpose and responsibilities;
(b) risk identification, assessment and control;
(c) education and training;
(d) written work procedures, when required;
(e) hygiene facilities and decontamination procedures, when required;
(f) health monitoring, when required;
(g) documentation, when required.
(3) The plan must be reviewed at least annually and updated as necessary by the employer, in
consultation with the joint committee or the worker health and safety representative, as
applicable.
5.55 Type of controls
(1) If there is a risk to a worker from exposure to a hazardous substance by any route of
exposure, the employer must eliminate the exposure, or otherwise control it below harmful
levels and below the applicable exposure limit established under section 5.48 by
(a) substitution,
(b) engineering control,
(c) administrative control, or
(d) personal protective equipment.
(2) When selecting a suitable substitute, the employer must ensure that the hazards of the
substitute are known, and that the risk to workers is reduced by its use.
(3) The use of personal protective equipment as the primary means to control exposure is
permitted only when
(a) substitution, or engineering or administrative controls are not practicable, or
(b) additional protection is required because engineering or administrative controls are
insufficient to reduce exposure below the applicable exposure limits, or
(c) the exposure results from temporary or emergency conditions only.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 315/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
5.56 Oxygen deficiency
The airborne concentration of any gas or vapour must be controlled so that a worker is not
exposed to an oxygen deficient atmosphere, and there is no other hazard, such as fire or
explosion.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
273
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
APPENDIX B CONT’D
Note: Examples of gases that can cause an oxygen deficient atmosphere include:
acetylene
argon
ethane
ethylene
helium
hydrogen
methane
neon
nitrogen
propane
propylene
5.57 Designated substances
(1) If a substance identified as any of the following is present in the workplace, the employer
must replace it, if practicable, with a material which reduces the risk to workers:
(a) ACGIH A1 or A2, or IARC 1, 2A or 2B carcinogen;
(b) ACGIH reproductive toxin;
(c) ACGIH sensitizer;
(d) ACGIH L endnote.
(2) If it is not practicable to substitute a material which reduces the risk to workers, in
accordance with subsection (1), the employer must implement an exposure control plan to
maintain workers' exposure as low as reasonably achievable below the exposure limit
established under section 5.48.
(3) The exposure control plan must meet the requirements of section 5.54.
5.58 Protective policy
(1) At any worksite where a worker is exposed to a substance which is identified in section
5.57(1) as an ACGIH reproductive toxin or an ACGIH sensitizer, the employer must develop
policy and procedures appropriate to the risk, which may include protective reassignment.
(2) The policy and procedures required by subsection (1) must
(a) inform workers about the reproductive toxin and identify ways to minimize exposure
to the toxin for a worker who has advised the employer of pregnancy or intent to
conceive a child, and
(b) identify ways to eliminate or minimize exposure to a sensitizer for a worker who is or
may be sensitized to that substance.
5.59 Investigating symptoms
(1) If a worker exhibits signs or reports symptoms of overexposure to a hazardous substance
present in the workplace, the employer must investigate and assess the potential for exposure.
(2) If the assessment demonstrates that the signs or symptoms can be caused by exposure to a
hazardous substance that is present in the workplace, further investigation must be conducted,
in consultation with the joint committee or the worker health and safety representative, as
applicable, to address and resolve the worker's concern.
(3) Records of the investigation required under subsection (2) must be made available to
workers, and maintained by the employer for a minimum of 10 years.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
274
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
APPENDIX C - BIOLOGICAL HAZARD CONTROL - APPROVED RESPIRATOR
18.16 Appendix C – Guideline Reference: OHSR 8.33
8.33 (2)-1 Approved respirators
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.33(2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Only a respirator which meets the requirements of a standard acceptable to the Board may be
used for protection against airborne contaminants in the workplace.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to identify a standard acceptable to the Board for respirators
and to provide information on the U.S. National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
(NIOSH) certification of respirators, particularly for respirators used to protect against airborne
particulates. It also includes a list of approval in other jurisdictions for certain particulate
respirators that are also considered acceptable to WorkSafeBC under section 8.33(2) of the
Regulation.
"Particulates" are airborne contaminants other than gases or vapours, and include dusts, mists,
fibers, pollen, spores, and aerosols contaminated with bacteria or viruses.
Particulate respirators with NIOSH approvals
WorkSafeBC accepts (NIOSH) certification requirements for respirators as a standard
acceptable to the Board under s. 8.33(2) of the Regulation. The requirements for NIOSH
certified respirators are found in Part 84 of Title 42 of the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations on
respiratory protective devices ("Part 84"). Certifications in Part 84 cover various types of
respirators including non-powered air-filtering particulate respirators, chemical cartridge
respirators, self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), airline respirators, and powered airpurifying respirators (PAPR) equipped with high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters. All
respirators approved under Part 84 carry a certification label bearing the emblems of NIOSH
and the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS).
For non-powered, air-purifying particulate respirators the sequence of NIOSH approval numbers
is "TC-84A-xxx." These respirators include particulate filtering face piece respirators, as well as
respirators with elastomeric face pieces.
Filtering face piece respirators, in which the entire face piece acts as the filter, cover only half
the face, and are sometimes termed "disposable" respirators. Respirators with elastomeric face
pieces made of silicone, thermoplastic, or rubber material are available in half or full face piece
models. In these designs one or more filters or cartridges are attached to the face piece.
Under Part 84, particulate respirators are classified on the basis of their resistance to oil. Oil
degrades and reduces the filtering efficiency of the filter material. NIOSH certifies the following
three classes of filters: N-series (for Not resistant to oil), R-series (for Resistant to oil), and Pseries (for oil Proof).
Each of these three classes of filters is also certified according to its level of filter efficiency
(rated as 95%, 99%, or 99.97% efficient at removing particles 0.3 micrometres in diameter). For
example, a filter marked N95 means that the filter is not resistant to oil and is at least 95%
#Main_Table_of_Contents
275
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
APPENDIX C Cont’d
efficient at removing particles 0.3 micrometres in diameter. In total, nine classes of filters are
certified, as shown in the Table below.
Classes of filters certified by NIOSH under Part 84
Filter series
Filter type
"N" Series
N100
N99
N95
R100
R99
R95
P100
P99
P95
"R" Series
"P" Series
Minimum
efficiency
99.97%
99%
95%
99.97%
99%
95%
99.97%
99%
95%
Comments
May be used for any solid or non-oil
containing particulate.
May be used for any particulate contaminant.
May only be used for 1 shift if used for an oilcontaining particulate.
May be used for any particulate contaminant.
Note: Oil aerosols include lubricants, cutting fluids, and glycerine.
All nine classes of filters, as discussed in the above Table, are considered appropriate for
protection against tuberculosis and other airborne biological agents. (Refer to OHS Guidelines
G6.34-1 to G6.40 for further information on protection against biological agents designated as a
hazardous substance in section 5.1.1.)
Particulate respirators with approvals in jurisdictions other than NIOSH
To be acceptable to WorkSafeBC under section 8.33(2) of the Regulation, respirators approved
in a jurisdiction other than NIOSH in the US are expected to be equivalent to products bearing
NIOSH approvals.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
276
Golden Health & Safety Program
Biological Hazard Program
18.17 Appendix D – Removal of Gloves
APPENDIX D - BIOLOGICAL HAZARD CONTROL PROGRAM - REMOVAL OF GLOVES
Removing Disposable Gloves
Follow these steps to make sure your hands do not contact any biological agent left on used gloves:
1.With both hands gloved, grasp the outside
of one glove at the top of the wrist.
1.Peel off this glove from wrist to fingertips
while turning it inside out, as you pull the
glove off your hand and away from you.
Hold the glove you just removed in your
gloved hand.
1.With the ungloved hand peel off the
second glove by inserting your fingers on the
inside of the glove at the top of your wrist.
1.Turn the glove inside out while tilting it
away from you, leaving the first glove inside
the second.
1. Dispose of the entire bundle promptly in a waterproof garbage bag. DO NOT REUSE!
2. Wash your hands thoroughly with soap and water as soon as possible after removing gloves
and before touching non-contaminated objects and surfaces.
Some workers may be allergic to natural rubber latex gloves. The WorkSafeBC pamphlet,
Dealing with Latex Allergies at Work, should be consulted for more information and used as a
resource by workers exposed to natural rubber latex products. The Laboratory Centre for
Disease Control (a branch of Health Canada) considers disposable, good quality, non-latex
gloves made of vinyl, nitrile, neoprene, copolymer, and polyethylene to be adequate barriers to
bloodborne pathogens.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
277
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
19. EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM
19.1
Objective .......................................................................................................... 281
19.2 Assignment of Responsibility ........................................................................... 281
19.3 Training ............................................................................................................. 282
19.4 Excavation Requirements ................................................................................ 283
19.5 Protective System Requirments ....................................................................... 290
19.6 Accident Investigations ..................................................................................... 297
19.7 Changes to Program ........................................................................................ 298
19.8
Glossary........................................................................................................... 298
19.9 Appendix A – Graveyard Excavation................................................................ 301
19.10 Purpose ............................................................................................................ 301
19.11 Scope ............................................................................................................... 301
19.12 Preparation ....................................................................................................... 301
19.13 Equipment Placement ...................................................................................... 301
19.14 Excavation Procedure ...................................................................................... 301
19.15 No Entry ............................................................................................................ 302
19.16 Appendix B – Excavaton Practices – Safe Work Procedure ........................... 303
19.17 Purpose ............................................................................................................ 303
19.18 Scope................................................................................................................ 303
19.19 Standards/Procedures ...................................................................................... 304
279
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
19.20 RD7000 User Locate Information .................................................................... 322
19.21 Preface ............................................................................................................. 323
19.22 Basic Operation ................................................................................................ 323
19.23 Locating Cables and Pipes ............................................................................... 325
19.24 Depth and Current Readings ........................................................................... 328
19.25 General Locating Tips ...................................................................................... 331
19.26 Using Accessories ............................................................................................ 334
19.27 Care and Maintenance ..................................................................................... 336
280
Golden Health & Safety Program
19.1
Excavation Safety Program
Objective
This Excavation Safety Program has been developed to protect employees from safety hazards
that may be encountered during work in trenches and excavations. This program is intended to
assure that:
Employees who perform work in excavations are aware of their responsibilities and know
how to perform the work safely.
The Town of Golden has appointed one or more individuals within the company to
assure compliance with the requirements of this program.
The responsibilities of these individuals and workers are clearly detailed.
All persons involved in excavation and trenching work have received appropriate training
in the safe work practices that must be followed when performing this type of work.
19.2
Assignment of Responsibility
A. Employer
In administering the Excavation Safety Program, the Town of Golden will:
Monitor the overall effectiveness of the program.
Provide atmospheric testing and equipment selection as needed.
Provide personal protective equipment as needed.
Provide protective systems as needed.
Provide training to affected employees and supervisors.
Provide technical assistance as needed.
Preview and update the program on at least an annual basis, or as needed.
B. Program Manager
The Program Manager and/or his delegate shall act as the competent person for the
Town of Golden in reference to this program, and must assure that:
The procedures described in this program are followed.
Employees entering excavations or trenches are properly trained and equipped to
perform their duties safely.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
281
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
All required inspections, tests, and recordkeeping functions have been performed.
C. Employees
All employees, including contractor personnel, who work in or around excavations, must
comply with the requirements of this program. Employees are responsible for reporting
hazardous practices or situations to the Town of Golden management, as well as
reporting incidents that cause injury to themselves or other employees to the site
foreman.
19.3
Training
A. Training Schedule
All personnel involved in trenching or excavation work shall be trained in the
requirements of this program by the site foreman with assistance from the
appropriate lead hands.
Training shall be performed before employees are assigned duties in excavations.
Retraining will be performed when work site inspections indicate that an employee
does not have the necessary knowledge or skills to safely work in or around
excavations, or when changes to this program are made.
Training records will be maintained by the HR department and shall include:
a. date of the training program;
b. name(s) of the instructor(s) who conducted the training;
c. a copy of the written material presented; and
d. name(s) of the employee(s) who received the training.
e. Note: training can include classroom work, crew talk meetings and
hands on work activities.
B. Training Components
The training provided to all personnel who perform work in excavations shall include:
The work practices that must be followed during excavating or working in
excavations.
The use of personal protective equipment that will typically be required during
work in excavations, including but not limited to safety shoes, hardhats, eye
protection and fall protection devices.
Procedures to be followed if a hazardous atmosphere exists or could reasonably
be expected to develop during work in an excavation.
The WorksafeBC excavation regulations.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
282
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Emergency and non-entry rescue methods, and the procedure for calling rescue
services.
Town of Golden policy on reporting incidents that cause injury to employees.
C. Training and Duties of Program Manager
The Program Manager and/or his delegate, shall receive the training detailed in this
program as well as training on the requirements detailed in the Worksafebc regulations.
The Program Manager or his delegate shall:
Coordinate, actively participate in, and document the training of all employees
affected by this program.
Ensure on a daily basis, or more often as detailed in this program, that worksite
conditions are safe for employees to work in excavations.
Determine the means of protection that will be used for each excavation project.
Ensure, if required, that the design of a protective system has been completed
and approved by a registered professional engineer before work begins in an
excavation.
Make available a copy of this program and the Worksafebc regulations to any
employee who requests it.
19.4
Excavation Requirements
A. Utilities and Pre-Work Site Inspection
Prior to excavation, the site shall be thoroughly inspected by the site foreman to
determine if special safety measures must be taken.
B. Surface Encumbrances
All equipment, materials, supplies, permanent installations (i.e., buildings or
roadways), trees, brush, boulders, and other objects at the surface that could
present a hazard to employees working in the excavation shall be removed or
supported as necessary to protect employees.
C. Underground Installations
The location of sewer, telephone, fuel, electric, water, or any other underground
installations or wires that may be encountered during excavation work shall be
determined and marked prior to opening an excavation. Arrangements shall be
made as necessary by the site foreman with the appropriate utility entity for the
protection, removal, shutdown, or relocation of underground installations.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
283
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
If it is not possible to establish the exact location of these installations, the work
may proceed with caution if detection equipment or other safe and acceptable
means are used to locate the utility.
.
Excavation shall be done in a manner that does not endanger the underground
installations or the employees engaged in the work. Utilities left in place shall be
protected by barricades, shoring, suspension, or other means as necessary to
protect employees.
D. Protection of the Public
Barricades, walkways, lighting, and posting shall be provided as necessary for the
protection of the public prior to the start of excavation operations.
Guardrails, fences, or barricades shall be provided on excavations adjacent to
walkways, driveways, and other pedestrian or vehicle thoroughfares. Warning
lights or other illumination shall be maintained as necessary for the safety of the
public and employees from sunset to sunrise.
Wells, holes, pits, shafts, and all similar hazardous excavations shall be effectively
barricaded or covered and posted as necessary to prevent unauthorized access.
All temporary excavations of this type shall be backfilled as soon as possible.
Walkways or bridges protected by standard guardrails shall be provided where
employees and the general public are permitted to cross over excavations. Where
workers in the excavation may pass under these walkways or bridges, a standard
guardrail and toe board shall be used to prevent the hazard of falling objects.
Information on the requirements for guardrails and toe boards may be obtained by
contacting the site foreman.
E. Protection of Employees
Stairs, ladders, or ramps shall be provided at excavation sites where employees are
required to enter trench excavations over four (4) feet deep. The maximum distance of
lateral travel (along the length of the trench) necessary to reach the means of egress
shall not exceed 25 feet.
Structural Ramps
a. Structural ramps used solely by employees as a means of access or
egress from excavations shall be designed by a competent person.
Structural ramps used for access or egress of equipment shall be designed
by a person qualified in structural design, and shall be constructed in
accordance with the design.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
284
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
b. Ramps and runways constructed of two or more structural members
shall have the structural members connected together to prevent
movement or displacement.
c. Structural members used for ramps and runways shall be of uniform
thickness.
d. Cleats or other appropriate means used to connect runway structural
members shall be attached to the bottom of the runway or shall be
attached in a manner to prevent tripping.
e. Structural ramps used in place of steps shall be provided with cleats or
other surface treatments on the top surface to prevent slipping.
Ladders
f. When portable ladders are used, the ladder side rails shall extend a
minimum of three (3) feet above the upper surface of the excavation.
g. Ladders shall have nonconductive side rails if work will be performed
near exposed energized equipment or systems.
h. Two or more ladders, or a double-cleated ladder, will be provided where
25 or more employees will be conducting work in an excavation where
ladders serve as the primary means of egress, or where ladders serve twoway traffic.
i. Ladders will be inspected prior to use for signs of damage or defects.
Damaged ladders will be removed from service and marked with “Do Not
Use” until repaired.
j. Ladders shall be used only on stable and level surfaces unless secured.
Ladders placed in any location where they can be displaced by workplace
activities or traffic shall be secured, or barricades shall be used to keep
these activities away from the ladders.
k. Non self-supporting ladders shall be positioned so that the foot of the
ladder is one-quarter of the working length away from the support.
l. Employees are not permitted to carry any object or load while on a
ladder that could cause them to lose their balance and fall.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
285
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
F. Exposure to Vehicular Traffic
Employees exposed to vehicular traffic shall be provided with, and shall wear high
visibility apparel meeting the type 1 or type 2 criteria of “ WCB Standard Personal
Protective equipment Standard 2-1997, High Visibility Garment” or the class 2 or 3
garment criteria of “CSA standard Z96-02, High Visibility Safety Apparel”, with a
fluorescent background colour along with high visibility safety head gear with a stipe of
reflectorized tape across the top from front to back and on the sides. The traffic control
person must also wear wrist and lower leg bands with appropriate retroreflective strips.
Emergency lighting, such as spotlights or portable lights, shall be provided as needed to
perform work safely.
G. Exposure to Falling Loads
No employee is permitted underneath loads being handled by lifting or digging
equipment. Employees are required to stand away from any vehicle being loaded or
unloaded to avoid being struck by any spillage or falling materials. Operators may remain
in the cabs of vehicles being loaded or unloaded when the vehicles provide adequate
protection for the operator during loading and unloading operations.
H. Warning System for Mobile Equipment
A warning system shall be used when mobile equipment is operated adjacent to the
edge of an excavation if the operator does not have a clear and direct view of the edge
of the excavation. The warning system shall consist of barricades, hand or mechanical
signals, or stop logs. If possible, the grade should be away from the excavation.
I. Hazardous Atmospheres
The site foreman or the trained worker will test the atmosphere in excavations over four
(4) feet deep if a hazardous atmosphere exists or could reasonably be expected to exist.
A hazardous atmosphere could be expected, for example, in excavations in landfill
areas, areas where hazardous substances are stored nearby, or near areas containing
gas pipelines.
Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent employee exposure to atmospheres
containing less than 19.5 percent oxygen and other hazardous atmospheres such as
hydrogen sulfide, carbon monoxide and explosive concentrations of flammables such as
methane. These precautions include providing proper respiratory protection or forced
ventilation of the workspace.
Forced ventilation or other effective means shall be used to prevent employee exposure
to an atmosphere containing a flammable gas in excess of ten (10) percent of the lower
flammability limit of the gas.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
286
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
When controls are used that are intended to reduce the level of atmospheric
contaminants to acceptable levels, continuous air monitoring will be performed by the
site foreman or trained worker. The device used for atmospheric monitoring shall be
equipped with an audible and visual alarm.
Atmospheric testing will be performed using a properly calibrated direct reading gas
monitor. Direct reading gas detector tubes or other acceptable means may also be used
to test potentially toxic atmospheres.
Each atmospheric testing instrument shall be calibrated by the site foreman or the
trained worker on a schedule and in the manner recommended by the manufacturer. In
addition:
a) Any atmospheric testing instrument that has not been used within 30 days shall
be recalibrated prior to use.
b) Each atmospheric testing instrument shall be calibrated at least every six (6)
months.
Each atmospheric testing instrument will be field checked (bump test) immediately prior
to use to ensure that it is operating properly.
J. Personal Protective Equipment
All employees working in trenches or excavations shall wear approved hardhats and
steel-toed work boots with leather protection above the ankle.
Employees exposed to flying fragments, dust or other materials produced by drilling,
sawing, sanding, grinding, and similar operations shall wear approved safety glasses
with side shields.
Employees performing welding, cutting, or brazing operations, or are exposed to the
hazards produced by these tasks, shall wear approved spectacles or a welding
faceshield or helmet, as determined by the site foreman.
Employees entering bell-bottom pier holes or other similar deep and confined footing
excavations shall wear a harness with a lifeline securely attached to it. The lifeline shall
be separate from any line used to handle materials and shall be individually attended at
all times while the employee wearing the lifeline is in the excavation. A tripod hoist will be
on site for emergency rescue purposes.
Employees shall wear, as determined by the site foreman, approved gloves or other
suitable hand protection.
Employees using or working in the immediate vicinity of hammer drills, masonry saws,
jackhammers, or similar high-noise producing equipment shall wear suitable hearing
protection either ear muffs or ear plugs, as determined by the site foreman.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
287
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Each employee working at the edge of an excavation ten (10) feet or more deep shall be
protected from falling. Fall protection shall include guardrail systems, fences, barricades,
covers, or a tie-back system meeting Worksafebc requirements, as determined by the
site foreman.
Emergency rescue equipment, such as breathing apparatus, a safety harness and line, a
tripod hoist and a basket stretcher, shall be readily available where hazardous
atmospheric conditions exist or may develop during work in an excavation. This
equipment shall be attended when in use. Only personnel who have received approved
training and have appropriate equipment shall attempt retrieval that would require entry
into a hazardous atmosphere. If entry into a known hazardous atmosphere must be
performed, then the operations manager or his designate shall be given advance notice
so that the hazards can be evaluated and rescue personnel placed on standby if
necessary.
K. Walkways and Guardrails
Walkways shall be provided where employees or equipment are permitted to cross over
excavations. Guardrails shall be provided where walkways, accessible only to on-site
project personnel, are four (4) feet or more above lower levels.
L. Protection from Water Accumulation Hazards
Employees are not permitted to work in excavations that contain or are accumulating
water unless precautions have been taken to protect them from the hazards posed by
water accumulation. Precautions may include special support or shield systems to
protect from cave-ins, water removal to control the level of accumulating water, or use of
safety harnesses and lifelines.
If water is controlled or prevented from accumulating by the use of water removal
equipment, the water removal equipment and operation shall be monitored by a person
trained in the use of that equipment.
If excavation work interrupts the natural drainage of surface water (such as streams),
diversion ditches, dikes, or other suitable means shall be used to prevent surface water
from entering the excavation. Precautions shall also be taken to provide adequate
drainage of the area adjacent to the excavation. Excavations subject to runoff from
heavy rains shall be reinspected by the site foreman or a trained designate after each
rain incident to determine if additional precautions, such as special support or shield
systems to protect from cave-ins, water removal to control the level of accumulating
water, or use of safety harnesses and lifelines, should be used.
The site foreman or the trained designate, shall inform affected workers of the
precautions or procedures that are to be followed if water accumulates or is
accumulating in an excavation.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
288
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
M. Stability of Adjacent Structures
A professional engineer will determine if the excavation work could affect the stability of
adjoining buildings, walls, sidewalks, or other structures.
Support systems (such as shoring, bracing, or underpinning) shall be used to assure the
stability of structures and the protection of employees where excavation operations could
affect the stability of adjoining buildings, walls, or other structures.
Excavation below the level of the base or footing of any foundation or retaining wall that
could be reasonably expected to pose a hazard to employees shall not be permitted,
except when:
a) a support system, such as underpinning, is provided to ensure the safety of
employees and the stability of the structure;
b) the excavation is in stable rock;
c) a registered professional engineer has approved the determination that the
structure is sufficiently removed from the excavation so as to be unaffected by the
excavation activity; or
d) a registered professional engineer has approved the determination that such
excavation work will not pose a hazard to employees.
e) Sidewalks, pavements, and appurtenant structures shall not be undermined
unless a support system or other method of protection is provided to protect
employees from the possible collapse of such structures.
Where review or approval of a support system by a registered professional engineer is
required, the operations manager or his designate, shall secure this review and approval
in writing before the work begins.
N. Protection from Falling Objects and Loose Rocks or Soil
Adequate protection shall be provided to protect employees from loose rock or soil that
could pose a hazard by falling or rolling from an excavation face. Such protection shall
consist of:
a) scaling to remove loose material;
b) installation of protective barricades, such as wire mesh or timber, at appropriate
intervals on the face of the slope to stop and contain falling material; or
c) benching sufficient to contain falling material.
Excavation personnel shall not be permitted to work above one another where the
danger of falling rock or earth exists.
Employees shall be protected from excavated materials, equipment, or other materials
that could pose a hazard by falling or rolling into excavations.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
289
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Protection shall be provided by keeping such materials or equipment at least two (2) feet
from the edge of excavations, by use of restraining devices that are sufficient to prevent
materials or equipment from falling or rolling into excavations, or by a combination of
both if necessary.
Materials and equipment may, as determined by the site foreman, need to be stored
further than two (2) feet from the edge of the excavation if a hazardous loading condition
is created on the face of the excavation.
Materials piled, grouped, or stacked near the edge of an excavation must be stable and
self-supporting.
O. Inspection by Operations Manager
The Operations Manager or his designate , shall conduct daily inspections of
excavations, adjacent areas, and protective systems for evidence of a situation that
could result in possible cave-ins, failure of protective systems, hazardous atmospheres,
or other hazardous conditions. An inspection shall be conducted by the site foreman or
trained designate prior to the start of work and as needed throughout the shift.
Inspections shall also be made after every rainstorm or other hazard-increasing
occurrence. These inspections are only required when the trench will be or is occupied
by employees.
Where evidence of a situation that could result in a possible cave-in, failure of protective
systems, hazardous atmosphere, or other hazardous conditions occurs, exposed
employees shall be removed from the hazardous area until precautions have been taken
to assure their safety.
The site foreman or trained designate shall maintain a written log of all inspections
conducted. This log shall include the date, work site location, results of the inspection,
and a summary of any action taken to correct existing hazards.
19.5
Protective System Requirements
A. Protection of Employees
Employees in an excavation shall be protected from cave-ins by using either an
adequate sloping and benching system or an adequate support or protective
system. The only exception is:
a. excavations less than four (4) feet in depth where examination of the
ground by the site foreman or trained designate provides no indication of a
potential cave-in.
Protective systems shall be capable of resisting all loads that could reasonably be
expected to be applied to the system.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
290
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
B. Design of Sloping and Benching Systems
The slope and configuration of sloping and benching systems shall be selected and
constructed by the site foreman or trained designate in accordance with the following
options:
Allowable configurations and slopes
1. Excavations shall be sloped at an angle no steeper than one and one-half (1
½) horizontal to one (1) vertical (34 degrees measured from the horizontal),
unless one of the options listed below is used.
2. Slopes shall be properly excavated depending on soil type as shown in OSHA
29 CFR 1926, Subpart P, Appendix B.
Determination of slopes, benching and configurations using Figure 20-1 and
Figure 20-2 in Part 20 of the Worksafebc regulations
Designs using other tabulated data
The design of sloping or benching systems may be selected from, and shall be
constructed in accordance with, other tabulated data, such as tables and charts.
The tabulated data used must be in written form and include the following:
1. Identification of the factors that affect the selection of a sloping or benching
system.
2. Identification of the limits of the use of the data, including the maximum height
and angle of the slopes determined to be safe.
3. Other information needed by the user to make correct selection of a protective
system.
4. At least one copy of the tabulated data that identifies the registered
professional engineer who approved the data shall be maintained at the jobsite
during construction of the protective system. After that time, the data may be
stored off the jobsite, and shall be maintained by the operations manager or
his designate.
Design by a registered professional engineer
1. Sloping or benching systems designed in a manner other than those described
in the preceding three options shall be approved by a registered professional
engineer.
2. Designs shall be in written form and shall include at least the following
information:
a. the maximum height and angle of the slopes that were determined to be
safe for a particular project, the subsurface conditions that may be
expected; and
#Main_Table_of_Contents
291
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
b. the identity of the registered professional engineers who approved the
design.
3. At least one copy of the design shall be maintained at the jobsite while the
slope is being constructed. After that time, the design may be stored off the
jobsite, and shall be maintained by the operations manager or his designate.
C. Design of Support, Shield, and Other Protective Systems
The design of support systems, shield systems, and other protective systems shall be
selected and constructed by the site foreman in accordance with the following
requirements:
Designs using soil type information, the depth and width of the excavation
1. Timber shoring in trenches shall be designed in accordance with the
requirements of Table 20-1 from the Worksafebc regulations Part 20.
2. Aluminum hydraulic shoring shall be designed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s tabulated data.
Designs using manufacturer’s tabulated data
3. Support systems, shield systems, and other protective systems designed from
manufacturer’s tabulated data shall be constructed and used in accordance
with all specifications, recommendations, and limitations issued or made by
the manufacturer.
4. Deviation from the specifications, recommendations, and limitations issued or
made by the manufacturer shall be allowed only after the manufacturer issues
specific written approval.
5. Manufacturer’s specifications, recommendations, and limitations, as well as
the manufacturer’s written approval to deviate from the specifications,
recommendations, and limitations, shall be kept in written form at the jobsite
during construction of the protective system(s). After that time, the information
may be stored off the jobsite, and shall be maintained by the operations
manager or his designate.
Designs using other tabulated data
Designs of support systems, shield systems, and other protective systems shall
be selected from and constructed in accordance with tabulated data, such as
tables and charts.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
292
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
6. The tabulated data shall be in written form and shall include all of the following:
a. identification of the factors that affect the selection of a protective
system drawn from such data;
b. identification of the limits of the use of such data; and
c. information needed by the user to make a correct selection of a
protective system from the data.
7. At least one written copy of the tabulated data, which identifies the registered
professional engineer who approved the data, shall be maintained at the
jobsite during construction of the protective system. After that time, the data
may be stored off the jobsite, and shall be maintained by the operations
manager or his designate.
Design by a registered professional engineer
Support systems, shield systems, and other protective systems designed in a
manner other than the preceding three options shall be approved by a registered
professional engineer.
1. Designs shall be in written form and shall include:
a. a plan indicating the sizes, types, and configurations of the materials to
be used in the protective system; and
b. the identity of the registered professional engineer who approved the
design.
2. At least one copy of the design shall be maintained at the jobsite during
construction of the protective system. After that time, the design may be stored off
the jobsite, and shall be maintained by the operations manager or his designate.
When an engineer is required
Written instructions are required from a professional engineer when:
a) The excavation is more than 6m (20 ft.) deep,
b) An improvement or structure is adjacent to the excavation,
c) The excavation is subject to vibration or hydrostatic pressure likely to result
in ground movement hazardous to workers, or
d) The ground slopes away from the edge of the excavation at an angle
steeper than a ratio of 3 horizontal to 1 vertical
#Main_Table_of_Contents
293
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
What an engineer report should contain
Written instructions
Verbal instructions from a qualified registered professional with no supporting
documents are insufficient.
The following should be included as a minimum for a qualified registered
professional's certificate on a site under this section:








Date of issue
Site address/location
Drawing/sketch, plan, and sections and/or clearly written instructions
Geotechnical description of the expected soil conditions, or confirmation upon site
review
Limitations for machinery or equipment being adjacent to the excavation
Time period for which certification applies
Influence of changing weather conditions
Name of the certifying qualified registered professional, signature, and seal
Subsequent certifications may refer back to the initial certification documents, in
which case such documents shall be available at the site. If conditions and/or
instructions change with respect to the conduct of the excavation work,
supplementary instructions and documentation are required.
If the certification is incomplete or deemed inadequate, work should stop in the
hazard area until acceptable certification is available, or until remedial work is
done so that the excavation complies with the Regulation.
D. Materials and Equipment
Materials and equipment used for protective systems shall be free from damage
or defects that might affect their proper function.
Manufactured materials and equipment used for protective systems shall be used
and maintained in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer,
and in a manner that will prevent employee exposure to hazards.
When materials or equipment used for protective systems are damaged, the site
foreman shall ensure that these systems are examined by a competent person to
evaluate suitability for continued use. If the competent person cannot assure that
the material or equipment is able to support the intended loads or is otherwise
suitable for safe use, then such material or equipment shall be removed from
service. The material or equipment shall then be evaluated and approved by a
registered professional engineer before being returned to service.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
294
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
E. Installation and Removal of Supports
General
1. Members of support systems shall be securely connected together to prevent
sliding, falling, kickouts, or other potential hazards.
2. Support systems shall be installed and removed in a manner that protects
employees from cave-ins, structural collapses, or from being struck by
members of the support systems.
3. All timber support systems must be either backfilled or blocked between the
excavation face and the shoring.
4. If the end of the trench requires shoring then the walers for the end shoring
must be installed to bear on the existing walers that extend along the sides of
the trench.
5. End shoring must be designed by an engineer if the end shoring waler length
exceeds 1.8m (6 ft.).
6. All uprights must extend a minimum 30 cm. (1 ft.) above ground level.
7. Individual members of the support systems shall not be subjected to loads
exceeding those that they were designed to support.
8. Before temporary removal of individual support members begins, additional
precautions shall be taken as directed by the site foreman to ensure the safety
of employees (i.e., the installation of other structural members to carry the
loads imposed on the support system).
9. Removal of support systems shall begin in reverse order to the installation,
and progress from, the bottom of the excavation. Members shall be released
slowly. If there is any indication of possible failure of the remaining members of
the structure or possible cave-in of the sides of the excavation, the work shall
be halted until it can be examined by the site foreman.
10. Backfilling shall progress either in conjunction with the removal of support
systems from excavations or after all support structures have been removed.
Additional Requirements
11. Excavation of material to a level no greater than two (2) feet below the bottom
of the members of a support system is allowed, but only if the system is
designed to resist the forces calculated for the full depth of the trench. There
shall be no indications of a possible loss of soil from behind or below the
bottom of the support system while the trench is open.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
295
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
12. Installation of a support system shall be closely coordinated with the
excavation of trenches.
F. Sloping and Benching Systems
Employees are not permitted to work above other employees in the faces of sloped or
benched systems, except when employees at lower levels are protected from the
hazards of falling, rolling, or sliding material or equipment.
G. Shield Systems
General
1. Shield systems shall not be subjected to loads that are greater than those they
are designed to withstand.
2. Shields shall be installed in a manner that will restrict lateral or other
hazardous movement of the shield and could occur during cave-in or
unexpected soil movement.
3. Employees shall be protected from the hazard of cave-ins when entering or
exiting the areas protected by shields.
4. Employees are not permitted in trenches when shields are being installed,
removed, or moved vertically.
Additional Requirements
5. Excavation of material to a level no greater than two (2) feet below the bottom
of the shield system is allowed, but only if the system is designed to resist the
forces calculated for the full depth of the trench.
6. There shall be no indications of a possible loss of soil from behind or below the
bottom of the shield system while the trench is open.
H. Precautions
Train your operators
Thoroughly train operators to avoid potential dangers while on the job. All operators and
supervisors should receive training on proper handling and assembly of trench shields.
Sizing a trench shield
Knowing the scope of your job is imperative to choosing the correct trench shield – large
enough to provide protection but light enough for the equipment being used on the site.
Develop a checklist and answer the following questions:


What type of soil are you working in?
How deep is the cut going to be?
296
Golden Health & Safety Program



Excavation Safety Program
What is the outside pipe diameter? (The shield must be a at least 12" wider than the
pipe)
What is the length of the pipe you are using? (The shield must be 2' to 4' longer than
the pipe)
What is the size of machine and the lift capacity?(Minimum capacity should be 1.5
times the weight of the shield at 20' radius)
I. Practice Safe Operation
Follow the manufacturer’s guidelines
Always read the manufacturer’s directions before assembling a shield. Make sure all
components are supplied by the manufacturer, including the spreader pins. Rebar, bolts,
pipe, or other materials should not be substituted for the spreader pins.
Handling the trench shields
Properly handling shields helps keep workers safe. Do not chain together stacks of
trench shields. When stacking shields, always use stacking pins. It is also important to
install all the spreaders and to never remove a spreader from a machine. Never lift a
trench shield by the spreaders. If you are using a tagline, the line must be long enough
to keep the worker a safe distance from the shield.
Call the location nearest you for more information!
J. Direct Equipment Trench Shields
Daily Inspection Checklist
It is recommended that Trench Shields be inspected each day before work commences.
The following checklist is intended to be used as a guideline.
1. Check the spreader bar assemblies and be sure there are no missing hitch pins.
2. Examine the walls for puncture holes and structural damage. Such damage could
affect the performance of the unit. Contact Direct Equipment for further information or
damage assessments.
3. Check the spreader bars. The bars must be straight. DO NOT USE damaged or bent
spreader bars. Contact Direct Equipment if spreader bars need to be replaced.
4. Inspect the lifting cable for fraying. Be sure the hooks are not bent or spread open
and replace any missing safety latches.
5. The trench shield should be cleaned and receive thorough inspections on a regular
basis.
NOTE: All modifications and repairs must be done by Direct Equipment West. Any
unauthorized work performed on the shields is strictly prohibited.
19.6
Accident Investigations
All incidents that result in injury to workers, as well as near misses, regardless of their nature,
shall be reported and investigated. Investigations shall be conducted by the site foreman and
297
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
representatives of the safety committee as soon after an incident as possible to identify the
cause and means of prevention to eliminate the risk of reoccurrence.
In the event of such an incident, the Excavation Safety Program shall be reevaluated by the
operations manager and the OHS committee to determine if additional practices, procedures, or
training are necessary to prevent similar future incidents.
19.7
Changes to Program
Any changes to the Excavation Safety Program shall be approved by the Operations Manager
and shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the job progresses to determine additional
practices, procedures, or training needs necessary to prevent injuries. Affected employees shall
be notified of procedure changes, and trained if necessary. A copy of this program shall be
maintained at the jobsite by the site foreman or his designate.
19.8
Glossary
Accepted engineering practices: the standards of practice required by a registered
professional engineer.
Aluminum hydraulic shoring: a manufactured shoring system consisting of aluminum
hydraulic cylinders (crossbraces) used with vertical rails (uprights) and horizontal rails
(wales). This system is designed to support the sidewalls of an excavation and prevent
cave-ins.
Bell-bottom pier hole: a type of shaft or footing excavation, the bottom of which is made
larger than the cross section above to form a bell shape.
Benching system: a method of protecting employees from cave-ins by excavating the
sides of an excavation to form one or more horizontal steps, usually with vertical or nearvertical surfaces between levels.
Cave-in: the movement of soil or rock into an excavation, or the loss of soil from under a
trench shield or support system, in amounts large enough to trap, bury, or injure and
immobilize a person.
Competent person: a person who has been trained to identify hazards in the workplace,
or working conditions that are unsafe for employees, and who has the authority to have
these hazards corrected.
Cross braces: the horizontal members of a shoring system installed from side to side of
the excavation. The cross braces bear against wales.
Excavation: any man-made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in an earth surface formed
by earth removal.
Faces or sides: the vertical or inclined earth surfaces formed as a result of excavation
work.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
298
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Failure: the movement or damage of a structural member or connection that makes it
unable to support loads.
Hazardous atmosphere: an atmosphere that is explosive, flammable, poisonous,
corrosive, oxidizing, irritating, oxygen deficient, toxic, or otherwise harmful, that may
cause death, illness, or injury.
Kickout: the accidental movement or failure of a cross brace.
Program Manager: the individual within the company who oversees excavation work
and is responsible for assuring compliance with this program.
Protective system: a method of protecting employees from cave-ins, from material that
could fall or roll from an excavation face into an excavation, or from the collapse of
adjacent structures. Protective systems include support systems, sloping and benching
systems, shield systems, and other systems that provide the necessary protection.
Ramp: an inclined walking or working surface that is used to gain access to one point
from another. A ramp may be constructed from earth or from structural materials such as
steel or wood.
Shield system: a structure used in an excavation to withstand cave-ins and which will
protect employees working within the shield system. Shields can be permanent
structures or portable units moved along as work progresses. Shields used in trenches
are usually referred to as trench boxes or trench shields.
Shoring system: a structure that is built or put in place to support the sides of an
excavation to prevent cave-ins.
Sloping system: sloping the sides of an excavation away from the excavation to protect
employees from cave-ins. The required slope will vary with soil type, weather, and
surface or near surface loads that may affect the soil in the area of the trench (such as
adjacent buildings, vehicles near the edge of the trench, etc.).
Stable rock: natural solid mineral material that can be excavated with vertical sides that
will remain intact while exposed.
Structural ramp: a ramp built of steel or wood, usually used for vehicle access. Ramps
made of soil or rocks are not considered structural ramps.
Support system: a structure used as underpinning, bracing or shoring, which provides
support to an adjacent structure, underground installation, or the sides of an excavation.
Tabulated data: tables and charts approved by a registered professional engineer and
used to design and construct a protective system.
Trench: an excavation less than 3.7 m (12 ft.) wide at the bottom, over 1.2 m (4
ft.) deep, and of any length.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
299
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Trench box or trench shield: see shield.
Uprights: the vertical members of a trench shoring system placed in contact with the
earth and usually positioned so the individual members do not contact each other.
Uprights placed so that individual members are closely spaced, in contact with or
interconnected to each other, are often called sheeting.
Wales: horizontal members of a shoring system placed in the direction of the excavation
face whose sides bear against the vertical members of the shoring system (the uprights).
#Main_Table_of_Contents
300
Golden Health & Safety Program
19.9
Excavation Safety Program
Appendix A – Graveyard Excavation
19.10 Purpose
The intent of this section is to outline the key areas that are related to Graveyard
excavation. WorksafeBC Regulations require the Town to meet the requirements within
Section 20.81 (1) as it relates to sloping and shoring, if workers must enter the
excavation, as well as all other related sections within the Act and Regulation.
19.11 Scope
The Town shall ensure that all workers receive appropriate training as it relates to
trenching and shoring, that workers adhere to the written procedures and supervisor
directions to meet the requirements of both the Act and Regulation.
19.12 Preparation
Prior to starting the work, the crew assigned to a graveyard excavation will inspect all
equipment to ensure they meet safety requirements and are free from defects.
This would include:
 Backhoe (contractor)
 Loader Bucket
 Hand Tools
 X 8 Plywood Boards with a minimum thickness of ¾ inches
 Lowering device (Funeral Director)
 Shoring (uprights, walers and cross braces)
 Laminated boards
19.13 Equipment Placement
At the site the crew will place the checker plate on the designated location, overlapping
the plywood boards around the plate. The backhoe operator will at all times ensure that
there is a distance of at least 1.5 m (5 ft) from the designated excavation edge, the
dump truck at all times will ensure that it will be at least 2.4 m (8 ft) from the excavation
location.
19.14 Excavation Procedure
To mark the location of the grave, the site crew will use spray paint to outline the
boundary. The depth of the dig will not exceed 1.8m (6ft) in depth, with a width of 1.4m
(4ft) and the length of 2.4m (8ft). The material is removed with a loader bucket into the
dump truck. All ground crew will ensure they stay away from the swing radius of the
backhoe. No worker will enter into this radius unless they confirm that they have eye
contact with the backhoe operator.
To ensure that the work activity is completed safely, the crew will have a crew talk
meeting to discuss all hazards and control measures prior to startup .
#Main_Table_of_Contents
301
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
When the dig is completed the crew will place 4 pieces of 2 ft x 8ft plywood around the
opening with laminated board 2ft x 8ft for the lowering device to sit on. The boards will be
secured from inadvertent slipping. A small beam is placed across the centre of the
bottom of the grave to allow the funeral director to remove the lowering straps.
The lead hand and workers will monitor the ground and excavated sides for fissures, cracks
and spalling. If the soil is not able to maintain its structure during or at the completion of the
dig, the crew shall comply with sections 20.81 (2) to 20.86 of the regulation and put into
place the required shoring that would allow them to complete their task in a safe manner.
Filling the excavation:
The crew will remove the plywood sheets, laminated boards and checkerplate. The
backhoe operator will refill the excavation. If soil compaction is needed then it should take
place once the site is filled.
19.15 No Entry
AT NO TIME WILL THE CREW ENTER THE EXCAVATION UNLESS APPROPRIATE
SHORING IS IN PLACE AND PERMISSION OF THE SUPERVISOR/FOREMAN HAS
BEEN GIVEN.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
302
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
19.16 Appendix B - Excavation Practices - Safe Work Procedure
Title:
Excavation Practices
Location:
Operations Department
Date of Issue:
2012-11-16
Drafted by:
Al Taylor
Review Date:
2013-11-16
Reviewed by:
Committee
19.17 Purpose
Excavation and trenching are among the most hazardous work procedures undertaken by the
Town of Golden. This document outlines general requirements and specific safe work
practices to ensure the health and safety of employees and workers who work in or around
excavations as part of their job duties. These safe work practices are also designed to protect
the general public who work or travel in the vicinity of excavations.
Before a worker enters any excavation over 1.2m (4ft) in depth, or approaches closer to the
side or bank than a distance equal to the depth of the excavation, the sides of excavation
must be sloped, benched, shored or supported in accordance with Part 20 of the WCB
Occupational Health & Safety Regulation or with the specifications and requirements of a
registered professional engineer.
19.18 Scope
The scope of the safe work procedures is to identify the hazards encountered during
excavation work, to eliminate or control the hazard safely during the work process and to
outline the practices and standards that must be adhered to while working in the excavation.
Hazards
Hazards and the potential source that workers may encounter when excavating around
underground utilities include:
• Electric shock (underground power lines, earthing rods)
• Electric shock (overhead power lines)
• Explosive or flammable conditions, asphyxiation (natural gas line, propane gas line,
sewer line contact; and process activities)
• Toxic gases & vapours, i.e. hydrogen sulfide, carbon monoxide (sewer line contact,
process activities and mobile/vehicular traffic)
• Potential drowning (water main contact, storm catchment line contact and natural stream
diversion)
• Struck by, engulfment (Excavation collapse)
• Contaminated soils- multitude of chemical contaminants (i.e. old dump sites, old fuel
storage sites, coal-tar coating around natural gas pipelines- acute and chronic health
consequences)
• Struck by and potential carbon monoxide exposure (mobile quipment/machinery around
excavations and vehicular traffic)
#Main_Table_of_Contents
303
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
• Potential silica and/or asbestos exposure- chronic effects (Sewer and storm line repair)
• Struck by, engulfment (adjacent structure stability -potential collapse or structural
failure)
• Biological exposure, possible acute and chronic effects (sewer line break/ contact)
• Struck by, contact with (falling rock and material)
• tripping, slipping hazard (uneven ground, weather conditions)
Controls
• Proper locate protocols for utilities; Proper procedures for exposing buried utilities;
• Proper sloping, benching, shoring or engineered designs; Proper traffic control;
• Mobile restrictions near excavation; Regular inspections of excavation;
• Proper training of staff in the use of underground locators and of excavation methods;
• Proper training of staff in the use of air monitoring equipment, ventilation & rescue
equipment;
• Regular maintenance and inspection of equipment used for excavation work;
• Regular housekeeping; Effective procedures for work tasks being conducted;
• Designating a responsible person during the excavation work.
Prior to conducting any excavation work, staff involved with the work activity will discuss all
potential hazards that may be encountered. From this discussion, a plan of action to
eliminate or control the risks during the excavation work and required service work will be
prepared.
19.19 Standards / Procedures
General Procedures
Locates
1. Before excavating or drilling with powered tools and equipment, the location of ALL
underground utilities in the area must be accurately determined by a trained person. Mark
locations on asphalt or ground surfaces to identify where underground utilities are. Use the
universal colour coding for marking underground utility lines.
The colour code standard is:
Power lines
Red;
Sanitary/Storm sewer
Green;
Gas, petroleum, steam
Yellow; Temporary Survey markings Pink;
Communications
Orange; Excavation limits
White;
Water
Blue;
Irrigation
Purple;
Call BC One Call to:
 Tell you which members may have underground facilities in the proposed
excavation area;
 Transmit the information about the proposed activity to the member companies;
 Inform you about your liability and provide you with a ticket number to confirm
your request;
 Advise you to contact any other parties who may have underground facilities in the
excavation area, as all facility owners are not members of BC ONE CALL. You must
contact these non-members directly.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
304
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Each member company will then contact you with information about where their facilities are buried
in the proposed excavation area. Always wait for a response from all facility owners in the
proposed excavation site before digging. Give the utility owner a minimum of three full working
days’ notice for planned work.
Ensure that copies of the locate documentation, including BC One Call ticket numbers are on the site
at all times. Remember that maps may not always be accurate.
Where depth information is important such as when the utility is shallow and may be affected by the
removal of hard surface covering, always request this information from the utility. Locators should
identify and mark locations of abandoned facilities whenever possible.
Always request the gas owner to identify the characteristics of their line such as size and material. A
special permit is required for transmission and intermediate pipelines.
For emergency excavation situations, the ground disturber will notify the BC One Call centre to
request an emergency locate. Provincial regulations require that ground disturbers determine the
location of buried facilities before commencing work. The expectation is that locators will respond to
emergency locate requests in urban areas within 1 hour of the locate request being placed and
within 2 hours in rural areas.
2. Mechanical digging is not permitted within the “no mechanical dig zone boundary limit”
(1m (3ft 3in.) in any direction from the utility or its marked location) until it is exposed by
hand digging or hydro-excavating at a sufficient number of locations to determine its exact
positions and depths. Once the utility or service is adequately exposed, mechanical digging
is permitted up to within 0.3m (12in.) of the utility.
3. Pointed tools must not be used for probing to locate underground gas lines or electrical lines
4. Traffic around the site must be controlled in accordance with Worksafebc and Ministry of
Transportation regulations. Barricades, signs, and/or flag persons must be used as needed
to control both vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
5. Excavated material must be kept back a minimum distance of 0.6m (2 feet) from the edge
of a trench excavation and 1.2m (4ft) from any other excavation. Ideally, the excavated
material should be at a distance equal to the depth of the excavation. Excavated material
must not be piled so it endangers workers.
6. The sides of an excavation must be scaled and trimmed or otherwise stabilized to prevent
slides of material or falls of rock which could endanger workers
7. Trees, utility poles, rocks or similar objects adjacent to an area to be excavated must be
removed or secured if they could endanger workers.
8. Safe access must be provided in the immediate area where workers are employed in trenches
over 1.2m (4ft). Ladders must extend from the bottom of the excavation to at least 0.9m (3
feet) above ground. Ladders must be on level ground and secured if there is potential for
dislodgement. The safe point of access or egress must be located within 8m (25 ft.)
horizontal distance from the worker.
9. If an excavation is a hazard to workers who are working above and around the excavation,
then it must be effectively covered or guarded.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
305
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
10. A worker must be designated as a spotter at all times when mechanical digging is
undertaken. The spotter must maintain visual contact with the equipment operator and the
excavation at all times while watching for underground utilities. The spotter must signal
the equipment operator to stop digging immediately if any unexpected utilities are
encountered.
11. All workers must maintain a safe distance from the operating radius (hazard zone) of the
backhoe bucket. Workers must never walk under a loaded bucket due to the danger of
falling debris, hydraulic failure or operator error. Eye contact is required to be made with
the operator prior to entering the hazard zone.
12. All traffic adjacent to a shored trench must be at a distance greater than one half the depth
of the trench (Okay with P.Eng certification). For sloped excavations, traffic must be at a
distance greater than the depth of the excavation. Any incursions closer than these values
will require the approval of a professional engineer.
Overhead power lines
13. All equipment and machinery must maintain a safe distance from overhead hazards. The
“Limits of Approach” as outlined in the WCB OSHR Section 19.24 Table 19-1 must be
adhered to when working in close proximity to power lines. The employer must accurately
determine the voltage of any energized electrical equipment or conductor to determine the
appropriate distances.
Table 19-1: General limits of approach
Voltage Phase to Phase
Minimum distance (m)
Minimum distance(feet)
Over 750V to 75kV
3
10
Over 75kV to 250kV
4.5
15
Over 250kv to 550kv
6
20
If the minimum distance in Table 19-1 cannot be maintained because of the
circumstances of work or the inadvertent movement of persons or equipment, an
assurance in writing must be signed by a representative of the owner of the
power system. The "assurance in writing" form is referred to as a WCB form 30M33.
14. Water must not be allowed to accumulate in an excavation if it might affect the stability of the
excavation or endanger workers. Surface water must also be prevented from eroding the slopes
of the excavation. If a water extraction system is used to prevent accumulation, a worker
knowledgeable in the pump system, must monitor the device to ensure adequate extraction is
taking place.
15. If unexpected contact is made with a utility, the accidental contact procedures must be followed
as specified in this document.
16. If the excavation work is not complete at the end of the day, the excavation must be covered,
fenced or otherwise made safe for the public.
17. A Worksafe Notice of Project must be filed 24 hours prior to a planned excavation /
construction project if (a) the total cost of labour and materials for the work exceeds $100,000
or (b) the construction project includes a trench more than 1.2m (4 feet) in depth and over 30
m (100 feet) in length or includes another type of excavation more than 1.2m (4 feet) in depth,
which a worker may be required to enter. Examples of another type of excavation include any
excavations requiring the written instructions of a professional engineer.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
306
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Sloping, Benching and Shoring Requirements
1.
Before a worker enters any excavation over 1.2m (4ft) in depth, or approaches closer to the
side or bank than a distance equal to the depth of the excavation, the excavation sides must
be sloped as specified by a professional engineer or geoscientist, or shored as specified by a
professional engineer, or the sides of the excavation must be:
a) Sloped at angles, dependent on soil conditions, which will ensure stable faces, but in no
case may the slope be steeper than 0.9m (3ft) horizontal to 1.2m (4ft) vertical (see Figure
20-1 ).
b) Benched - bench heights shall not be greater than 1.2m (4 ft.) high. The bench step
cannot be less than the height of its rise below (see Figure 20-2),
c) Supported in accordance with the minimum requirements of section 20.85 of the
Regulation, or
d) Supported by manufactured or prefabricated trench boxes or shoring cages with
specifications for soil types to be used, or other effective means.
If the end of a trench over 4 feet in depth is not adequately sloped, end shoring must be
installed to bear against the walers that extend along the sides of the trench. If the end shoring
waler exceeds 1.8 m (6 ft) it must be designed by a professional engineer. The exceptions to
this apply if:
a) A worker in the trench is not required to approach closer to the end of the trench than
a distance equal to the depth of the trench at that end,
b) Where, for the prevailing soil conditions at the end of the trench, the permissible spacing
of uprights equals or exceeds the width of the trench, or
c) Otherwise authorized in writing by a professional engineer.
2.
A safety spotter must be designated to each excavation while a worker is in the excavation to
identify any potential hazard that may occur while the work is being performed. Equipment
Operators and Truck Drivers may be designated as spotters; however in doing so, they must
remain in a position while designated as the spotter to be able to observe and communicate
at all times with the excavation worker.
3.
Any engineered excavation support system must have certified design documentation and
written procedures available on site and duly signed. It must also be inspected daily by the
engineer or their designate and it must be maintained in a fully effective condition.
4.
Shoring is installed from the top down and removed in the reverse order.
• Workers are not allowed in an unsupported trench to compact backfill.
• Workers must not enter an excavation to remove shoring materials if ground
conditions have deteriorated so as to make entry for shoring removal unsafe.
5.
Excavation support systems must be installed so that they are firmly in contact with the face of
the excavation. This can be achieved by back filling or blocking.
6.
Shoring must extend above the top of the excavation by at least 0.3m. (1ft.) and must be as
close to the bottom of the trench as is possible but in no case more than 0.6m. (2ft.) from the
bottom. An exception is given to the 0.3m (1ft.) extension above the ground for excavation
using road plates.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
307
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
7. When a combination of sloping and shoring is used the minimum amount of shoring must be
equivalent to the standard for the overall depth of the excavation (see Figure 20-3 and Figure
20-4).
8. Cross braces and trench jacks must be installed in a horizontal position and must be secured
against dislodgement.
9. If hydraulic or pneumatic trench jacks are used ensure that a locking mechanism is activated to
prevent collapse in the event of loss of internal pressure.
10. For cross braces, the minimum number to use is determined by the trench depth as follows:
Depth at location
up to 2.4m (8 ft.)
2.4 m to 3.7 m (8 ft. to 12 ft.)
3.7 m to 4.6 m (12 ft. to 15 ft.)
4.6 m to 6 m (15 ft. to 20 ft.)
Number of braces
2
3
4
5
11. For each cross bracing location, the cross braces must be less than 1.2 m (4 ft) apart, and the
uppermost cross brace must be within 60 cm (2 ft) of ground level.
12. Uprights must not spread outwards more than 15 degrees (4 vertical: 1 horizontal) from the
vertical when viewed along the trench.
13. Plywood may be substituted for two inch thick shoring elements provided that
(a) the plywood is not less than 19 mm (3/4 in) thick,
(b) the trench is not over 2.7 m (9 ft) in depth,
(c) uprights are installed at not over 60 cm (2 ft) centres,
(d) cross braces do not bear directly on plywood, and
(e) cross braces bearing on uprights or walers are located at all plywood sheathing
14. Ensure that all 2 x 10 uprights are graded number 2 or better and are checked for cracks and
damage prior to using them in any excavation work.
15.
Trench support structures must comply with Table 20-1 for the following relevant soil
conditions:
Soil Type
Description of soil
A
hard and solid
B
likely to crack or crumble
C
Soft, sandy, filled or loose
#Main_Table_of_Contents
308
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Table 20-1: Trench support structures
Size and spacing of members1 (metric figures)
UPRIGHTS
Trench depth
(m)
Minimum dimensions (mm)2
WALERS
Maximum spacing
(m)
Minimum dimensions (mm)2
CROSS BRACES
Maximum vertical spacing
(m)
width of trench
(m)
Up to 1.8
1.8-3.7
Minimum
dimensions
(mm)2
Vertical
Horizontal
Maximum
spacing (m)
Type A: Hard and solid soil
1.2-3
38 x 235
1.8
89 x 140
1.2
89 x 89
140 x
140
1.2
1.8
3-4.6
38 x 235
1.2
140 x 140
1.2
89 x 140
140 x
191
1.2
1.8
4.6-6
38 x 235
Close tight
140 x 140
1.2
140 x
191
191 x
191
1.2
1.8
3
Type B: Soil likely to crack or crumble
1.2-3
38 x 235
1.2
89 x 140
1.2
89 x 140
140 x
140
1.2
1.8
3-4.6
38 x 235
0.9
140 x 191
1.2
140 x
140
140 x
191
1.2
1.8
4.6-6
38 x 235
Close tight
140 x 191
1.2
140 x
191
191 x
191
1.2
1.8
38 x 235
Close tight
140 x 191
1.2
140 x
140
140 x
191
1.2
1.8
3-4.6
38 x 235
Close tight
191 x 191
1.2
140 x
191
191 x
191
1.2
1.8
4.6-6
64 x 235
Close tight
191 x 241
1.2
140 x
191
191 x
241
1.2
1.8
3
Type C: Soft, sandy, filled or loose soil
1.2-3
3
Size and spacing of members1 (imperial figures)
UPRIGHT
Trench depth
(feet)
Minimum dimensions
(inches)2
WALERS
Maximum spacing
(feet)
Minimum dimensions
(inches)2
CROSS BRACES
Maximum vertical spacing
(feet)
width of trench
(feet)
Up to 6
6-12
Minimum
dimensions
(inches)2
Maximum
spacing
(feet)
Vertical
Horizontal
Type A: Hard and solid soil
4-10
3
2 x 10
6
4x6
4
4x4
6x6
4
6
10-15
2 x 10
4
6x6
4
4x6
6x8
4
6
15-20
2 x 10
Close tight
6x6
4
6x8
8x8
4
6
4
Type B: Soil likely to crack or crumble
4-10
3
2 x 10
4
4x6
4
4x6
6x6
4
6
10-15
2 x 10
3
6x8
4
6x6
6x8
4
6
15-20
2 x 10
Close tight
6x8
4
6x8
8x8
4
6
4-10
3
2 x 10
Close tight
6x8
4
6x6
6x8
4
6
10-15
2 x 10
Close tight
8x8
4
6x8
8x8
4
6
15-20
3 x 10
Close tight
8 x 10
4
6x8
8 x 10
4
6
Type C: Soft, sandy, filled or loose soil
1
The dimensions shown are minimum and must be increased if necessary to meet job conditions.
The dimensions of members in millimetres are actual dimensions for surfaced dry materials. The dimensions in
inches are the nominal values for surfaced dry materials.
2
309
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Trenches less than 1.2 m (4 ft) deep must be shored when hazardous ground movement may be expected, as
in ground subject to hydrostatic pressure or vibration.
3
Walers may be omitted in trenches not exceeding 2.4 m (8 ft) in depth provided that it has been confirmed
that the soil is sufficiently hard and solid to safely permit waler deletion, and provided that the trench is not in
proximity to previously excavated ground.
4
Soil condition assessment
Soil condition affects the degree of slope in an excavation and affects the structural member
requirements for shoring. There are three classifications of soil in the regulations: Type A (hard and
solid), Type B (likely to crack or crumble) and Type C (soft, sandy, filled or loose).
Type A soil
Type A soil means cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 tons per square foot
(tsf) (144 kPa) or greater. Clay, silty clay, sandy clay and clay loam are examples of Type A soil.
Cohesive soil does not crumble, can be excavated with vertical side slopes and can be plastic when
moist and is hard to break up when dry.
No soil is type A if it:
 Is fissured
 Is subject to vibration from heavy traffic, pile driving, blasting, etc.
 Has been previously disturbed or
 Is part of a sloped or layered system where the layers dip towards the excavation on a slope of
4H:1V or greater
Type B soil
Type B soil means:
 Cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength between 0.5 tsf (48 kPa) and 1.5 tsf (144
kPa).
 Crushed rock, silt, silt loam and sandy loam are examples of Type B soil.
 Soil that meets the unconfined compressive strength of Type A soil but is fissured or subject to
vibration or is dry rock that is not stable is Type B soil.
Type C soil
Type C soil means:
 cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 tsf (48 kPa) or less; or
 granular soils including gravel, sand, and loamy sand; or
 submerged soil or soil from which water is freely seeping; or
 submerged rock that is not stable
Unconfined compressive strength is load per unit area at which a soil will fail in compression. It can be
estimated in the field by using a pocket penetrometer and by thumb penetration tests.
Layered formations will default to the weakest soil type.
Basis of classification
The classification of soil type will be made on the basis of results from at least one visual and at least
one manual analysis.
(1) Visual tests: Assess the excavation site in general, the soil adjacent to the excavation, the soil forming
the sides of the open excavation, and the soil taken as samples from excavated material.
 Estimate the particle size. Soil that is primarily fine grained is cohesive material. Soil composed
primarily of coarse grained sand or gravel is granular material.
310
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program

Observe soil as it is excavated. Soil that remains in clumps when excavated is cohesive. Soil
that breaks up easily and does not stay in clumps is granular.

Observe the side of the opened excavation and the surface area adjacent to the excavation.
Crack like openings could indicate fissured material. If chunks of soil spall off a vertical side, the
soil could be fissured. Small spalls are evidence of moving ground and are indications of
potentially hazardous situations
Observe the area adjacent to the excavation and the sides of the opened excavation for signs of
surface water, water seeping from the sides of the excavation, or the location of the level of the
water table.
Observe the area adjacent to the excavation and the area within the excavation for sources of
vibration that may affect the stability of the excavation face.


(2) Manual tests: Assesses the qualitative and quantitative properties of the soil.
 Plasticity: Mold a moist or wet sample of soil into a ball and attempt to roll it into threads as thin
as 1/8th inch in diameter. Cohesive material can be rolled without crumbling. If at least a two inch
(50 mm) length of 1/8th inch thread can be held on one end without tearing, the soil is cohesive.
 Dry strength: If the soil is dry and crumbles on its own or with moderate pressure into individual
grains or fine powder, it is granular (any combination of gravel, sand, or silt). If the soil is dry and
falls into clumps which break up into smaller clumps, but the smaller clumps can only be broken
up with difficulty, it may be clay in any combination with gravel, sand or silt. If the dry soil breaks
into clumps which do not break up into small clumps and which can only be broken with
difficulty, and there is no visual indication the soil is fissured, the soil may be considered
unfissured.
 Thumb penetration: The thumb penetration test can estimate the unconfined compressive
strength of cohesive soils. Type A soils with an unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 tsf can
be readily indented by the thumb; however, they can be penetrated by the thumb only with very
great effort. Type C soils with an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 tsf can be easily
penetrated several inches by the thumb, and can be molded by light finger pressure. This test
should be conducted on an undisturbed soil sample, such as a large clump of spoil, as soon as
practicable after excavation to keep to a minimum the effects of exposure to drying influences.
If the excavation is later exposed to wetting influences (rain, flooding), the classification of the
soil must be changed accordingly.
 Other strength tests: Estimates of unconfined compressive strength of soils can also be
obtained by use of a pocket penetrometer or by using a hand-operated shearvane.
 Drying test: The drying test differentiates between cohesive material with fissures, unfissured
cohesive material, and granular material. The procedure for the drying test involves drying a
sample of soil that is approximately one inch thick (2.54 cm) and six inches (15.24 cm) in
diameter until it is thoroughly dry:
 (A): If it develops cracks as it dries, significant fissures are indicated
 (B): If it dries without cracking and requires considerable force to break the sample the soil has
significant cohesive material present and can be classed as unfissured cohesive material.
Check the unconfined compressive strength.
 (C): If a sample breaks easily by hand, it is either a fissured cohesive material or a granular
material. To distinguish between the two, pulverize the dried clumps of the sample by hand or by
stepping on them. If the clumps do not pulverize easily, the material is cohesive with fissures. If
they pulverize easily into very small fragments, the material is granular.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
311
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Slope determination
Once the soil type has been determined by both a visual and manual assessment the excavation can
be properly sloped. For simple slope excavations the proper angle for the soil type is:



Type A soil: 3 horizontal to 4 vertical
Type B soil: 1 horizontal to 1 vertical
Type C soil: 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical
53 degrees slope
45 degrees slope
34 degrees slope
This angle is referred to as the angle of repose. The angle of repose is the natural stable slope loose
excavated material forms when dumped on a level surface.
For shoring requirements with:



Type A soil,
Type B soil and
Type C soil,
refer to Table 20-1.
312
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Case 1 (trench or bulk excavation) - maximum slope of excavated face, shown as line AB, in
hard and solid soil is 3 horizontal to 4 vertical.
Case 2 (trench or bulk excavation), maximum height of vertical portion, shown as line AB is
1.2 meters (4 feet).
For Case 2 (trench or bulk excavation), the maximum permissible slope of the excavated face BC
for the corresponding height of the lower vertical cut AB is as follows:
Height of line AB
Maximum slope of line BC
(in hard and solid soil)
centimeters
feet
up to 30
up to 1
1 horizontal (H) to 1 vertical (V)
30 to 60
1 to 2
3H to 2V
60 to 90
2 to 3
2H to 1V
90 to 120
3 to 4
3H to 1V
313
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
#Main_Table_of_Contents
314
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
If the broken reference line extending on a 1:1 slope from the toe or base of the excavation meets
the surface of undisturbed ground within a distance of 1.5 times the depth of the trench, the
trench support structures specified in Table 20-1 can be used. If not, the original ground slopes
upwards steeper than a 1 vertical in 3 horizontal slope, then a professional engineers certificate
must be obtained and followed.
Figure 20-4: Combined sloping and shoring
450 mm
(18 in)
min.
4
3
H
h
Shoring
must be
sized for
depth H
#Main_Table_of_Contents
315
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
EXPOSING UNDERGOUND UTILITIES
The “No Mechanical Dig Zone Boundary Limit” is defined to be equal to the diameter of
the conduit or cable plus one meter in any direction of the utility. Within 1m (3ft. 3 in.),
the utility must be located by hand digging or hydro-excavating. Once the utility has been
exposed in a sufficient number of locations to determine its routing, mechanical digging
may resume up to 0.3m (1ft.) from the utility.
Mechanical digging is not permitted:
• within the “no mechanical dig zone boundary limit” until the utility is exposed.
• within 0.3m (1ft.) of a utility at any time.
Hand digging:
Hand digging is required when the utility is within a one metre. Hand digging is
conducted at a shallow shovel angle, prying rather than striking, using a blunt spade. Do
not use body weight on the shovel to increase force and leverage since this action may
damage the utility.
Hydro-excavating is permitted:
• Within the “no mechanical dig zone boundary limit” to expose the utility. Prior to using
the hydro-excavating method, the utility must be contacted to verify that this method is
acceptable for exposing their utility. Utilities may have specific protocols in place for the
use of a hydro-excavation method. Qualified and authorized workers will operate the
vacuum excavation equipment as per the recommended practices of the manufacturer.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
316
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERES
Atmospheric testing must be conducted in excavations over 1.2m (4ft.) deep where
hazardous atmospheres could reasonably be expected to exist (e.g. landfill areas, near
hazardous substance storage or gas pipelines). An assessment of the contaminants must be
identified and confirmed with the appropriate gas testing equipment.
A Construction Safety Check List shall be completed for each project and communicated
to all workers prior to the start of any construction. This check list must remain at the site
and the information identified on this form must be reviewed and understood by all
employees working at the job site. All subsequent workers arriving after the start of the
project must also review and understand the information on this document. If any
information is unclear or not understood, employees must contact their supervisor for
clarification prior to commencing work at the site.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
317
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Project Information
Project Title / Desc’n:
Start Date:
Work Order #:
SiteSupervisor/Foreman:
Crew
Equipment Operator:
Supervisor /
Chargehand:
WorkSafeBC: Notice
Of Project#
Location:
Site Hazards, Control Measures and PPE - Check Applicable Boxes
Underground/Overhead Hazards
Asbestos Pipe
Fire or explosion
Work from height
Gases, Dusts, Fumes, Vapours
Adjacent Structure
Slipping- maintain housekeeping
Spoil placement
Falling/dislodgement of rocks
Mobile equipment
Water accumulation
Process issues
Personal Protective Equipment: Hardhat
Hi-Vis Vests
Respiratory protection
Gloves
Safety Eyewear
Small Powered Equip
Slopes / Rollover
Poor lighting/visibility
Ladder – rails and rungs good
Contaminated soil
Other
Safety boots
Hearing Protection
Working Around Heavy Equipment Discussed: Eye Contact / Aware of position / Traffic
Environmental: Water accumulation –continuous dewatering
Cold/Heat Stress
Overhead Hazards: Communicated with operator
30M33
Clearance Controls
Established
‰
Traffic Control: Adequate signs posted
Barricades
Traffic Control Persons ( )
Cave-In protection: Sloped at angles
Benching
Shoring
Professional: P Eng; Geoscientist
Trench Shield
Hazardous atmosphere: –use gas detection follow Confined Space Entry procedures
Gases tested:- LEL;
Oxygen;
Carbon monoxide;
Hydrogen sulfide;
Other___________
Utility Locations BC ONE CALL „ AS-BUILTS „ UTILITY
Utilities
Utility in
or near
Located &
DETECTOR
Mains/Services
BC Hydro
Fiber Optic
|
excavation
sii sit
Yes
No
„
Comments
Marked
/Scoped
Utility
(Place check
mark)
Propane
Telephone
Street Lighting
Cable
Water
Sewer
Drainage (storm)
Other (i.e. Irrigation)
Date:_________________________ Completed by:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
318
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Comments/Drawings:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
Utilities – Accidental Contact Procedures
319
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Purpose:
The purpose of this safety procedure is to:
• Prevent injuries to workers resulting from accidental contact with underground utilities
• Prevent economic loss resulting from accidental contact with underground utilities
• Provide the appropriate response to accidental contact with underground utilities
Accidental Contact with a BC Hydro Electrical Utility
(e.g. broken conduit, pulled cable, wires down)
1. If a cable is accidentally contacted, stop work immediately. Treat all electrical components
as if they are “live” – do not approach them. Do not take any steps. The ground is now at
different electrical potentials. Immediately contact the utility owner.
2. Move the digger bucket clear of the cable to break contact and stay out of the trench.
3. If the machine can’t be moved, keep workers 10 meters (33 feet) away and have the
operator remain in the vehicle.
4. If the operator is in danger by remaining in the machine, i.e., an uncontrolled fire, vehicle
rollover, the operator should jump off the machine keeping his feet together. Never contact the
machine and the ground at the same time.
5. Once clear of the machine, shuffle away never allowing the heel of one foot to go beyond
the toe of the other or hop with both feet together to a minimum distance of 10 meters/33 feet.
6. Notify the crew supervisor(s)/foreman/chargehand of the incident.
7. If safe to do so, cordon area off with vehicles, barricades, tape, etc.
8. Work must not resume until BC Hydro has confirmed that the site is safe for the intended
work.
9. Supervisors must complete an accident/incident investigation and submit a report to the
Occupational Health and Safety Committee
Warnings:
If there is an electrical fire, do not use water to control it. Water conducts electricity
#Main_Table_of_Contents
320
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Accidental contact with a gas utility
(eg. Gas line struck, jarred, pulled or wrapping or pipe surface has been damaged)
1. Remove all sources of possible ignition such as cigarettes.
2. Turn off all mechanical equipment and vehicles. Do not operate electrical switches.
3. Stop all work and immediately call gas company.
4. Check for smell or sound of escaping gas in the area.
5. Do not backfill. The gas company must physically check the integrity of the piping system
and repair any damage.
(eg. Gas is escaping from a ruptured line)
1. Remove all possible sources of ignition (e.g., cigarettes).
2. Turn off machinery and mechanical equipment. Do not operate electrical switches.
3. Stop all work and immediately call gas company and fire department.
4. Evacuate the area. Move people upwind if possible, and prevent cars and bystanders from
entering.
5. Do not attempt to make temporary repairs or operate any underground gas valves.
6. If the break or leak is underground, warn people in nearby buildings where gas might enter
through drains, etc. If gas is entering into buildings, evacuate them, as well as neighbouring
buildings.
Warning
• Dead gas mains may contain residual natural gas concentrations in the explosive range for
natural gas (5–15% methane in air).
• Polyethylene gas lines generally have a static charge buildup, making it dangerous for
unqualified workers to stop a gas leak in an excavation involving this type of pipe
#Main_Table_of_Contents
321
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Roles and Responsibilities
Supervisor
Site Supervisors (ie. Foreman/Chargehand) shall be familiar with the actual and potential
hazards associated with this work. Site Supervisors must ensure that workers under their
direction and control are aware of the dangers associated with the work and perform their
work in a safe manner. Site Supervisors shall ensure the requirements of this procedure, related
elements of the Occupational health & Safety regulation, and applicable industry best
practices are applied at all times. Site Supervisors must hold a pre-job meeting with the crew
to discuss the hazards and control measures for the work to be done. Site Supervisors are
responsible to ensure the workers under their direction and control sign-off the site preparation
form under the communication section prior to the commencement of the work.
Employee
Each employee is responsible to carry out their work in accordance with the established safe
excavation practices outlined in this document. Employees must also use and or wear
protective equipment, devices and clothing as required for the hazards of the work. It is every
employee’s responsibility to ask questions about anything they do not understand or safe work
procedures that are not clear.
If any worker believes that there is a risk of injury to themselves, a co-worker or damage to a
utility or piece of equipment, it is their duty to stop work immediately and correct the situation
including notifying their supervisor to determine the next course of action. Workers must signoff the site preparation form under the communication section prior to the commencement of
the work.
Communication
Written safe work procedures are located in the Town of Golden’s Health and Safety
Manual. All procedures can also be found on the Town of Golden’s intranet page under
Safe Work Procedures. Visual and verbal instructions of the step by step procedure will be
provided to the Employee by the Supervisor.
Training
All employees will be required to read through the safe work procedure as part of their
training. Each employee will be shown the step by step safe work procedure by the
Supervisor.
Evaluation
Safe work procedures will be reviewed annually to ensure all information is current and
applicable.
Forms
An “Out of Order” tag must be placed on all damaged or defective equipment.
Reference Materials
Always reference the manufacturing safety labels and operations manuals.
Documentation
All documents derived from the excavation project will be forwarded to the administration
office.
322
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
19.20 RD7000 User Locate Information
19.21 Preface
General
The locator performance may be affected when used in close proximity to ferrous materials
such as manhole covers, steel-toe boots and nearby vehicles. Keep a distance of one or two
meters from these objects when taking critical measurements such as depth and current
readings.
Safety
This equipment shall be used by fully qualified and trained personnel only.
Radio detection receivers do not indicate whether a signal is from a single cable, several
cables buried side by side or one above another. Exercise caution and due diligence when
conducting any survey.
WARNING! Making a direct connection to live power lines is extremely dangerous to life. Do not
attempt any direct connection unless you are fully trained and qualified to do so.
WARNING! The transmitter is capable of outputting potentially lethal voltages. Take care when
applying signals to any pipe or cable and be sure to notify other technicians who may be
working on the line. Reduce audio level before using headphones to avoid damaging your
hearing.
WARNING! This equipment is NOT approved for use in areas where hazardous gases may be
present.
WARNING! When using the transmitter, switch off the unit and disconnect cables before
removing the battery pack.
19.22 Basic Operation
The system should be set up for your preferences for both the receiver and transmitter. Become
familiar with the use of the menu. When battery replacement is necessary, the LCD shows a
flashing battery icon. The expected battery life is 30 hours with the receiver and approximately
15 hours with the transmitter.
Frequencies
Passive frequencies
Passive frequency detection takes advantage of signals that are already present on
buried metallic conductors.
The RD7000 supports three types of passive frequencies: Power, Radio and CPS (DL
only) signals. You can detect these frequencies without the aid of a transmitter if they are
present on the utility you are surveying.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
323
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Active frequencies
Active frequencies are applied direct to a buried conductor using the transmitter. The
transmitter can apply a signal using two methods: induction and direct connection.
Induction
The transmitter is placed on the ground over or near the survey area. You select the
appropriate frequency. The transmitter will then induce the signal indiscriminately to any
nearby metallic conductor. In induction mode, using higher frequencies is generally
recommended as they are induced easier onto nearby conductors.
Direct connection
In direct connection, you connect the transmitter directly to the pipe or cable you wish to
survey. The transmitter will then apply a discreet signal to the line, which you can locate
using the receiver. This method provides the best signal on an individual line and
enables the use of lower frequencies, which can be traced for longer distances.
Connecting the transmitter to a pipe or line requires the use of a direct connection lead
or clamp and a ground stake to complete the circuit.
WARNING! Direct connection to live wires is POTENTIALLY LETHAL. Direct
connections should be attempted by fully qualified personnel only!
WARNING! The transmitter is capable of outputting potentially lethal voltages. Take care
when handling the terminals, connection leads and ground stake, notify other technicians
working on the line of the hazard and guard exposed conductors to prevent accidental
contact.
Selecting frequencies
It is important to select the correct or appropriate frequency for your particular
application.
If using an active frequency you must also set your transmitter to output the matching
frequency. You can change your transmitter’s output frequency manually using your
transmitter’s keypad or automatically using iLOC (iLOC enabled receivers and
transmitters only)
NOTE: Some frequencies require that you connect an accessory, for example an AFrame, before the frequency is available.
TruDepth™ measurement
The RD7000 uses TruDepth to automatically estimate depth when a good reading is
established.
NOTE: TruDepth only indicates a locate depth when the receiver is correctly oriented
directly above the detected pipe or cable. Depth readings are displayed according to your
preferred units of measurement as follows:
Less than 1 meter: depth is displayed in centimeters
Greater than 1 meter: depth is displayed in meters.
Less than 3 feet: depth is displayed in inches.
Greater than 3 feet: depth is displayed in feet.
324
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
SideStepauto™
SideStepauto allows the transmitter to calculate the optimum frequency based on ground
impedance.
The transmitter uses this information to optimize the active frequency. SideStepauto helps
to improve locate accuracy by determining the best signal. SideStepauto can also help to
prolong battery life.
NOTE: SideStepauto will only work in direct connection mode. Inductive frequencies are
not supported.
Dynamic overload protection
The RD7000PL features dynamic overload protection (DOP). DOP allows you to locate
accurately in areas with high levels of electromagnetic interference, such as sub-stations
and beneath high-voltage transmission lines. DOP works by disregarding signal spikes
that would otherwise overwhelm the RD7000PL’s digital signal processor. DOP is an
integrated feature of the RD7000PL. No action is required by the user.
StrikeAlert™
StrikeAlert detects shallow power cables and warns the operator with an audible alarm.
The alarm is characterized by a rapid warbling sound. StrikeAlert is enabled by default.
NOTE: StrikeAlert will not sound when the receiver’s volume is muted.
Using StrikeAlert
StrikeAlert works with passive power frequencies only.
When StrikeAlert is active, it will automatically sound when a shallow power cable is
detected.
Transmitter power output
The transmitter supports several power output modes to help you select the optimal
settings for your requirements whilst helping to prolong battery life.
Boost (Tx3 and Tx10 only)
Boost allows the transmitter to output its maximum wattage for a specified period of time
in minutes.
WARNING! The transmitter is capable of outputting potentially lethal wattages. Exercise
extreme caution when using Boost.
19.23 Locating Cables and Pipes
Antennae modes
Peak mode
Peak mode provides the most sensitive and accurate mode for location and depth
measurement. It provides a sharp peak response with a corresponding small decrease in
sensitivity. Peak mode cannot be disabled using the menu.
325
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
In peak mode the following indicators are displayed by the LCD:
 Depth
 Current
 Signal strength
Null mode
Null mode is used to verify a locate signal in environments with limited or no electromagnetic
distortion.
In null mode the following indicators are displayed by the LCD:
 Signal strength.
 Right and left arrows.
Null mode gives a null response when it is directly over the line. The sharp, null response is
easier to use than the peak response but is vulnerable to interference and should not be used
for locating, except in areas where there is no interference present. In null mode, the receiver
will indicate line position but not its orientation.
Peak/Null mode
Peak/Null mode gives you the advantages associated with these modes simultaneously. Use
the proportional arrows to place the receiver above the NULL point. If the peak response is not
at a maximum then this is evidence of a distorted field. If the peak response is at its maximum
level where the NULL point is located then there is no or very limited distortion present. In
Peak/Null mode the indicators are displayed by the LCD:
 Proportional right and left arrows.
 Signal strength.
 Current
 Depth
Trace
Line tracing can be accelerated by switching the receiver to null response. Move the
receiver left and right while walking along the path of the line to observe the null directly
over the line and a peak response to each side of the line. As you move the receiver
over the line, the left and right arrows (and an accompanying tone) will indicate if the
target line is to the left or right of the receiver. Periodically switch to peak mode, locate
the target line, and verify its exact position.
Pinpoint
Pinpointing a target line in peak mode, defines the exact position of a target line after it
has been traced and its position is approximately known. Start with medium output
power from the transmitter, medium frequency on the transmitter and receiver, and peak
mode on the receiver.
Set the receiver sensitivity to approximately 50%.
326
Golden Health & Safety Program
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Excavation Safety Program
NOTE: it may be necessary to adjust the sensitivity level throughout the pinpointing to
keep the bar graph on scale.
With the antenna perpendicular to the line, make traverses across the line. Define the
point of maximum response.
Without moving the receiver, turn it round as if it is on a pivot. Stop at the point of
maximum response.
Hold the receiver vertical with the antenna just above the ground and move the receiver
from side to side across the line. Stop at the point of maximum response.
With the end of the antenna close to the ground, repeat steps 2 and 3.
Mark the position and direction of the line.
Repeat the steps of the procedure to increase pinpoint accuracy.
Switch to null response mode and move the receiver to find the null position. If the
position of the peak and the null pinpoints correspond, it can be assumed that the pinpoint
is precise. The pinpoint is not precise if the marks do not correspond, but both marks will
show an error to the same side. True line position will be close to peak position.
The line lies half the distance to the other side of the peak position as the distance
between the peak and the null positions. There are a number of techniques available for
locating unknown lines in an area. Using these techniques is particularly important before
conducting any excavation work to ensure that buried lines are not damaged.
Passive sweep
A passive sweep will locate any Power, Radio or CPS (RD7000DL only) signals that may
be radiating from buried conductors.
Stop when the receiver response rises to indicate the presence of a line. Pinpoint the line
and mark its position. Trace the line out of the area being searched. Resume grid search
in the area.
In some areas there may be a confusing amount of 50/60Hz power signals. Lift the
receiver 50mm from the ground and continue the sweep.
Switch the receiver to Radio Mode if the receiver supports this feature. Increase
sensitivity to maximum and repeat the above grid search procedure over the area.
Pinpoint, mark, and trace out any lines that are located.
In most, but not all areas, radio mode will locate lines that do not radiate power signals
and a grid search should be made in both power and radio modes.
Inductive search
An inductive search procedure is the most certain technique for locating unknown lines.
This type of search requires a transmitter and receiver and two people. This type of
search is referred to as a ‘two person sweep’. Before starting the sweep, define the area
of search and the probable direction of lines crossing the area. Ensure the transmitter is
switched on in induction mode.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
327
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
The first person operates the transmitter and the second person operates the receiver. The
transmitter induces a signal onto lines as it passes over them and the lines are then detected
with the receiver 20 paces upstream or downstream of the transmitter. Hold the transmitter
with its length aligned with the assumed direction of any lines.
The second person holds the receiver at the start of the area to be searched and with the
receiver antennae at right angles to the probable direction of the buried lines. Set the receiver
sensitivity level as high as possible without the receiver picking up any airborne signals directly
from the transmitter.
When the transmitter and receiver are in line both operators start to move forward in parallel.
The operator with the receiver sweeps it backwards and forwards, keeping the receiver
vertical, as they proceed in parallel with the transmitter. This method allows for misalignment of
the transmitter, receiver and buried line.
The transmitter applies the strongest signal to the lines directly below it, which are then located
with the receiver. Move the transmitter from side to side to establish the highest signal which
indicates that the transmitter is also directly above the line(s).
Mark the ground at the point of each peak signal detected with the receiver. Repeat the search
along any other possible paths of lines.
Once the positions of any lines have been marked, reverse positions, place the transmitter
over and along each line in turn, and trace the line out of the search area.
19.24 Depth and Current Readings
Depth readings
The RD7000 can measure the depth of buried conductors down to depths of approximately
6 meters (20 feet). The depth measurement is to the center of the pipe or cable. The best
readings are detected from signals outputted by a transmitter rather than from passive
sources.
The RD7000 is capable of determining depth when locating passive power signals.
However passive signals on lines are less suited for measuring depth because accuracy is
questionable due to the passive signal being present on more than one line.
NOTE: The accuracy of depth measurement is subject to a number of factors and is meant
as a guide only. Exercise caution when performing any excavation.
WARNING! Do not make depth measurements near bends or tees in the line. Go at least 5
meters from a bend for best accuracy.
TruDepth and Compass
It is important to note that the RD7000 will only display depth when the receiver is correctly
oriented above the target line, cable or sonde.
328
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
#Main_Table_of_Contents
To avoid signal distortion, do not apply the signal by induction. If direct connection or signal
clamping is not possible, place the transmitter at least 15 meters from the point of any depth
measurements.
Depth measurements are not accurate if there is audible interference or if part of the
transmitter signal has coupled to a nearby line.
Confirming the peak position coincides with a null position indicates that the position is suitable
for making a depth estimate.
 Pinpoint the target line accurately with the receiver.
 Check the receiver is directly over the line, the antennae are at right angles to it and the
receiver is vertical. Adjust sensitivity level to bring the bar graph indication on scale.
 Press the depth button to toggle between depth and current readings.
If the ground appears to radiate a strong field, perhaps near a radio station, check depth by
holding the bottom of the antenna 50mm above the ground and subtract this reading from the
indicated depth.
Verifying depth measurements
Check a suspect or critical depth reading by lifting the receiver 50mm (2 inches) above
the ground and repeating the measurement. If the measured depth increases by the
same amount it is a good indication that the depth reading is correct.




Depth measurements should be accurate to ±2.5% if conditions are suitable. However,
you may not always know if the conditions are suitable so the following techniques should
be used to check critical readings:
Check that the route of the line is straight for at least 2 meters (6’6”) to either side of the
measurement point.
Check that the signal response is reasonably constant over the 15 meter distance to the
transmitter and make depth measurements to either side of the original point.
Check that there are no adjacent lines carrying a significant signal within 1 to 2 meters of
the target line. This is the most common source of error of depth measurements as a
strong signal coupled to an adjacent line can often introduce ± 50% error.
Make several depth measurements at points slightly displaced from the line’s apparent
position. The shallowest indication will be the most accurate and will also indicate the
line’s position most accurately.
Rough depth calibration check
This check is a quick and easy way of verifying that the depth reading on the receiver is
within acceptable limits. There are two ways of checking the calibration of the receiver in
the field.
Both methods require the use of a transmitter:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
329
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Method 1
Place the transmitter on top of a non-metallic object, such as a cardboard box, on the ground
and away from any buried lines. Switch the transmitter on, ensuring that no accessories are
connected and that the transmitter is in induction mode. To reduce the effects of ground
coupling the transmitter, when it is placed on the box, must be more than 500mm above the
ground.
Hold the receiver with the blade horizontal and pointing towards the front of the transmitter and
approximately five meters from the front of the transmitter.
1. Switch the receiver on.
2. Select the same induction frequency as is selected on the transmitter.
3. Select sonde mode on the receiver.
4. Move the receiver from left to right and when the maximum signal is obtained place the
receiver on top of a non-metallic object, such as a cardboard box, on the ground.
Ensure that the blade is horizontal and pointing towards the transmitter. To reduce the
effects of ground coupling the receiver must be more than 500mm (18 inches) above
the ground when it is placed on the box.
5. Note the depth as indicated on the receiver.
6. Measure the distance from the base of the receiver to the center of the transmitter using
a tape measure.
7. Compare this reading with the depth reading on the receiver.
The receiver can be considered accurate if the difference between the depth reading on
the receiver and the distance measured with the tape is less than 10%.
Method 2
1. Apply a signal to a cable or pipe of known depth.
2. Locate the cable or pipe; the receiver will show depth automatically.
3. Compare the depth reading on the receiver with the actual depth.
Current readings
Identification using current measurements
Measuring current value on a line helps confirm the identity of the line and provides
information about the condition of cable insulation or pipe coating.
About current measurements
The transmitter applies a signal or current onto a target line. The current decreases in
strength as the distance from the transmitter increases. This rate of decrease depends on
the type of line and on soil conditions. Regardless of the type of line and the frequency
being used the rate of decrease should be regular with no sudden drops or changes. Any
sudden or abrupt current change indicates that the line or its condition has changed.
In congested areas, where there is more than one line, the receiver may sometimes
detect a stronger signal from an adjacent line to which the signal has coupled or shares
common grounding because it is nearer the surface. Although current measurement
compensates for depth, signal response will be less as the depth increases.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
330
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
The line with the highest current measurement, rather than the line giving the strongest
response, is the target line to which the transmitter signal has been applied.
Measuring current provides useful information about the position of bends and
intersections. Measuring current after a tee will indicate the main line that pulls more
current along its greater length.
Applying a transmitter signal
The transmitter signal can be connected, clamped or induced to the target line in the
same way as the signal for line tracing is applied.
Signal current measurements
Pinpoint the line and confirm the accuracy of the peak pinpoint with a null pinpoint. Check
the receiver is directly over the line, with the antennae at right angles to it and vertical.
The receiver will automatically estimation and display the depth reading on the LCD.
A signal coupled to a nearby line may distort the accuracy of the measurement. If the
accuracy of the reading is suspect, sweep the area to check if other nearby lines are
radiating the signal. If other signals are causing interference, it may be necessary to make
the current measurement at another point along the line.
Both antennae are needed to make a current measurement and receiver accessory
antennae such as a normal clamp or stethoscope cannot be used. Because current
measurement is a function of depth, it is only available in the locating modes.
19.25 General Locating Tips
Eliminating services
Induction
If several conductors are running parallel and it is not possible to connect a transmitter,
each line may be located separately. Proceed as follows:
1. Perform a sweep of the area to find the position and number of conductors in the
area.
2. Map the direction in which the conductors are going.
To trace the lines:
1. Select induction mode on the transmitter.
2. Select the same frequency as on the receiver.
3. Place the transmitter on its side and in line with a conductor.
4. Ensure the conductor is directly below the transmitter.
5. This will null the signal directly below the transmitter and, in addition, enable the
other conductors to be located.
6. Locate each conductor and mark its position.
7. Move the transmitter down the route and continue locating and marking.
8. Trace each conductor out of the search area until the target line can be accurately
located.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
331
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Unwanted signal coupling
Unwanted coupling of the signal from the target line to another nearby line is one of the
most common location problems. It leads either to an error in the marked position and
depth of the target line or to marking the wrong line. A certain degree of coupling is
unavoidable in many situations but there are ways in which a careful user can reduce
coupling and increase location reliability.
 Avoid applying the signal by induction. The signal may be coupling to more than
one line directly from the transmitter. Use the signal clamp where possible.
 Identify points where lines may be bonded or in close proximity to each other.
Work toward these points rather than away from them. For example, if gas and
water pipes are bonded within a building, apply the signal at the valves or access
points in the road rather than in the building.
 Reduce coupling to a parallel line by using a low signal frequency where available.
 Return signal flowing on another line. Use a double ended connection to by-pass
the ground return if possible.
 Choose a signal application point where the line is furthest from other lines and not
in a congested area.
 When using single-ended connection, site the ground stake as far from the target
line as possible and away from other buried lines.
 Avoid using existing structures for ground connections; other buried lines may be
bonded to them.
A bad ground connection or just laying the ground lead on the surface at right angles to
the line may result in less coupling than a good ground provided long distance tracing is
not required.
Signal grounding
Manhole covers
Sometimes when locating, it is not possible to insert the ground stake into the earth, for
example, when locating on hard ground such as roads. In this case, the ground return can
be made by attaching the ground lead to the metal frame of a manhole.
Using lighting columns
Direct connecting to a metal, street-lamp column is almost as effective as connecting to
the cable sheath itself. Normally the cable sheath is bonded to the metal column,
therefore a simple connection onto the column enables the user to locate the street
lighting quickly and safely without having to call out a technician from the lighting
company. If the lighting column is made from concrete make the transmitter connection to
the cable sheath unless the cable is earthed to the inspection doorframe.
Connection to the cable sheath applies the transmitter signal for a considerable distance
enabling the receiver to trace
WARNING! The live cable connector is for use only by operators licensed or permitted to
work on live cables.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
332
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
When the cable is not grounded at the column, open the inspection door and connect the
live cable connector to the live or neutral conductor.
The use of a street light column as a means of applying a signal to other power cables on
the same electric circuit is a possibility. The signal may be weak using this method
because it may have travelled some distance back to the sub-station and out again on the
other system. With the receiver used on a high sensitivity setting it is often possible to
locate a cable, which would otherwise have been difficult or inconvenient to energize with
the transmitter signal.
Finding a good ground point
When using a direct connection, it is important to get the best possible grounding for the
transmitter. This provides the lowest resistance ground path and the best output signal. If it
is not possible to use the ground stake the following are examples of good alternative
ground points:
 Metal manhole covers.
 Metal drainage grates.
 Metal railings.
 Metal fence posts.
Double-ended connections
Large diameter water pipes and gas distribution pipes that are laid in sections sometimes
have insulated joints between the sections and can be difficult to locate using a single
ended connect. This is because when using a single ended connection ground return,
signals can often cause confusion by returning to the transmitter along other lines. The
problem sometimes occurs when return signals appear stronger than on the target line,
usually because the target line is deeper than the line carrying the return signal, or the
return path may be a better electrical conductor than the target line.
Applying a double-ended transmitter connection is a useful technique for positively tracing
and identifying a target line in a situation such as a heavily congested industrial site,
provided there are access points at each end of the line.
Making a double-ended connection
Connect the transmitter to an access point on the target line. The transmitter ground is
connected with a long cable to another access point further along the line. A complete
circuit is achieved without using ground as a current return path. The long cable should be
kept as far away as possible from the expected route of the line. Radiodetection supplies
50 meter and 200 meter extension cables for this purpose.
This method of applying the transmitter signal is ideal for positive identification of a target
line. When a connection has been made to two points on the same line, the same level of
current should be detectable all around the circuit. The receiver display should remain
constant if the depth of the line does not change.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
333
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
19.26 Using Accessories
Receiver clamps
When to use clamps
Clamps can be used where:
 Several cables or pipes run in close proximity to each other.
 A cable or pipe is accessible at an inspection hole or manhole.
Sondes
When to use a sonde
A sonde transmitter is a small battery powered signal transmitter that can be inserted
into non-metallic ducts, drains or sewers so they can be located and traced with a
receiver. A wide range of transmitting sondes is available to suit different applications.
Sondes can also be used to pinpoint joints in iron gas pipes, locate blockages in plastic
water pipes and monitor the progress of horizontal boring tools.
Choosing a suitable sonde
Check that the sonde has sufficient range for the application and is dimensionally small
enough and sufficiently robust for the application. Ensure that the frequency of the sonde
corresponds with the receiver frequency; the receiver will not locate the sonde unless the
frequencies are the same. Sondes are marked with their transmitting frequency. Ensure
that the means of propelling the sonde is available together with the correct fittings and
couplings.
Preparation
Insert a new battery into the sonde. A new battery or a freshly recharged battery should
be used at the beginning of each day and preferably at the start of each new job. Before
inserting the sonde, check that the sonde and receiver are at the same frequency and
working correctly. To do this, place the sonde on the ground at a distance from the
receiver that is equal to the rated depth of the sonde. Point the receiver at the sonde with
the antenna in line with the sonde (the opposite of using the receiver to locate a line) and
check that the bar graph reading exceeds 50% at maximum sensitivity.
Propelling a sonde
Sondes have a male thread at one end for connecting to drain rods, or to other devices
for inserting and propelling the sonde along a drain or duct. Sondes may be floated along
drains at the end of a tether and floats are available for fitting to the sewer sonde and
super sonde. Sondes can be strapped to high-pressure water jets or similar devices
used for cleaning, maintaining and inspecting drains. Sondes used in underground
drilling and boring operations are normally housed in the boring or drill head behind the
boring or drill bit.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
334
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Locating and tracing a sonde
Insert the sonde in the drain or duct access and locate it while it is still just in view at the
drain or duct entrance. Hold the receiver vertical directly over the sonde with the antenna
in line with the sonde. Adjust the receiver sensitivity so the bar graph reads between 60%
and 80%.
The sonde radiates a peak field from the center of its axis with a ghost signal at each end
of the peak. Move the receiver a little way behind and then in front of the axis of the sonde
to detect the ghost signals. Finding the two ghost signals positively confirms the locate.
Reduce the receiver sensitivity to lose the ghost signals but still indicate a clear peak
response directly over the sonde. Receiver sensitivity is now set for tracing the duct or
drain unless the distance between sonde and receiver changes.
Propel the sonde three paces along the drain or duct and stop. Place the receiver over the
supposed position of the sonde. Do not adjust the sensitivity level.
To locate a sonde:
1. Move the receiver backwards and forwards and stop when the bar graph indicates
a peak. You can use the LCD compass to orient the blade of the receiver with the
direction of the sonde.
2. Rotate the receiver as if the blade is a pivot. Stop when the bar graph indicates a
peak.
3. Move the receiver from side to side until the bar graph indicates a peak.
4. Repeat 1, 2 and 3 with the antenna vertical and resting on or just above the ground.
The receiver should then be directly above the sonde with the antenna in line with
it. Mark the position of the sonde and its direction.
5. Propel the sonde a further 1 or 2 meters, pinpoint, and mark the position. Repeat
this pinpoint procedure at similar intervals along the line of the drain or duct until the
survey is completed.
Checking sonde depth
The RD7000 receiver will automatically display the depth of a located sonde providing the
receiver is correctly oriented and positioned above the sonde.
Calculation method
Pinpoint the sonde. Move the receiver in front of the sonde and still with the antenna in line
with it, increase sensitivity to find the peak of the ghost signal. Move the receiver to behind
the sonde ensuring that the receiver blade is always in line with the sonde. Find the null
positions A and B. Measure the distance between them and multiply by 0.7 to give an
approximate depth measurement.
Types and range of sondes
Standard sonde
The standard sonde combines compact size with a strong signal and is the
standard sonde for most applications unless a smaller size, greater depth or rugged
construction sonde is required.
335
Golden Health & Safety Program
Excavation Safety Program
Sewer sonde
This sonde incorporates a very strong housing and makes the sonde suitable for use in
municipal sewer systems. The sonde has a long life for daily use in all conditions.
19.27 Care and Maintenance
General
Store the equipment in a clean and dry environment.
Regularly validate your equipment using eCAL. Validation ensures the equipment is valid
according to its original factory calibration.
Ensure all terminals and connection sockets are clean, free of debris and corrosion and
are undamaged.
Do not use this equipment when damaged or faulty.
Cleaning
WARNING! Do not attempt to clean this equipment when it is powered or
connected to any power source, including batteries, adapters and live cables.
Ensure the equipment is clean and dry whenever possible.
Clean this equipment with soft, moistened cloth.
If using this equipment in foul water systems or other areas where biological hazards
may be present, use an appropriate disinfectant.
Do not use abrasive materials or chemicals as they may damage the casing, including
the reflective labels.
Do not use high pressure hoses.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
336
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program
20. AERIAL LIFT SAFETY PROGRAM
20.1
Introduction...................................................................................................... 339
20.2 Purpose ............................................................................................................ 339
20.3 Scope and Applicability .................................................................................... 339
20.4 References ....................................................................................................... 339
20.5 Responsibilities ................................................................................................ 339
20.6 Definitions ......................................................................................................... 340
20.7 General Requirements ..................................................................................... 341
20.8
Pre-Use Inspection .......................................................................................... 342
20.9 Battery Charging, Filling and Fueling ............................................................... 342
20.10 Personal Protective Equipment ........................................................................ 343
20.11 Training and Evaluation ................................................................................... 343
20.12 Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 345
20.13 Record Keeping ............................................................................................... 345
20.14 Contractor Employees ...................................................................................... 346
20.15 Appendix A: Pre-Use: Aerial/Scissor Lift Pre-Use Inspection Checklist .......... 347
20.16 Appendix B: Examples of Aerial/Scissor Lifts .................................................. 348
20.17 Appendix C: Aerial/Scissor Lift Training Certification Form ............................. 349
20.18 Appendix D: Hands-On Evaluation Test for Aerial/Scissor Lift Operators ....... 350
20.19 Appendix E: Evaluator Guidelines – Aerial/Scissor Lift ................................... 352
337
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program
20.20 Appendix F: Safe Work Practices .................................................................... 354
20.21 Safe Work Procedures – Terex Telelect Hi Ranger TPL 40-Aerial Lift ........... 357
338
Golden Health & Safety Program
20.1
Aerial Lift Safety Program
Introduction
Aerial / Scissor lifts pose a serious safety hazard if not used properly. It is the policy of the
Town of Golden to train employees on the hazards of operating aerial / scissor lifts and to
ensure such equipment is safely maintained.
20.2



Purpose
This program has been established to:
Ensure the safe operation of aerial and scissor lifts.
Ensure that work units understand and comply with safety standards related to aerial /
scissor lifts.
Assign responsibilities to personnel which are necessary for successful implementation.
20.3
Scope & Applicability
This program applies to all employees at all Town of Golden locations.
This program covers every type of aerial / scissor lift used by the Town of Golden
employees. (See Appendix B for specific examples)
20.4
References:
(The following have been used as references in the development of this program)
 OSHA Standard - Vehicle-mounted elevating and rotating work platform – 29 CFR
1910.67
 OSHA Standard - Aerial lifts – 29 CFR 1926.453
 Worksafebc Regulation and Guidelines; Part 11 Fall Protection, Part 14 Cranes and
Hoists
 CSA Standard Z150-1998, Safety Code for Mobile Cranes
 ANSI/SIA, Boom Supported Elevating Work Platforms – A92.5 – 2006
 ANSI/SIA, Self-Propelled Elevating Work Platforms – A92.6- 2006
 ANSI/SIA, Vehicle-Mounted Elevating and Rotating Aerial Devices – A92.2 – 2001
 Association of Equipment Manufacturers - Aerial Platform Safety Manual
20.5


Responsibilities:
Budget Administrators
Ensure that responsibilities assigned within this program are carried out within their
administrative work unit.
Designate individuals responsible for the implementation of this program within their work
unit.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
339
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program
 Actively support this program as part of the work unit’s overall safety effort.
 Ensure adequate funding is available to support this program.
Occupational Health and Safety Committee
 Assist work units in implementing the provisions of this program.
 Approve aerial/scissor lift trainers.
 Periodically review and update this written program.
 Periodically evaluate the overall effectiveness of this program.
Department Managers
 Determine the applicability of this program to activities conducted within their work
unit.
 Coordinate implementation of this program within their work unit.
 Actively support this program as part of the work unit’s overall safety effort.
Supervisors/Foremen
 Be thoroughly informed of the contents of this program and its application to their
areas of responsibility and authority.
 Ensure employees comply with all provisions of this program.
 Ensure employees receive training appropriate to their assigned tasks and maintain
documentation of such training.
 Ensure employees are provided with and use appropriate protective equipment.
 Take prompt corrective action when unsafe conditions or practices are observed.
 Investigate injuries and incidents within their work unit related to aerial / scissor lift
usage.
Employees
 Follow the work practices described in this program, including the use of appropriate
protective equipment.
 Attend all training required by this program.
 Immediately report any unsafe conditions or concerns related to aerial / scissor lift
safety to their supervisor/foreman.
20.6
Definitions:
Aerial Lifts: Any powered, mobile, vehicle-mounted device that may elevate, telescopically
extend, articulate and may (or may not) rotate around a substantial axis in order to raise
and support personnel to elevated job sites.
Aerial lifts include extendible boom platforms; vehicle-mounted aerial ladders; articulating,
rotating boom platforms; vertical self-elevating towers; cherry pickers; bucket trucks and
any other equipment built in accordance with either ANSI-A92.2 (1990), Vehicle-Mounted
Elevating and Rotating Aerial Devices, or ANSI-A92.5 (1992), Boom Supported Elevating
Work Platforms.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
340
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program
Scissor Lifts: Any powered, mobile device that has a personnel work platform which is
mechanically raised vertically above the carriage by means of controls on the work
platform.This equipment is designed and fabricated according to either ANSI-A92.6 (1990),
Self-Propelled Elevating Work Platforms, or ANSI-A92.3 (1990), Manually Propelled
Elevating Aerial Platforms.
Anchorage: A secure point of attachment to be used with personal fall protection
equipment.
Certified Operator: Certification of aerial/scissor lift operators is a three- step process
consisting of classroom instruction, hands-on training and hands-on evaluation. Once the
employee has successfully completed all three steps they are considered to be a certified
operator.
Competent Trainer: An employee who has successfully completed a Train–the– Trainer
or equivalent type of training program and is familiar with the type of aerial/scissor lift in
their work unit. A contractor or equipment vendor who has experience training
aerial/scissor lift safety and operation and is familiar with the equipment is also permitted to
be a Competent Trainer.
Competent Evaluator (Hands-on): An employee in the department/work unit who is
experienced and competent with the aerial/scissor lift. An employee must be familiar with
the equipment and its safe operation. In order to be considered competent in regards to
conducting the evaluation portion of the aerial/scissor lift training, an employee must have
successfully completed the classroom portion of aerial/scissor lift training. This employee
could be but is not limited to a certified operator, supervisor/manager or safety committee
member.
Familiarization: Providing information regarding the control functions and safety devices
for the aerial /scissor lift to an operator of the equipment.
Insulated Platform: A platform designed and tested to meet the specific electrical
insulation ratings consistent with the manufacturer’s identification plate.
Outriggers: Devices that increase the stability of the aerial lift platform and that are
capable of lifting and leveling the aerial / scissor lift platform.
Rated Work Load: The designated capacity of the aerial platform as specified by the
manufacturer.
Stabilizers: Devices that increase the stability of the aerial lift platform but are not capable
of lifting or leveling the aerial / scissor lift platform.
20.7 General Requirements:



Operators shall review and follow the manufacturer’s operating manual. A copy of the
manual must be located on the equipment.
Only certified operators shall operate an aerial / scissor lift.
Operators shall follow safe work practices when operating an aerial/scissor lift; a list of
common safe work practices are summarized in Appendix F.
341
Golden Health & Safety Program
20.8
Aerial Lift Safety Program
Pre-Use Inspections:
 Every aerial/scissor lift must undergo a pre-use inspection prior to use on each shift.

Aerial/scissor lifts not used during a shift do not have to undergo an inspection during
that shift.
 Pre-use inspections must be documented using an appropriate checklist for the
aerial/scissor lift similar to the one in Appendix A. Refer to the manufacturer's
inspection requirements for complete inspection details.
 Completed checklists will be kept on file for a period not less than a year.
 The pre-use inspection will identify conditions that could affect the safe use of the
aerial/scissor lifts. If any unsafe conditions exist, the aerial/scissor lift shall be removed
from service. In order to remove an aerial/scissor lift from service, the operator shall
remove the keys and place an “Out of Service” tag near the operator control panel.
 Operators must immediately report any unsafe aerial/scissor lift conditions to their
supervisor. When an aerial/scissor lift has been removed from service, the operator
must give the keys to the supervisor for safekeeping. The supervisor is then
responsible for ensuring the necessary arrangements are made for repair.
 Only authorized personnel shall perform aerial/scissor lift repairs and adjustments. All
replacement parts shall be the same design as the original or an equivalent design as
designated by the manufacturer.
20.9
Battery Charging, Filling and Fueling:
Charging Batteries
 Charging is permitted only in designated areas.
 Warning signs shall be posted at battery charging locations that state “Caution-battery
charging station, No Smoking or Open Flames” (or equivalent).
 Adequate ventilation must be present to avoid the build-up of hydrogen gas during
battery charging.
 A 10 lb ABC fire extinguisher must be located within 20 feet.
 A means to protect the charging apparatus from damage from trucks must be provided.
Filling Batteries
 When filling the water level of batteries the following personal protective equipment
(PPE) at a minimum must be worn: Safety goggles or face shield w/ safety glasses,
acid resistant gloves and acid resistant apron.
 A properly equipped battery filling station shall have:
o An eyewash able to provide a 15 minute flow. The eyewash shall be located within 10
seconds walking distance of all battery filling areas.
o A phone or other means of communication in the event of an emergency.
342
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program
Fueling (Liquid Petroleum, Gasoline, Diesel, etc)
 Signs shall be posted at fueling locations that state: “Danger – Diesel, No Smoking or
Open Flames” (or equivalent).
20.10 Personal Protective Equipment:
Fall protection equipment must be used as follows when operating aerial/scissor lifts:
Aerial Lifts:

Operators shall be secured to the anchor point provided by the equipment manufacturer by
either a self-retracting lanyard or by a lanyard short enough to prevent the employee from
being ejected.

Operators must use a safety harness.
Scissor lift – The guardrail system provides fall protection. If the manufacturer has
installed an anchorage point, a fall protection system (restraint, positioning, personal fall
arrest system) as designated by Worksafebc must be utilized.
Tying a lanyard off to an adjacent pole, structure, or equipment while working from an
aerial lift shall not be permitted.
Other types of personal protective equipment (PPE), such as head, eye and hand
protection, shall be worn according to the task specific personal protective equipment
hazard assessment.
20.11 Training
Training must be completed prior to any use of the aerial/scissor lift. Certification of
aerial/scissor lift operators is a three-step process consisting of classroom instruction,
hands-on training and hands-on evaluation.
Classroom instruction, hands-on training and hands-on evaluation can be conducted by
either a competent trainer in the work unit, equipment manufacturer, safety consultant
and/or a vendor who specializes in aerial/scissor lift training.


Hands-on training and hands-on evaluation portions of the training can also be conducted
by an employee in the department/work unit who is experienced and competent with the
aerial/scissor lift. This person could be a certified operator, supervisor/manager or safety
committee member.
The safety committee or the operations manager must approve trainers.
Training must be specific to the type of aerial/scissor lift being used.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
343
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program
Training must cover the following:








The purpose and use of the equipment manuals.
That operating manuals are an integral part of the lift and must be properly stored on
the vehicle.
A pre-start inspection.
Responsibilities associated with problems or malfunctions affecting the operation of
the lift.
Factors affecting stability.
The purpose of placards and decals.
Workplace inspection.
Applicable safety rules and regulations.
Authorization to operate.
Operator warnings and instructions.


Proper use of personal fall protection equipment.
Hands-on operation.


Employees shall not be allowed to operate rented equipment unless they have been
previously certified on similar equipment. Operators are also required to review the
owner’s manual and shall be given ample time to become familiar with the equipment and
its controls before operation is permitted. The vendor is required to review equipment with
the user when the user is not familiar with the type of aerial/scissor lift
Trainees must successfully complete hands-on training and a hands-on evaluation before
being allowed to operate an aerial/scissor lift independently. Trainees will be given
adequate supervision and time to learn basic operating skills.
Initial operator hands-on evaluations must be completed using the checklist found in
Appendix D or equivalent.
Documented re-evaluation of each aerial/scissor lift operator will be completed at least
once every three years using Appendix D or equivalent.

Re-evaluations can be conducted by an employee in the department/work unit who is
experienced and competent with the aerial/scissor lift. This person could be a
certified operator, Supervisor/Manager or safety committee member.
Refresher training in relevant topics will be provided to an aerial/scissor lift operator when
any of the following occur:




The operator has been observed to be using the aerial/scissor lift in an unsafe
manner.
The operator has been involved in an accident or a near-miss incident.
The operator has received an evaluation that reveals the operator is not using the
aerial/scissor lift safely.
The operator is assigned to operate a different type of equipment.
344
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program
A condition in the workplace changes in a manner that could affect safe operation of the
equipment.
20.12 Maintenance
The manufacturer’s instructions regarding maintenance must be followed. (Such
instructions are typically included in the owner’s manual for the aerial/scissor lifts).
An annual inspection is required and must be conducted by an authorized person qualified
as a mechanic on the type of aerial / scissor lift or one having similar design
characteristics.
Any aerial/scissor lift with an identified safety issue will be immediately removed from
service.
Maintenance performed by certified aerial/scissor lift operators will be limited to
replacing/disconnecting/connecting batteries, changing fuel cylinders, adding water to
batteries, replacing light bulbs and replacing stickers and decals.
No aerial/scissor lift with a leak in the fuel system will be operated until the leak has been
eliminated. Repairs to the fuel and ignition system that involve fire hazards will be
conducted in a location (non-flammable) designated for such repairs.
Any aerial/scissor that emits hazardous sparks or flames from the exhaust system will be
immediately removed from service and not returned to service until the cause has been
eliminated.
Only replacement parts equivalent to the original parts are to be used.
20.13 Recordkeeping
Each work unit is responsible for maintaining the following records in order to meet the
requirements of this program:
A listing of all aerial/scissor lifts owned by the work unit.
A record of training which includes: (Use Appendix C or equivalent)
 Name of operator.
 Date of classroom training.
 Date of hands-on training.
 Date of hands-on evaluation.
 Identity of the person(s) performing the training and/or evaluation.
 Make and model of aerial/scissor lift.
Copies of all pre-use inspection records for one year after completion.
Copies of annual inspection records for at least four years.
Copies of repair records for at least four years.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
345
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program
The Town of Golden is responsible for maintaining the following records in order to meet
the requirements of this program:

The Town of Golden will retain training records for training they have provided indefinitely.
20.14 Contract Employees
Contractors are required to follow all applicable Worksafebc regulations and
manufacturer’s instructions. Contractors are not permitted to use any aerial/scissor lifts
owned by the Town of Golden unless trained to do so
#Main_Table_of_Contents
346
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program
20.15 Appendix A – Pre-Use: Aerial/Scissor Lift Inspection Checklist
Equipment Make/Model:
Serial Number: ____________________
□
Owner’s manual legible and stored inside the container located on the platform.
□
All decals legible and in place.
□
Fluid levels checked. (Hydraulic oil, engine oil, coolant, etc)
□
Structural and other critical components present and all associated fasteners and pins in place.
□
Battery packs in place, properly connected and not leaking.
□
Compartment covers in place.
Check the following components or areas for damage, modifications, and improperly installed or missing parts:
□
Electrical components, wiring, and electrical cables
□
Hydraulic power unit, reservoir, hoses, fittings, cylinders, and manifolds
□
Drive and turntable motors and torque hubs
□
Boom wear pads
□
Tire and wheels
□
Limit switches, warning alarms, and horn
□
Nuts, bolts, and other fasteners
□
Gauges
□
Beacon and lights
□
Fall Protection Devices (railing, gates, toe boards, anchor/connecting points, etc)
Check entire machine for:
□
Cracks in welds or structural components
□
Dents or damage to machine Equipment operation:
□
Test all controls for proper operation
Comments:
Month:
Year:
Date
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Initial
Date
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Initial
347
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program
20.16 Appendix B – Examples of Aerial/Scissor Lifts
Vehicle Mounted Aerial Lift / Bucket Truck
The lift platform is an integral part of an over the road
vehicle.
Articulating Boom Aerial Lift
This aerial lift has at least 2 hinged sections which are
used to increase mobility.
Man Lift / Cherry Picker
This piece of equipment lifts personnel vertically, but
not horizontally.
Scissor Lift
This piece of equipment lifts personnel vertically, but
not horizontally.
Extendable / Telescoping Aerial Lift
This aerial lift has a boom that extends horizontally and
vertically.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
348
Golden Health & Safety Program
20.17
Aerial Lift Safety Program
Appendix C - Aerial/Scissor Lift Training Certification Form
Name of Classroom
Trainer(print
Name of Evaluator
(if different)(print
Make and model of aerial/scissor lift/s:
Name (Print)
Date of Date of handsclassroom on training
training
sign):
sign):
Date of
hands-on
evaluation
Signature
#Main_Table_of_Contents
349
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program
20.18 Appendix D - Aerial/Scissor Lift Hands-On Operator Training Evaluation Form
Trainee Name:
Evaluator Name:
Equipment Manufacturer:
Model:
Work Unit:
Department:
Date:
NOTE: Hands-On Operator Training must be completed for each
type of aerial lift utilized.
Step
1.
Preuse
equipme
nt
inspecti
on
2. Inspect
Worksite
3. Function
test of lower
control
station.
4. Utilize fall
protection
equipment
Evaluation
N/A
Pass
Fail
Including but not limited to: safety devices,
air/hydraulic/fuel system for leaks, cable/wiring
harnesses for damage, loose/missing parts,
tires and wheels, placards/warnings/and control
markings, outriggers/stabilizers and other
structures, guardrail system, other items as
specified in owner’s manual.
Including but not limited to: drop-offs or holes,
slopes, bumps and floor obstructions, debris,
overhead obstructions and electrical hazards,
inadequate surface and support to withstand all
load forces, wind and weather conditions,
presence of bystanders, other unsafe
conditions.
Done to determine if there are any malfunctions.
Face the machine. Maintain 3 point contact with
ladder/hand rails (two hands, one foot OR two
feet, one hand).
Done to determine if there are any malfunctions.
5. Function
test of bucket
/ platform /
basket control
station.
6.
Drive
and creep
/
inch
forward
and
reverse.
Move approximately 10 feet in a driving mode.
Creep approximately 5 feet. Verify unit balance
and stability.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
350
Golden Health & Safety Program
Step
Evaluation
Aerial Lift Safety Program
N/A Pass
Fail
7. Turn vehicle Minimum disturbance of aerial lift platform.
Verify unit balance and stability.
360 degrees
right and left.
8. Boom up & Fully extend, fully raise. Minimum disturbance
down, in & out. of aerial platform. Verify unit balance and
stability.
Minimum disturbance of aerial platform. Verify
9.
Rotate/swing unit balance and stability.
boom 360
degrees in
each
Minimum disturbance of aerial platform. Verify
10. Tilt
direction.
unit balance and stability.
platform in
each
direction.
Locate and use emergency stop function.
11. Turn off
machine
using
emergency
stop function.
Minimum disturbance of aerial platform. Verify
12. Park and
unit balance and stability.
shutdown
aerial lift.
13. Dismount
safely. Face
the machine
when
dismounting.
Maintain 3 point contact with ladder/handrails
(two hands, one foot OR two feet, one hand)
14.
Deploy/setup
and store
outriggers.
Follow manufacturer’s guidance. Refer to
owner’s manual.
15.
Comments
Must be included for all “Failed” tasks. If task is failed the
evaluator must explain what was done incorrectly and have the
trainee repeat the task until it is completed correctly.
Trainee
Signature
Evaluator
Signature
#Main_Table_of_Contents
351
Golden Health & Safety Program
20.19
Aerial Lift Safety Program
Appendix E - Evaluator Guidelines - Aerial/Scissor Lift
(Note: The evaluation can be done in-house using an experienced and competent
employee or an outside vendor/safety consultant may be used.
1. Pre-Requisites:
a. Completed the classroom portion of an aerial/scissor lift training class.
b. Review and become familiar with the Aerial/Scissor Lift written program.
c. Be experienced with the equipment you will be training on.
d. Review owner’s manual.
2. Choose safe location:
a. Open area.
b. Away from vehicle and pedestrian traffic.
c. Flat surface on solid ground.
d. If necessary barricade area with orange cones or equivalent to keep vehicles
and pedestrians out of the training area.
3. Review features of specific aerial/scissor lift with student:
a. On/off
b. Bucket, boom, steering
c. Deck extensions
d. Stop/Go
e. Outriggers
f. Safety devices (guardrail gate, anchor points)
g. Emergency boom/bucket lowering mechanism
h. Fueling/charging ports
i. Fueling/charging locations at site
4. Review site specific working conditions/hazards/safety concerns:
a. Ramps/Slopes
b. Dock plates/dock levelers
c. Overhead obstructions
d. Pedestrian traffic areas
e. Vehicle restricted areas (unstable surface, narrow aisles, etc)
f. Hazardous locations (flammable, chemical, etc)
g. Any other unique situations/areas
h. PPE
#Main_Table_of_Contents
352
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program
5. Allow student to learn/practice actual operation of the equipment while supervised.
6. After the student gets comfortable with the equipment operation, begin the evaluation.
7. Use the “Aerial/Scissor Lift Hands-On Training Evaluation Form” found in Appendix D of the
PSU Aerial/Scissor Lift Program. Have employee complete each task on the form which
applies to the equipment.
8. File evaluation form with supervisor/manager/safety officer.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
353
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program
20.20
Appendix F - Safe Work Practices
 Operators shall not wear any loose clothing or any accessory that can catch in
moving parts.

Before machine is started, the operator must walk completely around the machine to
ensure everyone and everything is clear of the machine.

Articulating boom and extendable boom platforms, primarily designed as personnel
carriers, shall have both platform (upper) and lower controls. Upper controls shall be
in or beside the platform within easy reach of the operator. Lower controls shall
provide for overriding the upper controls. Controls shall be plainly marked as to their
function. Lower level controls shall not be operated unless permission has been
obtained from the employee in the lift, except in case of emergency.

Modifications and additions that may affect the capacity or safe operation of an
aerial/scissor lift are strictly prohibited without the manufacturer’s written approval.
Capacity, operation, and maintenance instruction markings will be changed as
necessary if the manufacturer approves a modification.


Operations department must be notified before modification takes place.
The insulated portion (if applicable) of an aerial / scissor lift shall not be altered in
any manner that might reduce its insulating value.

Any signs, plates, or decals which are missing or illegible must be replaced.

Welding operations on aerial/scissor lifts shall be conducted per Hot Work Permit
Program.

If the aerial / scissor lift becomes disabled, a “out of service” tag or equivalent shall
be attached to the controls inside the platform in a conspicuous location.

Aerial/scissor lift devices with noted, reported deficiencies shall not be operated until
repairs are made and equipment is authorized for use.
Safe Work Practices Before Operation


Consideration shall be given to the amount of wind. Follow the manufacturer’s
instruction regarding operation in windy conditions. As a general rule aerial/scissor
lifts shall not be operated in winds exceeding 25 MPH although this can vary
depending on the model of equipment.
Guardrails must be installed and access gates or openings must be closed before
raising the platform.

Boom and platform load limits specified by the manufacturer shall not be exceeded.

Before moving an aerial / scissor lift for travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected to see
that it is properly cradled and outriggers (if available) are in stowed position.
354
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program

Consideration shall be given to the protection of bystanders via barricading, having
another employee keep bystanders at a safe distance or by other means.

Aerial / scissor lifts shall not be operated from trucks, scaffolds, or similar
equipment.

Safe Work Practices During Operation

Attention shall be given towards the direction of travel, clearances above, below and
on all sides.

Employees shall not sit or climb on the guardrails of the aerial / scissor lift.

Planks, ladders or other devices shall not be used on the work platform.

An aerial / scissor lift shall not be moved when the boom is elevated in a working
position with employees in the basket, except for equipment which is specifically
designed for this type of operation.

Aerial / scissor lift shall not be placed against another object to steady the elevated
platform.

Aerial / scissor lift shall not be used as a crane or other lifting device.

Aerial / scissor lift devices shall not be operated on grades, side slopes or ramps
that exceed the manufacturer's recommendations.

The brakes shall be set, chocks inserted on the tires and outriggers, when used,
shall be positioned on pads or a solid surface.

Speed of aerial/scissor lift devices shall be limited according to the conditions of the
ground surface, congestion, visibility, slope, location of personnel and other factors
that may cause hazards to other nearby personnel.

The following approach distances to energized electrical lines must be maintained:
Stunt driving and horseplay shall not be permitted.

Booms and elevated platform devices shall not be positioned in an attempt to jack
the wheels off the ground.

The area surrounding the elevated platform shall be cleared of personnel and
equipment prior to lowering the elevated platform.

On boom-type machines, drive controls shall not be used to maneuver in close to
an obstacle. The swing and boom functions shall be used for maneuvering.

Operators are to call for assistance if the platform or any part of the machine
becomes entangled.
355
Golden Health & Safety Program

Aerial Lift Safety Program
The operator shall maintain a clear view of the path of travel and a safe distance
from other obstacles such as: debris, drop offs, holes, depressions, slopes, and
overhead hazards
Voltage Range
(Phase to Phase)
750 V to 75 kV
Over 75 kV to 250
kV
Over 250 kV to
Minimum Safe
Approach Distance
(feet)
10
15
20
500 kV
Safe Work Practices After Operation

Safe shutdown shall be achieved by utilizing a suitable parking area, placing the
platform in the stowed position, placing controls in neutral, idling engine for gradual
cooling, turning off electrical power, and taking the necessary steps to prevent
unauthorized use.

Aerial / scissor lifts shall be shut off prior to fueling. Fueling must be completed in
well ventilated areas free of flames, sparks or other hazards which may cause fires
or explosions.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
356
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program
20.21
Safework Procedures - Terex Telelect Hi-Ranger TPL 40 Aerial Lift
Scope
The aerial lift is a versatile truck that can be used for: replacing burned out lights,
installing Christmas decorations, trimming trees, painting and maintenance. These
procedures are designed to eliminate or minimize the hazards associated with using the
bucket truck for these work tasks.
Authority
The Town of Golden has authorized the development and competencies for this
procedure.
Hazards
Hazards associated with the use of the aerial lift truck include:




Electrocution from power line contact
Contact with pinch points
Release of hydraulic fluid under pressure
Injuries and fatalities from falls due to working without a fall restraint or falling protection
system

Slips and falls caused by improper use of bucket side rails, ladders or planks for
additional reach

Injuries and fatalities due to overturned lifts or trucks when the vehicle is set on
unstable ground

Falls from buckets when passing vehicle traffic hits the lift or truck due to improper work
zone setup
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
PPE requirements include:
 CSA safety toed boots

Hard hat

Safety glasses

Hi-vis vest or hi-vis coveralls

Traffic cones

Leather gloves or insulated rubber gloves

Fall arrest harness and lanyard

Ear plugs/ear muffs (as required)

#Main_Table_of_Contents
357
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program
Emergency response
 There will be a first aid attendant on site at all times during the operation of the
aerial lift.

If the lift operator becomes injured or incapable of operating the lift, then the
ground worker will use the truck controls to effect rescue of the operator.

If the operator finds that the lift is not functioning as required or notices unusual
noises (grinding, squealing), the operator will stop activating the controls and
notify the ground worker who will contact the fire department for operator removal.
Safe Work Procedures
Pre Operation Check
With boom in stored position and before operation, check:
 Fuel gauge to ensure adequate fuel supply

Tires for damage or under inflation

Hand brake and brake lock for proper operation

Truck warning lights for proper operation

Torsion bars for structural damage or loose pins/fasteners

Loose objects for proper storage

Hydraulic oil level (must be at full mark)

Hydraulic lines for twisting, abrasion or leakage

Aerial device parts for any damage (cylinders, pins, welds, loose bolts, etc.)

Safety harness and lanyard stored in truck. Fabric rope for damage and
cleanliness.

Cover and guards properly installed

Decals and signs for damage, illegible or missing

Hooks for safety catches, twisted or opened throat

Platform is clean inside and out
Pre Operation Procedures
 Never operate aerial lift equipment without adequate, hands on training. If you
are renting equipment, be sure that the rental company provides hands on
training as part of the rental.

Warm up truck and operate the lift from the truck controls to verify proper
function prior to use.

Return the lift arms to their cradle and secure for transport
358
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program

Before locating the truck in position to work, carefully survey the job site to
determine the best location to park the truck to maximize the work activity
without having to move the truck.

Survey the work area for potential hazards such as overhead electrical lines.

Maintain a minimum clearance of at least 10 feet from overhead power lines

Use the following procedure when positioning the truck:

Park the vehicle with the flow of traffic on level ground.

Keep an eye out for drop offs, holes, bumps and debris

Set up a work zone that isolates the vehicle from traffic. Provide sufficient
clearance for the extension of the boom.

Turn the warning lights on.

Set the brakes. Place wheel chocks in position under the tires.

Place cones and barricades in accordance with Ministry of Transportation and
Worksafebc requirements.

Check fiberglass extension sections for cracks and cleanliness.

Disconnect boom tie down straps.

Check effectiveness of controls by operating all aerial device functions- lock
torsion bars into operating position before raising the boom from the boom rest.

Run unit through its complete cycle using ground controls.

Check aerial device parts for any damage (cylinder, pins, welds, loose bolts, etc.).

Check holding valves by stopping the truck engine with boom in raised position
and operating ground control levers in both directions to relieve pressure. The
boom must remain stationary.

Return the lift to its storage position.

Prior to entering the bucket, the operator will put on the harness. The grounds
helper will check the harness for proper installation.

The operator will enter the bucket using a three point entry. The lanyard will be
connected to the D-ring and to the designated anchor point on the aerial lift.

The operator will operate the lift from the bucket.

Use a feathering technique with the control levers to ease the unit to smooth starts
and stops. Use low speed for starting and stopping motion when approaching
aerial job sites and when prolonged stops will be made. Use high speed only
between ground and job site and from job site to ground.

Always look in the direction the unit is traveling to ensure there is clearance for
boom, platform and operator.
359
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program

Be aware of any obstacles the lower and main boom may strike if rotated or
elevated.

On completion of work activity, retract hydraulic extension and place boom in
stored position for travel.

Remove all tools and supplies from the platform. Place the platform in stored
position for travel.

Disconnect lanyard and depart from the platform using a three point contact.

Connect and tighten the boom tie down strap.

Unlock the torsion bar. Stow all loose tools and equipment.

Turn off vehicle warning lights and remove and store cones.

Check area for safe egress and leave site.
Safety Rules and Precautions
All operators must be authorized by the Town to operate the unit. Before operating,
review the manual and:
 Don’t exceed load limits specified on the unit.

Test the controls both upper and lower before using the unit.

Set brakes and wheel chocks before using unit.

Wear body harness with lanyard attached to the lanyard anchor.

Always stand with both feet on the floor of the platform.

Do not sit or climb on the edge of the platform.

DO NOT use planks, ladders, or other devices for a work position.

Ensure that the boom is properly stowed before moving the aerial truck for
travel.

DO NOT move the truck when the boom is elevated with workers in the
platform.

DO NOT belt off to adjacent poles, structures or equipment when in the
platform.

Always observe legal clearances between energized conductors.

NEVER position the platform or workers between conductors.

When aloft, never allow conductive materials to hang from the platform or
worker.

When aloft always wear insulated rubber gloves when near electrical power
lines.

Do not operate the boom if wind gusts exceed 50 kph or there is a threat of an
360
Golden Health & Safety Program
Aerial Lift Safety Program
electrical storm.

Do not use aerial lift devices as a crane or other lifting device.
To prevent Tip-Over hazards:

Do not push or pull toward anything while raised in the bucket.

Do not carry ladders, etc. in bucket.

Do not exceed the 300 lb. load capacity at full extension.

Do not move the truck when bucket is raised.

Do not operate in high winds.

Make sure truck is parked on even ground.

Make sure the torsion bar is properly set, and

Never use the bucket truck as a crane.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
361
Golden Health & Safety Program
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
21. VEHICLE LIFT SAFETY PROGRAM
21.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 365
21.2 Purpose .................................................................................................... 365
21.3 Scope & Applicability ................................................................................ 365
21.4 References ............................................................................................... 365
21.5 Responsibilities ........................................................................................ 365
21.6 Definitions ................................................................................................. 366
21.7 General Requirements for Vehicle Lists .................................................. 367
21.8 Training ................................................................................................... 367
21.9 Inspections for Vehicle Lifts ..................................................................... 368
21.10 Maintenance ........................................................................................... 369
21.11 Recordkeeping ....................................................................................... 369
21.12 Contractors ............................................................................................. 370
21.13 Appendix A – Pre-Use Vehicle Lift Inspection Guidelines ..................... 370
21.14 Appendix B – Monthly Vehicle Lift Inspection ........................................ 371
21.15 Appendix C – Vehicle Lift Training Certification Form ........................... 372
21.16 Appendix D – Safe Work Practices for Vehicle Lifts .............................. 373
21.17 Appendix E – Vehicle Lift Operator Evaluation Form ............................ 374
21.18
Appendix F – Instructions for Conducting Vehicle Lift Operator
Evaluations ....................................................................................................... 375
363
Golden Health & Safety Program
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
21.19 Safe Work Procedures for PKS Vehicle Lift ........................................... 375
21.20 Scope ..................................................................................................... 375
21.21 Authorization .......................................................................................... 375
21.22 Hazards .................................................................................................. 376
21.23 Personal Protective Equipment (ppe) .................................................... 376
21.24 Emergency Requirements...................................................................... 376
21.25 Safe Work Procedures ........................................................................... 376
21.26 Lift Operation Procedure ........................................................................ 377
364
Golden Health & Safety Program
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
21.1 Introduction
Vehicle lifts pose a serious safety hazard if not used properly. It is the policy of the
Town of Golden to ensure employees are trained on the hazards of using vehicle
lifts and also to ensure that such equipment is safely maintained.
21.2 Purpose
This program has been established to:
 Ensure the safe use of vehicle lifts.
 Ensure that work units understand and comply with safety standards related to
vehicle lifts.
 Assign responsibilities to personnel which are necessary for successful
implementation of this program.
21.3



Scope & Applicability
This program applies to all employees at all Town of Golden locations.
This program covers the following vehicle lifts that are or could be used by our
employees: in ground hydraulic lifts, two and four post surface mounted lifts,
mobile wheel engaging lifts, parallelogram lifts and scissor lifts having the same
fundamental characteristics.
This program does not cover mobile cranes (wheel-mounted, rough-terrain, allterrain, commercial truck-mounted, and boom truck cranes), engine hoists or
winches.
21.4
References
(The following have been used as references in the development of this program)
 Worksafebc Regulation Part 12- Tools, Machinery and Equipment
 ANSI/ALI ALCTV-1998 American National Standard for Automotive Lifts- Safety
Requirements for Construction, Testing and, American National Standard for
Automotive Lifts- Safety Requirements for Operation, Inspection and
Maintenance
 ASME PALD-2003, Safety Standards for Portable Automotive Lifting Devices
21.5




Responsibilities
Department Managers
Ensure that responsibilities assigned within this program are carried out within
their administrative work unit.
Designate individuals responsible for the implementation of this program within
their work unit.
Actively support this program as part of the work unit’s overall safety effort.
Ensure adequate funding is available to support this program.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
365
Golden Health & Safety Program
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
Health and Safety Committee
 Assist work units in implementing the provisions of this program. Periodically
review and update this written program.
 Periodically evaluate the overall effectiveness of this program.
 Assess the applicability of this program to activities conducted within each work
unit.
 Confirm implementation of this program within the towns depts. Be
knowledgeable of components of program and ensure program compliance.
 Assist in the investigation of serious accidents related to vehicle lifts, etc. Actively
support this program as part of the Town’s overall safety effort.
Supervisors
 Be thoroughly informed of the contents of this program and its application to their
areas of responsibility and authority.
 Ensure employees comply with all provisions of this program.
 Ensure employees receive training appropriate to their assigned tasks and
maintain documentation of such training.
 Ensure employees are provided with and use appropriate protective equipment.
 Take prompt corrective action when unsafe conditions or practices are observed.
 Investigate injuries and incidents within their work unit related to vehicle lift usage.
Employees
 Follow the work practices described in this program, including the use of
appropriate protective equipment.
 Attend all training required by this program.
 Immediately report any unsafe conditions or concerns related to vehicle lifts to
their supervisor.
21.6
Definitions
Authorized Person (Repair): Someone with training and experience pertaining to
vehicle lift repair. There are specific safety considerations that are unique to vehicle
lifts, thus the person must have training and experience in vehicle lift repair.
Competent Trainer: An employee who has demonstrated familiarity with the type of
vehicle lift in their work unit. A contractor or equipment vendor who has experience
training crane/hoist operation and is familiar with the equipment is also permitted to
be a Competent Trainer.
Competent Evaluator: An employee in the department/work unit who is experienced
and competent with the vehicle lift. An employee must be familiar with the equipment
and its safe operation. In order to be considered competent in regards to conducting
the evaluation portion of the crane training, an employee must have successfully
completed the classroom portion of vehicle lift training. This employee could be but
is not limited to a certified operator, supervisor/manager or safety committee
member.
366
Golden Health & Safety Program
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
Designated Person (monthly inspections): means selected or assigned by the
employer or the employer’s representative as being qualified to perform specific
duties.
Vehicle Lift: is a machine for lifting and lowering a vehicle. Lifts can be operated
manually or by electrical and hydraulic power.
21.7
General Requirements for Vehicle Lifts
The work unit must notify the department head and the OHS committee when a
vehicle lift is installed. This is required so that the unit can be added to the monthly
and annual inspection schedule.
Only trained employees shall operate a vehicle lift. If the need arises to operate
vehicle lifts not owned by the Town of Golden, contact the department head for
further guidance.
Vehicle lifts shall go through a pre-use, monthly and annual inspection.
Any unsafe condition noted during an inspection shall be corrected before the
equipment is used.
Operators shall comply with the manufacturer's specifications and limitations
applicable to the operation of the equipment.
Where manufacturer's specifications are not available, the limitations assigned to the
equipment shall be based on the determinations of a qualified engineer competent in
this field and such determinations will be appropriately documented and recorded.
Operators shall follow safe work practices when operating a vehicle lift.
Appendix D)
21.8
(See
Training
Training must be completed prior to any use of a vehicle lift. Training of vehicle lift
operators at the Town of Golden is a two-step process for the majority of vehicle lifts
which consists of classroom instruction & hands-on training.
In additional to the above requirements, a documented operator evaluation is
required for operators of vehicle lifts. (Appendix E)
Classroom instruction, hands-on training and operator evaluations can be conducted
by either a competent trainer in the work unit, the equipment manufacturer; a safety
consultant and/or a vendor who specializes in vehicle lift training.
Hands-on training and hands-on evaluation portions of the training can also be
conducted by an employee in the department/work unit who is experienced and
competent with the equipment. This person could be a trained operator,
supervisor/manager, or safety committee member.
Training must be specific to the type of equipment being used.
367
Golden Health & Safety Program
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
Training shall include the following:
 Characteristics of safe vehicle lift operation;
 Inspection procedures;
 Basic vehicle handling considerations;
 Operator responsibilities;
 Communication used during vehicle lift operations;
 Hands-on equipment training.
Trainees must successfully complete hands-on training before being allowed to
operate the equipment independently. Trainees will be given adequate supervision
and time to learn basic operating skills.
Refresher training in relevant topics will be provided to a vehicle lift operator when
any of the following occur:



The operator has been observed to be using the equipment in an unsafe
manner.
The operator has been involved in an accident or a near-miss incident. The
operator is assigned to operate a different type of equipment.
A condition in the workplace changes in a manner that could affect safe
equipment operation.
21.9
Inspections for Vehicle Lifts
Each department is responsible for ensuring inspections are conducted at the
following frequencies:
Pre-Use Inspection – (See Appendix A)
 Prior to use the operator shall visually inspect the vehicle lift for defects.
 The pre-use inspection will identify conditions that could affect the safe use of
the equipment.
 Operators must immediately report any unsafe vehicle lift conditions to their
supervisor. The supervisor is then responsible for ensuring the necessary
arrangements are made for repair.
 Only authorized personnel shall perform repairs and adjustments.
 All replacement parts shall be the same design as the original or an equivalent
design as designated by the manufacturer.
Monthly Inspection (Vehicle Lifts) – (See Appendix A & B)
 A documented monthly inspection of all vehicle lifts shall be performed. These
inspections must be performed by a designated person. The designated
person must be a trained vehicle lift operator and have gone through monthly
vehicle lift inspection training.
 All vehicle lifts will have monthly inspections completed by the designated
person.
 Vehicle lifts located within the town’s locations must have monthly inspections
completed by either a designated person or a third party
#Main_Table_of_Contents
368
Golden Health & Safety Program
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
Annual Inspection (Vehicle Lifts)
 A documented annual inspection of all vehicle lifts shall be performed by a third
party.
 Vehicle lift annual inspections will be scheduled through the Operations
Department.
 All vehicle lifts shall be labeled or marked to show date of last annual
inspection. This will be confirmed by the operations manager or his designate.
If any unsafe conditions exist, the equipment shall be removed from service. In order
to remove a vehicle lift from service it shall be locked out and tagged out to prevent
use.
Prior to initial use, all new, altered, modified or repaired vehicle lifts shall have the
following testing performed by the installation company or third party:





Raising and lowering
Operation of synchronized lifting or lowering
Measure of carriage movement
Limit switches, locking and safety devices
Functioning of power unit
21.10 Maintenance
Preventive maintenance shall be performed as prescribed by the manufacturer as
detailed in the owner's manual.
21.11 Recordkeeping
Each department is responsible for maintaining the following records in order to
meet the requirements of this program:
 A listing of all vehicle lifts.
 Record of training which includes: (Use Appendix C or equivalent)
o Name of trainer.
o Name of operator.
o Date of training (classroom, hands-on training, and hands-on evaluation).
 Monthly inspections, annual inspections and repair records according to the
frequencies listed below.
Operations is responsible for maintaining the following records in order to meet the
requirements of this program:

Copies of all monthly inspection records for one year after completion.

Copies of annual inspection records for at least four years.

Copies of repair records for the life of the equipment.

Copies of load test results for the life of the equipment.
369
Golden Health & Safety Program
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
The OHS committee is responsible for reviewing the following records in order to
meet the requirements of this program:

The Town of Golden will retain training records for training they have provided
indefinitely.
21.12 Contractors
Contractors are required to follow all applicable Worksafebc regulations and
manufacturer’s instructions and are not permitted to use any crane, hoist or sling
owned by the Town unless trained to do so.
21.13 Appendix A - Pre-Use Vehicle Lift Inspection Guidelines
Item (Vehicle Lift)
Y
e
s
Load rating marked on the vehicle lift.
N
o
N
/
A
There is smooth movement for all lifts.
Unit is ALI/ETL certified. Does the vehicle lift have
an appropriate label.
All controller functions labeled and legible.
All operational controls and functional operating
mechanisms working properly, properly adjusted
and no unusual sounds.
Upper limit switch operating properly.
Excessive wear of components on any functional
operating mechanisms.
Deterioration or leakage in lines, tanks, valves,
drains pumps, and other parts of the air or
hydraulic system.
Excessive dirt, grease, or foreign matter.
Deformation and/or cracking of the components in
the vehicle lift.
Safety locks on vehicle lift that automatically
closes.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
370
Golden Health & Safety Program
21.14 Appendix B - Monthly Vehicle Lift Inspection
Make:
Model:
Serial:
Needs
Repaired/
Inspection / Service
Ok
Repair
Replaced
Item
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
Comments / Date
Repaired or Replaced
15 minute leak test
(vehicle elevated)
HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM
CAPACITY
lbs
Test Function:
Oil Level & Inspect for
Leaks:
Valves:
Hoses:
CABLES, CHAINS, VBELTS, SPINDLES
Check for Excess Play:
Amount of Wear:
Cables Lubricated:
Pulleys Greased:
PULLEYS, PINS &
SPROCKETS
Condition:
COLUMNS, POSTS
Rust / Damage / Wear:
Alignment:
Rubbing Blocks or Guide
Rollers:
ROLLING BRIDGE,
WHEEL FREE
CAPACITY
Leak Test:lbs
Locks:
Rollers or Slides:
GENERAL
Decking & Covers
Secured:
Anchor Bolts & Other
Fasteners:
Swing Arm Restraints,
Telescoping
Stops:
Wheel
Chocks:
Runway Stops:
Drive-up Ramps:
Test Lift Locks:
Inspect / Test Other
Safety Features:
ELECTRICAL
Function of Switches:
Limit Switch:
Condition of Terminals:
OTHER
Inspected by:_________________________________
Date Completed:_______________________________
#Main_Table_of_Contents
371
Golden Health & Safety Program
21.15
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
Appendix C - Vehicle lift Training Certification Form
Name of Trainer (print)
(Sign):
Name (Print)
Date of
classroom
training
Date of
hands- on
training
Date of
Evaluation (if
required)
Signature
#Main_Table_of_Contents
372
Golden Health & Safety Program
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
21.16 Appendix D - Safe Work Practices for Vehicle Lifts
1. For specification information about the lift, always refer to the lift manufacturer's
manual.
2. Inspect your lift daily. Never operate lift if it malfunctions or if it has broken or
damaged parts. Repairs should be made with original equipment parts.
3. Operating controls are designed to close when released. Do not block open
or override them.
4. Never overload your lift. Manufacturers rated capacity is shown on nameplate
affixed to the lift.
5. Positioning of the vehicle and operation of the lift should be done only by trained
and authorized personnel.
6. Never raise vehicle with anyone inside it. Customers or bystanders should not be in
the lift. During operation.
7. Always keep lift area free of obstructions, grease, o i l , trash and other debris.
8. Before driving vehicle over lift, position arms and supports to provide unobstructed
clearance. Do not hit or run over the lift arms, adapters, or axle supports. This
could damage the lift or vehicle.
9. Load vehicle on lift carefully. Positioning lift supports to contact at the
vehicle manufacturers recommended lifting points. Raise lift until supports
contact the vehicle.
10. Check supports for secure contact with vehicle. Raise lifts to the desired
working heights. CAUTION: if you are working under the vehicle, lifts shall be
raised high enough for locking device to be engaged.
11. Note that with some vehicles, the removal (or installation) of components may
cause a critical shift in the centre of gravity and results in raised vehicle
instability.
12. Refer to the vehicle manufacturer's service manual for recommended
procedures when vehicle components are removed.
13. Before lowering lift, be sure tool trays, stands, etc. are removed from under the
vehicle. Release locking devices before attempting to lower lift.
14. Before removing vehicle from lift area, position lift arms and supports to
provide and unobstructed exit (refer back to No. 7).
#Main_Table_of_Contents
373
Golden Health & Safety Program
21.17
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
Appendix E - Vehicle Lift Operator Evaluation Form
Trainee Name:
Work Unit:
Evaluator Name:
Department:
Lift location:
Date:
NOTE: Operators must be evaluated on each type of Vehicle Lift.
Step
Evaluation
N/A Pass Fail
1. Pre-use
Did operator utilize appendix A of this document
equipment
(Pre-Use Vehicle Lift Inspection Guidelines)?
inspection
If not, was the operator able to explain all of the
items they were looking for?
Was the owner’s manual referenced for any
additional items to be checked?
2. Load
Was the weight of the load identified as not to exceed
inspection
the rated capacity?
Was load properly secured, balanced and stable?
3. Move plan
Was a destination identified?
4. Control
operation
Was operator familiar with all controls?
Was lift speed and control satisfactory? (no sudden
stops or acceleration)
5. Worksite
Inspection
Was operator aware of activities in the vicinity
including personnel and equipment?
6. Post move
Was vehicle lift properly stowed? (Located in area
where contact with other equipment is minimized )
Were attachments properly stored? (not subject to
damage, moisture, corrosives, extreme temp.)
7. Comments Must be included for all “Failed” tasks. If task is failed the evaluator must
explain what was done incorrectly and have the trainee repeat the task
until it is completed correctly.
Trainee Signature:
Evaluator Signature:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
374
Golden Health & Safety Program
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
21.18 Appendix F - Instructions for Conducting Vehicle Lift Operator Evaluations
(Note: The evaluation can be done in-house using an experienced and competent
employee or an outside vendor/safety consultant may be used.)
1. Pre-Requisites:
a. Completed the classroom portion of a vehicle lift training class.
b. Review and become familiar with the Town of Golden’s Vehicle Lift written
program.
c. Be experienced with the equipment you will be training on.
d. Review owner’s manual.
2. Make sure the equipment is in safe condition.
3. Make sure the location is safe.
4. Have operator perform each item on the Vehicle Lift Operator Evaluation Form.
(Appendix E)
5. Assess the operator’s performance. (Appendix E)
6. Explain any “failed” tasks and have operator repeat task.
7. Sign form.
8. File form with designated person. (Supervisor, Operations Manager, OHS
committee representative, etc.)
21.19 Safe Work Procedures for PKS Vehicle Lift
21.20 Scope
This document outlines the safe work procedure for the PKS Electro-Hydraulic
Mobile/Portable Lift (Vehicle Lift) located at the operations work shop.
21.21 Authorization
The operations manager or his designate will ensure that the vehicle lifts are serviced,
maintained and operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Only qualified
workers will use the vehicle. Qualified workers are ones who have received hands-on
training, classroom instruction and hands on evaluation by a competent person.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
375
Golden Health & Safety Program
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
21.22 Hazards
Operating the vehicle lifts has risks associated with their use. Operators must be cognizant
of these hazards which include:
 Fatalities or serious injuries can occur if vehicle lifts are not inspected, maintained
and properly used.
 Fatalities or serious injuries may occur when workers are struck by a vehicle that
has fallen off the lift.
 Moving vehicles with other workers in the vicinity.
 Getting caught in moving parts.
 Moving a vehicle through a work area that is untidy.
 Violating a safety rule in operation and/or lack of proper maintenance.
 Exceeding the safe lifting limit of the lift.
 Operating a lift that is damaged.
21.23 Personal Protective Equipment (ppe)
When using the vehicle lift, the following ppe is required:
 Safety toed footwear
 Safety glasses
 Face shield (optional)
 Chemical resistant gloves
21.24 Emergency Requirements
If a worker is alone and will be using the bridge crane, then notification to a designated
person prior to and after completion of the crane use is required to comply with the working
alone (or in isolation) regulations. Emergency eye wash, spill clean-up kit and fire
extinguishers will be located in an easily accessible location near the active crane area. All
staff will be aware of these locations.
21.25 Safe Work Procedures
Pre Operation Checklist
Trained operator: The operator must be fully trained and qualified to safely and
effectively operate this equipment of the specific make and
Absence of obstructions: The total work area must be free of any and all
obstructions and be generally clean (free of oil and debris
Visual inspections: Thoroughly inspect the unit noting any problem areas. Inspect
the floor and the anchoring fasteners, as well report any questionable items.
No load performance checks: All mechanical safeties must operate properly and
consistently with no external fluid leaks; no bleed downs; effortless and
simultaneous movement; level lifting; controls function properly; all safety
mechanisms fully functional
376
Golden Health & Safety Program
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
Previous day’s operation report: Verify with the supervisor that there were no
problems experienced the previous day. If there were any problems, verify that all
necessary repairs have been completed.
21.26 Lift Operation Procedure
Operation of the lift:
1. Perform pre-operation check list item by item
2. Make sure that the floor is strong enough to support the lift before operating. Do not
use the lift on asphalt surfaces, as the lift will sink if the vehicle is on the lift for any
extended period of time.
3. Ensure that the surface of the floor is relatively flat. If there is a slope of more than
3 degrees do not operate the lift.
4. Make certain that you have adequate headroom to raise the car without the top of
the car coming in contact with any obstruction.
5. Drive the vehicle to the working spot.
6. Push the lift c/w appropriate adaptor under each lifting point. Be sure adaptors are
matching lifting points.
7. Connect the cables from the slave columns to the main column control box and
check to make sure that the rear right column is connected to the rear right outlet
and so on for each column.
8. Connect the main column power.
9. WARNING! The network system can be used only with cable configuration or by
wireless transmitters Do Not connect both.
5 step system ID configuration.
Step 1: Please do check the power is switched “ON” (by releasing the E-STOP
button)
Step 2: Hold the selector switch to “SINGLE” (and while still holding), switch the
power “OFF”. The fault red light will appear. Then release the selector switch to
“ALL”.
Step 3: Use the "UP" Button to increase ID number or use the "DOWN" Button
to decrease the ID number. The Green Power Light will flash when
corresponding to the number of the ID. One short flash indicates ID 1, while two
short flashes indicate ID 2. Once desired, ID's are accomplished.
Step 4: Select the network color that you like to use by pressing and holding the
Green "PARK" Button.
Step 5: Switch the power "ON". Unit will display ID confirmation by flashing
Green Power Light. Count number of flashes to confirm the ID of the controller
and network color.
10. Ensure unit is completely lowered. Caution: Avoid sudden starts and stops
during loading and unloading of vehicles.
Raising the lift:
11. To raise ALL columns connected to the Lift Network press the Up Button on the
control box until you have reached desired height.
377
Golden Health & Safety Program
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
12. Depress “Park” button to lower the unit onto the mechanical safeties.
13. To raise a SINGLE column go to that column and select and hold the Single/Pair/All
switch to the left in the “SINGLE” position and press the Up Button until you have
reached desired height.
14. To raise in a PAIR of lifting columns go to that pair of columns and select and hold
the Single/Pair/All switch to the right in the “PAIR” position and press the Up Button
until you have reached the desired height of that axle.
Lowering the lift:
15. To lower ALL columns connected to the Lift Network press the Down Button until
you have reached desired height.
16. To lower a SINGLE column go to that column and select and hold the
Single/Pair/All switch to the left in the “SINGLE” position and press the Down
Button until you have reached desired height.
17. To raise in a PAIR of lifting columns go to that pair of columns and select and hold
the Single/Pair/All switch to the right in the “PAIR” position and press the Down
Button until you have reached the desired height of that axle.
Note: When you have reached close to floor level with the forks and the lift "Faults
out”, go around to each lift and SINGLE + DOWN to ensure every post is in the fully
down position. Pull lifts away.
18. Inspect the lifting area to ensure that all personnel and debris have been cleared
from the lifting area, and when it is safe, move the vehicle out of the shop.
Emergency Stop:
19. The Emergency Stop can be pressed at any column to immediately stop the lift in
the event that someone needed to halt operation.
Safety Instructions
1. Read all instructions prior to use.
2. Inspect lift daily. Do not operate if it malfunctions or problems have been
encountered.
3. Never attempt to overload the lift. The manufacturer's rated capacity is shown on the
identification label on the power side column. Do not override the operating controls
or the warranty will be void.
4. Only trained and authorized personnel should operate the lift. Do not allow
customers or bystanders to operate the lift or be in the lift area.
5. Position the lift support forks to contact the vehicle tires. Raise the lift until the forks
contact the tires. Check forks for secure contact with the vehicle tires, then raise the
lift to the desired working height.
6. Always use all 4 posts to raise and support vehicle.
378
Golden Health & Safety Program
Vehicle Lift Safety Program
7. Note that the removal or installation of some vehicle parts may cause a critical load
shift in the center of gravity and may cause the vehicle to become unstable. Refer
to the vehicle manufacturer's service manual for recommended procedures.
8. Always keep the lift area free of obstructions and debris. Grease and oil spills
should always be cleaned up immediately.
9. Never raise vehicle with passengers inside.
10. Before lowering check area for any obstructions.
11. Before driving vehicle between the posts, position the lift forks to allow vehicle to
freely enter lifting area. Do not hit or run over forks as this could damage the lift
and/or the vehicle.
12. To maintain proper synchronization, lift must be lowered to the ground and powered
off when doing 3 or more subsequent lifts.
13. Before removing the vehicle from the lift area, position the lift forks to allow vehicle
to freely leave lifting area. Do not hit or run over forks as this could damage the lift
and/or the vehicle.
14. Care must be taken as burns can occur from touching hot parts.
15. Do not operate equipment with a damaged cord or if the equipment has been
dropped or damaged until a qualified technician has examined it.
16. Do not let cords hang over tables, benches or counters or come in contact with hot
manifolds or moving fan blades.
17. If an extension cord is necessary, a cord with a current rating greater than that of
the equipment should be used. Cords rated for less current than the equipment may
overheat. Care should be taken to arrange the cord so that it will not be tripped over
or pulled.
18. Always unplug the equipment from electrical outlet when not in use. Never use the
cord to pull the plug from the outlet. Grasp plug and pull to disconnect.
19. Let equipment cool completely before pulling away. Loop cord loosely around
equipment when storing.
20. To reduce the risk of fire, do not operate equipment in the vicinity of open containers
of flammable liquids (gasoline).
21. Adequate local exhaust ventilation should be provided when working on operating
internal combustion engines.
22. Keep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all parts of body way from moving parts.
23. To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use on wet surfaces or expose to rain.
24. Use only manufacturer's recommended attachments.
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
379
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
22. BRIDGE CRANE HOIST SLING PROGRAM
22.1
Introduction ................................................................................................... 383
22.2 Purpose ......................................................................................................... 383
22.3 Scope & Applicability ..................................................................................... 383
22.4 References .................................................................................................... 384
22.5 Responsibilities .............................................................................................. 384
22.6 Definitions ...................................................................................................... 385
22.7 General Requirments for Cranes, Hoists and Slings .................................... 387
22.8
Training ......................................................................................................... 387
22.9 Inspections for Cranes, Hoists and Slings .................................................... 388
22.10 Maintenance .................................................................................................. 390
22.11 Recordkeeping .............................................................................................. 390
22.12 Contractors .................................................................................................... 391
22.13 Appendix A – Pre-Use Crane, Hoist and Sling Inspection Guidelines .......... 391
22.14 Appendix B – Crane & Hoist Monthly Inspection Checklist ........................... 393
22.15 Appendix C – Examples of Cranes and Hoists ............................................. 395
22.16 Appendix D – Examples of Slings ................................................................. 398
22.17 Appendix E – Crane and Hoist Training Certification Form .......................... 399
22.18 Appendix F – Safe Work Practices of Cranes, Hoists and Slings ................. 400
381
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
22.19 Engaging the Load ........................................................................................ 400
22.20 Moving the Load ............................................................................................ 401
22.21 Placing the Load ............................................................................................ 402
22.22 Slings ............................................................................................................. 402
22.23 Appendix G – Bridge Crane Operator Evaluation Form ................................ 403
22.24 Appendix H–Instructions for Bridge Crane Operator Evaluations ................. 405
22.25 Safe Work Procedures for Bridge Crane ....................................................... 405
22.26 Scope ............................................................................................................. 405
22.27 Authorization .................................................................................................. 405
22.28 Hazards ......................................................................................................... 406
22.29 Personal Protective Equipment (ppe) ............................................................ 406
22.30 Safe Work Procedures .................................................................................. 406
382
Golden Health & Safety Program
22.1
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
Introduction
Cranes, hoists and slings pose a serious safety hazard if not used properly. It is the
policy of the Town of Golden to ensure employees are trained on the hazards of using
cranes, hoists and slings and also to ensure that such equipment is safely maintained.
22.2
Purpose

This program has been established to:


Ensure the safe use of cranes, hoists and slings.
Ensure that work units understand and comply with safety standards related to
cranes, hoists and slings.
Assign responsibilities to personnel which are necessary for successful
implementation of this program.

22.3
Scope & Applicability
This program applies to all employees at all Town of Golden locations.
This program covers the following cranes and hoists that may be used by our
employees: overhead and gantry cranes, semi-gantry cranes, cantilever gantry cranes,
wall cranes, monorail cranes, bridge cranes, single girder cranes, overhead hoists, and
other hoists and cranes having the same fundamental characteristics. (See Appendix C
for examples)
This program does not cover mobile cranes (wheel-mounted, rough-terrain, all-terrain,
commercial truck-mounted, and boom truck cranes), engine hoists or winches. (See
Appendix C for examples)
The program covers the following types of slings used by the Town of Golden
employees: alloy steel chain, wire rope, metal mesh, natural and synthetic fiber rope,
and synthetic webbing. (See Appendix D for examples)
#Main_Table_of_Contents
383
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
22.4 References
(The following have been used as references in the development of this program)







22.5
CAS Standard B167-96 Safety Standard for Maintenance and Inspection of
Overhead Cranes, Gantry Cranes, Monorails, Hoists and Trolley’s
ANSI/ASME B30.9-1990 Slings
ANSI/ASME B30.10 - Hooks
ANSI/ASME B30.11 – Monorails and Underhung Cranes
ANSI/ASME B30.16 – Overhead Hoists (Underhung)
ANSI/ASME B30.17 – Overhead and Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge, Single
Girder, Underhung Hoist)
HMI (Hoist Manufacturers Institute) – Manually Lever Operated Hoist Inspection
and Hoist Maintenance Personnel Manual
Responsibilities
2.1 Department Managers
 Ensure that responsibilities assigned within this program are carried out within
their administrative work unit.
 Designate individuals responsible for the implementation of this program within
their work unit.
 Actively support this program as part of the work unit’s overall safety effort.
Ensure adequate funding is available to support this program.
2.2 Health and Safety Committee
 Assist work units in implementing the provisions of this program. Periodically
review and update this written program.
 Periodically evaluate the overall effectiveness of this program.
 Assess the applicability of this program to activities conducted within each work
unit.
 Confirm implementation of this program within the towns depts. Be
knowledgeable of components of program and ensure program
compliance.
 Assist in the investigation of serious accidents related to cranes, etc. Actively
support this program as part of the Town’s overall safety effort.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
384
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
2.3 Supervisors
 Be thoroughly informed of the contents of this program and its application to their
areas of responsibility and authority.
 Ensure employees comply with all provisions of this program.
 Ensure employees receive training appropriate to their assigned tasks and
maintain documentation of such training.
 Ensure employees are provided with and use appropriate protective
equipment.
 Take prompt corrective action when unsafe conditions or practices are
observed.
 Investigate injuries and incidents within their work unit related to crane, hoist and
sling usage.
2.4 Employees
 Follow the work practices described in this program, including the use of
appropriate protective equipment.
 Attend all training required by this program.
 Immediately report any unsafe conditions or concerns related to cranes, hoists
or slings to their supervisor.
22.6
Definitions
Authorized Person (Repair): Someone with training and experience
pertaining to crane and hoist repair. There are specific safety
considerations that are unique to cranes and hoists, thus the person
must have training and experience in crane and hoist repair.
Bridge: means that part of a crane consisting of girders, trucks, end ties,
foot walks, and drive mechanism which carries the trolley or trolleys.
Bridge Crane: A load lifting system consisting of a hoist which moves
laterally on a beam, girder, or bridge which in turn moves longitudinally on
a runway made of beams and rails. Loads can be moved to any point
within a rectangle formed by the bridge span and runway length.
Bumper: a device for reducing impact when a moving crane or trolley
reaches the end of its permitted travel, or when two moving cranes or
trolleys come into contact. This device may be attached to the bridge,
trolley, or runway stop.
Competent Trainer: An employee who has demonstrated familiarity with the
type of crane/hoist in their work unit. A contractor or equipment vendor who
has experience training crane/hoist operation and is familiar with the
equipment is also permitted to be a Competent Trainer.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
385
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
Competent Evaluator: An employee in the department/work unit who is
experienced and competent with the crane. An employee must be familiar
with the equipment and its safe operation. In order to be considered
competent in regards to conducting the evaluation portion of the crane
training, an employee must have successfully completed the classroom
portion of crane/hoist training. This employee could be but is not limited to
a certified operator, supervisor/manager or safety committee member.
Crane: is a machine for lifting and lowering a load and moving it
horizontally, with the hoisting mechanism an integral part of the machine.
Cranes can be driven manually or by power.
Drum: the cylindrical member around which rope is wound for lifting or
lowering the load.
Designated Person (monthly inspections): means selected or assigned by the
employer or the employer’s representative as being qualified to perform specific
duties.
End Truck: an assembly consisting of the frame and wheels which
support the crane girder(s) and allow movement along the runway.
Floor operated crane: crane controlled by an operator on the floor or an
independent platform using a pendant or non-conductive rope.
Gantry crane: A crane that has a hoist in a trolley which runs horizontally
along gantry rails, usually fitted underneath a beam spanning between
uprights which themselves have wheels so that the whole crane can move
at right angles to the direction of the gantry rails.
Hoist: a suspended machinery unit that is used for lifting or lowering a freely
suspended (unguided) load.
Limit Device: a device that is operated by some part or motion of a powerdriven hoist to limit motion.
Monorail: A trolley suspension crane hoist, whose trolley is suspended
from a single rail. This type of crane hoist is used to move a load
horizontally.
Overhead crane: a crane with a movable bridge carrying a movable or
fixed hoisting mechanism and traveling on an overhead fixed runway
structure.
Reeving: a system in which a rope or chain travels around drums,
sheaves, or sprockets.
Rope: refers to wire rope unless otherwise specified.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
386
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
Sheave: a grooved wheel or pulley used with a rope or chain to change
direction and point of application of a pulling force.
Trolley: the unit which travels on the bridge rails and carries the hoisting
mechanism.
Wall mounted jib crane: A crane with a jib and with or without a trolley.
The wall crane is supported from a side wall or columns of a building.
22.7
General Requirements for Cranes, Hoists and Slings
4.1 The work unit must notify the department head and the OHS committee when
a crane or hoist is installed. This is required so that the unit can be added to
the monthly and annual inspection schedule.
4.2 Only trained employees shall operate a crane or hoist. If the need arises to
operate crane or hoists not owned by the Town of Golden, contact the
department head for further guidance.
4.3 Cranes and hoists shall go through a pre-use, monthly and annual inspection.
4.4 Slings shall go through pre-use and annual inspections.
4.5 Any unsafe condition noted during an inspection shall be corrected before the
equipment is used.
4.6 Operators shall comply with the manufacturer's specifications and limitations
applicable to the operation of the equipment.
4.6.1 Where manufacturer's specifications are not available, the
limitations assigned to the equipment shall be based on the
determinations of a qualified engineer competent in this field and such
determinations will be appropriately documented and recorded.
4.7 Operators shall follow safe work practices when operating a cranes, hoists
and slings. (See Appendix F)
22.8
Training
5.1 Training must be completed prior to any use of a crane or hoist. Training of
crane and hoist operators at the Town of Golden is a two-step process for
the majority of cranes/hoists which consists of classroom instruction &
hands-on training.
5.1.1 In additional to the above requirements, a documented operator
evaluation is required for operators of Bridge Cranes. (Appendix G)
5.2 Classroom instruction, hands-on training and operator evaluations can be
conducted by either a competent trainer in the work unit, the equipment
manufacturer, a safety consultant and/or a vendor who specializes in
crane/hoist training.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
387
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
5.2.1 Hands-on training and hands-on evaluation portions of the training can
also be conducted by an employee in the department/work unit who is
experienced and competent with the equipment. This person could be
a trained operator, supervisor/manager, or safety committee member.
5.3 Training must be specific to the type of equipment being used.
5.4 Training shall include the following:
5.4.1 Characteristics of safe crane and hoist operation;
5.4.2 Inspection procedures;
5.4.3 Basic load handling considerations;
5.4.4 Operator responsibilities;
5.4.5 Communication used during crane and hoist operation;
5.4.6 Hands-on equipment training.
5.5 Trainees must successfully complete hands-on training before being allowed
to operate the equipment independently. Trainees will be given adequate
supervision and time to learn basic operating skills.
5.6 Refresher training in relevant topics will be provided to a crane or hoist
operator when any of the following occur:
The operator has been observed to be using the equipment in an unsafe
manner.
The operator has been involved in an accident or a near-miss incident.
The operator is assigned to operate a different type of equipment.
A condition in the workplace changes in a manner that could affect safe
operation of the equipment.
22.9 Inspections for Cranes, Hoists and Slings
Each department is responsible for ensuring inspections are conducted at the
following frequencies:
6.1 Pre-Use Inspection – (See Appendix A)
6.1.1 Prior to use the operator shall visually inspect the crane, hoist and/or
slings for defects.
6.1.2 The pre-use inspection will identify conditions that could affect the safe
use of the equipment.
6.1.3 Operators must immediately report any unsafe crane conditions to their
supervisor. The supervisor is then responsible for ensuring the
necessary arrangements are made for repair.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
388
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
6.1.4 Only authorized personnel shall perform repairs and adjustments.
6.1.4.1 All replacement parts shall be the same design as the original
or an equivalent design as designated by the manufacturer.
6.2 Monthly Inspection (Crane and Hoists) – (See Appendix A & B)
6.2.1 A documented monthly inspection of all cranes and hoists shall be
performed. These inspections must be performed by a designated
person. The designated person must be a trained crane/hoist operator
and have gone through monthly crane/hoist inspection training.
6.2.2 All cranes and hoists will have monthly inspections completed by the
designated person.
6.2.3 Cranes and hoists located within the town’s locations must have
monthly inspections completed by either a designated person or a
third party.
6.3 Annual Inspection (Cranes and Hoists)
6.3.1 A documented annual inspection of all cranes and hoists shall be
performed by a third party.
6.3.2 Crane and hoist annual inspections will be scheduled through the
Operations Department.
6.3.3 All cranes and hoists shall be labeled or marked to show date of last
annual inspection. Labelling needs to be confirmed as being done
annually.
6.4 Annual Inspection (Slings) –
6.4.1 A documented annual inspection of all slings shall be performed by a
designated person or third party who has gone through sling inspection
training.
6.5 If any unsafe conditions exist, the equipment shall be removed from service.
In order to remove a crane or hoist from service it shall be locked out and
tagged out to prevent use.
6.6 Cranes and hoists not in regular use
6.6.1 A unit which has been idle for a period of one month or more shall be
given a monthly inspection before placing in service.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
389
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
6.7 Prior to initial use, all new, altered, modified or repaired cranes and hoists
shall have the following testing performed by the installation company or third
party:
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.7.3
6.7.4
6.7.5
Hoisting and lowering
Trolley travel
Bridge travel
Limit switches, locking and safety devices
Load Tests
6.7.5.1 Shall not be more than 125% of the rated load unless
otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.
22.10 Maintenance
Preventive maintenance shall be performed as prescribed by the manufacturer as
detailed in the owner's manual.
22.11 Recordkeeping
8.1 Each department is responsible for maintaining the following records in order
to meet the requirements of this program:
8.1.1 A listing of all cranes and hoists.
8.1.2 record of training which includes: (Use Appendix E or equivalent)
8.1.2.1 Name of trainer.
8.1.2.2 Name of operator.
8.1.2.2 Date of training (classroom, hands-on training, and hands-on
evaluation).
8.2
8.1.3 Monthly inspections, annual inspections, repair records and load tests
according to the frequencies listed in 8.2 below.
Operations is responsible for maintaining the following records in order to
meet the requirements of this program:
8.2.1 Copies of all monthly inspection records for one year after completion.
8.2.2 Copies of annual inspection records for at least four years.
8.2.3 Copies of repair records for the life of the equipment.
8.2.4 Copies of load test results for the life of the equipment.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
390
Golden Health & Safety Program
8.3
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
The OHS committee is responsible for reviewing the following records in
order to meet the requirements of this program:
8.3.1 The Town of Golden will retain training records for training they
have provided indefinitely.
22.12 Contractors
Contractors are required to follow all applicable Worksafebc regulations and
manufacturer’s instructions. Contractors are not permitted to use any crane, hoist
or sling owned by the Town of Golden unless trained to do so
22.13 Appendix A - Pre-Use Crane, Hoist and Sling Inspection Guidelines
Item (Cranes and Hoists)
Yes
No
N/A
Load rating marked on each side of the crane.
Load rating of the hoist marked on the hoist or its load block
and legible from the ground? (If the crane has more than one
hoisting unit, each hoist shall have its rated load marked on it
or its loading block and this marking shall be clearly legible
from the ground.)
At least 3 inches of overhead clearance and 2 inches laterally
between crane and obstructions.
All controller functions labeled and legible.
All operational controls and functional operating mechanisms
working properly, properly adjusted and no unusual sounds.
Upper limit switch operating properly. It shall be tested with no
load on the hook. Extreme care shall be exercised; the block
shall be "inched" into the limit device or run in at slow speed.
Excessive wear of components on any functional operating
mechanisms.
Deterioration or leakage in lines, tanks, valves, drains pumps,
and other parts of the air or hydraulic system.
Excessive dirt, grease, or foreign matter.
Deformation and/or cracking of the hook, load block, drums
and/or sheaves.
Safety latch on crane/hoist load block that automatically
closes.
391
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
Item (Slings)
Yes No N/A
Chain Slings:
Nicks, cracks, breaks, stretches, distortions, twists, gouges, bends,
heat damage, discoloration, worn or damaged links and components,
Lack of ability of the chain or components to hinge (articulate) freely,
Pitting, corrosion or weld splatter,
Missing or illegible sling identifications,
Other conditions that cause doubt as to the continued safe use of the
sling.
Wire Rope Slings:
Broken wires,
Pitting or corrosion,
Localized wear (shiny worn spots), abrasion or scrapes,
Damage or displacement of end fittings, hooks, rings, links, or collars,
Distortions, kinks, bird caging, crushing, or other evidence of damage
to wire rope structure,
Missing or illegible sling identifications,
Other conditions that cause doubt as to the continued safe use of the
sling.
Synthetic Fiber Rope / Synthetic Webbing Slings:
Melting, charring or burning of any part of the surface,
Snags, punctures, tears, cuts, fraying, broken or worn stitches,
Change in diameter,
Discoloration,
Hard or stiff areas,
Wear or elongation exceeding the amount recommended by the
manufacturer,
Distortion of fittings,
Missing or illegible sling identifications,
Other conditions that cause doubt as to the continued safe use of the
sling.
Metal Mesh Slings:
Broken weld or brazed joints,
Broken wire in any part of the mesh,
Abrasion, corrosion, distortion, pitting, twisting, bending, cracking,
gouging of any component,
Lack of flexibility,
Missing or illegible sling identifications,
Other conditions that cause doubt as to the continued safe use of the
sling.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
392
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
22.14 Appendix B - Crane & Hoist Monthly Inspection Checklist
#
Inspection Item
1
Conduct pre-use inspection of equipment. Does it pass the preuse inspection? (See Appendix A)
2
Any distortion of the drop stop tabs (maximum 1” drop)?
3
Are there worn, cracked, or distorted parts such as pins, bearings,
wheels, shafts, gears, rollers, locking and clamping devices,
bumpers, and stops?
4
Is there excessive wear or improper operation of the brake
system parts, linings, pawls, chain sprockets or ratchets?
5
Any cracked or worn sheaves and drums?
6
Are there loose or missing bolts, nuts, pins or rivets?
7
Are there any signs of pitting or deterioration of controllers, master
switches, contacts, limit switches, and push button stations?
8
Are load, wind, and other indicators properly operating?
9
Is gasoline, diesel, electric, or other power plants performing
properly?
Yes No N/A
10 Are stops provided at the limit of travel of the trolley?
11 Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end
connections?
12 Load chain reeving for compliance with hoist manufacturer’s
recommendation?
Hook
13 Is there any gouges, nicks, weld spatter, corrosion, deformation,
cracks?
14 Has the hook throat opening increased 5%, not to exceed ¼ inch
(6 mm), more than the normal throat opening measured at the
narrowest point?
393
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
15 Is there any bend or twist from the plane of the unbent hook?
Chain
16 Is there excessive drive chain stretch?
17 Test the hoist under load in lifting and lowering directions and
observe the operation of the chain and sprockets. Does the chain
feed smoothly into and away from the sprockets?
18 Does the chain bind, jump, or is noisy? If so, clean chain. If
trouble continues inspect the chain and mating parts for wear,
distortion, or other damage.
19 Slacken the chain and move the adjacent links to one side to
inspect for wear at the contact points. Is wear observed? Is
stretching suspected?
Refer to owner’s manual for any additional inspection items:
Comments:
Crane ID number or identifier: _
Inspector (print):_
Sign:_
Date:_
#Main_Table_of_Contents
394
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
22.15 Appendix C - Examples of Cranes and Hoists
A type of crane where a horizontal member (jib
or boom), supporting a moveable hoist, is fixed
to a wall or to a floor-mounted pillar.
Jib Crane
Wall Crane
A type of crane has a hoist which typically runs
horizontally along rail/s.
Gantry Crane
Semi Gantry Crane
Monorail
Switching Monorail
#Main_Table_of_Contents
395
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
A load lifting system consisting of a hoist which
moves laterally on a beam, girder, or bridge
which in turn moves longitudinally on a runway
made of beams and rails. Loads can be moved
to any point within a rectangle formed by the
bridge span and runway length.
Bridge Crane
Mobile Cranes
ARE NOT COVERED IN THIS PROGRAM
Winches
ARE NOT COVERED IN THIS PROGRAM
Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendations
Electric Chain Hoist
Manually operated hoists
Lever Hoist
Chain Fall Hoist
Come Along Hoist
396
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
Pneumatic Chain Hoist
Electric Wire Rope Hoist
Pneumatic Wire Rope Hoist
Engine Hoists
ARE NOT COVERED IN THIS PROGRAM
Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendations
#Main_Table_of_Contents
397
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
22.16 Appendix D - Examples of Slings
Alloy Steel Chain
Wire Rope
Metal Mesh
Natural and Synthetic Fiber Rope
Synthetic Web
#Main_Table_of_Contents
398
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
22.17 Appendix E - Crane and Hoist Training Certification Form
Name of Trainer (print)
(Sign):
Name (Print)
Date of
classroom
training
Date of
handson
training
Date of
Evaluation (if
required)
Signature
#Main_Table_of_Contents
399
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
22.18 Appendix F - Safe Work Practices of Cranes, Hoists and Slings
Cranes and Hoists
General:

A personal protective equipment (PPE) hazard assessment must be performed
for the task. PPE considerations should include a hardhat, safety glasses and
safety footwear.

Rated load capacities, recommended operating speeds, special hazard warnings
and/or instructions, shall be conspicuously posted on all equipment. Instructions
or warnings shall be visible to operators while they are at their control stations.

Do not exceed the rated load capacity of the crane, hoist, slings, or other
components. (Keep in mind that the hoist may be higher rated that the rail/beam
or vice versa)

Persons operating the crane hoist or sling shall inspect all machinery and
equipment prior to each use to make sure it is in safe operating condition. (See
Appendix A)

Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels, chains, or other
reciprocating, rotating, or other moving parts or equipment shall be guarded if such
parts are exposed to contact by employees, or otherwise create a hazard.

No modifications or additions which affect the capacity or safe operation of the
equipment shall be made without the manufacturer's written approval. If such
modifications or changes are made, the capacity, operation, and maintenance
instruction plates, tags, or decals, shall be changed accordingly. In no case shall
the original safety factor of the equipment be reduced.

Disconnect power to a hoist or crane that is unsafe or in need of repair. Arrange
to have the equipment locked out and tagged out.

Never operate a hoist or crane that in your opinion is UNSAFE TO OPERATE.
22.19 Engaging the Load

The sling or other device shall be properly seated and secured in the base of the
hook.

The load shall not be applied to the point of the hook or the hook latch.

Before moving the load, the operator shall be sure chains and wire rope are not
kinked or twisted and that multiple part chains or ropes are not twisted about
each other.

The rope or chain must be properly seated on the drum, sheaves, or sprockets
before the lift takes place.

Remove slack from the sling, chain, or cable before lifting a load.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
400
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program

The hoist must be centered over the load.

The operator shall not pick up a load in excess of the rated load of the hoist or
crane.

Specific attention should be given to balancing of the load to prevent slipping.
22.20 Moving the Load

The operator shall not engage in any activity that will divert his/her attention from
the task.

The operator shall respond to signals from a designated person only. However,
the operator shall obey a stop signal at all times, no matter who gives it.

The operator shall make sure the load and hoist will clear all obstacles before
moving or rotating the load.

A person shall be designated to observe clearance of the equipment and give timely
warning for all operations where it is difficult for the operator to maintain the desired
clearance by visual means.

The operator shall inch powered hoists and cranes slowly in engagement with a
load, but should avoid unnecessary inching and quick reversals of direction.

A load shall not be lifted more than a few inches until it is well balanced in the
sling or lifting device.

When lifting loads at or near capacity, brake action shall be tested by lifting the
load a few inches off the surface to verify that the brakes are holding.

On rope hoists, the load shall not be lowered below the point where less than two
wraps of rope remain on each anchorage of the hoist drum, unless a lower limit
device is provided. In this case no less than one wrap may remain on each
anchorage of the hoist drum.

Loads shall not be suspended over personnel.

All employees shall be kept clear of loads about to be lifted and of suspended
loads.

Under no circumstances may anyone ride the hook or load.

Directional movement should be made smoothly and deliberately to avoid
swing.

Never pull a hoist by the controller cable.

Contact between trolleys (on two trolley cranes) or between trolleys and stops
should be avoided.

The operator shall not use the upper (or lower, if provided) limit device(s) as a
normal means of stopping the hoist. These are emergency devices only.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
401
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
22.21 Placing the Load

Never leave the controls unattended while a load is suspended. If it becomes
necessary to leave the controls, lower the load to the floor.

The load block should be positioned above head level when the hoist is not in
use.

Care shall be exercised when removing a sling from under a landed and blocked
load.
22.22 Slings

Slings shall be inspected prior to each use to make sure they are in safe
operating condition. (See Appendix A)

Slings that are damaged or defective shall not be used.

Slings shall not be shortened with knots or bolts or other makeshift
devices

Sling legs shall not be loaded in excess of their rated capacities.

Slings used in a basket hitch shall have the loads balanced to prevent
slippage

Slings shall be securely attached to their loads.

Slings shall be padded or protected from sharp edges of their
loads.

Suspended loads shall be kept clear of all obstructions.

Hands and fingers shall not be placed between the sling and its load while the
sling is being tightened around the load.

Shock loading is prohibited (abrupt starting or stopping of the load).

A sling shall not be pulled from under a load when the load is resting on the sling.

Slings shall be properly stored when not in use so that they are not subject to
mechanical damage, moisture, corrosives, extreme temperature or kinking.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
402
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
22.23 Appendix G - Bridge Crane Operator Evaluation Form
Trainee Name:
Work Unit:
Evaluator Name:
Department:
Crane location:
Date:
NOTE: Operators must be evaluated on each type of crane.
Step
1. Pre-use
equipment
inspection
2. Load
inspection
Evaluation
N/A Pass Fail
Did operator utilize appendix A of this document
(Pre-Use Hoist, Crane and Sling Inspection
Guidelines)?
If not, was the operator able to explain all of the
items they were looking for?
Was the owner’s manual referenced for any
additional
items of
to the
be checked?
Was
the weight
load identified as not to exceed
the rated capacity?
Was load properly secured, balanced and stable?
3. Move plan
Was a destination identified?
4. Control
operation
Was operator familiar with all controls?
Was load speed and control satisfactory? (no sudden
stops or acceleration)
5. Worksite
Inspection
Was operator aware of activities in the vicinity
including personnel and equipment?
6. Post move
Was hoist/crane properly stowed? (Hook near bottom
of the hoist)
Were slings properly stored? (not subject to
mechanical damage, moisture, corrosives, extreme
kinking) for all “Failed” tasks. If task is failed the evaluator must
Must beorincluded
7. Comments temp.,
explain what was done incorrectly and have the trainee repeat the task
until it is completed correctly.
Trainee Signature:
Evaluator Signature:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
403
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
22.24 Appendix H - Instructions for Conducting Bridge Crane Operator Evaluations
(Note: The evaluation can be done in-house using an experienced and competent
employee or an outside vendor/safety consultant may be used.)
9.1 Pre-Requisites:
9.1.2 Completed the classroom portion of a crane / hoist training
class.
9.1.3 Review and become familiar with the Town of Golden’s
Crane, Hoist and Sling written program.
9.1.4 Be experienced with the equipment you will be training on.
9.2 Review owner’s manual.
9.3 Make sure the equipment is in safe condition.
9.4 Make sure the location is safe.
9.5 Have operator perform each item on the Bridge Crane Operator
Evaluation Form. (Appendix G)
9.6 Assess the operator’s performance. (Appendix G)
9.7 Explain any “failed” tasks and have operator repeat task.
9.8 Sign form.
9.9 File form with designated person. (Supervisor, work
department manager, OHS committee representative, etc.)
22.25 Safe Work Procedures for Bridge Crane
22.26 Scope
This document outlines the safe work procedure for the Clayton bridge cranes located at the
operations work shop.
22.27 Authorization
The operations manager or his designate will ensure that the bridge cranes are serviced,
maintained and operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Only qualified
workers will use the bridge cranes. Qualified workers are ones who have received hands-on
instruction, classroom training and evaluation by a competent person.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
405
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
22.28 Hazards
Operation of the bridge cranes have risks associated with their use. Operators must be
cognizant of these hazards which include:
 Fatalities or serious injuries can occur if overhead cranes are not inspected,
maintained and properly used.
 Fatalities or serious injuries may occur when workers are struck by a load, or pinched
between the load and another object.
 Inadequate rigging of a load resulting in the load shifting or releasing.
 Moving loads over workers.
 Moving a load over a work area that is full of obstructions.
 Using damaged rigging equipment.
 Violating a safety rule in operation and/or lack of proper maintenance.
 Exceeding the safe lifting limit of the hoist.
 Operating a hoist that is damaged.
 Allowing a load to swing
22.29 Personal Protective Equipment (ppe)
When using the bridge cranes, the following ppe is required:
 Safety toed footwear
 Safety glasses
 Hard hat
 Leather gloves
Emergency Requirements
If a worker is alone and will be using the bridge crane, then notification to a designated
person prior to and after completion of the crane use is required to comply with the working
alone (or in isolation) regulations. Emergency eye wash, spill clean-up kit and fire
extinguishers will be located in an easily accessible location near the active crane area. All
staff will be aware of these locations.
22.30 Safe Work Procedures
Pre Check
Prior to using the bridge cranes a pre-check of the units is required which includes:
1.) Tagged Crane or Hoist; Check that crane or hoist is not tagged with an out-of-order sign.
If the equipment is tagged, do not use and report the situation to your supervisor.
2.) Control Devices; Test that all motions (hoist, trolley, bridge) agree with the control device
markings i.e.: the hoist up (raising) motion agrees with the hoist up marking on the control
pendant.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
406
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
3.) Brakes; Check that all motions do not have excessive drift and that stopping distance is
normal when the motion is powered off.
4.) Hook; Check for damage, cracks, nicks, gouges, deformations of the throat opening,
wear on saddle or load bearing point, and twist. Refer to the manual furnished by the
original equipment manufacturer for acceptable tolerances.
5.) Safety Latch; Check that the latch is on the hook and is operating properly.
6.) Wire Rope; Check for broken wires, broken strands, kinks and any deformation or
damage to the rope structure.
7.) Reeving on Wire Rope Hoists; Check that the wire rope is properly reeved and that rope
parts are not twisted about each other.
8.) Limit Switches; Check that the upper limit device stops the lifting motion of the hoist load
block before striking any part of the hoist or crane.
9.) Oil and Dirt; Check for any sign of oil and excessive dirt on the crane and on the floor
beneath the crane.
10.) Unusual Sounds; Check for any unusual sounds from the crane or hoist mechanism
while operating the crane or hoist.
11.) Warning and Safety Labels; Check that warning and other safety labels are not missing
and are legible.
12.) Housekeeping and Lighting; Check area for accumulation of material to prevent tripping
or slipping. Also check area for poor lighting.
Preparing the Lift
 It is the operator's responsibility to be fully acquainted with the crane before
attempting to operate it. Know the crane's rated capacity, its type of control system,
and the function of all operating controls.
 Verify that all required periodic lubrication and other periodic maintenance have been
accomplished before beginning operating at the start of a shift.
 If any adjustments or repairs are necessary or if any damage is known, or suspected,
the operator must report this to their supervisor or other duly appointed person. The
next operator must also be informed upon changing shifts if the know deficiency has
not been corrected. DO NOT OPERATE until the equipment has been repaired.
 All operating controls shall be tested at the beginning of each shift. If any malfunction
appears, it shall be corrected before actual operations are begun.
 Before operating the crane, make certain that all personnel are clear of the area.
 Evaluate the load. Determine the weight of the object or load prior to a lift to ensure
the lifting equipment operates within its capabilities.
 Balance the load. Estimate the center of gravity or point of balance. Choose the
appropriate lifting device. The lifting device should be positioned immediately above
the determined center of gravity.
 Select only appropriate slings or lifting devices for the task and NEVER exceed the
working load limits.
 Make sure the hoist or crane is directly over the load.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
407
Golden Health & Safety Program

















Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
Use slings of proper reach. Never shorten a line by twisting or knotting.
With chain slings, never use bolts or nuts.
Make sure all personnel are aware of the lift and they stand clear from the load being
lifted.
Make sure a tagline is used to control the load.
Be sure your hand is clear of pinch points.
Watch out for the roll or swing of the load. Anticipate the direction of the swing or roll
and work away from it.
Never place yourself between material, equipment or any stationary object and the
load swing.
Stay away from stacked material that may be knocked over by a swinging load.
Never stand under the load, and keep from under the boom as much as possible.
Look over the location where the load is to be set. Remove unnecessary blocks or
other objects that might fly up if struck by the load.
Take up slack carefully - ensure load is balanced and load holding action is
secure before continuing.
Warn personnel of an approaching load.
Check brake function by tensioning the hoist prior to each lift operation.
Ensure the hook latches are closed and not supporting any parts of the load.
Ensure the load is free to move and will clear all obstructions.
Avoid swinging the load or hook.
Maintain a firm footing or be otherwise secured when operating the hoist.
Moving the Load
 Do not engage in any activity that will divert your attention.
 Do not lift, lower, or transport a load with the crane or hoist until all personnel are
clear of the load and the load’s path.
 Verify that the load, crane and hoist will clear all obstacles before moving or rotating
the load.
 Do not move loads over personnel.
 Slowly inch the hook into engagement with the load to eliminate wire rope slack and
reduce impact loading of the crane and hoist.
 Avoid unnecessary inching and quick reversals of direction.
 Lift the load only a few inches to verify that the hoist braking system is functioning
properly before continuing with the lift.
 Avoid swinging of the load or hoist hook when the bridge trolley or hoist is traveling.
 Avoid sharp contact between trolleys or between trolleys and stops.
 Verbally warn people before starting the bridge travel motion to stay clear of the lift.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
408
Golden Health & Safety Program
Bridge Crane Hoist Sling Program
Parking the Load
 Do not lower a load with the hoist until all personnel are clear of the load and the
load’s path. Verify that the load will clear all obstacles before lowering the load.
 Block loads before landing if slings or other lifting devices must be removed under
the landed load.
 Exercise care when removing a sling from under a landed and blocked load.
 Do not leave a suspended load unattended unless specific precautions to prevent the
load from inadvertent lowering have been instituted and are in place.
 Position the hoist load block and hook above head level storage when the hoist is not
in use.
 When lowering or setting the load, be sure your feet and all other parts of your body
are out from under the load.
 Set the load down easily and slowly so that if it rolls on the blocking, it will be a slow
shift that you can get away from.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
409
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
23. ASBESTOS MANAGEMENT PLAN
23.1
Purpose .......................................................................................................... 413
23.2 Definitions ........................................................................................................ 413
23.3 Reference Materials & Applicable Legislation................................................. 414
23.4 Roles and Responsibilities .............................................................................. 415
23.5 Procedures ...................................................................................................... 418
23.6 Documentation ................................................................................................ 422
23.7 Program Review .............................................................................................. 422
23.8 Appendix A – Exposure Control Plan .............................................................. 423
23.9 Appendix B - Labelling .................................................................................... 429
23.10 Appendix C – Safe Work Procedures ............................................................. 429
411
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
23.1 Purpose
This document describes the Town of Golden’s Asbestos Management Program. This
program outlines the Town’s approach towards assessment and management of the risks of
exposure to asbestos.
The long term goal of this program is to have all asbestos safely removed from the Town of
Golden, while in the interim ensuring that best practices are being followed in order to
minimize employee, student, contractor and visitor exposures, both in day-to-day actions,
and during remediation activities.
23.2 Definitions
Asbestos
Asbestos is a naturally occurring fibrous silicate mineral that can cause serious chronic
health effects. An asbestos fibre measures longer than 5μm, has a diameter of less than
3μm and an aspect ratio of 3:1. Asbestos has been commonly used in construction
materials and other products because of its high heat resistance, strength and durability.
There are six common types of asbestos found in worksites: Chrysotile; Amosite;
Crocidolite; Anthophylite, Tremolite and Actinolite asbestos.
Asbestos Containing Material (ACM)
Any manufactured article or other material, other than vermiculite insulation, that would be
determined to contain at least 0.5% asbestos if tested in accordance with one of the
following methods:
 (i) Asbestos, Chrysotile by XRD, NIOSH Method 9000

(ii) Asbestos (bulk) by PLM, NIOSH Method 9002

(iii) EPA test Method 600/R-93/116 for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Building
Materials

(iv) vermiculite insulation that would be determined to contain any asbestos if tested
in accordance with the EPA method 600/R-04/004 research method for sampling and
analysis of fibrous amphibole in vermiculite attic insulation
Friable Material
Any material that is crumbled or powdered or can be crumbled or powdered by hand
pressure.
Low Risk Work Activity
Work activity in proximity to asbestos-containing material, if at the time the work activity is
being carried out, both of the following apply:
(a) the asbestos-containing material is not being
(i) cut, sanded, drilled, broken, ground down or otherwise fragmented, or
(ii) disturbed such that the asbestos-containing material may release airborne
asbestos fibre;
#Main_Table_of_Contents
413
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
(b) it is not necessary to use personal protective equipment or engineering controls in
respect of that activity to prevent exposure of a worker to airborne asbestos fibre;
Moderate Risk Activity
Work activities other than a high risk work activity, that involve working with or in proximity to
asbestos-containing material if, at the time the work activity is being carried out, one or both
of the following apply:
(a) the asbestos-containing material is being
(i) cut, sanded, drilled, broken, ground down or otherwise fragmented, or
(ii) disturbed such that the asbestos-containing material may release airborne
asbestos fibre;
(b) it is necessary to use personal protective equipment or engineering controls, or
both, in respect of that activity to prevent exposure of a worker to airborne
asbestos fibre;
High Risk Activity
Work activity that involves working with or in proximity to asbestos-containing material if a
high level of control is necessary in respect of that activity to prevent exposure of a worker
to airborne asbestos fibre;
Qualified Individual
A “qualified person" means a person who
(a) has knowledge of the management and control of asbestos hazards through
education and training, and
(b) has experience in the management and control of asbestos hazards.
Notice of Project for Asbestos (NOPA)
A document that must be submitted to WorkSafeBC at least 24 hours before starting any
construction project that consists of the removal, encapsulation, or enclosure of friable
asbestos materials, or the demolition, dismantling or repair of any part of a building or
structure in which materials containing asbestos have been used, or in which asbestos
products have been manufactured.
Hazard
A thing or condition that may expose a person to a risk of injury or occupational disease.
23.3 Reference Materials & Applicable Legislation
WorkSafeBC Worker’s Compensation Act Part 3 Division 3 - General Duties of Employers,
Workers and Others
#Main_Table_of_Contents
414
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
WorkSafeBC Regulation Part 6 – Substance Specific Requirements – Asbestos
Worksafebc Regulation Part 20 – Construction, Excavation and Demolition
WorkSafeBC Publication– Safe Work Practices for Handling Asbestos
23.4 Roles and Responsibilities
Asbestos Management Plan Administrator (Facilities)
The Asbestos Management Plan Administrator is responsible for the development, use and
maintenance of all asbestos related documentation at the Town of Golden. This includes
ensuring that the asbestos containing materials data is updated to include all current
information regarding the areas where ACM exists in all building’s and locations owned or
under the control of the Town along the hazards associated with the asbestos. The Town of
Golden’s Asbestos Management Plan Administrator must have experience working with
Asbestos in various settings within the Town’s jurisdiction. Responsibilities also include:

Scheduling and contracting-out asbestos removal and repair projects,

Coordinating the work of contractor and Town employees for asbestos abatement
projects,

Coordinating all asbestos related work with the Town’s Asbestos Exposure Control
Plan Administrator if these are different,

Inspecting work sites for final condition,

Submitting an annual NOPA to WorkSafeBC for any work involving moderate risk
asbestos work activities where Town employees are involved, and

Maintenance of asbestos related documentation.
Asbestos Exposure Control Plan Administrator
The Asbestos Exposure Control Plan Administrator is responsible for the administration and
periodic review of the Exposure Control Plan (appendix A). The management plan and
exposure control plan administrator can be one and the same person. Specific
responsibilities include:

Attend pre-construction meetings to identify potential sources of adverse impact on
adjacent area occupants and potential problems,

Act as a resource on all areas relating to the Asbestos Exposure Control Plan,

Review work plans and procedures that involve the Town of Golden’s employees
when they conduct moderate risk asbestos abatement and repair projects,
#Main_Table_of_Contents
415
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program

Notify contractors where asbestos containing material that may impact their work
activity is located, so that precautions are administered,

Be involved in a debrief of all asbestos abatement projects,

Review air sampling results for airborne asbestos,

Submit an annual report to the Joint Occupational Health and Safety Committee and
senior management.
Employees
The Town of Golden employees must not carry out any work process or operate any tool,
appliance or equipment if they have any reasonable cause to believe that to do so would
create the potential for exposure to asbestos. Employees must consult with the Asbestos
Management Plan Administrator for any work that could potentially lead to asbestos
exposure. Only trained workers are allowed to work on asbestos containing material and
only if it is classified as moderate risk work.
In all instances of suspected exposure to asbestos, employees must immediately cease
work and report the incident to their supervisor or foreman.
All Town employees must take reasonable care to protect their health and safety and the
health and safety of others who may be affected by their acts or omissions at work.
Employees must ensure that they are aware of, and follow, the established work procedures
in their area and for their tasks. This includes wearing the required protective equipment,
devices or clothing.
Supervisors/Forman
Supervisors are required to ensure the health and safety of all workers under their direct
supervision. This includes providing to the employees the information, instruction, training
and supervision necessary to ensure their health and safety in carrying out their work and to
ensure the health and safety of others at the workplace.
Supervisors are responsible for ensuring that the employees under their supervision are
trained in their work procedures and provided with the appropriate tools and equipment to
ensure that they are not exposed to asbestos over the course of their work. This includes
consulting with the Asbestos Management Plan Administrator and following all guidelines
laid out in section 5 of this document before assigning any work that has the potential to
result in exposure to asbestos. Supervisors assigning any such work are required to review
and understand the Asbestos Exposure Control Plan (appendix A).
If, at any time the supervisor suspects that ACM poses an exposure hazard to their
employees or others they must cease work immediately and consult with the Asbestos
Management Plan Administrator. Work must not recommence until a risk assessment has
been performed and risks of exposure to asbestos have been mitigated.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
416
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
Project Coordinators
Project coordinators are required to:
 Ensure that all contractors are given all relevant information regarding the proximity
to ACM in building’s owned by the Town,

Ensure that all Risk Assessments, Work Procedures, NOPs, sampling results and
other project related documentation is submitted to the Asbestos Management Plan
Administrator and Asbestos Exposure Control Plan Administrator for review,

Organize user information sessions and ensure that area users are briefed on the
impacts to the project area and the associated risks,

Periodically review contractor work areas,

Update the Asbestos Management Plan Administrator, Asbestos Exposure Control
Plan Administrator, and all user groups of any changes to the project.
Note: For expediency, one person can assume the roles of the asbestos management plan
administrator, the asbestos exposure control plan administrator and the project coordinator.
Contractors/Prime Contractors
Only contractors who are experienced and have qualified individuals as defined by
WorkSafeBC will be hired to perform asbestos remediation work at the Town of Golden.
Contractors are responsible for ensuring the safety of their employees. Contractors are
required to consult with their Project Contact regarding the proximity to ACM at the worksite
and the potential for asbestos exposures prior to commencement of any work at Town sites.
If, at any time during their work on Town property, the contractor suspects that ACM poses
an exposure hazard to their employees or others they must cease work immediately and
consult with their Project Contact who will consult with the Asbestos Management Plan
Administrator. Work must not recommence until a risk assessment has been performed and
risks of exposure to asbestos have been mitigated.
Contractors are responsible for submitting a NOPA to WorkSafeBC for any work that
involves renovation or demolition of areas where ACM is present and notifying the Project
Contact. Contractors are responsible for any asbestos waste or waste that is contaminated
with asbestos, including disposable protective clothing and equipment, that is a result of
their work on Town properties.
Occupational Health & Safety Committee

Respond to concerns surrounding asbestos disturbances by visual inspection and
consultation with the Asbestos Management Plan Administrator and Asbestos
Exposure Control Plan Administrator,
#Main_Table_of_Contents
417
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program

When necessary, work with project coordinators to advise area occupants of work
activities and organize information sessions,

When requested, attend planning meetings to advise on controls and identify
potential sources of adverse impact on adjacent area occupants,

Periodically audit the Asbestos Management Program for compliance and
documentation control.
Town of Golden Responsibilities

Provision of resources to ensure that the Asbestos Management Plan is effectively
implemented at the Town of Golden,

The Asbestos Management Plan must be reviewed periodically.
23.5 Procedures
Town of Golden employees and contractors working on Town property have the
responsibility to abide by all of the requirements outlined in this document, safe work
procedures for moderate risk abatement activities and applicable regulations. It is the
responsibility of any person planning to work in a space to determine whether an asbestos
hazard exists prior to the disturbance of any construction materials in buildings constructed
prior to 1990.
Inventory
Surveys of Town properties will be carried out by a consulting company with properly trained
individuals as outlined by WorkSafeBC. These surveys will identify all areas where the
potential for ACM exists and will be used to direct a structured, detailed sampling strategy of
Town buildings to identify the actual locations of ACM.
An extensive, structured and detailed survey of all buildings that were highlighted by the
surveys will take place with sampling being performed by properly trained individuals
following appropriate analytical methods as outlined by WorkSafeBC. Hazard risk
assessments will be created to describe the location and condition of all ACM at the Town of
Golden. This information will be used to create an electronic inventory of asbestos
containing materials at all Town sites which will be maintained in the Operations
Department. It will provide Town employees, students, contractors and other occupants with
the necessary information and procedures to work in areas where ACM exist or are
suspected. The inventory, surveys, risk assessments and remediation work on projects will
be filed separately and remain in the domain of the operations department Procedures for
working with or around ACM will be kept in the asbestos Management Program.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
418
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
Once both surveys have been completed an ACM remediation plan will be developed and
reviewed annually thereafter. This remediation plan will become an appendix to this
Asbestos Management Plan.
Periodic inspections of ACM shall be performed by the Asbestos Exposure Control Plan
Administrator. These inspections are designed to determine whether the condition of the
ACM has changed and whether updating of the applicable risk assessment is necessary.
Risk assessments must be updated by properly trained individuals as outlined by
WorkSafeBC whenever the conditions of the ACM have changed.
In the interim, prior to the creation and full implementation of the Town’s Asbestos
Management Plan, the Asbestos Management Plan Administrator must advise the Project
Coordinator regarding the potential for ACM disturbance on all projects. This includes using
contract environmental consultants to survey project areas for any areas where data
regarding the whereabouts of ACM has not been previously completed.
Identification
All of the materials that are identified by the site surveys as ACM will be entered into the
Asbestos Management Plan. The Town’s Asbestos Management Plan is intended to provide
ACM inventory information to all members of the community regarding ACM in occupied
areas. Service areas, in addition to the information in the Town’s Asbestos Management
Plan, will have appropriate signage to the hazard (see appendix B). Signage needs will be
inspected annually.
In the interim, for any construction, demolition or other tasks where building materials may
be disturbed in areas where there is the potential for ACM to exist, the area is to be
presumed asbestos containing until sampling for asbestos proves otherwise. Service areas
that are known to be asbestos containing will be appropriately identified.
Assessment and Classification
A risk assessment must be conducted on all identified ACM and maintained by the Asbestos
Management Plan Administrator. This data will remain in the domain of the operations
department. Risk assessments must be performed by a qualified individual and must take
into account the condition of the material, its friability, accessibility and likelihood of damage,
or structures where asbestos may be disturbed.
Task specific risk assessments must be performed by a qualified individual, as outlined by
WorkSafeBC, prior to work taking place in any area where ACM exists or is suspected.
Control of Friable Asbestos
Per WorkSafeBC regulation 6.7, all friable ACM must be controlled by removal, enclosure or
encapsulation in order to prevent the release of airborne asbestos fibre. At the Town, all
high risk work with friable asbestos must be performed by contractors who have the
necessary equipment, training and experience for working with asbestos as recognized
by WorkSafeBC. Contractors must follow the guidelines laid out in this document. More
information on controlling exposures to asbestos can be found in the Asbestos Exposure
Control Plan (appendix A).
#Main_Table_of_Contents
419
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
Town employees will not perform any work that has been classified as a High Risk Work
Activity. Employees must be fully trained, as outlined in section 5.8 of this document, and
have all of the necessary equipment before they are able to perform any Low or Moderate
Risk Work Activities.
Work Procedures
Written work procedures must be available for all work that involves handling or use of ACM
in order to prevent, or minimize, the release of airborne asbestos fibers. Written procedures
must provide the employees with task-specific work direction that addresses both the
hazards observed in the risk assessment and the necessary controls outlined in the
Exposure Control Plan (appendix A). These procedures must be in accordance with
procedures acceptable to WorkSafeBC and consider work area containment, control of
release of asbestos fibres, personal protective equipment (PPE), employee
decontamination, the removal of asbestos containing waste, and cleanup.
Prior to any remediation work at the Town of Golden, the contractor must review the
exposure control plan (ECP) and risk assessment. This ECP and risk assessment must be
kept at the worksite for the duration of the remediation work. For activities deemed high risk,
the contractor must acquire the services of a qualified person to perform a risk assessment.
A NOPA must be completed and submitted to WorkSafeBC with a copy to the Asbestos
Exposure Control Plan Administrator for review. A copy of the NOPA MUST be posted at
the remediation site.
All remediation work must be as complete as practicable and shall, as a minimum, extend to
a naturally occurring boundary.
If, during any demolition work at a Town building, if previously unidentified asbestos is
discovered, all work must cease until the appropriate control measures can be implemented.
Prohibitions
1) ACM may not be brought into or used at the Town of Golden.
2) Pressure spraying equipment must not be used to remove asbestos insulation or
other ACM from buildings or structures.
3) Compressed air must not be used to clean up or remove asbestos-containing dust or
debris, nor dry sweeping or dry mopping of asbestos-containing waste.
Substitution
ACM must be substituted for a less hazardous material whenever possible (i.e. asbestos
containing brake shoes). When substitution is not practicable, the Town must document
the reasons why it isn’t practicable. This information will be entered into the Asbestos
Management Plan. Doing this will make this information available to workers and the
Joint Occupational Health and Safety Committee as required by WorkSafeBC. In the
interim, this information shall be maintained by the Asbestos Management Plan
Administrator and made available upon request.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
420
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
Instruction and Training
All employees, as part of their training and orientation, shall be trained on the hazards of
asbestos and the means of identifying ACM at Town sites. As part of the initial orientation,
employees and students receive comprehensive training that outlines both the work that
they may not perform (operation’s work) and the steps to take if they ever encounter a
circumstance where there is the potential for exposure to Asbestos. The use of the
Asbestos Management Plan will be integrated into the initial and ongoing training of Town
employees as it is developed.
Employees who perform work tasks that create a risk of exposure to asbestos (i.e.
operations) must be trained in the following five points:
1) the hazards of asbestos,
2) the means of identifying ACM at Town facilities,
3) the work procedures to be followed,
4) the correct use and decontamination of the required PPE, and operation of the
required engineering controls, and
5) the purpose and significance of health monitoring.
Training records will be maintained in City Hall.
Town employees are not permitted to perform any High Risk Work Activities.
Exposure Monitoring
The contractor (or project coordinator if alternate arrangements are made) must arrange air
sampling for airborne asbestos fibres during any high risk work activities. This sampling
must be performed in occupied areas outside of the containment area (referred to as
ambient sampling) at least daily if there are unprotected workers in the area. Also, sampling
must be performed in the clean room (referred to as clean room sampling); at least daily
during high risk abatement operations and within the containment (referred to as
occupational sampling) to ensure that employees are adequately protected. Air sampling is
also mandatory prior to dismantling a containment used in any high risk work activity
(referred to as clearance sampling) that did not rely on glove bag containments.
Sampling locations and strategies must be included in the contractor work plans and
submitted to the Asbestos Exposure Control Plan Administrator and the Asbestos
Management Plan Administrator for review prior to the commencement of any project that
contains high risk work activities.
All sampling results must be provided to the Asbestos Exposure Control Plan Administrator
and the Asbestos Management Plan Administrator (by way of the Project Coordinator). This
data will be maintained by the Asbestos Management Plan Administrator and entered into
the Asbestos Management Plan, once operational.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
421
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
Clearance sampling reports must be forwarded for review to the Asbestos Management
Plan Administrator and the Exposure Control Plan Administrator by the Project Coordinator
prior to Town employees being permitted to re-occupy the area. In addition, sampling results
must be made available to the contractor’s employees per WorkSafeBC regulations.
Health Monitoring
Health monitoring for asbestos requires supervisors, employees, instructors and students
promptly reporting any suspected exposures or symptoms which can be linked to exposure
to asbestos. These suspected exposures and symptoms shall be reported to First Aid and
the Supervisor, Forman or Manager for further investigation.
Chronic exposure to asbestos may increase the risk of lung cancer, mesothelioma, and
nonmalignant lung and pleural disorders. Shortness of breath is the primary symptom of
health effects due to exposures to asbestos. Other symptoms include a persistent and
productive cough, chest tightness, chest pain, loss of appetite, or a dry, crackling sound in
the lungs while inhaling. Cigarette smoking greatly increases the likelihood of a person
developing lung cancer as the result of asbestos exposure.
Notice of Project for Asbestos
A Notice of Project for Asbestos (NOPA) must be submitted to WorkSafeBC at least 24
hours before starting any project that involves the demolition or renovation of structures
containing ACM. The prime contractor is responsible for submitting and posting the NOPA
when performing these projects on Town property. A copy of the NOPA must be posted at
the worksite and filed with the Town Project Contact, who submits it to the Asbestos
Management Plan Administrator and the Asbestos Exposure Control Plan Administrator for
review. The Asbestos Management Plan Administrator will ensure that the NOPA is
uploaded into the Town’s Asbestos Management Plan for upgrading abatement changes,
once operational.
23.6 Documentation
All documentation that is related to training and instruction must be maintained for a
minimum of 3 years. Additionally, records of corrective actions to control asbestos fibre
release, written work procedures and all written WorkSafeBC notifications must be
maintained for a minimum of 3 years.
The Operations Department must maintain documentation of asbestos-containing materials
inventories and risk assessments, inspections and air monitoring results for a minimum of
10 years.
23.7 Program Review
The Asbestos Management Program must be reviewed periodically for the following:

The capability of the Town to disseminate the program to incoming contractors,
#Main_Table_of_Contents
422
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program

The effectiveness of the program as it applies to ensuring employees and contractors
are not exposed to airborne asbestos fibres, and

Document control.
The annual review will be done in consultation with the Joint Occupational Health and
Safety Committee.
The Exposure Control Plan MUST be reviewed annually.
23.8 Appendix A- Exposure Control Plan
TOWN OF GOLDEN ASBESTOS EXPOSURE CONTROL PLAN
Purpose
This document describes the Town of Golden’s Asbestos Exposure Control Plan. This
exposure control plan describes the methods that will be used to control the release of
asbestos fibres, and thus minimize the potential for exposure to asbestos whenever
asbestos related work is performed at Town sites. This control plan should be used
whenever procedures for work on, or around, ACM is required as indicated in the Asbestos
Management Plan.
Responsibilities
A list of all of the individuals with roles and responsibilities related to work on, or around
ACM is given in the Asbestos Management Plan. The following is a list of the roles and
responsibilities of the individual’s specific to Asbestos Exposure Control.
Supervisors/Forman
Supervisors are required to ensure the health and safety of all workers under their direct
supervision. This includes providing to employees the information, instruction, training and
supervision necessary to ensure their health and safety in carrying out their work and to
ensure the health and safety of others at the workplace.
Supervisors must consult with the Asbestos Management Plan Administrator before
assigning any work that has the potential to result in exposure to asbestos. As indicated in
the Asbestos Management Plan, supervisors are responsible for ensuring that safe work
procedures are being followed and for the creation of task specific Safe Work Procedures
and for having the safe work procedures reviewed by the Asbestos Management Plan
Administrator and the Asbestos Exposure Control Plan Administrator prior to the
commencement of work on, or around ACM.
In addition, if at any time, the supervisor suspects that ACM poses an exposure hazard to
their employees or others they must cease work immediately and consult with the Asbestos
Management Plan Administrator. Work must not recommence until a risk assessment has
been performed and risks of exposure to asbestos have been mitigated.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
423
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
Contractors/Prime Contractors
Contractors are responsible for ensuring the safety of their employees. Contractors are
required to consult with their Project Contact regarding the proximity to ACM at the worksite
and the potential for asbestos exposures prior to commencement of any work at Town sites.
Contractors must submit work procedures to their Project Contact for review by the
Asbestos Management Plan Administrator and the Asbestos Exposure Control Plan
Administrator prior to the commencement of work on, or around ACM. These positions can
be administered by one person.
Contractors are responsible for any asbestos waste or waste that is contaminated with
asbestos, including disposable protective clothing and equipment, that is a result of their
work on Town projects.
If, at any time during their work on Town property, the contractor suspects that ACM poses
a hazard to their employees or others they must cease work immediately and consult with
their Project Contact. Work must not recommence until a risk assessment has been
performed and risks of exposure to asbestos have been mitigated.
Town Employees
Town employees must not carry out any work process or operate any tool, appliance or
equipment if they have any reasonable cause to believe that to do so would create the
potential for exposure to asbestos. Town employees must consult with the Asbestos
Management Plan Administrator for any work that could potentially lead to asbestos
exposure.
In all instances of suspected exposure to asbestos Town employees must cease work and
immediately report the incident to their supervisor and to First Aid.
Asbestos Management Plan Administrator
The Asbestos Management Plan Administrator’s responsibilities, in relation to exposure
control, are:

Coordinate all asbestos related work with the Asbestos Exposure Control Plan
Administrator,

Inspect work sites for final condition, and

Maintain asbestos related labeling and documentation.
Asbestos Exposure Control Plan Administrator
The Exposure Control Plan Administrator is responsible for acting as a resource in the
creation of work procedures for ACM related work projects that involve Town personnel and
for reviewing contractor work plans and procedures for projects on or around ACM. These
responsibilities specifically include:
#Main_Table_of_Contents
424
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program

Attend pre-construction meetings to identify potential sources of adverse impact on
adjacent area occupants and potential problems,

Act as a resource on all areas relating to the Asbestos Exposure Control Plan,

Review work plans and procedures that involve Town employees working on, or in
proximity to asbestos abatement and repair projects,

Review contractor work plans and procedures for work on, or in close proximity to
asbestos abatement and repair projects,

Review air sampling results for airborne asbestos,

Submit an annual report to the Joint Occupational Health & Safety Committees and
Senior Management, and

Annual review of the Asbestos Exposure Control Plan.
Risk Identification
For any construction, demolition or other tasks where building materials may be disturbed in
areas where there is the potential for ACM to exist, the area is to be presumed asbestos
containing until sampling for asbestos proves otherwise. The Asbestos Management Plan
Administrator will ensure that environmental sampling is performed in all of these areas prior
to work commencing.
Areas that are known to be asbestos containing will be marked with the appropriate
signage.
Risk Assessment
Before any work in an area where ACM exists the work activity must be assessed and
classified as a low, moderate or high risk activity. This task-specific hazard assessment will
be completed by a qualified person, hired either by the Asbestos Management Plan
Administrator or the contractor.
Risk Control
Asbestos has been classified as an ALARA substance, for which exposures must be kept as
low as reasonably achievable.
The WorkSafeBC Safe Work Practices for Handling Asbestos booklet and the guideline
G6.8 outlines a variety of appropriate controls to prevent asbestos exposure when working
in areas where ACM exists. The information found in the WorkSafeBC booklet and guideline
should be used as a resource for supervisors when creating additional work procedures for
work on, or around ACM.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
425
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
The following control measures must be used to eliminate or minimize the risk of exposure
to asbestos for employees, students, contractors and visitors. The use of control measures
should be prioritized with Elimination and Substitution being the best control, then
Engineering Controls and Administrative Controls. Personal Protective Equipment should be
used in situations where other controls are not practicable or where the other controls are
not adequate in eliminating concerns of exposure to asbestos.
ACM must be substituted for a less hazardous material whenever possible as outlined in the
Town’s Asbestos Management Program. In addition, ACM may not be brought into or used
at the Town of Golden.
Education and Training
All Town employees, as part of their training and orientation, shall be trained on the hazards
of asbestos and the means of identifying ACM at Town sites. As part of the initial orientation
to the Town of Golden, employees and students receive comprehensive training that
outlines both the work that they may not perform (operations work) and the steps to take if
they ever encounter a circumstance where there is the potential for exposure to Asbestos.
The use of the Asbestos Management Plan will be integrated into the initial and ongoing
training of Town employees as it is developed.
Employees who are in areas or who perform work tasks that create a risk of exposure to
asbestos (i.e. operations) must be trained in the following 5 points:
1) the hazards of asbestos,
2) the means of identifying ACM at the Town of Golden,
3) the work procedures to be followed,
4) the correct use and decontamination of the required PPE, and operation of the
required engineering controls, and
5) the purpose and significance of health monitoring .
Training records must be maintained in City Hall.
Town employees are not permitted to perform any High Risk Work Activities.
Work Procedures
Written work procedures must be available for all work that involves handling or use of ACM
in order to prevent or minimize the release of airborne asbestos fibres. Written procedures
must provide the employees with task-specific work direction that addresses both the
hazards observed in the risk assessment and the necessary controls. These procedures
must be in accordance with procedures acceptable to WorkSafeBC and consider work area
containment, control of release of asbestos fibre, PPE, employee decontamination, and the
removal of asbestos containing waste and cleanup.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
426
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
Work procedures must be submitted to the Asbestos Management Plan Administrator and
Asbestos Exposure Control Plan Administrator for review prior to the commencement of any
work on, or around ACM. One person may assume the responsibilities of both positions.
The following elements must be included in the written work procedures:
Designated Work Areas and Containments
Designated work areas and containments need to be used when the risk assessment
classifies the work as moderate or high risk. It is the responsibility of the contractor who has
been hired to perform the work to identify and mark the boundary of the designated work
area by barricades, fences, or similar means and to install containments and
decontamination areas as required by WorkSafeBC regulation (section 6.13-6.16). In
addition, it is the responsibility of the contractor to inspect and maintain the containment to
WorkSafeBC standards.
Ventilation
Contractors are responsible for ensuring that containments are ventilated, that a negative
pressure atmosphere is maintained and that HEPA filters are used, tested and replaced in
accordance with WorkSafeBC regulations and manufacturer’s instructions.
Other Means of Controlling Exposure to Asbestos
Written work procedures must be created that outline the use of specific control measures
that mitigate the release of asbestos fibres when working on, or around ACM.
The following is a list of several other means of controlling exposure to asbestos (more
information can be found in the WorkSafeBC booklet – Safe Work Practices for Handling
Asbestos and in Guideline G.6.8):

Saturate asbestos-containing materials with water before handling or removing them.
Surfactants must be used with the water to help thoroughly wet ACM.

Use water to continually mist the air near workers who are removing asbestos or
cleaning up waste materials.

Clean all surfaces exposed to asbestos contamination by vacuuming or damp-wiping.

Do not use dry sweeping or compressed air to clean up ACM.

When cleaning up small amounts of ACM, use only vacuum cleaners equipped with a
HEPA-filtered exhaust, or wet-mop or wipe the materials. Large amounts of ACM
inside an asbestos containment can be shoveled into labeled bags once wetted.

Equipment is inspected before being used in the work process.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
427
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program

After removing ACM, wash or vacuum exposed surfaces and treat with a sealant or
glue designed to seal invisible residual fibres to the substrate.

If asbestos is encapsulated, test encapsulated asbestos materials to ensure that the
encapsulant has penetrated the materials and that the encapsulant has not disturbed
the bond between the friable asbestos materials and their supporting surface.
Personal Protective Clothing and Equipment
Personal protective equipment (PPE) must be selected that is appropriate for the level of
risk of the work being performed. The use, care and limitations of PPE must be included in
the written safe work procedures for any work on, or around ACM at Town sites. Single use
respirators must not be used for protection against asbestos; protective clothing must be
resistant to penetration by asbestos; and PPE must be removed, cleaned with damp cloth or
vacuum-cleaner with HEPA-filtered exhaust before leaving the designated work area.
Decontamination of Workers
Contractor procedures must have written decontamination procedures for the provision and
use of hygiene facilities and decontamination procedures whenever they perform moderate
or high risk work with asbestos on Town property.
Waste Handling and Disposal
All asbestos waste and other waste contaminated with asbestos, including disposable
protective clothing and equipment must be placed into sealed containers and labeled as
containing asbestos. This must be performed in the designated work area.
The containers must be cleaned with a damp cloth or vacuum-cleaner with a HEPA-filtered
exhaust prior to removal from the designated work area. Once sealed and cleaned, the
asbestos waste must be disposed of promptly at an authorized landfill.
Health Monitoring
Health monitoring for asbestos requires supervisors, employees, instructors and students
promptly reported to First Aid and their Supervisor for further investigation.
Chronic exposure to asbestos may increase the risk of lung cancer, mesothelioma, and
nonmalignant lung and pleural disorders. Shortness of breath is the primary symptom of
health effects due to exposures to asbestos. Other symptoms include a persistent and
productive cough, chest tightness, chest pain, loss of appetite, or a dry, crackling sound in
the lungs while inhaling. Cigarette smoking greatly increases the likelihood of a person
developing lung cancer as a result of asbestos exposure.
Documentation
All documentation that is related to the training, instruction and written work procedures
must be maintained for a minimum of 3 years. Records of ACM inventories and risk
assessments, inspections and air monitoring results must be maintained for at least 10
years.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
428
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
Document Review
The Town’s Asbestos Exposure Control Plan must be reviewed annually.
23.9 Appendix B - Labelling
Asbestos Labeling for Service Areas
The following label will be permanently affixed to the Entry Point for any service area that
contains ACM that has been assessed as either moderate or high risk. The approximate
dimensions of this label are 9cm x 13cm (4” x6”). For other more public areas, a floor
mapping system will be used.
23.10 Appendix C – Safe Work Procedures
1) Replacing bag filter in HEPA vacuum
2) Clean-up of damaged ACM material
3) Drilling into block walls containing vermiculite insulation
4) Cutting ACM pipe
1) Moderate Risk Safe Work Procedures for: Replacement of Bag Filter in HEPA
Vacuum
When replacing the bag in the HEPA vacuum with a new bag, the following procedures
MUST be used. Replace the bag when it is no more than 1/2 to 2/3rds full.
1. Secure the area with barrier tape and restrict all non-essential staff from entering the
working space behind the barrier. Make sure the area is safe first.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
429
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
2. Place a 5’ x 5’ 6 mil poly (preferably reinforced) on the floor and put the HEPA
vacuum on the poly sheet.
3. Bring in all necessary tools, parts and ppe (replacement bag; 6 mil labelled asbestos
waste bags; duct tape; exacto knife; 6 mil reinforced poly roll; mister bottle with
amended water in it; shop wipes; tyvek suit; rubber laceless boots or booties, nitrile
gloves; ½ mask elastomeric respirator with P100 cartridges, bucket with warm water).
4. Put on tyvek suit, nitrile gloves, laceless rubber boots, and respirator. Make sure all
seams at the glove suit and at the boot suit are taped.
5. Conduct a positive and negative fit check to verify the respirator seal.
6. Wet wipe the exterior of the vacuum including the hose (a precaution in case this was
not performed on the last abatement work). Place the wet wipe in a 6 mil poly
labelled waste bag.
7. Unclip the top portion of the HEPA vacuum and carefully remove the unit and place
on the poly sheet upside down (HEPA filter showing). Wet wipe the interior of the lid
and place the wipe in the waste bag. Place the lid away from the vacuum housing.
8. Remove the retainer clip that holds the bag to the vacuum housing. Wet wipe the clip
and place the clip away from the vacuum housing and dispose of the wipe in the
waste bag.
9. CAREFULLY remove the bag from the holding bracket making sure to prevent any
debris being released from the rubber mouth of the bag (see pictorial). Mist the bag
before removal.
10. Duct tape the rubber mouth and place the bag in a 6 mil waste bag.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
430
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
11. Use shop wipes and wet each with amended water. Wet wipe the whole interior of
the vacuum paying special attention to the connector that the bag inserts into. Place
all used wet wipes into the 6 mil waste bag.
12. Insert a new vacuum bag onto the canister connector making sure that the rubber
mouth is fully inserted into the vacuum connector. The cardboard tab on the filter bag
must be pointing up. Roll out the bag so it surrounds the full perimeter of the inside of
the canister.
13. Place the retainer clip over the connector making sure than it secures both the tab
and the corresponding retainer clip on the canister. Lightly tug on the bag to ensure
this is secure.
14. Replace the HEPA filter lid back onto the canister and lock the lid with the two
holding clamps.
15. Wet wipe the exterior of the vacuum and place the wipes in the waste bag. Remove
the HEPA filter vacuum from the poly sheet. Make sure that there is duct tape sealing
the end of the vacuum hose.
16. Wet wipe the poly sheet, fold it and place it and the wipes in the waste bag.
17. Twist the waste bag opening and duct tape the full length of the twist. Make an
inverted ‘U’ of the taped end and retape the end. Wipe down the outside of the bag
and place it beside the work area.
18. Wipe down the tyvek suit, gloves, boots/booties (if rubber boots only, ensure the
bottom of the boot is cleaned well) and respirator. Place the used wipes into a waste
bag.
19. Remove the duct tape on the seams; remove the gloves by inverting them so the
outside is inside. Dispose in the waste bag.
20. Remove the Tyvek suit and booties, rolling them outside in and dispose in the waste
bag.
21. Remove the respirator and clean the inside with wet wipes. Tape the outside of the
cartridges with duct tape and store or remove the cartridges and dispose of in the
waste bag.
22. Twist the waste bag opening and duct tape the full length of the twist. Make an
inverted ‘U’ of the taped end and retape the end. Wipe down the outside of the bag
and place it beside the work area.
23. Place both bags in a second bag; wipe the outside of the second bag and twist the
open end and tape seal as before.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
431
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
24. Dispose of the material as asbestos waste in accordance with Ministry of
Environment regulations and Regional District landfill criteria.
2) Moderate Risk Safe Work Procedures for: Clean-up of damaged ACM material
Each project will be different in nature but the methods used in this procedure will be
effective in controlling asbestos fibre exposure and further release to the work environment.
The typical abatement projects will be either damaged material that has fallen onto the floor
or structure or damaged ACM material that requires repair or removal.
1. Notify staff in the area of the work activity being performed. Secure the area with
barrier tape or signage (Place barrier tape and/or signage a minimum 15 to 20 feet
from the damaged material) and restrict all non-essential staff from entering the
working space behind the barrier. Make sure the area is safe first.
2. Block off all access doors leading into the space to prevent persons from entering.
3. Close all windows and block off any ventilation vents to prevent drafts in the
contaminated area.
4. Gather all necessary tools, parts and ppe. This includes but is not limited to:
a. replacement vacuum bag;
b. 6 mil labelled asbestos waste bags;
c. duct tape;
d. exacto knife;
e. 6 mil reinforced poly roll;
f. mister bottle with amended water in it;
g. mister bottle with encapsulating solution;
h. shop wipes;
i. wet wipes;
j. tyvek suit;
k. rubber laceless boots (steel toe/steel shank) or booties,
l. nitrile gloves;
m. ½ mask elastomeric respirator with P100 cartridges,
n. HEPA vacuum that is DOP tested;
o. 2 buckets with warm soapy water; and
p. a portable GFCI.
5. Place all the equipment outside of the barrier tape.
6. Put on a hooded tyvek suit (with elasticized wristlets, anklets and hoodie) over street
clothes, laceless rubber boots or booties over work boots; nitrile gloves and a ½
mask elastomeric respirator with P100 cartridges. The mask must be on the inside of
the hood when the hood is placed over the head.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
432
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
7. Duct tape the seams at the glove/tyvek suit and tyvek suit/ boot or bootie interface.
8. Put the respirator on and conduct a positive and negative fit check. The wearer
MUST be clean shaven.
9. Cut a working piece of 6 mil reinforced poly.
10. Mist the surfaces lightly with the amended water solution to minimize asbestos fibre
release before vacuuming commences.
11. Plug in the HEPA vacuum into the portable GFCI and vacuum the surfaces in the
taped off area which includes floor, walls and objects within this space. Mist the
damaged material lightly while HEPA vacuuming.
12. If the material is too large for vacuuming, mist the material lightly until it is saturated
(sufficient to squeeze a couple of drops of water when compressed under hand
pressure scoop it up and dispose of in a 6 mil asbestos waste bag.
13. Wet wipe the same area, using disposable wipes. Wet the towelette using one of the
water buckets. Wipe no more than 1 square meter of space, turning the wipe over
half way through the cleaning. Discard the wipe in a labelled 6 mil poly waste bag. Do
not reuse the wipe by rinsing in the water bucket.
14. For damaged ACM: Complete a clean-up of the surfaces excluding the damaged
ACM.
15. Place a 6 mil poly sheet under the damaged asbestos containing material.
16. Wet mist the surface of the damaged ACM.
17. Spray encapsulant over the surface to seal any residual fibres.
18. Cover with duct tape, aluminum tape, canvas or patching compound.
19. If material is too damaged for repair, wet the material with light misting until the
material is saturated and manually remove and dispose of in a labelled asbestos
waste bag. Use of an exacto knife may aid in making a clean cut between the
damaged material and good material. Wipe the knife after use with a wet wipe.
20. Wet wipe the area where the material was removed followed by HEPA vacuuming.
21. Seal the remaining exposed ends with an encapsulant and cover as described
above.
22. NOTE: Torn clothing must be immediately repaired or replaced.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
433
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
23. Do not use dry sweeping or compressed air to clean up or remove dust or materials
from work surfaces or clothing.
24. During the work, clean up dust and waste (lightly wetted if possible) using a HEPA
vacuum or by wet mopping.
25. Immediately upon finishing the work, complete the following tasks:
a. Wet drop sheets and barriers.
b. Fold them to contain any remaining dust.
c. Bag or place them in a sealable container.
d. Dispose of them as asbestos waste.
26. Before leaving the work area, complete the following tasks:
a. Before taking protective equipment and clothing outside the contaminated
work area to the change area, clean them by damp-wiping or using a HEPA
vacuum. For PPE, this is best done with two persons cleaning each other off.
When the HEPA vacuum is cleaned and removed from the area, duct tape the
hose end.
b. Leave the barrier area to the change area where the buckets of amended
water are. Place all tools in one bucket. Remove booties, tyvek suit and nitrile
gloves turning them inside out and place disposable protective clothing in a
sealable container and dispose of it as asbestos waste. Twist the open end
and duct tape it sealed. Bend the taped end into an inverted ‘U’ and retape the
end closed.
27. To prevent any interference with the work activity, do not allow containers of
asbestos waste to accumulate in the work area.
28. Remove containers from the work area at the end of each work shift, if not more
often, and ensure that the containers remain under effective control if they are stored
at the worksite before being disposed of.
29. Before removing asbestos waste containers from the work area, clean their external
surfaces by wiping with a damp cloth or using a HEPA vacuum. Double-bagging is a
good practice and an industry standard.
30. Remove the respirator and clean the inside of the respirator with wet wipes. Tape the
cartridge face with duct tape, remove the cartridges and dispose as asbestos waste.
31. Wash the hands and face with warm amended water. Dispose of this water outside.
32. Dry all tools from the bucket and dispose of the water outside.
33. Dispose of the asbestos waste bags in accordance with Ministry of Environment
regulations and CRSD waste asbestos landfill rules.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
434
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
34. Notify all personnel of completion of work.
35. Dismantle the respirator and wash in warm soapy water, rinse and air dry. Once dry,
put the mask back to original and store for future use.
3) Moderate Risk Safe Work Procedures for: Drilling into block walls containing
vermiculite insulation
When drilling into block walls containing vermiculite insulation, there are two hazards to
contend with:
1. Actinolite or tremolite asbestos fibres; and
2. respirable silica dust
This procedure will protect workers from both contaminants.
When drilling into block walls workers shall:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
p)
q)
r)
cordon off the area to restrict access to all parties other than operations staff,
ensure the area is safe for the work activity,
ensure that tyvek suits, laceless rubber boots or boots with tyvek booties, nitrile
gloves, 2-6 mil poly asbestos labelled bags, drop sheet, wet wipes, bucket with water,
spray bottle of amended water, spray bottle of encapsulant and duct tape are on site,
operations staff to place drop sheet under location where hole is to be drilled,
2 workers (where possible) will don tyvek suits with elasticized ankle, hand and
hood, laceless rubber boots or boots with tyvek booties and nitrile gloves (tape joints
at suit/glove and suit/booty intersect)
workers will put on a half mask dual cartridge P100 respirator previously fit tested
and perform a positive and negative fit check,
a HEPA vacuum (DOP tested) will be used for capture of material at the drill site,
one worker will drill and the other worker will locate the hose wand as close to the
drilling point as practicable,
once the drilling is complete, the worker with the wand will place the wand near the
hole to remove any loose zonolite from the hole,
spray the hole with encapsulant,
mist the poly drop sheet and vacuum any debris fallen onto the drop sheet,
install the anchor or device,
Vacuum the wall, drop sheet and surfaces and wet wipe,
spray encapsulant or amended water on the drop sheet, fold the drop sheet and
insert into a 6 mil poly bag,
insert the wet wipes in the 6-mil poly bag
vacuum off or wet wipe the ppe and remove suits, gloves and booties turning it inside
itself and insert into the 6-ml poly bag (If multiple holes are drilled, vacuum ppe and
drop sheet and move to next hole if at a different location) and at the end turn them
inside itself and place into 6 mil poly bag,
Tape off the end of the vacuum hose
Wet wipe bag, duct tape the end, gooseneck the taped end and retape it.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
435
Golden Health & Safety Program
s)
t)
Asbestos Management Program
Place into second bag, wet wipe the second bag and duct tape the end as above.
Remove the respirator and duct tape the cartridge face and properly clean and store
the respirator.
If the interior walls are known to be free of Zonolite: Silica is also to be dealt with some
precautions since respirable silica is classed as a carcinogen. Always use a drop sheet and
respirator:
1. Have shaving cream at the drill site. You drill through the shaving cream. The silica
dust is captured in the foam. Wipe clean. Any residual can be vacuumed up with a
HEPA vac.
2. Use of a dust cap. This is a device placed on the drill and the dust is caught in the
cap. Any residual debris should be HEPA vacuumed.
3. Use the HEPA vacuum at the site as noted above to source capture the dust. Any
residual debris should be vacuumed.
4) Moderate Risk Safe Work Procedures for: Cutting ACM pipe
This procedure will minimize worker exposure to asbestos fibre release during repair and
replacement of ACM pipe.
The sequence for this process includes:
1. If the project will affect traffic, ensure proper traffic control is in place
2. Obtain water for clean-up. Have 2-20 litre buckets and a large sprayer of amended
water plus a sprayer for disinfection
3. Shut off the water line and de-energize water line by opening and posting signage
4. Assemble equipment for the repair. Materials will include:
a. Area barricades
b. Disposable asbestos bags and 6 mil poly roll
c. Replacement pipe
d. Tools; snap cutter, sockets
e. Sprayers with amended water and one with bleach solution for disinfection
f. Ladder to access excavation safely
g. Barrier tape
h. Magic markers
5. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) assembled will include:
a. Disposable tyvek suit with hood and elasticized anklets, wristlets and hood,
b. P100 ½ mask elastomeric respirator
c. Hardhat
d. Nitrile gloves and leather gloves
#Main_Table_of_Contents
436
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
e. Eye protection
f. Laceless rubber safety boots
6. Tape the suit at the intersect of the glove/suit and the boot/suit using duct tape
leaving a tab at the end for easier disassembly during decontamination and removal
of suit
7. Tape the suit at the waist with legs tight to the crotch to minimize tearing of fabric, tab
the end of the tape
8. Supervisor or lead will check that all PPE and equipment is on site and that
a. Workers are clear on activities
b. Workers are clean shaven
c. A checklist is useful for this activity
9. Workers will perform a positive and negative fit check on their respirator.
10. Workers shall tape the hood back to keep it out of eyes
11. Respirator straps are to be under the hood
12. Hood will be partially secured under the hardhat
13. Safety glasses are to be used
14. Use hearing protection to keep headgear on
a. A chin strap may be necessary
15. Area will be barricaded with barrier tape on the perimeter of the worksite
16. Assemble the equipment and TEST before starting
17. Wet the pipe using amended water sprayer
18. Make sure there is safe Access and Egress from site by way of a ladder
a. Normal ladder slope is 1:4 while excavation sloping is 3:4. Ladder slope will
be approximately 1:1
19. Keep the area under pipe clear
20. The pipe must stay wet
21. For residual water remove by sump pump
#Main_Table_of_Contents
437
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
22. Mark the area where damaged pipe is to be cut
23. NB. Mark with felt pen NOT hacksaw cut
24. Install the snap cutter
25. Snap cutter is tightened with each cut, wetting the pipe and snap cutter all the time
the cut occurs
26. If possible, remove the section of pipe and bag it in a 6 mil poly bag, twist the end of
the bag, and duct tape the end, gooseneck the end and retape.
27. Wet wipe the bag, place in a second 6 mil poly labelled bag, wipe the bag, tape again
and remove from the excavation.
28. If the pipe is too large, wrap the pipe in 6 mil reinforced poly twice and duct tape the
seams, wet wipe and remove from the excavation if safe to do so
29. If the pipe is too heavy to safely remove, poly wrap as above and place it aside in the
excavation
30. Measure the replacement pipe for the proper length
31. NB. Package ALL waste materials in a 6 mil waste bag
32. Disinfect the new pipe and the seam of the old pipe using a sprayer with the
appropriate ratio of Sodium hypochlorite in water
33. NB. WHMIS requirements are necessary for this product which includes:
a. Labels
b. MSDS
c. Training and education
34. Disinfect the couplings
35. Add the new section of pipe and install to the ACM pipe with the couplings using the
socket wrenches
36. Make sure all waste is in the 6 mil poly bags
37. Back fill by hand around the pipe using shovels
38. ALL tools are to be decontaminated on site outside of the excavation using amended
water sprayers
a. This usually involves TWO separate washings and/or rinsing’s
#Main_Table_of_Contents
438
Golden Health & Safety Program
Asbestos Management Program
39. All tools are decontaminated including the socket wrenches and snap cutter
40. Decontaminate the buckets before leaving site
41. Suits are wiped down, removed and turned inside out
42. Suits are bagged as asbestos waste
43. Gloves are wiped down, removed and turned inside out and bagged as asbestos
waste
44. All waste is double bagged and the bags are wet wiped
45. Boots are decontaminated with the amended water sprayer
46. Respirators are wiped down
a. Two people make this task much easier.
47. Respirator are then rinsed and wiped clean and stored in Ziploc bag
48. Filters are removed and disposed of in 6 mil poly bags
49. Workers will wash their face and hands
50. The barrier tape is removed from the barricades
51. The excavation is filled
52. The bagged waste has been removed and placed in a vehicle for transport to landfill
in accordance with the Ministry of Environment regulations and CRSD landfill rules
53. If the ACM pipe was too large to be safely removed, it must be double wrapped in 6
mil poly, duct taped or tuck taped at the seams, labelled and left on site under the
excavated soil by the existing pipe line
a. Check with the ministry for acceptability
54. Use the barrier tape to mark the burial site if wrapped ACM pipe is left in the
excavation
55. Place the tape approximately 0.3 metres (1 ft.) below surface
#Main_Table_of_Contents
439
Golden Health & Safety Program
Pesticide Use - SWP
24. PESTICIDE USE – SAFE WORK PROCEDURE
24.1
Purpose .......................................................................................................... 443
24.2 Scope .............................................................................................................. 443
24.3 Hazards ........................................................................................................... 443
24.4 Pesticides in Use ............................................................................................. 443
24.5 Risk Assessment ............................................................................................. 444
24.6 Personal Protective Equipment ....................................................................... 444
24.7 Handling .......................................................................................................... 445
24.8
Storage ........................................................................................................... 448
24.9 Spill Cleanup and Disposal ............................................................................. 450
24.10 Planning Emergency Procedures.................................................................... 450
24.11 Records ............................................................................................................ 452
24.12 Guidelines for Spraying in Public Places ........................................................ 452
441
Golden Health & Safety Program
Pesticide Use - SWP
24.1 Purpose
The Town of Golden, as part of their corporate responsibilities undertakes the application of
herbicides and rodenticides within the boundaries of the Town. This document outlines
general requirements and specific safe work practices to ensure the health and safety of
employees and workers who work in or around pesticide use.
These safe work practices are also designed to protect the general public who work or travel
in the vicinity of pesticide applications.
Before a worker handles or applies any pesticide, they must have an up to date pesticide
applicators license. No other worker shall be involved with pesticides.
24.2 Scope
The scope of the safe work procedures is to identify the hazards encountered during
storage, mixing and application of pesticides and to eliminate or control the hazard safely
during the work process and to outline the practices and standards that must be adhered to
while working with pesticides.
24.3 Hazards
Hazards that workers may encounter when storing, mixing and applying pesticides include:
 Inhalation, skin contact and ingestion of the herbicide or rodenticide leading to
possible acute effects,
 Contamination of coveralls and clothing from spillage of diluted herbicide from the
backpack sprayer or malfunction of the spray nozzle onto the clothing of the pesticide
applicator
 Spillage of concentrated herbicide on the pesticide applicator and/or onto the ground
during initial mixing of concentrate from a 10 litre herbicide container to the
measuring cup and/or from the measuring cup to the backpack sprayer
 Use of galvanized spray tanks or mild steel spray tanks with the herbicide resulting in
production of hydrogen gas, a highly flammable gas,
 Potential for heat stress when applying the herbicide and rodenticide during warm
sunny days.
 Contact with vehicle traffic during application activities and,
 Contact with the public or with animals during application activities.
 Ergonomic injury from handling the 10 litre herbicide container or the filled up
backpack
24.4 Pesticides in Use
At present there are three pesticides that are used within the boundaries of the town site;
 Credit 45 (an herbicide with the active ingredient Glyphosate),
 Rozol RTU (a rodenticide with the active ingredient Chlorophacinone, an
anticoagulant), Atlas (a rodenticide with the active ingredient Sulfur).
#Main_Table_of_Contents
443
Golden Health & Safety Program
Pesticide Use - SWP
The town has one licensed pesticide applicator who utilizes these products as required.
Only minimal supplies are retained for each year. These products are classed as slightly
toxic.
All pesticides must have legible labels and Material Safety Data Sheets. These pesticides
must be kept in their own storage container and dispensed in dedicated measuring
containers. At the beginning of the application season, these labels and MSDS’s should be
reviewed prior to use.
24.5 Risk Assessment
Assessing risk
A risk assessment is based on information supplied on the label and MSDS, and involves an
inspection of the actual work location and work practices. In some situations it may be
necessary to obtain specialist advice.
Risk assessments should be reviewed if:
 information on an MSDS or a label changes,
 work practices change,
 a new pesticide is introduced,
 need is indicated by the results of health surveillance, or
 the last assessment was in excess of five years.
Types of risk
Risk assessments should cover risks to:
 users, from the preparation and use of pesticides where the emphasis is on
controlling contact with pesticides;
 others, from spray drift, residues, contamination and disposal;
 persons, property and the environment by accidental events, such as spillage or fire
in storage or transport; and
 it may also be necessary to assess other risks such as those arising from manual
handling and the use of plant and equipment.
24.6 Personal Protective Equipment
Personal protective equipment
Personal protective equipment (PPE) should be used as specified on the product label. PPE
should be used:
 according to instructions on the label
 in an open field situation where engineering controls are not available when mixing,
decanting or spraying
#Main_Table_of_Contents
444
Golden Health & Safety Program
Pesticide Use - SWP
Selection, use and maintenance of personal protective equipment
Employers should ensure that:
 all PPE is appropriate for the task as nominated on the label
 PPE is of the appropriate size and fit for the employee
 PPE is readily available, clean and in fully operational condition
 employees are trained in the use of the PPE, including the selection and
maintenance (and, where appropriate, when to discard disposable PPE)
 any maintenance such as cleaning is carried out according to manufacturers’
instructions
 the likelihood of a secondary injury risk due to wearing PPE, such as skin rash or
heat stress or dehydration caused by unsuitable clothing and hot conditions, is
assessed. A suitable control measure would be avoiding chemical use during the
hottest part of the day.
Eye protection
 When handling containers of pesticide concentrates always wear safety glasses.
 During mixing and pouring of concentrates, splash proof goggles and a face shield
are required.
 During cleanup of spills of concentrates always wear chemical splash proof goggles.
 When rinsing out concentrate containers, always wear chemical splash proof
goggles.
 When rinsing out the backpack sprayer, use safety goggles.
Gloves, aprons and other equipment
 Chemical resistant gloves should always be worn when handling pesticides. Do not
use lined gloves.
 It is recommended that a rubber apron be used when dispensing the herbicide
concentrate.
Respiratory protection
 Respiratory protection is not necessary for any of the existing herbicides and
rodenticides presently in use.
Footwear
 For rodenticide application CSA rated leather footwear with ankle support, steel toe
and shank are required due to the potential for uneven surfaces and risk of abrasion.
 For herbicide application, the use of rubber boots with steel toe and shank is
recommended.
24.7 Handling
Transport
Where practicable, have a commercial transport firm deliver the pesticides to the works yard
for storage. If this is not feasible, vehicles used for pest management activities should be
#Main_Table_of_Contents
445
Golden Health & Safety Program
Pesticide Use - SWP
designed so that the pesticides are separated from the driver and other occupants, and
restrained such as in the back of a pickup truck. The containers should be placed in a spill
proof bin to contain any leakage.
Pest management vehicles
When transporting pesticides:
1. Personal protective equipment (PPE), a change of clothes (in case of contamination),
spill absorbent material, food, drink and medications, should be carried in such a
manner to prevent contact with any pesticide in clean, sealed containers such as the
driver’s cabin.
2. Floors and walls of parts of vehicles carrying pest control equipment and pesticides
should be impervious to pesticides. Restraints and buffers that are not impervious to
pesticides should be readily disposable and replaceable.
3. The internal and external surfaces of the vehicle, and the surfaces of pesticide
containers and spray equipment, should be kept free of pesticide contamination.
4. The vehicle should be kept locked to prevent public access to pesticides or
equipment, and the load should be protected from the weather.
5. Do not accept or load damaged or leaking containers. Secure the load and limit its
movement.
6. Vehicles should be constructed in such a way to contain any leaks or spills.
7. Have contact details available such as the fire department, ambulance and
supervisor.
Mixing
resently only the herbicide requires mixing applications. Ensure that proper PPE is used.
The applicator must wear rubber boots, coveralls, chemical resistant gloves, chemical
splash goggles, face shield and plastic apron when dispensing the concentrate.
 Bring the 10 litre container, measuring cup and backpack sprayer outside of the
storage shed and onto the pavement. Check out the sprayer to ensure all
components are in place and it is functioning properly.
 Have the water hose available at the mixing location.
 Do not eat drink or smoke
 Restrict worker activity to that of the pesticide applicator during mixing. Place
restriction signage at the entry to the mixing.
 Open and remove the backpack lid and place the sprayer on the pavement while
keeping the screen on the opening.
 Add water to the sprayer to an amount up to 3 litres
 Measure out the prescribed amount of concentrate into the measuring cup and pour
into the backpack sprayer. If windy, stay upwind while pouring and mixing.
 Triple rinse the measuring cup at a minimum and dispense this into the backpack
sprayer.
 Fill the backpack sprayer with water up to the prescribed volume and replace the lid.
Agitate the sprayer to effect adequate mixing and to check for leaks.
 Place the lid on the herbicide container and return to its proper storage location
ensuring that any spill on the exterior has been rinsed off onto the pavement.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
446
Golden Health & Safety Program





Pesticide Use - SWP
Load up the backpack sprayer onto a spill tray in the designated vehicle and secure.
If any spill occurs, rinse the material off the pavement and onto the perimeter soil
with water.
If contamination occurs on the person, remove coveralls immediately and wash the
affected area with copious amounts of water
Wash the chemical resistant gloves and air dry or dry with disposable towelettes.
Remove the chemical splash goggles, apron and face shield and store in storage
shed.
Application
Application of the herbicide and the rodenticides must be performed with appropriate PPE.
For the herbicide application, the PPE required includes:
 Rubber boots (recommended),
 Chemical resistant gloves,
 Coveralls, and
 Safety glasses
For the application of the rodenticide, the PPE required includes:
 CSA safety toed footwear with ankle support, leather construction, steel toe and
shank,
 Safety glasses,
 Coveralls, and
 Chemical resistant gloves.
Spray drift
To reduce risks from spray drift:
 check wind speed and direction. Spraying should not occur with wind speeds above 8
km/hr.
 ensure the nozzle is appropriately sized to spray a courser droplet which will reduce
spray drift
 where feasible maintain the release height as low as possible.
 routinely check the nozzle for wear and tear to minimize spray pattern alterations.
 DO NOT use your mouth to blow out nozzles to clear them. Always use a non-metal
insert to clean out the nozzle.
Disposal of empty containers
Empty concentrate containers must be rinsed and disposed of or recycled in the manner
recommended on the label. If manually rinsed, they should be triple rinsed.
Triple rinsing
An effective manual rinsing procedure is:
1. On emptying the contents into the backpack sprayer, drain the container for an extra
30 seconds after the flow has reduced to drops.
2. Fill the container with clean water or suitable solvent to about 20– 25 per cent of its
capacity.
3. Replace the cap securely.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
447
Golden Health & Safety Program
Pesticide Use - SWP
4. Shake, rotate, roll and/or invert the container to wash the entire inside with rinse.
5. Remove the cap and add the rinsate from the container to the spray tank. Drain the
contents for an extra 30 seconds after the flow has reduced to drops.
6. Steps 1 to 5 must be carried out three times.
7. Check the container cap, thread and outside surfaces and, if contaminated, rinse with
a hose and hand wash to ensure all product residue is removed.
8. Let the container dry completely and replace the cap.
Containers should be returned to the supplier when they are marked ‘returnable’ or the label
specifies return to point of sale. If not returned to the supplier, it may be appropriate to
puncture or crush the container to ensure it cannot be used again.
Containers should not be burned but triple rinsed to remove residual pesticide. This action
should render the container as acceptable for disposal in a landfill.
The decision on whether a landfill will accept a properly cleaned pesticide container rests
with the landfill operator. Holders of such waste should discuss the disposal of these items
with their local government authority.
Control of risks to other people at or near the worksite
Pesticides are often applied in workplaces, parks and clubs where the protection of other
people is an important objective.
Rules to follow are:
 Do not allow others, including children, in the vicinity of the areas where pesticides
are being sprayed or mixed, to prevent contact or exposure.
 Pesticides must be kept away from all unauthorized persons, including children.
 Keep vehicles carrying pesticides locked or supervised.
 Control spray drift risks.
 Notify the owners or occupiers of the site prior to the commencement of spraying.
 Prior to commencement of treatment, advice should be given to the person in charge
of a workplace to enable other users to be informed in an appropriate way.
 Notices of pesticide application are to be posted prior to useage and remain in place
until the site is deemed safe for reentry of the public
 Persons in charge should consider advising all the tenants in a multi-tenanted
building.
 This advice should include the: type of pesticide to be sprayed and the time of
spraying area to be sprayed
24.8 Storage
Storage quantities
Obtaining the minimum supplies to last the season will prevent storage of extra pesticides
throughout the year.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
448
Golden Health & Safety Program
Pesticide Use - SWP
Storage risks
 Presently, the pesticides being used are all low toxicity.
 Limit access to authorized persons only and maintain a manifest of chemical
identities and quantities stored.
 Keep storage facility locked at all times
 Ensure adequate natural ventilation.
Storage design
 Set aside a portion of the shelving in the storage shed out in the works yard.
 This shelving must have doors that can be secured and locked to minimize
inadvertent use other than by the pesticide applicator.
 This space should have impervious floors.
 Place the herbicide containers on a separate spill control tray on the designated
shelves.
 A separate spill control tray must be used for the rodenticides. DO NOT store the
herbicide and rodenticides together.
 These trays must be large enough to contain the total volume of the pesticide up to a
volume of 110%.
 Whenever the products are accessed, regular checks on leaks is necessary to
ensure the integrity of the containers.
 Any and all application equipment should be stored in this space such as backpack
sprayers and replacement parts.
 Within this shed, there should be a spill kit to address any inadvertent leaks or spills
of any pesticides and PPE for handling and mixing of pesticides.
 Whenever accessing pesticides make sure that water for washing and cleaning the
storage area is available
 Good natural cross-flow ventilation should be provided with vents in opposite walls.
 Substances should be stored at a cool temperature to prevent deterioration.
 The products should be protected from moisture so that packaging and labelling does
not deteriorate (especially cardboard containers).
 Check the MSDS for information on pesticide compatibilities and other advice in
relation to storage.
 Have a pesticide placard attached to the shelving doors to notify all workers of the
products in storage.
 Within this space should be a copy of the MSDS’s and the pertinent regulations from
the MoE and Worksafebc.
Pesticide containers
 Pesticides must be stored in their original containers.
 However, if the container is damaged or leaking, transfer the contents into another
correctly labelled container.
 Soft drink bottles or food containers must never be used for storing pesticides.
 Ensure that all original labels remain legible and on the container.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
449
Golden Health & Safety Program






Pesticide Use - SWP
Containers should be regularly checked.
Containers that are leaking or corroded should be secured by placing in another
container, such as an over-drum, or removed.
Over-drums should be labelled appropriately.
Keep containers closed or the lids on while in storage.
This helps to reduce dust and/or solvent vapours building up in the storage area.
Do not store liquids above solids.
24.9 Spill Cleanup and Disposal
Washing and equipment clean-up
Regular cleaning and maintenance avoids the build-up of residues in and on equipment.
Where appropriate after each application:
 remove any residue on external surfaces of equipment
 PPE should be worn during cleaning and they must also be cleaned after use
 any pesticide washed from the tank should be triple rinsed at the works yard shed
area
 water used for hosing down equipment and any contaminated protective clothing and
equipment should be rinsed off the pavement and onto the soil perimeter
 wash with water and soap after use(employers should provide adequate washing
amenities including water, soap and towel
 at the end of each day’s operations change clothes, store and wash work clothes
separately from other laundry
Disposal of pesticide containers
All pesticide containers should be triple-rinsed. Where they are not recyclable, punch a hole
to render them unusable. The water used to rinse the container should be added to the
spray tank during mixing where applicable. Disposable of non-recyclable containers should
be eligible for landfill. Consult with the landfill operator for confirmation.
24.10 Planning Emergency Procedures
Spills
To avoid spills, do not use leaking containers or equipment. Manage spills by following the
three Cs:
1. CONTROL the spill
2. CONTAIN the spill
3. CLEAN UP the spill.
1. CONTROL the spill
Controlling the spill involves two primary activities:
1. Isolate the spill. This involves protecting people and animals in the immediate spill
area and could include the following:
a. wear PPE and work up-wind of the spill
#Main_Table_of_Contents
450
Golden Health & Safety Program
Pesticide Use - SWP
b. restrict non-essential persons from the immediate area of the spillage, keep
bystanders away (for example, rope off the area)
c. ensure that the spill site is not left unattended
d. notify relevant supervisors
e. keep flames away from spill area.
2. Take immediate steps to control the flow or spill at its source. This could include the
following: - manage leaking containers by either positioning container to minimize
further spillage or decant leaking containers into suitable temporary container.
2. CONTAIN the spill
Containing the spill involves minimizing the spread of the spill and any further environmental
contamination. This could include the following:
1. Using absorbent material to stop further flow.
3. CLEAN-UP the spill
Cleaning up the spill involves two primary activities:
1. Removing the spilled product from the site. This could involve the following steps: - in
the case of liquids, using absorbent material to soak up excess spillage or for
herbicide spills wash down with copious amounts of water if located outside of the
shed
a) in the case of dry chemical spill, minimizing dust drift by slightly wetting (if
appropriate) or covering with plastic sheeting
b) shoveling contaminated material into a plastic bag.
c) disposing of contaminated materials at an approved site.
2. Decontamination of the site. This can include:
a) decontamination of the spill site using copious amounts of water.
b) decontamination of cleanup equipment. Any absorbent materials such as rags
and mops should be disposed in the same manner as the spillage material.
c) decontamination of PPE and persons involved in the clean-up.
Information on appropriate decontamination can be sourced from Material Safety Data
Sheets,
Fires
Where a fire occurs in a pesticide store, first attempt to control the fire. If you cannot safely
control the fire:
 call the fire-fighting authorities
 if the fire cannot be quickly extinguished with the dry chemical extinguisher, then the
appropriate fire control agent, usually a water fog or foam, should be used (water can
be used to keep containers cool)
#Main_Table_of_Contents
451
Golden Health & Safety Program


Pesticide Use - SWP
instruct bystanders to keep up-wind of the area and not enter the fire area unless
suitably protected. Be prepared to have a pesticide manifest to give to the fire-fighting
authorities.
Wear a full face respirator with a self-contained air supply, which is considered
minimum protection, for entry to the fire area
Emergency treatment - first aid procedures
 Contact the Poisons Information Centre or the hospital.
 Read and follow the instructions on the label.
 If the sufferer is unconscious, do not induce vomiting and do not administer anything
by mouth.
 First aid is only the first step, and is not a substitute for full professional medical
treatment. Following first aid, take the sufferer to a doctor or hospital along with the
pesticide container or label or MSDS.
 If the pesticide has been spilled on the skin or clothing, remove the clothing
immediately and thoroughly wash the skin with water or soap. Do not scrub the skin
harshly and do not use ointments, powders or medication unless instructed to do so
by a doctor.
 If the pesticide has been inhaled, get the sufferer to fresh air and keep them lying
down, warm and calm. If breathing stops, use mouth-to-mouth resuscitation.
 If the pesticide has splashed into the eye, hold the eyelid open and gently wash the
eye with clean running water for 15 minutes. Cover the eye with a clean cloth and
seek medical attention immediately.
 If the pesticide has been swallowed, read the instruction on the label - it will direct
whether or not vomiting should be induced. Examples where vomiting should not be
induced are pesticides which are petroleum based (‘emulsifiable concentrate’) or
corrosive (acid or alkali).
24.11 Records
Legal requirements for record keeping
For pesticides classified as hazardous substances, it is a requirement under Worksafebc
legislation for the employer to keep:
 a list of all pesticides and any other hazardous substances stored or used on the site
 the date and time which the application was completed
 a register of MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets)
24.12 Guidelines for Spraying in Public Places
General
This section applies to any person who uses and applies chemical products in public places.
1. You must only use chemical products that are registered or permitted for use on the
target host.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
452
Golden Health & Safety Program
Pesticide Use - SWP
2. You must not apply a chemical product at variance with the label instructions, except
in accordance with an authorized permit, or where it is applied at a lower rate,
concentration or frequency than advised on the label.
3. You should always use products that will do the job effectively. Where practicable,
you should use those products that are least toxic to people and the environment.
4. You must store chemical products in their original containers in a dry, well-ventilated
area that is not easily accessible to children or animals. A source of water suitable for
washing should be located nearby.
5. When handling or using a product, you must be equipped with and wear the
protective and safety equipment recommended on the product label, unless more
effective exposure control methods are employed.
6. You must not eat, drink or smoke while handling or using chemical products.
7. You must maintain spray equipment in good operational order. You must not start
maintenance until the equipment has been cleaned.
8. You must not spray onto waterways or water logged areas unless the product is
approved for such use.
9. When spraying, you must not allow a chemical product to move off target to the
extent that it may adversely affect any people, their land, water, plants or animals.
Areas of particular concern include schools, community halls, malls, parks and
gardens.
10. You must maintain a record of spraying operations. Your records must at least
include the date, location, name and rates of any chemical products applied. These
records must be made available to relevant authorities if requested.
11. Where practicable, the spray supervisor should inform the public of impending spray
operations, and notify them of current operations through the use of signage or
whatever suitable means are available.
12. You must stop spraying if a member of the public or other third party should approach
the area being sprayed.
13. If you are approached by a member of the public with an inquiry or complaint, you
should answer their questions or refer them to your supervisor. The public must be
treated with courtesy at all times.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
453
Golden Health & Safety Program
Pesticide Use - SWP
Inventory Record Form
Company:___________________________ Date of last review:_________________________
Workplace:__________________________
LIST OF SUBSTANCES
(To be kept with the MSDS’s to form a
register. Keep documents in a place safe from potential fire events)
Name of
Substance
Location
of
Substance
Current Hazardous Dangerous Labelled Uses
MSDS? Yes/No
Goods
Yes/No
Yes/No
Yes/No
Comments
#Main_Table_of_Contents
454
Golden Health & Safety Program
Pesticide Use - SWP
#Main_Table_of_Contents
455
Golden Health & Safety Program
Respectful Work Place Program
25. RESPECTFUL WORK PLACE PROGRAM
25.1
Respectful Work Place Policy ........................................................................ 459
25.2 Definitions ........................................................................................................ 459
25.3 General Policy Statement ............................................................................... 459
25.4 Scope .............................................................................................................. 460
25.5 Consequences of Non-Compliance ................................................................ 460
25.6 Appropriate Work Place Behaviours ............................................................... 461
25.7 Inappropriate Work Place Behaviours ............................................................ 461
25.8
Employee Responsibilities ............................................................................. 463
25.9 Reporting and Investigative Procedures ......................................................... 463
25.10 Respectful Work Place Procedure .................................................................. 464
25.11 Respectful Work Place Reporting Form .......................................................... 465
25.12 Respectful Work Place Investigation Form ..................................................... 466
457
Golden Health & Safety Program
Respectful Work Place Program
25.1 Respectful Work Place Policy
TOWN OF GOLDEN
CORPORATE POLICY
THE RESPECTFUL WORK PLACE
Effective Date: August 18, 2015
Authorized By:
Resolution # 15-214
Replaces: New
INTENT
It is the purpose of this policy to emphasize the importance of a respectful work place,
define its key elements, identify behaviour that is unacceptable within it, the consequences
for non-compliance, and the tools that may be used to deal with complaints and allegations
of unacceptable behaviour within its context.
25.2 Definitions
A. DEFINITIONS
‘The Town’
means the Town of Golden Council as represented by the Chief
Administrative Officer or as appropriate, an identified alternate.
25.3 General Policy Statement
B. GENERAL POLICY STATEMENT
1. The Town is committed to creating and sustaining a vibrant, healthy, safe and caring work
environment. To do so, all people (see Scope) are to be treated with respect, honesty and
dignity. Behaviour and/or situations that run contrary to such treatment will not be
tolerated.
2. ‘Behaviour’ and ‘conduct’ in the context of this policy includes all personal, physical, face to
face, digital, and written communication between people.
3. The Town recognizes that conflicts, disagreements or inappropriate behaviours will occur.
These issues will be resolved in a manner that contributes to a healthy and productive
workplace.
4. The Town shall respond in a timely manner to complaints about inappropriate behaviour in
the workplace, and resolve issues openly, honestly, and with appropriate consideration for
privacy and confidentiality through a procedure driven reporting and investigative process.
5. This Policy shall be reviewed every 2 years or earlier if deemed appropriate by the Occupational
Health and Safety Committee with change recommendations provided to the CAO to forward to
Town Council.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
459
Golden Health & Safety Program
Respectful Work Place Program
25.4 Scope
C. SCOPE
1. This Policy applies and will be familiarized to the following people:
a. All Town employees including regular, temporary, casual, contract, and student workers;
members of Town Council.
2. This Policy applies to the following people:
a. Contractors providing service for or to the Town;
b. Suppliers delivering material to the Town;
c. Volunteers; and,
d. Members of the public who are accessing Municipal services or Municipal operated
facilities.
3. Places:
a. Municipal buildings, facilities, sites, offices, or work environments;
b. Locations visited by employees while traveling on Municipal related business including
conferences, meetings, vendor/supplier, or customer sites; and,
c. Locations of work-based social gatherings.
25.5 Consequences of Non-Compliance
D. CONSEQUENCES OF NON COMPLIANCE
1. Any employee who violates this Policy will be subject to appropriate disciplinary action up to
and including dismissal in accordance with the Town’s Progressive Discipline Policy.
2. Members of the public, visitors to municipal facilities or individuals conducting business with
the Town, are expected to adhere to this policy. This includes refraining from inappropriate
behaviour towards employees, elected officials, and persons acting on behalf of the Town. If
inappropriate behaviour occurs, the Town will take appropriate action to ensure a respectful
workplace. This could include barring the person from facilities or discontinuing business with
contractors or suppliers.
Criminal Offences
3. Where behaviour may constitute a criminal offence, the Town will refer these matters to the
RCMP for further investigation.
False or Frivolous Complaints
4. Complaints that are found to be false, frivolous or made in bad faith will not be tolerated and
will be subject to appropriate disciplinary action or denial of service.
Retaliation
5. Everyone has the right to report, in good faith, incidents of discrimination, harassment or
inappropriate behaviour without fear of retaliation. Retaliation by any person against anyone
involved in informal or internal or external formal complaint processes will not be tolerated
and will be subject to discipline, up to and including dismissal or denial of municipal services.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
460
Golden Health & Safety Program
Respectful Work Place Program
25.6 Appropriate Work Place Behaviours
E. APPROPRIATE WORK PLACE BEHAVIOURS
1. In general terms, the kinds of behaviours that are to be encouraged are those which support
and create a respectful workplace, including but not limited to:
a. Being polite, courteous and respectful of others;
b. Using common greetings, farewells or brief enquiries about others' well-being which are
seen as an acknowledgement of others as unique individuals;
c. When reviewing others' ideas, suggestions or work, identifying what is positive or good
about the proposal as well as where it can be improved;
d. Treating others equitably and fairly;
e. Listening to what others have to say;
f. Being open-minded to others' ideas, comments and suggestions;
g. Seeking input and the active involvement of appropriate people in planning, decisionmaking and implementing initiatives;
h. Ensuring that decision-making takes into account relevant factors, is fair and is seen to be
fair;
i. Recognizing and valuing the diversity among workgroup members, customers and
citizens;
j. Willingly and sincerely apologizing to people u p o n h a v i n g s a i d something d i r e c t e d
a t t h e m t h a t may have offended them; and,
k. Any reasonable action taken by an employer or supervisor relating to the management and
direction of workers or the place of employment.
25.7 Inappropriate Work Place Behaviours
F. INAPPROPRIATE WORK PLACE BEHAVIOURS
1. Inappropriate behaviour includes any inappropriate conduct or comment by a person towards a
worker that the person knew or reasonably ought to have known would cause that worker to be
humiliated or intimidated. Such behaviour serves no valid work related purpose and can create a
poisoned work environment. There are three categories of inappropriate behaviour addressed
in this policy, being:
a. Disrespectful/Bullying Behaviour
b. Discrimination/Harassment
c. Damage to People or Property
2. Disrespectful/Bullying Behaviour
2.1 Disrespectful/Bullying Behaviour is:
a. Verbal aggression, name calling, insults, comments, actions or gestures which are
humiliating, offensive, hurtful or belittling;
b. Repeated conduct, comments, actions, or gestures when taken in isolation seem minor
but when repeated can lead to a conclusion of harassment;
#Main_Table_of_Contents
461
Golden Health & Safety Program
c.
d.
e.
f.
Respectful Work Place Program
A single incident of sufficient seriousness to have a significant impact on the recipient or
the work environment;
Hostile or unwanted;
Affecting of an employee's dignity, well being, or physical integrity; and,
Conduct that results in a harmful or poisoned work environment.
2.2 Examples of disrespectful behaviour include, but are not l i m i t e d t o :
a. Written or verbal comments, actions, gestures or other behaviours or 'jokes' which are
humiliating, offensive, hurtful, or belittling;
b. Harmful hazing or initiation practices;
c. Bullying or intimidation;
d. Abusing authority;
e. Yelling or shouting (except where intended to alert another to danger);
f. Deliberately excluding an employee from relevant work activities or decision making;
g. Decision making which is influenced by factors which have no work related purpose; and,
h. Attempting to discredit an employee by spreading false information or malicious rumours
about him/her.
3. Discrimination/Harassment
3.1 This category includes behaviours, practices, policies or systems which have a direct or
adverse impact based on: age;ancestry; colour; family status; marital status; mental or
physical disability; place of origin; race; religious beliefs; sexual orientation; lawful source of
income; sex (including pregnancy, breastfeeding, and sexual harassment); political belief;
criminal conviction; or any other ground covered by British Columbia's Human Rights Code.
3.2 Discriminatory or harassing behaviours include comments or actions which are unwelcome,
based on a prohibited ground of discrimination and result in a negative or poisoned work
environment and may include:
a. Any previously described inappropriate behaviour that is based on a prohibited ground;
b. Sexual harassment includes comments or conduct such as unwelcome advances, requests,
or comments; physical contact (unnecessary touching, pinching or jostling) or gestures
(suggestive or persistent staring) that are of a sexual nature; implied or expressed threats of
reprisal for refusal to comply with a request of a sexual nature or implied or expressed
promises of reward for agreeing to comply with a request of a sexual nature;
c. Unwelcome remarks, jokes, taunts, suggestions or speculations about a person's body,
attire, sex life, etc.; and,
d. Displays of pornographic or other sexual materials in the form of pictures, electronic mail,
graffiti, cartoons, or sayings.
3.3
Discriminatory practices, policies, or systems include:
a. Denial of equitable treatment in hiring or in the terms, conditions, or benefits of
employment;
b. Access to or the processes by which people use Municipal related services, programs
and/or facilities; and/or,
#Main_Table_of_Contents
462
Golden Health & Safety Program
c.
Respectful Work Place Program
Failing to accommodate an individual(s) protected under British Columbia's Human Rights
Code.
4. Damage to People or Property
4.1 Examples include:
a. Vandalism or deliberate destruction of personal or municipal property;
b. Any act, gesture or statement that gives an employee reasonable cause to believe that there
is risk of injury to themselves, another person or Municipal property. It may also include
any statement, either verbal or written, that could be reasonably interpreted by a person to
be menacing or taunting in nature. This could include, but not be limited to such things as
coercion, intimidation, persecution, humiliation, bullying, ridiculing or belittling; and,
c. Violent Acts, being any act that causes, or may cause, physical harm or significant
emotional distress to a Municipal employee or a member of the public. Behaviours that
are threatening to personal safety or are violent require immediate action to prevent
escalation and to ensure the safety of others. Incidents of threats or violence should be
reported immediately to an employee's supervisor, the Chief Administrative Officer, and the
RCMP.
25.8 Employee Responsibilities
G. EMPLOYEE RESPONSIBILITIES
1. Every employee of the Town is responsible for maintaining a respectful workplace environment
by:
a. Ensuring behaviour is respectful and appropriate at all times;
b. Accepting responsibility for one’s own actions, reactions, and behaviours and impact on
other; and,
c. Reporting inappropriate behaviour observed or experienced.
2. Managers and Supervisors have additional responsibilities to create and sustain a respectful
workplace environment, including:
a. Being a role model for behaviour standards;
b. Ensuring awareness of and compliance with this and other corporate policies and
procedures;
c. Taking appropriate action in a timely, impartial and confidential manner when
Respectful Workplace issues come to attention;
d. Supporting all parties involved in resolving issues under the this policy; and,
e. Ensuring no person suffers reprisal as a result of making a complaint or for providing
information.
25.9 Reporting and Investigative Procedures
H. REPORTING AND INVESTIGATIVE PROCEDURES
1. Implementation of reporting and investigations shall be in accordance with Administrative
Procedures associated with this policy.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
463
Golden Health & Safety Program
Respectful Work Place Program
25.10 Respectful Work Place Procedure
Reporting Respectful Work Place Policy Non Compliance
MAIL
Effective Date: August 18, 2015
Authorized By: CAO
Replaces: New
INTENT
This Procedure outlines the process taken to submitt complaints or allegations of non
compliance with the Town of Golden’s Respectful Work Place Policy.
In this Procedure:
‘Town”
means the Town of Golden as represented by the Chief Administrative Officer or
alternate, being the Manager of Legislative Services.
‘Investigator’ means the Chief Administrative Officer or designate (being a Supervisor, Manager, or
Human Resource Official) assigned to conduct an investigation based upon a submitted
verbal or written complaint of non compliance with the Town of Golden’s Respectful Work
Place Policy.
1. How to Report
Workers at the Town can report incidents or complaints of Respectful Work Place Policy non compliance
verbally or in writing. When submitting a written complaint, use the pro forma complaint form
associated with this Administrative Procedure. When reporting verbally, the reporting contact, along
with the complainant, will fill out the complaint form.
2. When to Report
Incidents or complaints should be reported as soon as possible after experiencing or witnessing an
incident. This allows the incident to be investigated and addressed promptly.
3. Reporting Contact
Reports of any incidents or complaints must be made to a direct supervisor, manager, or a Human
Resource Official.
4. Alternate Reporting Contact
If the complainant’s supervisor or the reporting contact named in Step 3 is the person engaging in the
non compliance behaviour, contact the Chief Administrative Officer or alternate, as appropriate.
5. What to Include in a Report
Provide as much information as possible in the report, such as the names of people involved,
witnesses, where the events occurred, when they occurred, and what behaviour and/or words led to
the complaint. Attach any supporting documents, such as emails, handwritten notes, or photographs.
Physical evidence, such as vandalized personal belongings, can also be submitted.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
464
Golden Health & Safety Program
Respectful Work Place Program
25.11 Respectful Work Place Reporting Form
Respectful Work Place Non Compliance
Name and contact information of complainant
Name of alleged bully or bullies
Personal statement
Please describe in as much detail as possible the bullying and harassment incident(s), including:
•
the names of the parties involved
•
any witnesses to the incident(s)
•
the location, date, and time of the incident(s)
•
details about the incident(s) (behaviour and/or words used)
•
any additional details that would help with an investigation
Attach any supporting documents, such as emails, handwritten notes, or photographs. Physical evidence,
such as vandalized personal belongings, can also be submitted.
Signature
Date
465
Golden Health & Safety Program
Respectful Work Place Program
25.12 Respectful Work Place Investigation Form
Respectful Work Place Non Compliance Report
Name of complainant
Name of respondent/alleged bully
Date
Location
Name of investigator
Person interviewed
Other people involved
(e.g., alleged bully, witnesses)
Description of the situation
(dates, words, actions,
etc.) and impact
(e.g., humiliated,
intimidated)
Based on the investigation, did workplace bullying and harassment occur?
Yes
No
Reason(s) for this conclusion
466
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
WorkSafeBC Regulations
467
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
WorkSafeBC Regulations
Confined Space Regulations (updated February 2011)
Part 9 Contents




Policies
Guidelines
Search
Top
9.1 Definitions
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
9.2 Initial determination
9.3 Prohibited entry
9.4 Control of hazards
9.5 Confined space entry program
RESPONSIBILITIES
9.6 Administration
9.7 Supervision
9.8 Instruction
HAZARD ASSESSMENT AND WORK PROCEDURES
9.9 Hazard assessment
9.10 Procedures
9.11 Qualifications
IDENTIFICATION AND ENTRY PERMITS
9.12 Identification
9.13 When permits required
9.14 Contents of permit
9.15 Updating the information
9.16 Record of permit
LOCKOUT AND CONTROL OF HARMFUL SUBSTANCES
9.17 Lockout
9.18 Control of harmful substance in adjacent piping
9.18.1 Exemptions [Repealed]
9.19 Isolation points
9.20 Blanks and blinds
9.21 Double block and bleed
469
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
9.22 Alternate procedures
9.23 Discharge area
VERIFICATION AND TESTING
9.24 Verifying all precautions
9.25 Testing the atmosphere
9.26 Procedures and equipment
CLEANING, PURGING, VENTING, INERTING
9.27 Cleaning, purging and venting
9.28 Risk control
9.29 Inerting
VENTILATION
9.30 Continuous ventilation
9.31 Low hazard atmospheres
9.32 Mechanical ventilation
9.33 Natural ventilation
STANDBY PERSONS
9.34 Low hazard atmosphere
9.35 Moderate hazard atmosphere
9.36 High hazard atmosphere, engulfment or entrapment
RESCUE
9.37 Provision of rescue services
9.38 Equipment and training
9.39 Notification
9.40 Summoning rescue
9.41 Rescue procedures
LIFELINES, HARNESSES AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT
9.42 When required
9.43 Standards
9.44 Line entanglement
9.45 Additional workers
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT AND OTHER PRECAUTIONS
9.46 Personal protective equipment [Repealed]
9.47 Emergency escape respirator
9.48 Compressed gas cylinders
9.49 Torches and hoses
9.50 Electrical equipment
9.51 Non-sparking tools
470
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
Confined Spaces Definitions




Policies
Guidelines
Search
Top
471
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
9.1 Definitions
In this Part
"adjacent piping" means a device such as a pipe, line, duct or conduit which is connected to a
confined space or is so located as to allow a substance from within the device to enter the confined
space;
"blank" means a solid plate installed through the cross-section of a pipe, usually at a flanged
connection;
"blanking or blinding" means the absolute closure of adjacent piping, by fastening across its bore a
solid plate or cap that completely covers the bore and that is capable of withstanding the maximum
pressure of the adjacent piping;
"blind" means a solid plate installed at the end of a pipe which has at that point been physically
disconnected from a piping system;
"clean respirable air" when used to describe the atmosphere inside a confined space, means an
atmosphere which is equivalent to clean, outdoor air and which contains
(a) about 20.9% oxygen by volume,
(b) no measurable flammable gas or vapour as determined using a combustible gas measuring
instrument, and
(c) no air contaminant in concentrations exceeding either 10% of its applicable exposure limit in
Part 5 (Chemical Agents and Biological Agents) or an acceptable ambient air quality standard
established by an authority having jurisdiction over environmental air standards, whichever is
greater;
"confined space", except as otherwise determined by the Board, means an area, other than an
underground working, that
(a) is enclosed or partially enclosed,
(b) is not designed or intended for continuous human occupancy,
(c) has limited or restricted means for entry or exit that may complicate the provision of first aid,
evacuation, rescue or other emergency response service, and
(d) is large enough and so configured that a worker could enter to perform assigned work;
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 381/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
"disconnecting" means physically disconnecting adjacent piping from a confined space to prevent
its contents from entering the space in the event of discharge;
#Main_Table_of_Contents
473
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
"double block and bleed" means the closure of adjacent piping by locking out a drain or vent in the
open position in the line between 2 locked out valves in the closed position;
"harmful substance" means a WHMIS controlled product, a substance referred to under section
5.48, or a substance which may have a harmful effect on a worker in a confined space;
"high hazard atmosphere" means an atmosphere that may expose a worker to risk of death,
incapacitation, injury, acute illness or otherwise impair the ability of the worker to escape unaided
from a confined space, in the event of a failure of the ventilation system or respirator;
"inerting" means intentionally flooding the atmosphere inside a confined space with an inert gas
such as nitrogen to eliminate the hazard of ignition of flammable vapours inside the confined space
but thereby creating an oxygen deficient atmosphere;
"low hazard atmosphere" means an atmosphere which is shown by pre-entry testing or otherwise
known to contain clean respirable air immediately prior to entry to a confined space and which is
not likely to change during the work activity, as determined by a qualified person after consideration
of the design, construction and use of the confined space, the work activities to be performed, and
all engineering controls required by this Regulation;
"moderate hazard atmosphere" means an atmosphere that is not clean respirable air but is not
likely to impair the ability of the worker to escape unaided from a confined space, in the event of a
failure of the ventilation system or respirator.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 315/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
Back to Top
General Requirements




Policies
Guidelines
Search
Top
9.2 Initial determination
The employer must
(a) ensure that each confined space in the workplace is identified, and
(b) determine whether any such space will require entry by a worker, either in scheduled work
activities or as a result of foreseeable system failures or other emergencies.
9.3 Prohibited entry
If a confined space exists at a workplace but no worker entry is required, the employer must ensure
that each point of access to the confined space is secured against entry or identified by a sign or
other effective means which indicates the nature of the hazard and the prohibition of entry, and that
workers are instructed not to enter.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
474
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
9.4 Control of hazards
The employer must ensure that all confined space hazards are eliminated or minimized and that
work is performed in a safe manner.
9.5 Confined space entry program
Before a worker is required or permitted to enter a confined space, the employer must prepare and
implement a written confined space entry program which includes
(a) an assignment of responsibilities,
(b) a list of each confined space or group of similar spaces and a hazard assessment of those
spaces, and
(c) written safe work procedures for entry into and work in the confined space, that address, where
applicable
(i) identification and entry permits,
(ii) lockout and isolation,
(iii) verification and testing,
(iv) cleaning, purging, venting or inerting,
(v) ventilation,
(vi) standby persons,
(vii) rescue,
(viii) lifelines, harnesses and lifting equipment,
(ix) personal protective equipment and other precautions, and
(x) coordination of work activities.
Back to Top
Responsibilities




Policies
Guidelines
Search
Top
9.6 Administration
The employer must assign overall responsibility for administration of the confined space entry
program to a person or persons adequately trained to do so.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
475
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
9.7 Supervision
(1) The employer must assign responsibility for supervision to a person who is adequately trained
to supervise the job before any worker enters a confined space.
(2) The responsible supervisor must ensure that
(a) pre-entry testing and inspection is conducted based on the written procedures,
(b) the precautions identified in the written procedures and the precautions required by this
Regulation or which are otherwise necessary for the health and safety of workers are followed, and
(c) only authorized workers enter a confined space.
9.8 Instruction
Each person who is assigned duties or responsibilities related to entry into a confined space must
be adequately instructed and trained in
(a) the hazards of the space, and
(b) the precautions identified in written procedures to properly perform their duties.
Back to Top
Hazard Assessment and Work Procedures




Policies
Guidelines
Search
Top
9.9 Hazard Assessment
(1) A hazard assessment must be conducted for each
(a) confined space, or each group of confined spaces which share similar characteristics, and
(b) work activity, or group of work activities which present similar hazards, to be performed inside a
confined space.
(2) The hazard assessment required by subsection (1) must consider
(a) the conditions which may exist prior to entry due to the confined space's design, location or use,
or which may develop during work activity inside the space, and
(b) the potential for oxygen enrichment and deficiency, flammable gas, vapour or mist, combustible
dust, other hazardous atmospheres, harmful substances requiring lockout and isolation,
engulfment and entrapment, and other hazardous conditions.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
476
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
9.10 Procedures
Written procedures specifying the means to eliminate or minimize all hazards likely to prevail must
be developed, based on the hazard assessment required by section 9.9.
9.11 Qualifications
(1) The hazard assessment and written confined space entry procedures must be prepared
(a) by a qualified person who has adequate training and experience in the recognition, evaluation
and control of confined space hazards, and
(b) in consultation with the person assigned overall responsibility for administration of the confined
space entry program and with the joint committee or the worker health and safety representative,
as applicable.
(2) For the purposes of subsection (1)(a) qualifications which are acceptable as evidence of
adequate training and experience include
(a) certified industrial hygienist (CIH), registered occupational hygienist (ROH), certified safety
professional (CSP), Canadian registered safety professional (CRSP) or professional engineer (P.
Eng.), provided that the holders of these qualifications have experience in the recognition,
evaluation and control of confined space hazards, or
(b) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 243/2006, effective January 1, 2007.]
(c) other combination of education, training and experience acceptable to the Board.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 243/2006, effective January 1, 2007.]
Back to Top
Identification and Entry Permits




Policies
Guidelines
Search
Top
9.12 Identification
When a confined space requires entry by a worker, each point of access which is not secured
against entry must be identified by a sign or other effective means which indicates the hazard and
prohibits entry by unauthorized workers.
9.13 When permits required
(1) An entry permit must be completed and signed by the responsible supervisor before a worker
enters a confined space
(a) with a high hazard atmosphere,
#Main_Table_of_Contents
477
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
(b) that requires lockout or isolation procedures to be followed, or
(c) in which there is a hazard of entrapment or engulfment.
(2) An entry permit must be posted at each designated point of entry to a confined space.
(3) Subsection (2) does not apply if
(a) the entry permit is posted at a minimum of one designated point of entry,
(b) the identification at other designated points of entry includes up-to-date information on whether
it is safe to enter, and
(c) all workers authorized to enter are informed of the location of posted entry permits.
9.14 Contents of permit
An entry permit must identify the
(a) confined space and the work activities to which it applies,
(b) workers who are inside the space,
(c) required precautions for the space, and
(d) time of expiration of the permit.
9.15 Updating the information
(1) Once issued, the information on an entry permit may only be altered by
(a) the responsible supervisor who signed the permit to update it in accordance with subsection (2)
or (3),
(b) the standby worker to update the list of workers inside the confined space, or
(c) the tester to record test results.
(2) An entry permit must be reviewed and updated as necessary to ensure the ongoing safety of
the workers inside the space.
(3) The permit must be re-authorized and signed by the responsible supervisor
(a) if there is a change in the work crew,
(b) after each shift change, or
(c) after a change of the responsible supervisor.
(4) Every worker affected must be informed of an alteration of an entry permit regarding a change
in the required precautions or work activity.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
478
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
9.16 Record of permit
A copy of the signed entry permit must be kept for at least one year.
Back to Top
Lockout and Control of Harmful Substances




Policies
Guidelines
Search
Top
9.17 Lockout
Before a worker enters a confined space, any material conveyance equipment that transports
material to or from the space must be free of material if the material could present a hazard.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
* See also Part 10 (De-energization and Lockout) of the OHS Regulation.
9.18 Control of harmful substance in adjacent piping
(1) Before a worker enters a confined space where adjacent piping contains a harmful substance
that is
(a) a liquid with sufficient volatility to produce a hazardous concentration of an air contaminant, or
(b) a gas or vapour,
the harmful substance in the adjacent piping must be controlled by either disconnecting the
adjacent piping or isolating it using blanks or blinds that meet the requirements of section 9.20.
(2) Subject to subsection (3), before a worker enters a confined space where adjacent piping
contains a harmful substance that is neither
(a) a liquid with sufficient volatility to produce a hazardous concentration of an air contaminant, nor
(b) a gas or vapour,
the harmful substance in the adjacent piping must be controlled by either disconnecting the
adjacent piping or isolating it using blanks or blinds that meet the requirements of section 9.20 or
using a double block and bleed system that meets the requirements of section 9.21.
(3) Before a worker enters a confined space where adjacent piping contains a substance that is
harmful only because of the temperature, pressure or quantity of the substance, the harmful
substance must be controlled
#Main_Table_of_Contents
479
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
(a) by either disconnecting the adjacent piping or isolating it using blanks or blinds that meet the
requirements of section 9.20 or using a double block and bleed system that meets the
requirements of section 9.21,
(b) by isolating the adjacent piping in a manner that a professional engineer has certified will make
the confined space safe for a worker to carry out the intended work, or
(c) if there is no head pressure in the adjacent piping, by de-energizing and locking out each
pressure source for the adjacent piping and depressurizing the adjacent piping.
(4) Where a confined space is
(a) subject to the ingress of gases from a gravity-flow municipal or domestic sanitary sewer system
or storm sewer system, and
(b) protected from the ingress of gases by a p-trap,
a worker may enter the confined space only if the atmosphere of the confined space has been
tested immediately before entry and the test results confirm that the confined space contains clean
respirable air.
(5) If a worker enters a confined space of the type referred to in subsection (4), the following must
be undertaken:
(a) the operational integrity of the p-trap must be confirmed immediately on the entry of the worker;
(b) while the worker is inside the confined space, the atmosphere of the confined space must be
continuously monitored and confirmed to contain clean respirable air.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]
9.18.1 Exemptions
Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]
9.19 Isolation points
(1) The employer must keep a record which identifies the location of every isolation point.
(2) Every isolation point must be visually checked or otherwise verified to ensure that the confined
space is effectively isolated before a worker enters the space.
9.20 Blanks and blinds
(1) Unless certified by a professional engineer to provide adequate safety for the particular
conditions of anticipated pressure, temperature and service, a blank or blind must be manufactured
in accordance with the specifications of one of the following standards:
(a) ANSI Standard API 590-1985, Steel Line Blanks;
(b) ANSI Standard ASME/ANSI B16.5-1988, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings;
#Main_Table_of_Contents
480
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
(c) ANSI Standard ASME B31.1-1992, Power Piping;
(d) ANSI Standard ASME B31.3-1993, Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping.
(2) If a blank or blind is certified by a professional engineer, the employer must keep a record of its
certification, location and conditions of service.
(3) If required, an allowance for corrosion must be made in the design of a blank or a blind.
(4) A blank or blind must be stamped with or otherwise indicate its pressure rating.
(5) If a line is to be opened for disconnection or to insert a blank or a blind, written safe work
procedures must be prepared and followed to prevent hazardous exposure of workers to its
contents.
(6) Visual indication that a blank or blind has been installed must be provided at the point of
installation.
(7) If required to prevent leakage, gaskets must be installed on the pressure side of blanks or
blinds and flanges must be tightened to make the blanks or blinds effective.
(8) If threaded lines are used, threaded plugs or caps must be used to blind the lines.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
* See also section 4.4 of the OHS Regulation.
9.21 Double block and bleed
If a double block and bleed isolation system is used
(a) the diameter of the bleed line must be no less than the diameter of the line being isolated,
unless certified by a professional engineer,
(b) the bleed for a liquid system must be at a lower elevation than the block valves,
(c) all valves must be locked out in their proper open or closed position,
(d) the downstream block valve must be checked to ensure that it is capable of safely withstanding
the line pressure,
(e) the bleed must be checked to ensure that it remains clear of obstructions while the confined
space is occupied, either by continuous automatic monitoring or by manually checking within 20
minutes before worker entry, or before re-entry after the confined space has been vacated for more
than 20 minutes, and
(f) in the event of discharge from the bleed line resulting from failure of the upstream block valve,
all workers must immediately exit the confined space and the space must be effectively re-isolated
before a worker enters the space.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
481
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
9.22 Alternative measures of control or isolation of adjacent piping
(1) Section 9.18 does not apply if
(a) a measure specified in section 9.18 to control or isolate harmful substances contained in
adjacent piping from a confined space is not practicable, and
(b) the employer implements alternative measures of control or isolation that are acceptable to the
Board.
(2) All workers affected by measures implemented under subsection (1) must be informed of the
measures taken and instructed in any applicable work procedures.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 243/2006, effective January 1, 2007.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]
9.23 Discharge area
The area of potential discharge from a disconnected line or from the bleed of a double block and
bleed isolation system must be controlled to ensure that any accidental discharge will not present a
hazard to workers.
Back to Top
Verification and Testing




Policies
Guidelines
Search
Top
9.24 Verifying all precautions
Before a worker enters a confined space, pre-entry testing and inspection must be conducted to
verify that the required precautions have been effective at controlling the identified hazards and
that it is safe for a worker to enter.
9.25 Testing the atmosphere
(1) Except as stated in subsection (7), before a worker enters a confined space, the employer must
ensure that the atmosphere in the confined space is tested.
(2) The pre-entry testing must be
(a) conducted as specified in the written work procedures, and
(b) completed not more than 20 minutes before a worker enters a confined space.
(3) When all workers have vacated the confined space for more than 20 minutes, pre-entry testing,
as required by subsection (1), must be repeated.
482
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
(4) While a worker is inside a confined space with a moderate or high hazard atmosphere,
additional testing must be conducted as necessary to ensure the worker's continuing safety.
(5) Whenever practicable, continuous monitoring of the atmosphere must be done.
(6) If a worker enters a confined space with a moderate or high hazard atmosphere, the employer
must continuously monitor the atmosphere if a flammable or explosive atmosphere in excess of
20% of the lower explosive limit could develop.
(7) Pre-entry atmospheric testing is not required in a confined space with a low hazard atmosphere
if
(a) the location and control of the space ensures that a more hazardous atmosphere could not
inadvertently develop,
(b) such testing is not required to verify the effectiveness of an isolation or other pre-entry control,
(c) prior representative sampling has demonstrated that the atmosphere within the space or group
of similar spaces meets the low hazard atmosphere definition, and
(d) the written entry procedures do not require such testing.
9.26 Procedures and equipment
(1) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
(2) Each confined space test must be carried out by an adequately trained worker.
(3) The test record must show the date and time of the test, the initials of the tester and the levels
or condition found.
(4) Test results, other than continuous monitoring results, must be posted without delay at all points
of entry to the confined space.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
* See also sections 4.3, 9.4, 9.5, and 9.7 of the OHS Regulation.
Back to Top
Cleaning, Purging, Venting, Inerting




Policies
Guidelines
Search
Top
9.27 Cleaning, purging and venting
(1) When practicable, the employer must ensure that a confined space to be entered contains
clean respirable air.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
483
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
(2) If a confined space is known, or shown by pre-entry testing to contain other than clean
respirable air, the hazard must be controlled by cleaning, purging or venting the space and the
atmosphere must be retested before a worker enters the space.
(3) The dead-ends of a line that has been isolated must be cleaned, purged or vented to remove
any harmful substance which could present a hazard to a worker entering the confined space.
9.28 Risk control
If clean respirable air cannot be assured in a confined space before worker entry, the employer
must ensure that
(a) all workers entering the space wear appropriate personal protective equipment including
respirators when necessary
(b) the concentrations of flammable gases and vapours are maintained below 20% of the lower
explosive limit, and
(c) if flammable or explosive gases, vapours or liquids are present, all sources of ignition are
eliminated or adequately controlled.
9.29 Inerting
(1) The employer must notify the Board in writing, and submit a copy of the proposed work
procedures, at least 7 days before a worker enters a confined space which has been inerted.
(2) The employer must follow any additional precautions that are prescribed by the Board after
review of the notification.
(3) If a confined space has been inerted
(a) all entry precautions for high hazard atmospheres must be followed, except the requirement for
continuous ventilation,
(b) every worker entering the confined space must be equipped with a supplied-air respirator
meeting the requirements of Part 8 (Personal Protective Clothing and Equipment),
(c) all ignition sources must be controlled, and
(d) the atmosphere inside the confined space must remain inerted while workers are inside.
(4) Subsection (1) does not apply to entry for the purpose of performing emergency rescue duties.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]
Back to Top
#Main_Table_of_Contents
484
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
Ventilation




Policies
Guidelines
Search
Top
9.30 Continuous ventilation
Every confined space must be ventilated continuously while a worker is inside the space, except in
(a) an atmosphere intentionally inerted in accordance with section 9.29,
(b) a low hazard atmosphere controlled in accordance with section 9.31(2), or
(c) an emergency rescue, if ventilation is not practicable.
9.31 Low hazard atmospheres
(1) The employer must ensure that a minimum of 85 m 3/hr (50 cfm) of clean respirable air is
supplied for each worker inside a confined space with a low hazard atmosphere, except as
permitted in subsection (2).
(2) Continuous ventilation is not required in a confined space which has a low hazard atmosphere,
if
(a) the atmosphere is continuously monitored and shown to contain clean respirable air, and
(b) the space has an internal volume greater than 1.8 m3 (64 cu ft) per occupant, is occupied for
less than 15 minutes, and the work inside the space generates no contaminants other than exhaled
air.
9.32 Mechanical ventilation
(1) A ventilation system for the control of airborne contaminants in a confined space must be
designed, installed and maintained in accordance with established engineering principles and must
be specified in the written procedures.
(2) Ventilation equipment must be located and arranged so as to adequately ventilate every
occupied area inside the confined space.
(3) If a contaminant is produced in a confined space, it must be controlled at the source by a local
exhaust ventilation system if practicable, by general (dilution) ventilation, or by a combination of
both.
(4) If practicable, a mechanical ventilation system for a confined space must be sufficient to
maintain concentrations of airborne contaminants below the applicable exposure limits.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
485
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
9.33 Natural ventilation
(1) If natural ventilation is relied upon for the control of airborne contaminants in a confined space,
the rate of airflow through the space must be monitored and must be sufficient to maintain
concentrations of airborne contaminants below the applicable exposure limits.
(2) Natural ventilation must not be used
(a) to ventilate a confined space that has a high hazard atmosphere, or
(b) if such ventilation could draw air other than clean respirable air into the confined space.
Back to Top
Standby Persons




Policies
Guidelines
Search
Top
9.34 Low hazard atmosphere
If a worker enters a confined space which contains a low hazard atmosphere
(a) another worker must be assigned as a standby person,
(b) there must be a continuous means of summoning the standby person,
(c) the standby person must check on the well-being of workers inside the space at least every 20
minutes, and
(d) the standby person must have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
9.35 Moderate hazard atmosphere
If a worker enters a confined space which contains a moderate hazard atmosphere
(a) another worker or workers must be assigned as the standby person(s),
(b) a standby person must be stationed at or near the entrance to the space,
(c) the standby person must visually observe or otherwise check the well-being of the worker(s)
inside the space, as often as may be required by the nature of the work to be performed, but at
least every 20 minutes,
(d) there must be a continuous means of summoning the standby person from inside the space,
and
(e) the standby person must have a means to immediately summon rescue personnel.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
486
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
9.36 High hazard atmosphere, engulfment or entrapment
If a worker enters a confined space which contains a high hazard atmosphere, a risk of engulfment
or entrapment or with any other recognized serious health or safety hazard
(a) another worker or workers must be assigned as the standby person(s),
(b) the standby person(s) must be stationed at the entrance to the space and must continuously
attend to the standby duties,
(c) the standby person(s) must visually observe or otherwise continuously monitor the well-being of
the worker(s) inside the space,
(d) there must be a continuous means of summoning the standby person(s) from inside the space,
(e) the standby person(s) must be equipped and capable of immediately effecting rescue using
lifting equipment if required, or otherwise performing the duties of rescue persons, and
(f) the standby person(s) must prevent the entanglement of lifelines and other equipment.
Back to Top
Rescue




Policies
Guidelines
Search
Top
9.37 Provision of rescue services
(1) The employer must provide for the services of rescue persons when a worker enters a confined
space.
(2) If the rescue persons are employees of another firm, or an agency such as a fire department,
there must be a written agreement detailing the services that are to be provided.
9.38 Equipment and training
(1) Every person assigned rescue duties must be properly equipped and adequately trained to
carry out such duties.
(2) A practice drill must be conducted at least annually.
(3) Records of training and practice drills must be maintained by the employer of the rescue
persons.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
487
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
9.39 Notification
(1) Before a worker enters a confined space, the responsible supervisor or the standby person
must notify rescue personnel of work in the space.
(2) The responsible supervisor or the standby person must notify rescue personnel when all
workers have completed their work and exited from the space.
(3) If more than one confined space is to be entered at the same time, notification of rescue
personnel to be on alert status at the commencement of work is adequate.
(4) Notification requirements in this section do not apply if the written agreement indicates that
rescue personnel are available 24 hours each day.
9.40 Summoning rescue
The employer must ensure that rescue personnel monitor any signalling system that will be used to
summon the rescue persons in the event of an emergency whenever they have been informed by
the responsible supervisor or the standby person that a confined space entry is in progress.
9.41 Rescue procedures
(1) Rescue or evacuation from a confined space must be directed by a supervisor who is
adequately trained in such procedures or a qualified rescue person.
(2) Effective voice communication must be maintained at all times between workers engaged in the
rescue or evacuation and the person directing the rescue.
(3) A rescue worker must not enter a confined space unless there is at least one additional worker
located outside to render assistance.
(4) A self-contained breathing apparatus, or air supplied respirator with escape bottle, must be
used during rescue operations in an unknown or IDLH atmosphere.
Note: Rescue procedures must apply every possible effort to eliminate, control or reduce the risk to
emergency personnel responding to emergency situations including the use of mechanical
ventilation.
Back to Top
Lifelines, Harnesses and Lifting Equipment




Policies
Guidelines
Search
Top
#Main_Table_of_Contents
488
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
9.42 When required
(1) When entering a confined space which contains a high hazard atmosphere, a risk of
entrapment or engulfment or with any other recognized serious health or safety hazard, the worker
must wear a harness of a type which will keep the worker in a position to permit rescue.
(2) A lifeline must be attached to the harness and be tended at all times by a standby person
stationed outside the entrance to the space.
(3) The standby person must be equipped with suitable lifting equipment if necessary to permit
rescue.
(4) The use of a lifeline is not required if the risk assessment identifies obstructions or other
conditions that make its use impractical or unsafe.
9.43 Standards
Harnesses, lifelines and lifting equipment must meet the requirements of standards acceptable
under this Regulation.
9.44 Line entanglement
If one or more workers enter a confined space, provision must be made to prevent the
entanglement of lifelines and other equipment.
9.45 Additional workers
If rescue cannot be effected by the standby person(s) using harnesses, lifelines and lifting
equipment, then one or more additional workers must be stationed at the entrance to the confined
space and these workers must be equipped and capable of entering the space and effecting
rescue.
Back to Top
Personal Protective Equipment and Other Precautions




Policies
Guidelines
Search
Top
#Main_Table_of_Contents
489
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
9.46 Personal protective equipment
Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
* See Part 8 (Personal Protective Clothing and Equipment) of the OHS Regulation.
9.47 Emergency escape respirator
Workers entering a confined space which contains a high hazard atmosphere must carry on their
person or have within arm's reach an emergency escape respirator sufficient to permit them to
leave the confined space without assistance.
9.48 Compressed gas cylinders
A cylinder of compressed gas is not permitted inside a confined space, except for a cylinder of
compressed air supplied to a respirator, medical resuscitation equipment, handheld aerosol spray
containers, fire extinguishers, or other equipment permitted by the Board.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 253/2001, effective January 28, 2002.]
9.49 Torches and hoses
When practicable, torches and hoses used for welding, brazing or cutting must be removed from a
confined space when not in use and when the confined space is vacated.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 253/2001, effective January 28, 2002.]
Note: It may be impracticable to remove hoses for some short duration breaks of 60 minutes or
less, particularly where the confined space is large or where the removal of hoses may create
some risk to workers, for example, when hoses are removed from scaffolding. If removal is
impracticable, alternate measures must be adopted under sections 9.4 and 9.5. The preferred
method in most cases is to disconnect at source with safe venting procedures together with
procedures to ensure no inadvertent reconnection while workers are on the break or, if this is not
practicable, closing and putting a tag on connections located outside the confined space. Other
applicable requirements in Part 9 must also be followed including those on ventilation, standby
persons and retesting prior to re-entry. For further information, see the OHS Guideline on section
9.49 at www.worksafebc.com.
[Note added January 28, 2002.]
9.50 Electrical equipment
(1) Electrical tools and equipment used in a confined space must be grounded or double-insulated
and so marked, and if wet or damp conditions exist inside the space, must be protected by an
approved ground fault circuit interrupter as required by Part 19 (Electrical Safety).
(2) Electrical tools and equipment used in a confined space where flammable vapours of explosive
gases, or liquids are present must be CSA approved for hazardous locations classified under CSA
Standard C22.1-94, Canadian Electrical Code Part 1, as Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B and C.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
490
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
9.51 Non-sparking tools
Only non-sparking tools may be used in a confined space where flammable or explosive gases,
vapours or liquids are present.
Back to Top
You can return to the Top of this page
Disclaimer: The Workers' Compensation Board of B.C. ("WorkSafeBC") publishes the online
version of the Occupational Health and Safety Regulation ("OHS Regulation") in accordance with
its mandate under the Workers Compensation Act to provide information and promote public
awareness of occupational health and safety matters. The online OHS Regulation is not the official
version of the OHS Regulation, which may be purchased from Crown Publications.
WorkSafeBC endeavours to update the online OHS Regulation as soon as possible following any
legislative amendments. However, WorkSafeBC does not warrant the accuracy or the
completeness of the online OHS Regulation, and neither WorkSafeBC nor its board of directors,
employees or agents shall be liable to any person for any loss or damage of any nature, whether
arising out of negligence or otherwise, arising from the use of the online OHS Regulation.
Employers are legally obligated to make a copy of the Workers' Compensation Act and the OHS
Regulation readily available for review by workers. The circumstances under which WorkSafeBC
may consider an employer's providing access to electronic versions of the Act and OHS Regulation
to have satisfied this obligation are described in Guideline G-D3-115(2)(f).




Privacy
Disclaimer
Copyright
Security
© 2011 WorkSafeBC (the Workers' Compensation Board of BC)Making a difference, one human
being at a time.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
491
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
Personal Protective Equipment (updated February 2011)
8.21 Leg protection
(1) Leg protective devices must be worn by a worker operating a chain saw.
(2) Leg protective devices referred to in subsection (1) must meet or exceed
(a) the general requirements of section 4 of the WorkSafeBC Standard - Leg Protective Devices, as
set out in Schedule 8-A of this Part, and
(b) the performance requirements of one of the following standards, using the cut-resistance testing
protocol set out in that standard except as varied in subparagraph (ii):
(i) WorkSafeBC Standard - Leg Protective Devices, as set out in section 5 of Schedule 8-A of this
Part, applying a threshold chain speed of 18.3 metres per second or 3 600 feet per minute;
(ii) ASTM F 1414-04 Standard Test Method for Measurement of Cut Resistance to Chain Saw in
Lower Body (Legs) Protective Clothing, but applying a threshold chain speed of 16.8 metres per
second or 3 300 feet per minute;
(iii) ISO 11393-2 Protective clothing for users of hand-held chain-saws - Part 2: Test methods and
performance requirements for leg protectors, applying a Class 2 threshold chain speed of 24
metres per second or 4 724 feet per minute;
(iv) BS EN 381-5:1995 Protective clothing for users of hand-held chain saws - Part 5:
Requirements for leg protectors, applying a Class 2 threshold chain speed of 24 metres per second
or 4 724 feet per minute.
(3) A leg protective device worn by a worker must have a label that
(a) is permanently affixed,
(b) uses lettering that is at least 6 mm (1/4 in) high, and
(c) clearly indicates all of the following information:
(i) the name or trademark of the manufacturer;
(ii) the standard met or exceeded under subsection (2) (a);
(iii) the standard met or exceeded under subsection (2) (b);
(iv) the year of manufacture of the device unless otherwise marked on the device.
(4) The requirement to wear leg protective devices does not apply to a firefighter using a chain saw
at the scene of a structural fire.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]
#Main_Table_of_Contents
492
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
SCHEDULE 8 - A
(section 8.21 [eg protection])
WORKSAFEBC STANDARD - LEG PROTECTIVE DEVICES
1 Scope
This standard provides specifications and performance criteria for leg protection for a worker using
a chain saw.
2 Definition
In this standard, "leg protection" or "leg protective device" means personal protective
equipment worn for protection from leg injury due to contact with a moving saw chain.
3 Types of leg protection
Leg protection must be of one of the following types:
(a) pant type: the protective pad is secured to and held in position by the trousers;
(b) apron type: the protective pad is secured to an apron style garment normally worn outside the
trousers and secured around the worker's legs and waist;
(c) chap type: the protective pad is secured to a chap style garment normally worn outside the
trousers and secured around the worker's legs.
4 General requirements
(1) Leg protection must be of materials suitable for the intended application.
(2) Leg protection
(a) must not unduly restrict the manoeuvrability of the worker, and
(b) must not shrink more than 10% when cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions during its service life.
(3) The protective pad of leg protection must be at least 711 mm (28 in) long and of a width
covering 180° in the front of both legs from inseam to outseam plus 100 mm (4 in) on the left side
of both legs.
(4) If the length requirement in subsection (3) results in a tripping hazard, the protective pad may
be shorter, as long as it meets the requirements set out in subsection (5).
(5) When leg protection is worn by a worker, the protective pad
(a) must extend at minimum from the crotch to within 75 mm (3 in) of the ankle, and
(b) must be effectively secured in this position.
#Main_Table_of_Contents
493
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
(6) Effective measures must be taken to prevent unravelling or fraying of material along any edges
or other area of leg protection where unravelling or fraying is likely to occur.
(7) A heat seal used to control unravelling or fraying of synthetic fibres of leg protection
(a) must be effective over the life of the product, and
(b) if subject to cracking, must be covered to prevent abrasion of the worker's skin.
(8) Instructions on the proper care, maintenance and repair of leg protection must be provided by
the manufacturer.
(9) Leg protection showing damage that will affect its performance must be removed from service.
5 Cut-resistance testing protocol and performance requirements
(1) Leg protection must meet or exceed the "threshold chain speed test" in which the protective pad
must be able to consistently resist being cut-through by a running saw chain operating at a speed
of 1 098 m/min (3 600 ft/min) or more for at least 1.01 seconds.
(2) Threshold chain speed tests must be conducted
(a) on leg protection samples assembled in the manner in which the leg protection will be produced
for distribution, and
(b) using the test apparatus described in subsection (3) in accordance with the procedures and
methodology described in this section.
(3) The test apparatus to be used in conducting a threshold chain speed test must include a
simulated "leg", chain saw and instruments as follows:
(a) a simulated "leg" (see Figure 1) that is
(i) made of wood approximately 150 mm (6 in) in diameter with a 20 mm (¾ in) layer of resilient
covering (Ensolite or similar material) attached to simulate the resilience of flesh,
(ii) designed to allow the leg protection to be mounted and tested similar to the configuration the leg
protection will take when worn by a worker while the worker's leg is extended, and
(iii) mounted to allow rotation about the longitudinal axis of up to 75 mm (3 in) at the outer
circumference, against an applied torque of at least 1.7 Newton-metres (15 inch pounds) and which
torque may increase as the leg rotates;
#Main_Table_of_Contents
494
Golden Health & Safety Program
WorkSafeBC Regulations
(b) a chain saw, with Oregon 72 LP chisel chain and capable of a chain speed of at least 1 220
m/min (4 000 ft/min), that must pivot in a vertical plane to contact the "leg" (see Figure 1) with a
downward force of 50 ± 1 Newtons (11 ± 0.1 lb);
(c) instruments to measure and record chain speed and cut-through time.
(4) The test procedure and methodology are as follows:
(a) start the saw and set the chain speed to the constant level selected for the test cut;
(b) allow the bottom of the running saw chain to freefall 6 mm (¼ in) onto the test specimen
mounted on the "leg";
(c) record the time from contact of the saw chain with the test specimen to the nearest 0.01
second;
(d) record the chain speed during each test;
(e) repeat the tests on the same material until the maximum chain speed (± 15 m/min or ± 50
ft/min) at which cut-through does not occur for at least 1.01 seconds or more is determined;
(f) maintain the chain saw in good repair throughout the testing and keep the saw cutters sharp in
accordance with the saw chain manufacturer's recommendations.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]
#Main_Table_of_Contents
495